C ON T E N T S

PHYSICS
S. No. Chapter Page No.
1. Electric Potential and Capacitance 01-82

2. Electric Charge and Fields 83-143

3. Current Electricity 144-243

4. Wave Motion 244-304

MODULE – V
 ELECTRIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE

INDEX
Topic Name Page No.

 Chapter at a Glance 01-24

 Solved Example 25-27
 Exercise
 Level – I 28-38
 Level – II 39-49
 Assertion & Reason 50-51
 Previous Year’s Questions 52-79
 Answer Key 80-82

This Chapter Includes:

 Electrostatic potential energy (u)
 Electrostatic potential
 Electrostatic potential difference (V)
 Relation between electrostatic field and potential
 Potential due to a dipole
 Potential due to a shell
 Potential due to a sphere
 Potential due to a ring at a point lying on its axis
 Equipotential surface
 Potential energy of a dipole placed in a uniform electric field
 Small oscillations of a dipole placed in a uniform electric field
 Capacitance
 Combination of Charged Drops
 Redistribution of Charges and Loss of Energy
 Capacitor or Condenser
 Dielectric
 Capacity of Various Capacitor
 Variation of different variable (Q, C, V, E and U) of parallel plate capacitor
 Grouping of Capacitor
 Charging and Discharging of Capacitor in Series RC Circuit
 Kirchhoff’s Law for Capacitor Circuits
 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII

ELECTRIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE

ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL ENERGY (U)
The electrostatic potential energy of two charges (a source charge Q and a test charge q0) is the
work done by external agent against the electrostatic force of surface change Q in bringing the test
charge q0 from infinity to the point of consideration very slowly (keeping is KE = 0).
dW = Fdx cos (180) { F and dx are directed opposite to each other}
Qq0 dx
 dW  dx
40 x 2 Q
x q0

Qq0 2
r
Qq0  x 1 r  Qq0
 W x dx  W    W .
4 0  4 0  1   4 0r

This work done is stored in the form of electrostatic potential energy (U) of the system.

ELECTRIC POTENTIAL ENERGY OF A SYSTEM OF POINT CHARGES

The electric potential energy of such a system is the work done in assembling this system
starting from infinite separation between any two-point charges.

Important points regarding Electrostatic potential energy

1. In case of potential energy of two or more point charges, we have to consider potential energy
of all the possible pairs of point charges.

Qq0
(a) For an assembly of two charges  U 
4 0r
(b) For an assembly of 3 charges (Total number of interactions is 3C2 = 3)
1  q1q2 q2q3 q1q3 
U    
4 0  r12 r23 r13 
(c) For an assembly of 4 charges (Total number of interactions is 4C2 = 6)
1  q1q2 q2q3 q3 q4 q4 q1 q2 q4 q1q3 
U       
4 0  r12 r23 r34 r14 r24 r13 
 n(n  1) 
(d) For an assembly of n charges  Totalnumber of interac tions is nC2 
 2 

1 1 n qiq j 
U 
2  4 0

i, j rij 

i j
 
1
The factor of is applied only with the summation sign because on expanding the
2
summation each pair is counted twice.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 1

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
2. Work done required by an external agency to move a charge q from A to B in an electric field
with constant speed

WAB = q [VB – VA]

3. When a charge q is let free in an electric field, it loses potential energy and gains kinetic
energy, if it goes from A to B, then loss in potential energy = gain in kinetic energy

1 1
or, q (VB – VA) = mVB2 – mVA2
2 2

Illustration 1 : A 1C
Three point charges 1C, 2C and 3C are
placed at the corner of an equilateral triangle A
of side 1m. Calculate the work required to
move these charges to the corners of a
smaller equilateral triangle of side 0.5 m as
shown. (in mJ)
B C
2C 3C

Solution: As the potential energy of two point charges separated by a distance ‘r ’ is given by
q q
[U = 1 2 ], the initial and the final potential energy of the system will be
4 0r

10 –12 1 2 2  3 3  1
UI =  
4 0  1 1 1 
= 9 × 109 × 11 = 9.9 × 10–2 J
10 –12  1 2 2  3 3  1
UF     9 109  22  10 –12
4 0  0.5 0.5 0.5 
= 19.8 × 10–2 J
So, the work done in changing the configuration of the system
W = UF – UI = (19.8 – 9.9) × 1010  10–12

= 99 mJ

INCHAPTER EXERCISE – 1

1. The charges 0f 10 C each are kept at three corners of an equilateral triangle of 10 cm side. Find
potential energy of
a) the system consisting of three charges.
b) Any one of the charge
2. Four equal point charges Q are placed, one at each corner of a square of side a. Find the potential
energy of the system.
3. The maximum electric field produced by a uniformly charged ring on its axis is E0. Find the magnitude
of electric field at a distance R 3 from its centre on its axis. R is radius of ring.
4. Two charged particles having equal charges of 20 C each, are brought from infinity to a separation of
10 cm. Find the increase in electrical potential energy during the process.
5. A point charge q is placed at the centre of a uniformly charged spherical shell (charge Q, radias R).
Find the potential energy of the system.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 2

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL
The electrostatic potential at a point P due to a source charge is the work done by external agent per
unit test charge against electrostatics force of source charge in bringing the test charge (q0) from
W
infinity to the point P very slowly (keeping its KE = 0). So, Vp  Potential at point P  P
q0
Qq0 WP Q Q P
Since WP   Vp   r
4  0r q0 4  0r

Electrostatic potential is a scalar physical quantity with SI unit joule per coulomb (JC–1) and 1 JC–1 =
1 volt = 1V.
Electrostatic Potential Difference (V)
The electrostatic potential difference V between two points A and B due to a source charge Q is the
work done by external agent per unit test charge against electric force of source charge Q in bringing
the test charge from point A to point B very slowly. So,
WA B Q  1 1
V  VB  VA     
q0 4 0  rA rB 
B  B 
 Q 1 1   
 V    E.dr    ;  V    E.dr 
A
4 0  rB rA   A 

Important points regarding Electrostatic potential

(i) Electrostatic potential at a point due to a positive charge is positive and due to negative
charge is negative.
(ii) Electrostatic potential due an assembly of charges q1, q2, ........, qn at a point P at distance r1,
r2, ....rn respectively from the charges is given by
1 n qi
V  [Superposition principal]
4 0 i1 ri
(iii) If two points A and B are at potentials VA and VB, then work done in taking a test charge q0
from A to B is WA B  q0 (VB  VA )
(iv) A positive charge always moves from higher potential to lower potential whereas a negative
charge always moves from lower potential to higher potential
(v) Commonly used unit of electrostatic energy is electron volt (eV) and 1eV = 1.6 × 10–19 J.
(vi) If a charge q of mass m accelerates through a potential V, then velocity of q is calculated by
using the Work-Energy Theorem, according to which work done equals the charge in kinetic
energy i.e.
1 2qV
qV  mv 2  v 
2 m
(vii) Consider two points A and B situated in a uniform electric field at a distance of such that the
line joining A and B is parallel to the field. If V be the potential difference between them, then
V = Ed (in magnitude)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 3

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
Illustration 2 :

The electric potential at point A is 200 V and at B is –400 V. Find the work done by an
external force and electrostatics force in moving charge of 2  10–8 C slowly from B to
A. (in J)

Solution: Here,

q0 = 2 × 10–8 C; VA = 200 V ;

VB = – 400 V

work done by the external force = WBA

= q0 (VA – VB)

= (2 × 10-8) [(200 – (-400)]

Work done by the electric force = – (WBA)external = 12

q1 P
Illustration 3 : +

Three point charges q1 = 1C; q2 = 2 C; and

q3 = 3 C are fixed at a position shown. How much 3m 5m
work would be needed to bring a charge q4 = 25 C
from infinity and to place it at P? (in mJ)
+ +
q2 q3

Solution: The external work is Wext = q[Vf – Vi]

In this case,Vi = 0.
So, Wext = q4 VP = (2.5 × 10–6 C) (7.65 × 103 V) =19

Illustration 4 : Four equal charges Q are placed at the four corners of a square of each side is
‘a’. Work done in removing a charge –Q from its centre to infinity is

2Q2 2Q2 Q2
(a) 0 (b) (c) (d)
4  0a 0a 20a

Solution: (c) Potential at centre O of the square

 Q 
V0  4 
 4  (a / 2) 
 0 
Work done in shifting (–Q) charge from centre to infinity
4 2Q2 2Q 2
W = –Q(V – V0) = QV0  
4 0 0a

Relation between Electrostatic Field and Potential

Electrostatic field is the negative gradient of potential i.e.,
 
E  V ... (1)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 4

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
  ˆ  ˆ    V ˆ V ˆ V 
where   ˆi  j k  E    ˆi j k 
x y z  x y z 
V  PartialDerivativeof V w.r .t.x OR 
where  
x  Derivativeof V w .r.t.x keepingy andzconstant 
V  PartialDerivativeof V w.r .t.y OR 
 ;
y  Derivativeof V w .r.t.y keepingx andzconstant 
V  PartialDerivativeof V w.r .t.z OR 
 
z  Derivativeof V w .r.t.zkeeping x andy constant 

Illustration 5 : Find the electrostatic field for the potential V = kxy

  V ˆ V ˆ V 
Solution : Since E    ˆi j k 
 x y z 
V  x  V  y  V 
where  ky    ky;  kx    kx;  0  E  k(yiˆ  xj)
ˆ
x 
 x y 
 y  z

Note:
(a) For an attractive system U is always NEGATIVE
(b) For a repulsive system U is always POSITIVE
dU
(c) For a stable system U must be MINIMUM i.e., 0
dx
dU dU
Since F    F  0 (For a stable system)
dx dx
   V ˆ V ˆ V 
(d) If we are given V(x, y, z), then E  V    ˆi j k 
 x y z 
  
(e) If we are given E(x, y, z)  E ˆi  E ˆj  E kˆ ; V   E.dr
x y z 

where, dr  ˆidx  ˆjdy  kdx
ˆ  V     E x dx   E y dy   E x dx 
 
The integrals are to be calculated within specified limits.

Illustration 6 : An electrostatic field is given by E  k(yiˆ  xj)
ˆ , find its potential.
 
Solution : Since V    E.dr

Let dr  ˆidx  ˆjdy  kdz
ˆ

 V   k(yiˆ  xj).(
ˆ ˆidx  ˆjdy  kdz)
ˆ  V  k  y dx  x dy

 V  k  d(xy) { d(xy) = x dy + y dx}

 V = k(xy) + constant.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 5

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
POTENTIAL DUE TO A DIPOLE

A. On Axial Line at a Point P at Distance r from The Centre of The Dipole

q q 2a (r–a)
Vp   
4 0 (r  a) 40 (r  a)
–q O +q P
q 2a p r
 Vp   V
2 2
4 0 (r  a ) 4 0 (r 2  a2 ) (r+a)

p
For a << r we have V 
4 0r 2

B. On Equitorial Line at a Point P at Distance r from Centre of P

Dipole O
q q
Vp    Vp  0 EB
2 2 r 2  a2 r2  a2
4 0 r  a 4 0 r 2  a2

a a
–q O q

ELECTRIC POTENTIAL DUE TO A CONTINUOUS CHARGE DISTRIBUTION

The electric potential due to a continuous charge distribution is the sum of potentials of all the
infinitesimal charge elements in which the distribution may be divided.
V   dV

dq
V=  4 r0

POTENTIAL DUE TO A SHELL

Consider a shell of charge Q having a radius R. The potential
V
due to the shell at a distance r from its centre is constant inside
Q
the shell (r < R) and this value equals the value of the potential at 1
4  0 R V
Q r
the surface of the shell i.e. V  for r  R where as
4 0R
Q r
outside the shell V  . So, O r=R
4 0r
 Q r R
 ,
 4 0R (Insideandat surface)
V
 Q , r R
 4 0r (Outside)
Graph of V vs r is shown
If  is the surface charge density of the charge on the shell then, Q  4 R2
Q R Q R2
 Vsurface   and  Voutside  
4 0R  0 4 0r  0r

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 6

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
 R r  R
  ,
 0 (Insideandat surface)
V 2
 R , r R
 0r (Outside)

POTENTIAL DUE TO A SPHERE

Consider a sphere of charge Q and radius R. Then
V
 Q 2 2
 8 R3 (3R  r ), r  R  inside  Q
 0
V 4  0 R
 Q
, r  R  outside 
 40r

Graph of V vs r is shown r
O r=R
If  is the volume charge density on solid sphere, then
  2 2 r R
 6 (3R  r ), (Inside andat surface)
 0
V
 R3 r R
,
 3  0r (Outside)


POTENTIAL DUE TO A RING AT A POINT LYING ON ITS AXIS

Consider a ring of charge Q, radius a, linear charge density 
dq
. Let an element of length dl be taken on the ring.
dq r
Then, dV 
4 0r
a
2 a
 dl 
 dV   V  dl x p
2 2
40 a  x 4 0 a 2  x 2 0

(2a) Q Q
 V  V
2 2 2 2
4 0 a  x 4 0 a  x

NEUTRAL POINT AND ZERO POTENTIAL

A neutral point is a point where resultant electrical field is zero.
(1) Neutral point Due to a system of two like point charges:
For this case neutral point is obtained at an internal point
along the line joining two like charges.
If N is the neutral point at a distance x1 from Q1 and at a
distance x2 ( = x – x1) from Q2 then
At N | E.F. due to Q1| = |E.F due to Q2|
2
1 Q1 1 Q2 Q x 
i.e., . 2  .  1  1
4 0 x1 40 x 22 Q2  x 2 

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 7

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
x x
Short Trick: x1  and x 2 
Q2 / Q1  1 Q1 / Q2  1
(2) Neutral point due to a system of two unlike point charge:
For this condition neutral point lies at an external point
along the line joining two unlike charges. Suppose two
unlike charge Q1 and Q2 are separated by a distance x
from each other.
Here neutral point lies outside the line joining two unlike charges and also it lies nearer to charge
which is smaller in magnitude.
If |Q1|  |Q2| then neutral point will be obtained on the side of Q1, suppose it is at a distance l from
Q1
2
kQ1 kQ2 Q   
Hence at neutral point   1 
2 (x   )2 Q 2  x   
x
so  
( Q 2 / Q1  1

(3) Zero potential due to a system of two point charges

i) If both charges are like then resultant potential is not zero at any finite point.
ii) If the charges are unequal and unlike then all such points where resultant potential is zero lie
on a closed curve
iii) Along the line joining the two charge, two such points exist, one lie inside and the other lies
outside the charges on the line joining the charges. Both the above points lie nearer to the
smaller charge.

For internal point

(It is assumed that |Q1|  |Q2|)
Q Q2 x
At P, 1   x1 
x1 (x  x1 ) (Q2 / Q1  1)

For External point

Q1 Q2 x
At P,   x1 
x1 (x  x1) (Q2 / Q1  1)

EQUIPOTENTIAL SURFACE
For a given charge distribution locus of all points having same potential is called “equipotential
surface” regarding equipotential surface following points should keep in mind:
(1) The density of the equipotential lines gives an idea about the magnitude of electric field. Higher
the density large the field strength.

(2) The direction of electric field is perpendicular to the equipotential surfaces or lines.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 8

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII

(3) The equipotential surfaces produced by a point

charge or a spherical charge distribution are a
family of concentric spheres.
(4) For a uniform electric field, the equipotential
surfaces are a family of planes perpendicular to
the field lines.

(5) A metallic surface of any shape is an equipotential surface.

(6) Equipotential surfaces can never cross each other

(7) The work done by electrostatic force in moving a charge along an equipotential surface is always
zero.

INCHAPTER EXERCISE – 2
1. A small sphere is charged to a potential of 50 V and a big hollow sphere is charged to a potential
of 100 V. How can you make charge flow from the smaller sphere to the bigger sphere?
2. Are equipotential surfaces which arise due to a point charge and whose potentials differ by a
constant amount ( say 1 volt) evenly spaced in radius ?
3. How can you check whether the electric potential in a given region of space has a constant
value?
4. We know that electric field is discontinuous across the surface of a charged conductor. Is electric
potential also discontinuous there?
5. Two point charges, each equal to +q, are placed on the X-axis at x = -1 m and x = +1 m. As we
move along x-axis potential changes. Plot a graph of potential versus x.

6. An electric field is expressed as E  2i  3j . Find the potential deference  VA  VB  between
 
two points A and B whose position vectors are given by rA  i  2j and rB  2i  j  3k .

CAPACITANCE
(1) Capacitance of a conductor : Charge given
to a conductor increases it’s potential i.e.,
Q  V  Q  CV
Where C is a proportionality constant, called
capacity or capacitance of conductor.
Hence capacitance is the ability of conductor
to hold the charge.
Coulomb
(2) It's S.I. unit is  Farad (F)
Volt
Smaller S.I. units are mF, F, nF and pF ( 1mF  10 3 F , 1F  10 6 F , 1nF  10 9 F ,
1pF  1F  10 12 F )

(3) It's C.G.S. unit is Stat Farad 1F  9  1011 Stat Farad .

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 9

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
1 2 4 2
(4) It's dimension : [C]  [M L T A ] .

(5) Capacity of a body is independent of charge given to the body or it’s potential raised and depends
on shape and size only.

(6) Capacity of an isolated spherical conductor : When charge Q is given to a +

+ + + Q
+
+ +
spherical conductor of radius R, then potential at the surface of sphere is + R +
+ +
1 Q Q O +
V   4 0R +
+ +
4 0 R V + + +

1
C  4πε 0R  .R
9  109
If earth is assumed to be a conducting sphere having radius R  6400 km. It’s theoretical
capacitance C  711F . But for all practical purpose capacitance of earth is taken infinity and its
potential V  0 .
(7) Energy of a charged conductor : Electrostatic potential energy of a conductor carrying charge
1 1 Q2
Q, capacitance C and potential V is given by U  QV  CV 2 
2 2 2C
Combination of Charged Drops
Suppose we have n identical drops each having Radius – r, Capacitance – c, Charge – q, Potential – v
and Energy – u.
If these drops are combined to form a big drop of Radius – R, Capacitance – C, Charge – Q, Potential –
V and Energy – U then
(1) Charge on big drop : Q  nq
4 3 4
(2) Radius of big drop : Volume of big drop = n  volume of a single drop i.e., R  n  r 3 ,
3 3
R  n1/3r
(3) Capacitance of big drop : C  n1/3c
Q nq
(4) Potential of big drop : V   1/3 V  n2/3 v
C n c
1 1
(5) Energy of big drop : U  CV 2  (n1/3c)(n2/3 v)2
2 2
5/3
Un u
(6) Energy difference : Total energy of big drop is greater than the total energy all smaller drop.
Hence energy difference
U  1 
U = U – nu  U  n  5/3  U  1  2/3 
n  n 
Redistribution of Charges and Loss of Energy
When two charged conductors joined together through a conducting wire, charge begins to flow from
one conductor to another from higher potential to lower potential.
This flow of charge stops when they attain the same potential.
Due to flow of charge, loss of energy also takes place in the form of heat through the connecting
wire.
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 10
 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
Suppose there are two spherical conductors of radii r1 and Q1 Q2
C1 r1 r2 C2
r2 , having charge Q1 and Q2, potential V1 and V2 , energies U1
V1 V2
and U2 and capacitance C1 and C2 respectively. U1 U2
Q1= C1V1 Q2= C2V2
Q1 Q2
If these two spheres are connected through a conducting wire, C1 r1 r2 C2
then alteration of charge, potential and energy takes place. V V
U1 U2
Q1=C1V Q2=C2V

(1) New charge : According to the conservation of charge

Q1' C1 r1
Q1  Q2  Q1'  Q2'  Q (say), also  
Q'2 C2 r2
 r   r 
 Q'2  Q  2  and similarly Q1'  Q  1 
 r1  r2   r1  r2 

(2) Common potential : Common potential

Total charge Q  Q 2 Q1'  Q'2 C1V1  C2 V2
(V)   1  
Total capacity C1  C2 C1  C2 C1  C2
(3) Energy loss : The loss of energy due to redistribution of charge is given by
C1C2
 U  Ui  Uf  (V1  V2 )2
2(C1  C2 )

Capacitor or Condenser
(1) A capacitor is a device that stores electric energy. or A capacitor is
a pair of two conductors of any shape, which are close to each
other and have equal and opposite charge.
(2) The capacitance of a capacitor is defined as the magnitude of the
charge Q on the positive plate divided by the magnitude of the
Q
potential difference V between the plates i.e., C 
V
(3) A capacitor gets charged when a battery is connected across the plates. Once capacitor gets fully
charged, flow of charge carriers stops in the circuit and in this condition potential difference
across the plates of capacitor is same as the potential difference across the terminals of battery.
(4) Net charge on a capacitor is always zero, but when we speak of the charge Q on a capacitor, we
are referring to the magnitude of the charge on each plate.
(5) Energy stored : When a capacitor is charged by a voltage source (say battery) it stores the
electric energy. If C = Capacitance of capacitor; Q = Charge on capacitor and V = Potential
1 1 Q2
difference across capacitor then energy stored in capacitor U  CV 2  QV 
2 2 2C
In charging capacitor by battery half the energy supplied is stored in the capacitor and remaining
half energy (1/2 QV) is lost in the form of heat.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 11

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
Dielectric Conduct
Dielectrics are insulating (non-conducting) materials
which transmits electric effect without conducting.
Dielectrics are of two types
Conductor Dielectric
(Metal foil) (Plastic sheet)

–
(1) Polar dielectrics: A polar molecule has permanent electric dipole – +
 + +
–
moment (p) in the absence of electric field also. But a polar dielectric –
+ +
–
has net dipole moment zero in the absence of electric field because
polar molecules are randomly oriented as shown in figure.
In the presence of electric field polar molecules tends to line up in the direction of electric field,
and the substance has finite dipole moment e.g. water, Alcohol, CO2 , NH3 , HCl etc. are made of
polar atoms/molecules.
(2) Non polar dielectric : In non-polar molecules, Each molecule has zero dipole moment in its
normal state.
When electric field is applied, molecules becomes induced electric dipole e.g. N2 , O2 , Benzene,
Methane etc. are made of non-polar atoms/molecules
In general, any non-conducting, material can be called as a dielectric but broadly non conducting
material having non polar molecules referred to as dielectric.
(3) Polarization of a dielectric slab : It is the process of inducing +
– + – + –
equal and opposite charges on the two faces of the dielectric +
– + – + –
on the application of electric field. +
Ei
+ – + – + –
(i) Electric field between the plates in the presence of + – + – +
–
dielectric medium is E'  E  Ei where E = Main field, E' = + –
– + – +

Induced field. E

(ii) Dielectric constant of dielectric medium is defined as :

E Electric field between the plates with air
 K
E' Electric field between the plates with medium
(iii) K is also known as relative permittivity ( r ) of the material or SIC (Specific Inductive
Capacitance)
(4) Dielectric breakdown and dielectric strength : If a very high electric field is created in a
dielectric,. The dielectric then behaves like a conductor. This phenomenon is known as dielectric
breakdown.
The maximum value of electric field (or potential gradient) that a dielectric material can tolerate
without it’s electric breakdown is called it’s dielectric strength.
V kV
S.I. unit of dielectric strength of a material is but practical unit is .
m mm

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 12

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
Capacity of Various Capacitor
(1) Parallel plate capacitor : It consists of two parallel metallic plates (may be circular, rectangular,
square) separated by a small distance. If A = Effective overlapping area of each plate.
 Q
(i) Electric field between the plates : E  
 0 A 0
d
(ii) Potential difference between the plates : V  E  d 
0
0A A
(iii) Capacitance : C  . In C.G.S. : C 
d 4 d
(iv) If a dielectric medium of dielectric constant K is filled completely between the plates then
K A
capacitance increases by K times i.e. C'  0  C'  KC
d
(v) The capacitance of parallel plate capacitor depends on A (C  –
+
 1 + t –
A) and d  C   . It does not depend on the charge on the
 d + –
A –
+
plates or the potential difference between the plates.
K –
+
(vi) If a dielectric slab is partially filled between the plates + –
0 A d
E
 C' 
t
dt 
K
(vii) If a number of dielectric slabs are inserted between the plate
as shown
K1 K2 K3
0 A A
C' 
t t t 
d  (t1  t 2  t 3  ........)   1  2  3  ........ 
 K1 K 2 K 3  t1 t2 t3
d
t
(viii) When a metallic slab is inserted between the plates
A
C'  0
(d  t)
A K=
If metallic slab fills the complete space between the plates (i.e. t = d)
or both plates are joined through a metallic wire then capacitance
becomes infinite. d

Force between the plates of a capacitor Q Q

Suppose charges Q and Q are provided on plates of a capacitor. E

Field due to charge Q on one plate is

 Q
E 
20 2A0
Force on the plate with charge Q will be
Q  Q  Q2
F= 
2A0 2A0

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 13

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
2
Q
Considering magnitude, each plate applies a force of on the other plate.
2A0
Energy Stored in a Capacitor
Energy stored in a capacitor can be found out by calculating the work done while transferring total
charge Q from one plate to another.

Suppose charge is being transferred from plate B to A. At a moment, charge on the plates are Q and
Q. Then, to transfer a charge of dQ from B to A. the work done by an external force will be
Q
dW = VdQ = dQ
C
Q
1 Q2
Total work done =  QdQ 
0
C 2C
Q2 1 1
 Energy stored = = CV 2 = QV
2C 2 2

Illustration 7: 20 F 20 F 10 F
A battery of 20 V is connected to 3 capacitors in series
as shown in the figure. Two capacitors are of 20F each
and one is of 10F. Calculate the energy stored in the 20 V
capacitors in the steady state.
1 1 1 1 4 1
Solution:    = 
Ceff 20 20 10 20 5
Ceff = 5F
1 1
 Energy stored = CV 2   5  106  202 = 103 J
2 2
Also, as C=oA/d and V = E.d
1 1  A  1 
U CV 2   o  (Ed)2   o E 2  [Ad]
2 2 d  2 
1
 U(energy density) = Energy per unit volume  o E 2
2
1
If dielectric is introduced then, U = K0E 2
2
This energy is stored in a capacitor in the electric field between its plates.
Variation of different variable (Q, C, V, E and U) of parallel plate capacitor
Quantity Battery is Removed Battery Remains connected

A K A K

d d
V

Capacity C = KC C = KC
Charge Q = Q Q = KQ
Potential V = V/K V = V
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 14
 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
Intensity E = E/K E = E
Energy U = U/K U' = KU

Illustration 8: 10F 10F

K=2
Three capacitors of 10F each are connected as
shown in the figure. Two of them are now filled with K=2.5

dielectric with k = 2, k = 2.5 as shown. Find the 10F

equivalent capacitance.

Solution: After insertion of dielectrics,

C1 = 10F; C2 = kC0 = 2  10 = 20F ; C3 = kC0 = 2.5  10 = 25 F
10  20 2
 Ceff = + 25 = 31 F
10  20 3
(2) Spherical capacitor : It consists of two concentric conducting spheres of radii a and b (a < b).
Inner sphere is given charge +Q, while outer sphere is earthed
(i) Potential difference : Between the spheres is –Q

Q Q a
V  b
4 0a 4 0b
+Q
ab
(ii) Capacitance : C  4 0 . .
ba
ab
In C.G.S. C  . In the presence of dielectric medium (dielectric constant K) between the
ba
ab
spheres C'  40K
ba
(iii) If outer sphere is given a charge +Q while inner sphere is earthed
a
Induced charge on the inner sphere b
a b2
Q'   .Q and capacitance of the system C'  4 0 .
b ba
This arrangement is not a capacitor. But it’s capacitance is equivalent to the sum of capacitance
b2 ab
of spherical capacitor and spherical conductor i.e. 40 .  4 0  40b
b a ba
b
(3) Cylindrical capacitor : It consists of two concentric cylinders of radii a a Q –Q

and b (a < b), inner cylinder is given charge +Q while outer cylinder is
l
20l
earthed. Common length of the cylinders is l then C 
b
loge  
a
Illustration 9 :
The plates of a parallel plate capacitor are 5 mm apart and 2m2 in area. The plates are
in vacuum. A potential difference of 10,000 V is applied across a capacitor. Calculate:-
(a) the capacitance: (in fm)
(b) the charge on each plate ; (in nC)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 15

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
0 A 8.85 10 12  2
Solution: (a) C   = 3540
d 5 10 3

(b) Q = CV = (0.00354 × 10–6) × (10,000) = 3540

The plate at higher potential has a positive charge of +3.54 C and the plate at lower potential
has a negative charge of – 3.54 C.

Illustration 10 :
A parallel plate capacitor has plates of area 4 m2 separated by a distance of 0.5 mm.
The capacitor is connected across a cell of emf 100 V.
Find the energy store in the capacitor (in mJ) if a dielectric slab of dielectric strength
3 thickness 0.5 mm is inserted inside this capacitor after it has been disconnected
from the cell.
K0 A
Solution: C= = KC0 = 0.2124 F
d
Q Q0 V0 100
V=   = V
C KC0 K 3

Q0 2 Q0 2 U0
U=   = 118
2C 2KC0 K

GROUPING OF CAPACITOR
(1) Series Grouping
(i) Charge on each capacitor remains same and equals to C1
+Q
C2
+Q
C3
+Q –Q –Q –Q
+ – + –
the main charge supplied by the battery but potential +
+
–
– + – + –
+ – + – + –
difference distributes i.e. V = V1 + V2 + V3 Q + – + – + –
V1 V2 V3
1 1 1 1
(ii) Equivalent capacitance    or + –
Ceq C1 C2 C3
V
Ceq  (C11  C21  C31 )1

(iii) In series combination potential difference and energy distributes in the reverse ratio of
capacitance i.e.,
1 1
V and U  .
C C
(iv) If two capacitors having capacitances C1 and C2 are connected in series then
CC Multiplication
Ceq  1 2 
C1  C2 Addition
 C2   C1 
V1    .V and V2    .V
 C1  C2   C1  C2 

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 16

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
(v) If n identical capacitors each having capacitances C are connected in series with supply
C
voltage V then Equivalent capacitance Ceq  and Potential difference across each
n
V
capacitor V '  .
n
(vi) If n identical plates are arranged as shown below, they
+ – + – + – + –
+
constitute (n – 1) capacitors in series. If each capacitors + – + – + – + – –
+ – + – + – + –
A  A + – + – + – + –
having capacitance 0 then Ceq  0
d (n  1)d

In this situation except two extreme plates each plate is common to adjacent capacitors.

(2) Parallel Grouping

+Q1 – Q1
(i) Potential difference across each capacitor remains same and equal +
+
–
–
+ –
to the applied potential difference but charge distributes i.e. Q = Q1 Q1
+Q2 –Q2
+ –

+ Q2 + Q3 +–
+ –
Q2 ++ ––
(ii) Ceq = C1 + C2 + C3 Q Q3 +Q3 –Q3
+ –
+ –
(iii) In parallel combination charge and energy distributes in the ratio of +
+
–
–

capacitance i.e. Q  C and U  C V

(iv) If two capacitors having capacitance C1 and C2 respectively are connected in parallel then
Ceq  C1  C2
 C1   C2 
Q1    .Q and Q 2   .Q
 C1  C2   C1  C2 
(v) If n identical capacitors are connected in parallel.
Q
Equivalent capacitance Ceq  nC and Charge on each capacitor Q' 
n
If n identical plates are arranged such that even numbered of
plates are connected together and odd numbered plates are 2 4 6
connected together, then (n – 1) capacitors will be formed and 1 3 5 7
they will be in parallel grouping.
Equivalent capacitance C'  (n  1)C
0A
where C = capacitance of a capacitor 
d
Illustration 11.
Four parallel plate capacitances of 4F, 5F, 6 F and 2F are connected
(a) in series (b) in parallel
Find equivalent capacitance.

Solution: (a) In series combination

1 1 1 1 1
   
C C1 C2 C3 C4
1 1 1 1 1 67
    
C 4 5 6 2 60
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 17
 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
60
Ceff = F
67
(b) In parallel combination,
Ceff = C1 + C2 + C3 + C4 = (4 + 5 + 6 + 2) C = 17 C
C
Illustration 12:
In the figure shown find the equivalent
2
capacitance between A and B. C 1 3
C
4

C
Solution: Capacitors (i), (ii) and (iii) are in C 6
C

series 5
1 1 1 1 3 A B
    
Ceq C C C C
C
 C4 =
3
C C/3

C C
4C/3


C C
C  C C
C C C

B
A B A B A

4 and 7 are in parallel

C 4C
 C4 =  C 
3 3
5, 6 and 8 are in series
1 1 1 1 2 3 1 11 4C
         C4 = .
C4 C C  4C  C 4C C 4 4C 11
 3 
 

Illustration 13: C
3 capacitors are arranged as shown in A B
figure. Find the equivalent capacitance
C C
between A and B.

Solution: All the 3 capacitors are in parallel.

 C4 = C1 + C2 + C3 = 3C
Kirchhoff’s Law for Capacitor Circuits
E E
According to Kirchhoff’s junction law q  0 and Kirchhoff’s
second law (Loop law) states that in a close loop of an electric –E +E

circuit  V  0 .
C C
Use following sign convention while solving the problems. + – + –
V = – q/C V = + q/C
When an arrangement of capacitors cannot be simplified by the method of successive reduction, then
we need to apply the Kirchhoff’s laws to solve the circuit.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 18

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
INCHAPTER EXERCISE – 3
1. An uncharged conducting sphere of radius 2R is joined to a charged conducting sphere of radius
R carrying a charge Q. The charge flows between them is 2Q/N. Find the value of N.
2. A positive point charge is projected from infinity towards another fixed positive point charge with
initial speed V. The distance of closest approach is L. What will be the distance of closest
approach if initial speed is2V?
3. In sharing of charge there is always loss of energy. True or False?
4. In sharing of charges, charges are shared in proportion of their capacity. True or False?
5. State the following statements as TRUE or FALSE
a) A Parallel Plate capacitor is completely charged with a battery. The battery is disconnected
and the plates are moved apart by means of insulting handles. The electrostatic energy
stores in the capacitor increases but charge remains unchanged.
b) Two metals Sphere of radii a and b are connected by a thin wire. There separation is large
compared with their dimensions. A charge Q is introduced into this system. Both Spheres will
have equal potential but charges will be proportion of their radii.
c) A parallel Plate capacitor is connected to a battery. The Plates are pulled a part with a
uniform speed v. If x is the separation between the Plates, then the time rate of change of
1
the electrostatic energy of the capacitor is proportional to 2 .
x

d) An uncharged parallel Plate capacitor having a dielectric of constant K is connected to a

similar air-cored parallel capacitor charged to a potential V0. The two share the charge and
V  V
the final common potential is V. The dielectric constant K is  0 .
 V 
e) An air capacitor C connected to a battery of e.m.f. V acquires a charge Q and electric field E.
The capacitor C is disconnected from the battery and a dielectric slab is placed between the
plates of the capacitors. The charge remains uncharged, capacitance increases but Potential
& Electric field decreases.
VAN-DE-GRAAFF GENERATOR
It is a device which is used to generate very high voltage in the order of 107 volts which is used to
accelerate charged particle like electrons and protons for atomic experiments.

Working:
When charge is given to the hollow conductor from Hollow metal sphere
inner surface, the total charge is transferred to the
outer surface of the conductor howsoever large its C 1 P1
Silk belt
+
potential is. + Steel tank
+
+
+ Non conducting stand
Positive charge is provided by an external source to +
comb C2. Charge is passed from comb C2 to belt by c2
+
+
ionization of air. 104 +
+  +
Belt is rotated with the help of motor so charge +
P2
Motor
reaches near comb C1. The charge density at sharp Pulley
points of C1 becomes high due to which action at a
distance starts and belt is neutralized.
The positive charge is transferred to the outer surface of the shell. As its charge increases, the
 q 
potential also increases  V   . In this way, very high potential is generated on the metal shell.
 4oR 

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 19

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
When potential at the surface of metal sphere becomes very high, dielectric breakdown of the
surrounding air take place due to which potential can not be increased further. This limit is
proportional to the radius R(C = 40R) of the shell.

SUMMARY

 After earthing a positively charged conductor +

+
–
–
+ + e– – – – e–
electrons flow from earth to conductor and if +
+ + – –
+ –
a negatively charged conductor is earthed + –
then electrons flows from conductor to earth.
 When a charged spherical conductor placed inside a hollow
insulated conductor and connected through a fine conducting +Q

wire the charge will be completely transferred from the inner

conductor to the outer conductor.

 Lightening-rod arrestors are made up of conductors with one of their ends earthed while the other
sharp, and protects a building from lightening either by neutralising or conducting the charge of
the cloud to the ground.
 With rise in temperature dielectric constant of liquid decreases.
 If X-rays are incident on a charged electroscope, due to ionisation of air by X-rays the
electroscope will get discharged and hence its leaves will collapse. However, if the electroscope
is evacuated. X-rays will cause photoelectric effect with gold and so the leaves will further diverge
if it is positively charged (or uncharged) and will converge if it is negatively charged.
 Two point charges separated by a distance r in vacuum and a force F acting between them. After
filling a dielectric medium having dielectric constant K completely between the charges, force
between them decreases. To maintain the force as before separation between them has to be
changed to r K . This distance known as effective air separation.
 No point charge produces electric field at it’s own position.
 The electric field on the surface of a conductor is directly proportional to the surface charge density
at that point i.e, E  
 Two charged spheres having radii r1 and r2 , charge densities 1 and 2 respectively, then the
E1 1 r22  Q 
ratio of electric field on their surfaces will be     
E2 2 r12  4r 2 
 In air, if intensity of electric field exceeds the value 3  10 6 N/C , air ionizes.

 A small ball is suspended in a uniform electric field 

E
with the help of an insulated thread. If a high energy
X–ray beam falls on the ball, X-rays knock out F= QE

electrons from the ball so the ball is positively

charged and therefore the ball is deflected in the X–Ray
direction of electric field.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 20

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
 Electric field is always directed from higher potential to lower potential.
 A positive charge if left free in electric field always moves from higher potential to lower potential
while a negative charge moves from lower potential to higher potential.
 An electric potential can exist at a point in a region where the electric field is zero and it’s vice
versa.
 It is a common misconception that the path traced by a positive test charge is a field line but
actually the path traced by a unit positive test charge represents a field line only when it moves
along a straight line.
 An electric field is completely characterized by two physical quantities Potential and Intensity.
Force characteristic of the field is intensity and work characteristic of the field is potential.
 For a short dipole, electric field intensity at a point on the axial line is double the electric field
intensity at a point on the equatorial line of electric dipole i.e. Eaxial = 2Eequatorial
1
 It is interesting to note that dipole field E  3 decreases much rapidly as compared to the field of a
r
 1
point charge  E  2  .
 r 
 Franklin (i.e., e.s.u. of charge) is the smallest unit of charge while faraday is largest (1 Faraday =
96500 C).
 The e.s.u. of charge is also called stat coulomb or Franklin (Fr) and is related to e.m.u. of charge
emu of charge
through the relation  3  1010
esu of charge
 Recently it has been discovered that elementary particles such as proton or neutron are
composed of quarks having charge  1/ 3  e and  2 / 3  e. However, as quarks do not exist in
free state, the quanta of charge is still e.
 Inducting body neither gains nor loses charge.
 Dielectric constant of an insulator can not be 
 For metals in electrostatics K =  and so Q'   Q; i.e. in metals induced charge is equal and
opposite to inducing charge.
 A truck carrying explosives has a metal chain touching the ground, to conduct away the charge
produced by friction.
 Coulombs law is valid at a distance greater than 10 15 m.
 Ratio of gravitational force and electrostatic force between
(i) Two electrons is 10–43/1.
(ii) Two protons is 10–36/1
(iii) One proton and one electron 10–39/1.
 Decreasing order to fundamental forces FNuclear  FElectromagnetic  FWeak  FGravitational

 At the centre of the line joining two equal and opposite charge V = 0 but E  0.
 At the centre of the line joining two equal and similar charge V  0,E  0 .

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 21

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
 Electric field intensity and electric potential due to a point charge q, at a distance t1 + t2 where t1 is
thickness of medium of dielectric constant K1 and t2 is thickness of medium of dielectric constant
K2 are :
1 Q 1 Q
E 2
;V 
4 πε 0 (t1 K1  t 2 K 2 ) 4 πε 0 (t1 K1  t2 K2 )

 If an electron (charge e and mass m) is moving on a circular path of radius r about a positively
charge infinitely long linear charge, (charge density ) then the velocity of electron in dynamic
e
equilibrium will be v  .
20m
 A metal plate is charged uniformly with a surface charge density . An electron of energy W is
fired towards the charged metal plate from a distance d, then for no collision of electron with plate
W 0
d
e
 It is a very common misconception that a capacitor stores charge but actually a
capacitor stores electric energy in the electrostatic field between the plates.
 Two plates of unequal area can also form a capacitor, but effective overlapping area
is considered. d

 Capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor doesn't depends upon the charge given,
potential raised or nature of metals and thickness of plates.
 The distance between the plates is kept small to avoid fringing or edge effect
+ –
(non-uniformity of the field) at the boundaries of the plates. + –

 Spherical conductor is equivalent to a spherical capacitor with it’s outer sphere of + –

+ –
infinite radius.
+ –
 A spherical capacitor behaves as a parallel plate capacitor if it’s spherical + –
surfaces have large radii and are close to each other.

 The intensity of electric field between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor (E = /0) does not
depend upon the distance between them.
 The plates of a parallel plate capacitor are being moved away with some velocity. If the plate
separation at any instant of time is ‘d’ then the rate of change of capacitance with time is
1
proportional to 2 .
d
 Radial and non-uniform electric field exists between the spherical surfaces of spherical capacitor.
 Two large conducting plates X and Y kept Q1 X Q2 Y X  Q1  Q 2  Y
 
close to each other. The plate X is given a  2 
b d 
charge Q1 while plate Y is given a charge  Q1  Q2 
 Q1  Q 2   Q1  Q 2   
Q2 (Q1  Q2 ) , the distribution of charge on a c      2 
 2   2 
the four faces a, b, c, d will be as shown
in the following figure.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 22

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
 When dielectric is partially filled between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor then it’s
capacitance increases but potential difference decreases. To maintain the capacitance and
potential difference of capacitor as before separation between the plates has to be increased say
by d' . In such case
t
K
t  d'
 In series combination equivalent capacitance is always lesser than that of either of the individual
capacitors. In parallel combination, equivalent capacitance is always greater than the maximum
capacitance of either capacitor in network.
 If n identical capacitors are connected in parallel which are charged to a potential V. If these are
separated and connected in series then potential difference of combination will be nV.
 Two capacitors of capacitances C1 and C2 are charged to potential of V1 and V2 respectively.
After disconnecting from batteries they are again connected to each other with reverse polarity
i.e., positive plate of a capacitor connected to negative plate of other. Then common potential is
given by
Q  Q 2 C1V1  C2 V2
V 1  .
C1  C2 C1  C2

——

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 23

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
INCHAPTER EXERCISE - 1
1. (a) 27 J (b) 18 J

2kQ2  1 
2.  2 
a  2

9E0
3.
16

4. 36 J

Q2 Qq
5. 
80R 4 0R

INCHAPTER EXERCISE - 2
1. Smaller one placed inside the bigger one and connected through metal wire

2. No

3. Observing flow of charge between two conductors

4. No

5. Use std. result for E and V for ploting.

6. - 1 volt

INCHAPTER EXERCISE - 3
1. N=3 2. L/4 3. TRUE 4. TRUE

5. (a) TRUE (b) TRUE (c) TRUE (d) TRUE (e) TRUE

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 24

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII

SOLVED EXAMPLE
1. A sphere of radius 1cm has potential of 8000V , then energy density near its surface will be

(a) 64  105 J / m3 (b) 8  103 J / m3 (c) 32 J / m3 (d) 2.83 J / m 3

2
1 1 V 
Sol.: (d) Energy density ue   0E 2   8.86  1012   
2 2 r 
3
= 2.83 J/m
2. How much kinetic energy will be gained by an   particle in going from a point at 70V to
another point at 50 V
(a) 40 eV (b) 40 keV (c) 40MeV (d) 0 eV
Sol.: (a) KE  q (V1  V2 )  2  1.6  10 19  (70  50)  40 eV
3. If a charged spherical conductor of radius 10 cm has potential V at a point distant 5 cm from
its centre, then the potential at a point distant 15 cm from the centre will be
1 2 3
(a) V (b) V (c) V (d) 3V
3 3 2
q
Sol.: (b) Potential inside the sphere will be same as that on its surface i.e. V  Vsurface  stat volt ,
10
q
Vout  stat volt
15
V 2 2
 out   Vout  V
V 3 3
4. What is the potential energy of the equal positive point charges of 1C each held 1 m apart in
air
(a) 9  10 3 J (b) 9  10 3 eV (c) 2eV / m (d) Zero
QQ
Sol.: (a) By using U  9  109 1 2
r
10 6  10 6
 U  9  109   9  10 3 J
1
5. The area of each plate of a parallel plate capacitor is 100 cm 2 and the distance between the
plates is 1mm . It is filled with mica of dielectric 6. The radius of the equivalent capacity of the
sphere will be
(a) 47.7 m (b) 4.77 m (c) 477 m (d) None of the above
 0 AK
Sol.: (b) C  4 0 r
d
r = Radius of sphere of equivalent capacity
AK 100  10 4  6 15
 r  3
  4.77 m
4 d 1 10  4  3.14 3.14
6. The respective radii of the two spheres of a spherical condenser are 12 cm and 9 cm . The
dielectric constant of the medium between them is 6. The capacity of the condenser will be
(a) 240pF (b) 240  F (c) 240F (d) None of the above

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 25

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
4
 ab  1  12  9  10  11
Sol.: (a) C  4 0 K    9
.6  2   24  10  240 pF
 b  a  9  10  3  10 
7. A parallel plate condenser is connected with the terminals of a battery. The distance between
the plates is 6mm . If a glass plate (dielectric constant K  9 ) of 4.5mm is introduced between
them, then the capacity will become
(a) 2 times (b) The same (c) 3 times (d) 4 times
1 Cmedium d 6 6
Sol.: (c) C     3
d Cair t 4.5 2
d t  6  4.5 
K 9
8. The radii of two metallic spheres P and Q are r1 and r2 respectively. They are given the
same charge. If r1  r2 . then on connecting them with a thin wire, the charge will flow

(a) From P to Q
(b) From Q to P
(c) Neither the charge will flow from P to Q nor from Q to P
(d) The information is incomplete
Sol.: (d) Since charge flows from high potential to lower potential.
If positive charge is given, then V1 < V2 as r1 > r2
So positive charge flows from Q  P
If negative charge is given, then V1 > V2
So negative charge flows form P  Q.
Since it is not given that whether the charge given is positive or negative, hence the
information is incomplete.
9. A capacitor of capacity C has charge Q and stored energy is W . If the charge is increased
to 2Q , the stored energy will be
(a) 2W (b) W / 2 (c) 4W (d) W / 4
Q2
Sol.: (c) W   W '  4W
2C
10. Between the plates of a parallel plate condenser, a plate of thickness t1 and dielectric constant
k1 is placed. In the rest of the space, there is another plate of thickness t 2 and dielectric
constant k2 . The potential difference across the condenser will be

Q  t1 t2   Qt t  Q  k1 k 2   0Q
(a)    (b) 0  1  2  (c)    (d) ( k1t1  k2t 2 )
A 0  k1 k 2  A  k1 k 2  A 0  t1 t2  A
Sol.: (a) Potential difference across the condenser
 
V  V1  V2  E1t1  E 2t2  t1  t2
K1 0 K 2 0
  t1 t  Q  t1 t 
V   2    2 
0  K1 K 2  A 0  K1 K 2 
11. The distance between the plates of a parallel plate condenser is 4mm and potential
difference is 60 volts . If the distance between the plates is increased to 12mm , the keeping
charge constant then
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 26
 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
(a) The potential difference of the condenser will become 180 volts
(b) The P.D. will become 20 volts

(c) The P.D. will remain unchanged

(d) The charge on condenser will reduce to one third
V1 d1 V d 60  12
Sol.: (a) For capacitor   V2  1 2   180 V
V2 d 2 d1 4

12. The two metallic plates of radius r are placed at a distance d apart and its capacity is C . If a
plate of radius r / 2 and thickness d of dielectric constant 6 is placed between the plates of
the condenser, then its capacity will be
(a) 7C / 2 (b) 3C / 7 (c) 7C / 3 (d) 9C / 4
2
Sol.: (d) Area of the given metallic plate A = r C'
2
A/4
K
r  A A
Area of the dielectric plate A '     
2 4 C'
d

A 3A
Uncovered area of the metallic plates A "  A  A '  A  
4 4
The given situation is equivalent to a parallel combination of two capacitor. One capacitor
A
(C') is filled with a dielectric medium (K = 6) having area while the other capacitor (C'') is
4
3A
air filled having area
4
K  0 ( A / 4)  0 (3 A / 4)
Hence Ceq  C ' C "  
d d
 AK 3  A6 3 9   A
 0     0     C C  0 
d  4 4 d 4 4 4  d 
13. In a parallel plate condenser, the radius of each circular plate is 12cm and the distance
between the plates is 5mm . There is a glass slab of 3mm thick and of radius 12cm with
dielectric constant 6 between its plates. The capacity of the condenser will be
(a) 144  10 9 F (b) 40pF (c) 160pF (d) 1.44  F
0 A 1  (0.12)2 2  144  10 10
Sol.: (c) C  .   160 pF
d t 
t 4  9  109  1  3 36  5
K  2   10
 2

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 27

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII

EXERCISE
LEVEL - 1
ELECTRIC POTENTIAL
1. Inside a hollow charged spherical conductor, the potential
(a) Is constant
(b) Varies directly as the distance from the centre
(c) Varies inversely as the distance from the centre
(d) Varies inversely as the square of the distance from the centre
2. Two small spheres each carrying a charge q are placed r metre apart. If one of the spheres
is taken around the other one in a circular path of radius r , the work done will be equal to
(a) Force between them  r (b) Force between them  2 r
(c) Force between them /2 r (d) Zero
3. Two charged spheres of radii 10 cm and 15 cm are connected by a thin wire. No current will
flow, if they have
(a) The same charge on each (b) The same potential
(c) The same energy (d) The same field on their surfaces
4. A hollow metal sphere of radius 5 cm is charged so that the potential on its surface is 10 V.
The potential at the centre of the sphere is
(a) 0 V (b) 10 V
(c) Same as at a point 5 cm away from the surface
(d) Same as at a point 25 cm away from the surface
5. If a unit positive charge is taken from one point to another over an equipotential surface, then
(a) Work is done on the charge (b) Work is done by the charge
(c) Work done is constant (d) No work is done
10
6. Charges of   10 9 C are placed at each of the four corners of a square of side 8 cm . The
3
potential at the intersection of the diagonals is
(a) 150 2 volt (b) 1500 2 volt (c) 900 2 volt (d) 900volt
7. A uniform electric field having a magnitude E 0 and direction along the positive X  axis
exists. If the potential V is zero at x  0 , then its value at X   x will be
(a) V( x )   xE0 (b) Vx   xE0 (c) Vx   x 2E0 (d) Vx   x 2E0
8. Three charges 2q,  q,  q are located at the vertices of an equilateral triangle. At the centre of
the triangle
(a) The field is zero but potential is non-zero (b) The field is non-zero but potential is zero
(c) Both field and potential are zero (d) Both field and potential are non-zero

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 28

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
A
9. In the electric field of a point charge q , a certain charge is carried from
point A to B , C , D and E . Then the work done
(a) Is least along the path AB
+q
(b) Is least along the path AD E
B

(c) Is zero along all the paths AB, AC, AD and AE C D

(d) Is least along AE

10. A conductor with a positive charge
(a) Is always at  ve potential (b) Is always at zero potential
(c) Is always at negative potential (d) May be at  ve , zero or ve potential
11. The insulation property of air breaks down at E  3  10 6 volt / metre. The maximum charge
that can be given to a sphere of diameter 5 m is approximately (in coulombs)
(a) 2  102 (b) 2  103 (c) 2  104 (d) 2  105
12. Two spheres A and B of radius 4cm and 6cm are given charges of 80  c and
40  c respectively. If they are connected by a fine wire, the amount of charge flowing from
one to the other is
(a) 20 C from A to B (b) 16 C from A to B
(c) 32 C from B to A (d) 32 C from A to B
13. A metallic sphere has a charge of 10 C . A unit negative charge is brought from A to B both
100 cm away from the sphere but A being east of it while B being on west. The net work
done is
(a) Zero (b) 2 / 10 joule (c) 2 / 10 joule (d) 1/ 10 joule
14. On rotating a point charge having a charge q around a charge Q in a circle of radius r. The
work done will be
q  2 Q Q
(a) q  2 r (b) (c) Zero (d)
r 2 0 r
15. Three particles, each having a charge of 10 C are placed at the corners of an equilateral
triangle of side 10 cm . The electrostatic potential energy of the system is (Given
1
 9  109 N  m 2 / C 2 )
4 0
(a) Zero (b) Infinite (c) 27 J (d) 100 J
16. Four equal charges Q are placed at the four corners of a square of each side is ' a ' . Work
done in removing a charge – Q from its centre to infinity is
2Q 2 2Q 2 Q2
(a) 0 (b) (c) (d)
4 0 a  0a 2 0 a
17. A particle A has charge q and a particle B has charge  4q with each of them having the
same mass m . When allowed to fall from rest through the same electric potential difference,
v
the ratio of their speed A will become
vB
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 1: 2 (c) 1: 4 (d) 4 : 1

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 29

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
18. A flat circular disc has a charge Q uniformly distributed on the disc. A charge q is thrown
with kinetic energy E towards the disc along its normal axis. The charge q will
(a) Hit the disc at the centre
(b) Return back along its path after touching the disc
(c) Return back along its path without touching the disc
(d) Any of the above three situations is possible depending on the magnitude of E
19. Two charge  q and  q are situated at a certain distance. At the point exactly midway
between them
(a) Electric field and potential both are zero
(b) Electric field is zero but potential is not zero
(c) Electric field is not zero but potential is zero
(d) Neither electric field nor potential is zero
20. In the figure the charge Q is at the centre of the circle. Work done is P
K
maximum when another charge is taken from point P to
(a) K L Q
(b) L
(c) M M
N
(d) N
21. Four identical charges  50 C each are placed, one at each corner of a square of side 2 m .
How much external energy is required to bring another charge of  50 C from infinity to the
centre of the square
2
 1 9 Nm 
 Given  9  10 
 4 0 C2 
(a) 64 J (b) 41J (c) 16 J (d) 10 J
22. In Millikan's oil drop experiment an oil drop carrying a charge Q is held stationary by a
potential difference 2400V between the plates. To keep a drop of half the radius stationary
the potential difference had to be made 600V . What is the charge on the second drop
Q Q 3Q
(a) (b) (c) Q (d)
4 2 2
23. A charge of 5 C experiences a force of 5000 N when it is kept in a uniform electric field. What
is the potential difference between two points separated by a distance of 1cm
(a) 10V (b) 250V (c) 1000V (d) 2500V
24. Two insulated charged conducting spheres of radii 20cm and 15 cm respectively and having
an equal charge of 10C are connected by a copper wire and then they are separated. Then
(a) Both the spheres will have the same charge of 10 C
(b) Surface charge density on the 20cm sphere will be greater than that on the 15 cm
sphere
(c) Surface charge density on the 15 cm sphere will be greater than that on the 20cm
sphere
(d) Surface charge density on the two spheres will be equal

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 30

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
25. Two equal charges q are placed at a distance of 2a and a third charge 2q is placed at the
midpoint. The potential energy of the system is
q2 6q 2 7q 2 9q 2
(a) (b) (c)  (d)
8 0 a 8 0 a 8 0 a 8 0 a
26. Two point charges 100  C and 5  C are placed at points A and B respectively with
AB  40 cm . The work done by external force in displacing the charge 5  C from B to C ,
 1
where BC  30 cm , angle ABC  and  9  109 Nm 2 / C 2
2 4 0
81 9 9
(a) 9 J (b) J (c) J (d)  J
20 25 4
27. Equal charges are given to two spheres of different radii. The potential will
(a) Be more on the smaller sphere
(b) Be more on the bigger sphere
(c) Be equal on both the spheres
(d) Depend on the nature of the materials of the spheres
28. An alpha particle is accelerated through a potential difference of 10 6 volt . Its kinetic energy
will be
(a) 1MeV (b) 2MeV (c) 4 MeV (d) 8 MeV
29. A charge of 5C is given a displacement of 0.5 m . The work done in the process is 10 J . The
potential difference between the two points will be
(a) 2V (b) 0.25V (c) 1V (d) 25 V
30. A particle of mass m and charge q is placed at rest in a uniform electric field E and then
released. The kinetic energy attained by the particle after moving a distance y is
(a) qEy 2 (b) qE 2 y (c) qEy (d) q 2Ey

CAPACITANCE
31. The capacity of a parallel plate condenser is 5  F . When a glass plate is placed between the
plates of the conductor, its potential becomes 1 / 8th of the original value. The value of
dielectric constant will be
(a) 1.6 (b) 5 (c) 8 (d) 40
32. A capacitor is charged by using a battery which is then disconnected. A dielectric slab is then
slipped between the plates, which results in
(a) Reduction of charge on the plates and increase of potential difference across the plates
(b) Increase in the potential difference across the plate, reduction in stored energy, but no
change in the charge on the plates
(c) Decrease in the potential difference across the plates, reduction in the stored energy, but
no change in the charge on the plates
(d) None of the above

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 31

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
33. The energy of a charged capacitor is given by the expression ( q = charge on the conductor
and C = its capacity)
q2 q2 q
(a) (b) (c) 2qC (d)
2C C 2C 2
34. The capacity of a condenser is 4  10 6 farad and its potential is 100 volts . The energy
released on discharging it fully will be
(a) 0.02 J (b) 0.04 J (c) 0.025 J (d) 0.05 J
35. The insulated spheres of radii R1 and R2 having charges Q1 and Q2 respectively are
connected to each other. There is
(a) No change in the energy of the system
(b) An increase in the energy of the system
(c) Always a decrease in the energy of the system
(d) A decrease in the energy of the system unless Q1R2  Q2 R1
36. Which one statement is correct ? A parallel plate air condenser is connected with a battery. Its
charge, potential, electric field and energy are Qo , Vo , Eo and Uo respectively. In order to fill the
complete space between the plates a dielectric slab is inserted, the battery is still connected.
Now the corresponding values Q, V , E and U are in relation with the initially stated as
(a) Q  Qo (b) V  Vo (c) E  E o (d) U  Uo
37. In a charged capacitor, the energy resides
(a) The positive charges (b) Both the positive and negative charges
(c) The field between the plates (d) Around the edge of the capacitor plates
38. The energy stored in a condenser of capacity C which has been raised to a potential V is
given by
1 1 1
(a) CV (b) CV 2 (c) CV (d)
2 2 2VC
39. If two conducting spheres are separately charged and then brought in contact
(a) The total energy of the two spheres is conserved
(b) The total charge on the two spheres is conserved
(c) Both the total energy and charge are conserved
(d) The final potential is always the mean of the original potentials of the two spheres
40. Two insulated charged spheres of radii 20cm and 25cm respectively and having an equal
charge Q are connected by a copper wire, then they are separated
(a) Both the spheres will have the same charge Q
(b) Charge on the 20 cm sphere will be greater than that on the 25 cm sphere
(c) Charge on the 25 cm sphere will be greater than that on the 20 cm sphere
(d) Charge on each of the sphere will be 2Q
41. Eight drops of mercury of equal radii possessing equal charges combine to form a big drop.
Then the capacitance of bigger drop compared to each individual small drop is
(a) 8 times (b) 4 times (c) 2 times (d) 32 times

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 32

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
42. A condenser of capacity 50  F is charged to 10 volts . Its energy is equal to

(a) 2.5  10 3 joule (b) 2.5  10 4 joule (c) 5  10 2 joule (d) 1.2  108 joule
43. The potential gradient at which the dielectric of a condenser just gets punctured is called
(a) Dielectric constant (b) Dielectric strength
(c) Dielectric resistance (d) Dielectric number
44. A parallel plate condenser has a capacitance 50  F in air and 110  F when immersed in an
oil. The dielectric constant ' k ' of the oil is
(a) 0.45 (b) 0.55 (c) 1.10 (d) 2.20
45. Separation between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor is d and the area of each plate is
A . When a slab of material of dielectric constant k and thickness t (t  d ) is introduced
between the plates, its capacitance becomes
0 A 0A 0 A 0 A
(a) (b) (c) (d)
 1  1  1  1
d  t 1   d  t 1   d  t 1   d  t 1  
 k  k  k  k
46. The capacity of parallel plate condenser depends on
(a) The type of metal used (b) The thickness of plates
(c) The potential applied across the plates (d) The separation between the plates
47. The energy of a charged capacitor resides in
(a) The electric field only (b) The magnetic field only
(c) Both the electric and magnetic field (d) Neither in electric nor magnetic field
48. No current flows between two charged bodies connected together when they have the same
Q
(a) Capacitance or ratio (b) Charge
V
Q
(c) Resistance (d) Potential or
ratio
C
49. The capacity of a parallel plate condenser is C . Its capacity when the separation between the
plates is halved will be
C C
(a) 4C (b) 2C (c) (d)
2 4
50. Eight small drops, each of radius r and having same charge q are combined to form a big
drop. The ratio between the potentials of the bigger drop and the smaller drop is
(a) 8 : 1 (b) 4 : 1 (c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 8
51. 1000 small water drops each of radius r and charge q coalesce together to form one spherical
drop. The potential of the big drop is larger than that of the smaller drop by a factor of
(a) 1000 (b) 100 (c) 10 (d) 1
52. A parallel plate condenser is immersed in an oil of dielectric constant 2. The field between the
plates is
1
(a) Increased proportional to 2 (b) Decreased proportional to
2
1
(c) Increased proportional to 2 (d) Decreased proportional to
2

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 33

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
53. If the dielectric constant and dielectric strength be denoted by k and x respectively, then a
material suitable for use as a dielectric in a capacitor must have
(a) High k and high x (b) High k and low x
(c) Low k and low x (d) Low k and high x
54. When air in a capacitor is replaced by a medium of dielectric constant K, the capacity
(a) Decreases K times (b) Increases K times
(c) Increases K 2 times (d) Remains constant
55. 64 drops each having the capacity C and potential V are combined to form a big drop. If the
charge on the small drop is q , then the charge on the big drop will be
(a) 2q (b) 4q (c) 16q (d) 64q
56. The capacity of a parallel plate capacitor increases with the
(a) Decrease of its area (b) Increase of its distance
(c) Increase of its area (d) None of the above
57. The radius of two metallic spheres A and B are r1 and r2 respectively ( r1  r2 ) . They are
connected by a thin wire and the system is given a certain charge. The charge will be greater
(a) On the surface of the sphere B (b) On the surface of the sphere A
(c) Equal on both (d) Zero on both

58. The capacity of a spherical conductor in MKS system is

R 4 0
(a) (b) (c) 4 0 R (d) 40R 2
 0 R
59. An infinite number of identical capacitors each of capacitance 1F are connected as in
adjoining figure. Then the equivalent capacitance between A and B is
(a) 1 F
(b) 2 F
8 capacitors
1 16 capacitors
(c) F
2 
(d)  A B

60. In the network shown, we have three C

identical capacitors. Each of them can C
withstand a maximum 100 V p.d. What A B
maximum voltage can be applied across A C
and B so that no capacitor gets spoiled?
(a) 150 V (b) 120 V (c) 180 V (d) 200 V

GROUPING OF CAPACITOR
61. Two identical capacitors are joined in parallel, charged to a potential V and then separated
and then connected in series i .e. the positive plate of one is connected to negative of the
other
(a) The charges on the free plates connected together are destroyed
(b) The charges on the free plates are enhanced

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 34

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
(c) The energy stored in the system increases
(d) The potential difference in the free plates becomes 2V
62. The condensers of capacity C1 and C2 are connected in parallel, then the equivalent
capacitance is
C1C2 C1 C2
(a) C1  C2 (b) (c) (d)
C1  C2 C2 C1
63. A parallel plate capacitor is made by stacking n equally spaced plates connected alternately. If
the capacitance between any two plates is C then the resultant capacitance is
(a) C (b) nC (c) (n  1)C (d) (n  1)C
64. Seven capacitors each of capacity 2 F are to be so connected to have a total capacity
10
 F . Which will be the necessary figure as shown
11

(a) (b)

(c) (d)

65. Four plates of equal area A are separated by equal

A B
distances d and are arranged as shown in the figure.
The equivalent capacity is
2 0 A 3 0 A 3 0 A 0 A
(a) (b) (c) (d)
d d d d
66. The capacitor of capacitance 4  F and 6  F are connected in series. A potential difference of
500 volts applied to the outer plates of the two capacitor system. Then the charge on each
capacitor is numerically
(a) 6000C (b) 1200 C (c) 1200 C (d) 6000 C

67. A parallel plate capacitor with air as medium between the plates has a
capacitance of 10  F . The area of capacitor is divided into two equal k1 k2
halves and filled with two media as shown in the figure having
dielectric constant k1  2 and k2  4 . The capacitance of the system
will now be
(a) 10  F (b) 20  F (c) 30F (d) 40  F

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 35

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
68. Three capacitors are connected to D.C. source of 100 volts shown in 2F 3F 4F

the adjoining figure. If the charge accumulated on plates of C1, C2 and a b c d e f

C3 are qa , qb , qc , qd .qe and qf respectively, then
100
(a) qb  qd  qf  C (b) qb  qd  qf  0 100 Volts
9
(c) qa  qc  qe  50 C (d) qb  qd  qf
69. n identical condensers are joined in parallel and are charged to potentialV . Now they are
separated and joined in series. Then the total energy and potential difference of the
combination will be
(a) Energy and potential difference remain same
(b) Energy remains same and potential difference is nV
(c) Energy increases n times and potential difference is nV
(d) Energy increases n times and potential difference remains same
70. Three capacitors each of capacitance 1 F are connected in parallel. To this combination, a
fourth capacitor of capacitance 1 F is connected in series. The resultant capacitance of the
system is
4 3
(a) 4  F (b) 2 F F(c) (d)  F
3 4
71. Five capacitors of 10  F capacity each are connected to a d.c. 10F 10F
potential of 100 volts as shown in the adjoining figure. The equivalent A B
10F
capacitance between the points A and B will be equal to
10F 10F
(a) 40  F (b) 20  F
(c) 30F (d) 10  F 100 Volt

72. Three capacitors of capacitances 3  F , 9  F and 18  F are connected once in series and
C 
another time in parallel. The ratio of equivalent capacitance in the two cases  s  will be
C 
 p 
(a) 1 : 15 (b) 15 : 1 (c) 1 : 1 (d) 1 : 3
73. Four condensers each of capacity 4  F are connected as 4F

shown in figure. VP  VQ  15 volts . The energy stored in 4F 4F

P Q
the system is 4F
(a) 2400 ergs (b) 1800 ergs
(c) 3600 ergs (d) 5400 ergs
74. Two capacitors each of 1F capacitance are connected in parallel and are then charged by
200 volts d.c. supply. The total energy of their charges (in joules) is
(a) 0.01 (b) 0.02 (c) 0.04 (d) 0.06

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 36

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
75. In an adjoining figure are shown three capacitors C1 , C2 and C3 V2 C2 Q2
V1 C1 Q1
joined to a battery. The correct condition will be (Symbols have
their usual meanings) V3 Q3
C3
(a) Q1  Q2  Q3 and V1  V2  V3  V
+ –
(b) Q1  Q 2  Q 3 and V  V1  V2  V3 V

(c) Q1  Q2  Q3 and V  V1  V2
(d) Q2  Q3 and V2  V3
12F
76. In the circuit diagram shown in the adjoining figure, the P
resultant capacitance between P and Q is
2F 3F
(a) 47  F (b) 3  F
(c) 60  F (d) 10  F Q
20F

77. Two condensers of capacity 0.3  F and 0.6F respectively are connected in series. The
combination is connected across a potential of 6volts . The ratio of energies stored by the
condensers will be
1 1
(a) (b) 2 (c) (d) 4
2 4
78. The capacitor of capacitance 4  F and 6  F are connected in series. A potential difference of
500 volts is applied to the outer plates of the two capacitor system. The potential difference
across the plates of capacitor of 4  F capacitance is
(a) 500 volts (b) 300 volts (c) 200 volts (d) 250 volts
79. Two capacitances of capacity C1 and C2 are connected in series and potential difference V is
applied across it. Then the potential difference across C1 will be
C2 C1  C2 C2 C1
(a) V (b) V (c) V (d) V
C1 C1 C1  C2 C1  C2
80. Three capacitances of capacity 10  F , 5  F and 5  F are connected in parallel. The total
capacity will be
(a) 10F (b) 5  F (c) 20  F (d) None of the above
81. Three capacitors of capacity C1, C2 C3 are connected in series. Their total capacity will be

(a) C1  C2  C3 (b) 1/ (C1  C2  C3 ) (c) (C11  C21  C31 )1 (d) None of these
82. Two capacitors of equal capacity are first connected in parallel and then in series. The ratio of
the total capacities in the two cases will be
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 1 : 2 (c) 4 : 1 (d) 1 : 4
83. Two capacitors connected in parallel having the capacities C1 and C2 are given ' q ' charge,
which is distributed among them. The ratio of the charge on C1 and C2 will be
C1 C2 1
(a) (b) (c) C1C2 (d)
C2 C1 C1C2

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 37

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
84. Two capacitors of capacities C1 and C2 are charged to voltages V1 and V2 respectively.
There will be no exchange of energy in connecting them in parallel, if
C1 C2
(a) C1  C2 (b) C1V1  C2V2 (c) V1  V2 (d) 
V1 V2
85. If three capacitors each of capacity 1 F are connected in such a way that the resultant
capacity is 1.5F , then

(a) All the three are connected in series (b) All the three are connected in parallel
(c) Two of them are in parallel and connected in series to the third
(d) Two of them are in series and then connected in parallel to the third
86. A capacitor of capacity C1 is charged to the potential of Vo .
S
On disconnecting with the battery, it is connected with a C1V0 C2
capacitor of capacity C2 as shown in the adjoining figure.
The ratio of energies before and after the connection of
switch S will be
(a) (C1  C2 ) / C1 (b) C1 / (C1  C2 ) (c) C1C2 (d) C1 / C2
A B
87. Four capacitors of each of capacity 3  F are connected as shown in
the adjoining figure. The ratio of equivalent capacitance between A
and B and between A and C will be
(a) 4 : 3 (b) 3 : 4
C
(c) 2 : 3 (d) 3 : 2
88. The capacities of two conductors are C1 and C2 and their respective potentials are V1 and V2 .
If they are connected by a thin wire, then the loss of energy will be given by
C1C2 (V1  V2 ) C1C2 (V1  V2 ) C1C2 (V1  V2 )2 (C1  C2 )(V1  V2 )
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2(C1  C2 ) 2(C1  C2 ) 2(C1  C2 ) C1C2
89. A parallel plate condenser is filled with two dielectrics as shown. Area
of each plate is A metre 2 and the separation is t metre . The dielectric
k1 k2
constants are k1 and k2 respectively. Its capacitance in farad will be

0 A  0 A k1  k 2 2 0 A  A k  k2
(a) (k1  k 2 ) (b) . (c) (k1  k 2 ) (d) 0 . 1
t t 2 t t 2
90. Three condensers each of capacitance 2F are put in series. The resultant capacitance is
3 2
(a) 6F (b) F (c) F (d) 5F
2 3

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 38

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII

LEVEL – 2
ELECTRIC POTENTIAL
1. The ratio of momenta of an electron and an -particle which are accelerated from rest by
a potential difference of 100 volt is
2me me me
(a) 1 (b) (c) (d)
m m 2m

2. A proton is accelerated through 50,000 V. Its energy will increase by

(a) 5000 eV (b) 8  10 15 J (c) 5000 J (d) 50,000 J

3. When a proton is accelerated through 1V, then its kinetic energy will be
(a) 1840 eV (b) 13.6 eV (c) 1 eV (d) 0.54 eV
4. Two metal spheres of radii R1 and R2 are charged to the same potential. The ratio of charges
on the spheres is
(a) R1 : R2 (b) R1 : R2 (c) R12 : R22 (d) R13: R23
5. Electric charges of 10 C,  5 C,  3 C and 8 C are placed at the corners of a square of
side 2 m. the potential at the centre of the square is
(a) 1.8 V (b) 1.8  106 V (c) 1.8  105 V (d) 1.8  10 4 V
6. Ten electrons are equally spaced and fixed around a circle of radius R. Relative to V = 0 at
infinity, the electrostatic potential V and the electric field E at the centre C are
   
(a) V  0 and E  0 (b) V  0 and E  0 (c) V  0 and E  0 (d) V  0 and E  0
7. Two positive point charges of 12 C and 8 C are 10cm apart. The work done in bringing
them 4 cm closer is
(a) 5.8 J (b) 5.8 eV (c) 13 J
(d) 13 eV
8. The displacement of a charge Q in the electric field E  e1iˆ  e2 jˆ  e3 kˆ is rˆ  aiˆ  bjˆ . The
work done is
(a) Q(ae1  be2 ) (b) Q (ae1 )2  (be2 )2

(c) Q(e1  e2 ) a 2  b 2 (d) Q( e12  e22 ) (a  b )

9. The potential at a point, due to a positive charge of 100 C at a distance of 9m, is

(a) 10 4 V (b) 105 V (c) 106 V (d) 107 V

10. Consider the points lying on a straight line joining two fixed opposite charges. Between the
charges there is
(a) No point where electric field is zero (b) Only one point where electric field is zero
(c) No point where potential is zero (d) Only one point where potential is zero

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 39

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
11. Three charges Q,  q and q are placed at the vertices of a right- Q

angled isosceles triangle as shown. The net electrostatic energy of

the configuration is zero if Q is equal to
q 2q
(a) (b) +q +q
1 2 2 2 a
(c) 2q (d) q

12. An electron of mass m and charge e is accelerated from rest through a potential difference
V in vacuum. The final speed of the electron will be
(a) V e / m (b) eV / m (c) 2eV / m (d) 2eV / m
13. The radius of a soap bubble whose potential is 16V is doubled. The new potential of the
bubble will be
(a) 2V (b) 4V (c) 8V (d) 16V
2
14. The dimension of (1/2)  0E ( 0 : permittivity of free space; E : electric field) is
1
(a) MLT (b) ML2T 2 (c) ML1T 2 (d) ML2T 1
15. In the rectangle, shown below, the two corners have charges q1 A

q1  5 C and q2  2.0 C . The work done in moving a charge

5 cm
3.0 C from B to A is (take 1 / 4 0  1010 N -m 2 / C 2 )
(a) 2.8 J (b) 3.5 J B
q2
15 cm
(c) 4.5 J (d) 5.5 J
16. A cube of a metal is given a positive charge Q. For the above system, which of the following
statements is true
(a) Electric potential at the surface of the cube is zero
(b) Electric potential within the cube is zero
(c) Electric field is normal to the surface of the cube
(d) Electric field varies within the cube
17. A hollow conducting sphere of radius R has a charge ( Q ) on its surface. What is the
R
electric potential within the sphere at a distance r  from its centre
3
1 Q 1 Q 1 Q
(a) Zero (b) (c) (d)
4 0 r 4 0 R 4 0 r 2
18. A spherical conductor of radius 2m is charged to a potential of 120 V. It is now placed inside
another hollow spherical conductor of radius 6m. Calculate the potential to which the bigger
sphere would be raised
(a) 20 V (b) 60 V (c) 80 V (d) 40 V
19. A charge ( q ) and another charge ( Q ) are kept at two points A and B respectively. Keeping
the charge ( Q ) fixed at B, the charge ( q ) at A is moved to another point C such that ABC
forms an equilateral triangle of side l. The net work done in moving the charge ( q ) is
1 Qq 1 Qq 1
(a) (b) (c) Qql (d) Zero
4 0 l 4 0 l 2 4 0

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 40

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
20. A particle of mass ‘m’ and charge ‘q’ is accelerated through a potential difference of V volt, its
energy will be
q q
(a) qV (b) mqV (c)   V (d)
m mV
21. Two spheres A and B of radius ‘a’ and ‘b’ respectively are at same electric potential. The ratio
of the surface charge densities of A and B is
a b a2 b2
(a) (b) (c) 2 (d) 2
b a b a
22. Potential at a point x-distance from the centre inside the conducting sphere of radius R and
charged with charge Q is
Q Q Q
(a) (b) (c) 2 (d) xQ
R x x
23. In an hydrogen atom, the electron revolves around the nucleus in an orbit of radius
0.53  10 10 m . Then the electrical potential produced by the nucleus at the position of the
electron is
(a) – 13.6 V (b) – 27.2 V (c) 27.2 V (d) 13.6 V
8
24. A ball of mass 1 g and charge 10 C moves from a point A. where potential is 600 volt to the
point B where potential is zero. Velocity of the ball at the point B is 20 cm/s. The velocity of
the ball at the point A will be
(a) 22.8 cm/s (b) 228 cm/s (c) 16.8 m/s (d) 168 m/s
25. Three charges Q,( q ) and ( q ) are placed at the vertices of an Q

equilateral triangle of side l as shown in the figure. If the net electrostatic

energy of the system is zero, then Q is equal to l l

 q
(a)    (b) ( q )
 2 +q l +q
(c) ( q ) (d) Zero

26. The work done in bringing a 20 coulomb charge from point A to point B for distance 0.2m is
2J. The potential difference between the two points will be (in volt)
(a) 0.2 (b) 8 (c) 0.1 (d) 0.4
27. If 4  1020 eV energy is required to move a charge of 0.25 coulomb between two points. Then
what will be the potential difference between them
(a) 178 V (b) 256 V (c) 356 V (d) None of these
28. Kinetic energy of an electron accelerated in a potential difference of 100 V is
(a) 1.6  10 17 J (b) 1.6  10 21 J (c) 1.6  10 29 J (d) 1.6  10 34 J
29. If 3 charges are placed at the vertices of equilateral triangle of charge ‘q’ each. What is the
net potential energy, if the side of equilateral  is l cm
1 q2 1 2q 2 1 3q 2 1 4q 2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
4 0 l 4 0 l 4 0 l 4 0 l

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 41

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
30. If identical charges ( q ) are placed at each corner of a cube of side b, then electric potential
energy of charge ( q ) which is placed at centre of the cube will be
8 2q 2 8 2q 2 4 2q 2 4q 2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
4 0 b  0 b  0 b 3 0 b
31. An  -particle is accelerated through a potential difference of 200V. The increase in its kinetic
energy is
(a) 100 eV (b) 200 eV (c) 400 eV (d) 800 eV
32. A proton is about 1840 times heavier than an electron. When it is accelerated by a potential
difference of 1 kV, its kinetic energy will be
(a) 1840 keV (b) 1/1840 keV (c) 1 keV (d) 920 keV
33. A thin spherical conducting shell of radius R has a charge q. Another charge Q is placed at
R
the centre of the shell. The electrostatic potential at a point p a distance from the centre of
2
the shell is
(q  Q ) 2 2Q 2Q 2q 2Q q
(a) (b) (c)  (d) 
4 0 R 4 0 R 4 0 R 4 0 R 4 0 R 4 0R
V
34. In which region magnitude of x component of electric field is
maximum, if potential Vs, x graph is as shown
1 2 3
(a) 1 (b) 2 4

X
(c) 3 (d) 4

35. The minimum work required to bring charge +q from infinity to the centre of ring, of radius R
and charge +Q uniformly distributed over it, is
Qq Qq
(a) (b)  (c) (d) None of these
4  0 R 8  0 R
CAPACITANCE
36. The true statement is, on increasing the distance between the plates of a parallel plate
condenser
(a) The electric intensity between the plates will decrease
(b) The electric intensity between the plates will increase
(c) The electric intensity between the plates will remain unchanged
(d) The P.D. between the plates will decrease
37. There is an air filled 1pF parallel plate capacitor. When the plate separation is doubled and
the space is filled with wax, the capacitance increases to 2pF . The dielectric constant of wax
is
(a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 6 (d) 8
38. The capacity and the energy stored in a parallel plate condenser with air between its plates
are respectively Co and Wo . If the air is replaced by glass (dielectric constant = 5) between
the plates, the capacity of the plates and the energy stored in it will respectively be
W0 Co Co Wo
(a) 5Co , 5Wo (b) 5Co , (c) , 5Wo (d) ,
5 5 5 5

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 42

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
39. Force of attraction between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor is
q2 q2 q q2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2 0 AK  0 AK 2 0 A 2 0 A 2K
40. A capacitor of capacity C is connected with a battery of potential V in parallel. The distance
between its plates is reduced to half at once, assuming that the charge remains the same.
Then to charge the capacitance upto the potential V again, the energy given by the battery
will be
(a) CV 2 / 4 (b) CV 2 / 2 (c) 3CV 2 / 4 (d) CV 2
41. N identical spherical drops charged to the same potential V are combined to form a big drop.
The potential of the new drop will be
(a) V (b) V / N (c) V  N (d) V  N 2/3
42. One plate of parallel plate capacitor is smaller than other, then charge on smaller plate will be
(a) Less than other
(b) More than other
(c) Equal to other
(d) Will depend upon the medium between them
43. A 6  F capacitor is charged from 10 volts to 20 volts . Increase in energy will be

(a) 18  10 4 J (b) 9  10 4 J (c) 4.5  10 4 J (d) 9  10 6 J

44. As shown in the figure, a very thin sheet of aluminium is placed in
between the plates of the condenser. Then the capacity
Al strip
(a) Will increase (b) Will decrease
(c) Remains unchanged (d) May increase or decrease

45. Twenty seven drops of water of the same size are equally and similarly charged. They are
then united to form a bigger drop. By what factor will the electrical potential changes
(a) 9 times (b) 27 times (c) 6 times (d) 3 times
46. The outer sphere of a spherical air capacitor is earthed. For increasing its capacitance
(a) Vacuum is created between two spheres
(b) Dielectric material is filled between the two spheres
(c) The space between two spheres is increased
(d) The earthing of the outer sphere is removed
47. The plates of parallel plate capacitor are charged upto 100 V . A 2mm thick plate is inserted
between the plates. Then to maintain the same potential difference, the distance between the
plates is increased by 1.6 mm . The dielectric constant of the plate is
(a) 5 (b) 1.25 (c) 4 (d) 2.5
48. Force acting upon a charged particle kept between the plates of a charged condenser is F . If
one plate of the condenser is removed, then the force acting on the same particle will become
(a) 0 (b) F / 2 (c) F (d) 2F

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 43

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
49. Two metallic charged spheres whose radii are 20 cm and 10 cm respectively, have each
150 micro  coulomb positive charge. The common potential after they are connected by a
conducting wire is
(a) 9  10 6 volts (b) 4.5  10 6 volts (c) 1.8  107 volts (d) 13.5  106 volts
50. A frictionless dielectric plate S is kept on a frictionless table T . – – – – – –
A charged parallel plate capacitance C (of which the plates are S C
frictionless) is kept near it. The plate S is between the plates. + + + + + +
T
When the plate S is left between the plates

(a) It will remain stationary on the table

(b) It is pulled by the capacitor and will pass on the other end
(c) It is pulled between the plates and will remain there
(d) All the above statements are false
51. A parallel plate capacitor is charged and the charging battery is then disconnected. If the
plates of the capacitor are moved further apart by means of insulating handles, then
(a) The charge on the capacitor increases
(b) The voltage across the plates decreases
(c) The capacitance increases
(d) The electrostatic energy stored in the capacitor increases
52. A capacitor with air as the dielectric is charged to a potential of 100 volts . If the space
between the plates is now filled with a dielectric of dielectric constant 10, the potential
difference between the plates will be
(a) 1000 volts (b) 100 volts (c) 10 volts (d) Zero
53. The distance between the circular plates of a parallel plate condenser 40mm in diameter, in
order to have same capacity as a sphere of radius 1metre is
(a) 0.01mm (b) 0.1 mm (c) 1.0 mm (d) 10 mm
54. When a slab of dielectric material is introduced between the parallel plates of a capacitor
which remains connected to a battery, then charge on plates relative to earlier charge
(a) Is less (b) Is same
(c) Is more (d) May be less or more depending on the nature of the material introduced
55. The capacitance of a metallic sphere will be 1 F , if its radius is nearly
(a) 9 km (b) 10 m (c) 1.11 m (d) 1.11 cm
56. The capacitance of a parallel plate condenser does not depend on
(a) Area of the plates (b) Medium between the plates
(c) Distance between the plates (d) Metal of the plates
57. Between the plates of a parallel plate condenser there is 1mm thick paper of dielectric
constant 4. It is charged at 100 volt . The electric field in volt / metre between the plates of the
capacitor is
(a) 100 (b) 100000 (c) 25000 (d) 4000000
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 44
 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
58. The electric field between the two spheres of a charged spherical condenser
(a) Is zero (b) Is constant
(c) Increases with distance from the centre (d) Decreases with distance from the centre
59. The distance between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor is d . A metal plate of thickness
d / 2 is placed between the plates. The capacitance would then be
(a) Unchanged (b) Halved (c) Zero (d) Doubled
60. An uncharged capacitor is connected to a battery. On charging the capacitor
(a) All the energy supplied is stored in the capacitor
(b) Half the energy supplied is stored in the capacitor
(c) The energy stored depends upon the capacity of the capacitor only
(d) The energy stored depends upon the time for which the capacitor is charged
61. A capacitor is kept connected to the battery and a dielectric slab is inserted between the
plates. During this process
(a) No work is done
(b) Work is done at the cost of the energy already stored in the capacitor before the slab is
inserted
(c) Work is done at the cost of the battery
(d) Work is done at the cost of both the capacitor and the battery
62. An air capacitor is connected to a battery. The effect of filling the space between the plates
with a dielectric is to increase
(a) The charge and the potential difference
(b) The potential difference and the electric field
(c) The electric field and the capacitance
(d) The charge and the capacitance

63. A light bulb, a capacitor and a battery are connected together as

shown here, with switch S initially open. When the switch S is
closed, which one of the following is true
(a) The bulb will light up for an instant when the capacitor starts
charging S

(b) The bulb will light up when the capacitor is fully charged

(c) The bulb will not light up at all

(d) The bulb will light up and go off at regular intervals
64. A parallel plate capacitor has a capacity C . The separation between the plates is doubled
and a dielectric medium is introduced between the plates. If the capacity now becomes 2C ,
the dielectric constant of the medium is
(a) 2 (b) 1 (c) 4 (d) 8

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 45

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
65. The diameter of each plate of an air capacitor is 4cm . To make the capacity of this plate
capacitor equal to that of 20cm diameter sphere, the distance between the plates will be
(a) 4  103 m (b) 1  10 3 m (c) 1cm (d) 1  10 3 cm
66. A spherical condenser has inner and outer spheres of radii a and b respectively. The space
between the two is filled with air. The difference between the capacities of two condensers
formed when outer sphere is earthed and when inner sphere is earthed will be
 b 
(a) Zero (b) 4 0a (c) 4 0 b (d) 4 0 a  
ba
d1 d3
67. The expression for the capacity of the capacitor formed by compound
dielectric placed between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor as shown
in figure, will be (area of plate  A )
K1 K2 K3
0 A 0A
(a) (b)
 d1 d 2 d3   d1  d 2  d 3 
      d2
 K1 K 2 K 3   K1  K 2  K 3 

 0 A(K1K 2 K 3 )  AK1 AK 2 AK 3 
(c) (d)  0    
d1d 2d 3  d1 d2 d3 

68. The intensity of electric field at a point between the plates of a charged capacitor
(a) Is directly proportional to the distance between the plates
(b) Is inversely proportional to the distance between the plates
(c) Is inversely proportional to the square of the distance between the plates
(d) Does not depend upon the distance between the plates
69. The capacity of a condenser in which a dielectric of dielectric constant 5 has been used, is C .
If the dielectric is replaced by another with dielectric constant 20, the capacity will become
C C
(a) (b) 4C (c) (d) 2C
4 2
70. In a spherical condenser radius of the outer sphere is R . The different in the radii of outer
and inner sphere in x . Its capacity is proportional to
xR x (R  x ) R (R  x ) R
(a) (b) (c) (d)
(R  x ) r x x
71. A capacitor when filled with a dielectric K  3 has charge Q0 , voltage V0 and field E 0 . If the
dielectric is replaced with another one having K  9 the new values of charge, voltage and
field will be respectively
V0 V0 E0
(a) 3Q0 , 3V0 , 3E0 (b) Q0 , 3V0 , 3E0 (c) Q0 , , 3E0 (d) Q0 , ,
3 3 3
72. A charge of 10 9 C is placed on each of the 64 identical drops of radius 2cm . They are then
combined to form a bigger drop. Find its potential
(a) 7.2  103V (b) 7.2  10 2V (c) 1.44  102V (d) 1.44  103V

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 46

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
GROUPING OF CAPACITOR
73. Two condensers of capacities 1 F and 2 F are connected in series and the system is
charged to 120 volts . Then the P.D. on 1 F capacitor (in volts) will be
(a) 40 (b) 60 (c) 80 (d) 120
74. Four condensers are joined as shown in the
adjoining figure. The capacity of each is 8  F . The A

equivalent capacity between the points A and B will B

be

(a) 32  F (b) 2 F (c) 8  F (d) 16  F

75. The capacities and connection of five capacitors are shown 5F 9F
A
in the adjoining figure. The potential difference between the
12F 10F 8F
points A and B is 60 volts . Then the equivalent capacity
between A and B and the charge on 5  F capacitance will
B
be respectively
(a) 44  F ; 300 C (b) 16  F ;150 C (c) 15  F ; 200 C (d) 4  F ; 50 C
76. Three equal capacitors, each with capacitance C are
connected as shown in figure. Then the equivalent A B
C C C
capacitance between A and B is
(a) C (b) 3C

C 3C
(c) (d)
3 2

77. Four plates of the same area of cross-section are joined

A
as shown in the figure. The distance between each plate
B
is d . The equivalent capacity across A and B will be
2 0 A 3 0 A
(a) (b)
d d
3 0 A 0 A
(c) (d)
2d d
78. Three identical capacitors are combined differently. For the same voltage to each
combination, the one that stores the greatest energy is
(a) Two in parallel and the third in series with it
(b) Three in series
(c) Three in parallel
(d) Two in series and third in parallel with it
79. Two capacitors each of capacity 2 F are connected in parallel. This system is connected in
series with a third capacitor of 12  F capacity. The equivalent capacity of the system will be
(a) 16  F (b) 13  F (c) 4  F (d) 3  F

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 47

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
80. A capacitor having capacitance C is charged to a voltage V . It is then removed and
connected in parallel with another identical capacitor which is uncharged. The new charge on
each capacitor is now
(a) CV (b) CV / 2 (c) 2 CV (d) CV / 4
81. In the connections shown in the adjoining figure, the
6F 12F
equivalent capacity between A and B will be
A B
(a) 10.8  F (b) 69  F 9F 24F

(c) 15  F (d) 10  F
18F

82. 2 F capacitance has potential difference across its two terminals 200 volts . It is
disconnected with battery and then another uncharged capacitance is connected in parallel to
it, then P.D. becomes 20 volts . Then the capacity of another capacitance will be
(a) 2 F (b) 4  F (c) 18  F (d) 10  F
3F 3F 3F
83. The resultant capacitance between A and B in the following
A
figure is equal to
(a) 1 F 2F 2F 3F
(b) 3  F
B
(c) 2 F 3F 3F 3F
(d) 1.5  fF
C 1F
84. In the following circuit, the resultant capacitance between A
A
and B is 1F. Then value of C is
8F
32 11
(a) F (b) F 6F 4F
11 32
2F
23 32 2F 12F
(c) F (d) F B
32 23
85. Two dielectric slabs of constant K1 and K 2 have been filled in between
k1
the plates of a capacitor as shown below. What will be the capacitance
d
of the capacitor k2

2 0 A 2 0 A  K1  K 2 
(a) (K1  K 2 ) (b)  
2d 2d  K1  K 2 

2 0 A  K1  K 2  2 0 A  K1  K 2 
(c)   (d)  
2d  K1  K 2  d  K1  K 2 
3F
86. In the circuit shown in the figure, the potential difference across the
4.5F capacitor is 4.5F

8 6F
(a) volts (b) 4 volts
3
(c) 6 volts (d) 8 volts 12V

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 48

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
87. Minimum number of capacitors of 2 F capacitance each required to obtain a capacitor of
5  F will be
(a) Three (b) Four (c) Five (d) Six
88. A capacitor 4  F charged to 50 V is connected to another capacitor of 2 F charged to 100 V
with plates of like charges connected together. The total energy before and after connection in
multiples of (10 2 J ) is
(a) 1.5 and 1.33 (b) 1.33 and 1.5 (c) 3.0 and 2.67 (d) 2.67 and 3.0

89. Two capacitors of 3F and 6F are connected in series and a potential difference of 5000 V
is applied across the combination. They are then disconnected and reconnected in parallel.
The potential between the plates is
(a) 2250 V (b) 2222 V (c) 2.25  10 6V (d) 1.1 106V
90. Two identical parallel plate capacitors are connected in series to a battery of 100 V . A
dielectric slab of dielectric constant 4.0 is inserted between the plates of second capacitor.
The potential difference across the capacitors will now be respectively
(a) 50 V, 50 V (b) 80 V, 20 V (c) 20 V, 80 V (d) 75 V, 25 V
2F
91. The total capacity of the system of capacitors shown in the A
adjoining figure between the points A and B is 1 F
1F 2F
(a) 1 F (b) 2 F
B
(c) 3  F (d) 4  F 2F

92. The equivalent capacitance between A and B in the figure A

C
is 1 F . Then the value of capacitance C is 2.5F 1F

(a) 1.4  F (b) 2.5  F

B
(c) 3.5  F (d) 1.2  F

93. A condenser of capacity C1 is charged to a potential V0 . The electrostatic energy stored in it is

U0 . It is connected to another uncharged condenser of capacity C2 in parallel. The energy
dissipated in the process is
C2 C1  C  C2  C1C2
(a) U0 (b) U0 (c)  1  U0 (d) U0
C1  C2 C1  C2  C1  C2  2(C1  C2 )
94. Three capacitors each of 6  F are available. The minimum and maximum capacitances
which may be obtained are
(a) 6  F , 18  F (b) 3  F ,12  F (c) 2 F ,12  F (d) 2 F ,18  F
2F 12F
95. Four capacitors are connected in a circuit as shown in the
figure. The effective capacitance in  F between points A
and B will be A B
2F
28 2F
(a) (b) 4
9

(c) 5 (d) 18

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 49

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII

ASSERTION & REASON QUESTIONS

(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason is the correct explanation of the
assertion.
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of the
assertion.
(c) If assertion is true but reason is false.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
1. Assertion : A point charge Q is rotated in a circle of radius r around a charge q. The work
done will be zero.
Reason : For this motion the force is along the radius and direction of motion is
perpendicular.

2. Assertion : Electric potential energy of any positive charge is always positive.

Reason : Potential energy is a vector quantity.
3. Assertion : When two charged spheres are touched, then total charge is always divides
equally.
Reason : Induced charge always equal to inducing charge.
4. Assertion : If three capacitors of capacitance C1 < C2 < C3 are connected in parallel then
their equivalent capacitance Cp > Cs
1 1 1 1
Reason :   
Cp C1 C2 C3

5. Assertion : A metallic shield in form of a hollow shell may be built to block an electric field.
Reason : In a hollow spherical shield, the electric field inside it is zero at every point
6. Assertion : Electrons move away from a low potential to high potential region.
Reason : Because electrons has negative charge

7. Assertion : If the distance between parallel plates of a capacitor is halved and dielectric
constant is made three times, then the capacitor becomes 6 times.
Reason : Capacity of the capacitor does not depend upon the nature of the material.
8. Assertion : A parallel plate capacitor is connected across battery through a key. A
dielectric slab of constant K is introduced between the plates. The energy
which is stored becomes K times.
Reason : The surface density of charge on the plate remains constant or unchanged.
9. Assertion : When charges are shared between any two bodies, no charge is really lost, but
some loss of energy does occur.
Reason : Some energy disappears in the form of heat, sparking etc.
10. Assertion : Surface of a symmetrical conductor can be treated as equipotential surface.
Reason : Charges can easily flow in a conductor.
11. Assertion : The capacity of a given conductor remains same even if charge is varied on it.
Reason : Capacitance depends upon nearly medium as well as size and shape of
conductor.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 50

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
12. Assertion : A charged capacitor is disconnected from a battery. Now if its plate are
separated farther, the potential energy will fall.
Reason : Energy stored in a capacitor is equal to the work done in charging it.
13. Assertion : The whole charge of a conductor cannot be transferred to another isolated
conductor.
Reason : The total transfer of charge from one to another is not possible.
14. Assertion : Conductors having equal positive charge and volume, must also have same
potential.
Reason : Potential depends only on charge and volume of conductor.
15. Assertion : At a point in space, the electric field points towards north. In the region,
surrounding this point the rate of change of potential will be zero along the east
and west.
Reason : Electric field due to a charge is the space around the charge.
16. Assertion : The force with which one plate of a parallel plate capacitor is attracted towards
the other plate is equal to square of surface density per  per unit area.
Reason : The electric field due to one charged plate of the capacitor at the location of
the other is equal to surface density per .
17. Assertion : The lightening conductor at the top of high building has sharp pointed ends.
Reason : The surface density of charge at sharp points is very high resulting in setting up of
electric wind.
18. Assertion : Circuit containing capacitors should be handled cautiously even when there is no
current.
Reason : The capacitors are very delicate and so quickly break down.
19. Assertion : The tyres of aircraft's are slightly conducting.
Reason : If a conductor is connected to ground, the extra charge induced on conductor
will flow to ground.
20. Assertion : A bird perches on a high power line and nothing happens to the bird.
Reason : The level of bird is very high from the ground.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 51

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII

PREVIOUS YEARS QUESTIONS

Electric Potential & Energy
1. A conducting sphere of radius R is given a charge Q. The electric potential and the electric
field at the centre of the sphere respectively are : [AIPMT 2014]
Q Q
(a) and (b) Both are zero
4 πε 0R 4 πε 0R2
Q Q
(c) Zero and 2
(d) and zero
4 πε 0R 4 πε 0R
2. In a region, the potential is represented by V(x,y,z) = 6x – 8xy – 8y + 6yz, where V is in volts
and x, y, z are in meters. The electric force experienced by a charge of 2 coulomb situated at
point (1, 1, 1) is [AIPMT 2014]
(a) 24 N (b) 4 35 N (c) 6 5 N (d) 30 N
3. A hollow metal sphere of radius 10 cm is charged such that the potential on its surface
becomes 80 V. The potential at the centre of the sphere is [J&K CET 2011]
(a) 80 V (b) 800 V (c) 8 V (d) zero
–8
4. A ball of mass 1 g and charge 10 C moves from a point A, where potential is 600 V to the
point B where potential is zero. Velocity of the ball at the point B is 20 cms–1. The velocity of
the ball at the point A will be [AIIMS 2010]
(a) 22.8 cms–1 (b) 228 cms–1 (c) 16.8 ms–1 (d) 168 ms–1
5. The electrostatic potential of a uniformly charged thin spherical shell of charge Q and radius
R at a distance r from the centre is [Manipal 2010]
Q Q
(a) for points outside and for points inside the shell
4 0 r 4 0 R
Q
(b) for both points inside and outside the shell
4 0 r
Q
(c) zero for points outside and for points inside the shell
4 0 r
(d) zero for both points inside and outside the shell
6. There is a uniform electric field of intensity E which is as shown. How many
labelled points have the same electric potential as the fully shaded point?
[KCET 2010]
(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 8 (d) 11
7. Identify the false statement. [Kerala CEE 2010]
(a) Inside a charged or neutral conductor electrostatic field is zero
(b) The electrostatic field at the surface of the charged conductor must be tangential to the
surface at any point
(c) There is no net charge at any point inside the conductor
(d) Electrostatic potential is constant throughout the volume of the conductor

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 52

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
(e) Electric field at the surface of a charged conductor is proportional to the surface charge
density
8. If a charged spherical conductor of radius 10 cm has potential V at a point distant 5 cm from
its centre, then the potential at a point distant 15 cm from the centre will be [JCECE 2010]
1 2 3
(a) V (b) V (c) V (d) 3V
3 3 2
9. The kinetic energy of an electron, which is accelerated in the potential difference of 100 V, is

(a) 1.6 × l0–17 J (b) 1.6 × l0–14 J [JIPMER 2010]

–10 –8
(c) 1.6 × l0 J (d) 1.6 × 10 J
10. A, B and C are three points in a uniform electric field. The electric potential is :

(a) same at all the three points A, B and C [NEET 2013]

(b) maximum at A (c) maximum at B
(d) maximum at C
11. The electric potential on the surface of the hollow sphere of radius 1 m is 1000 V. The
potential at the centre of sphere is [MP PMT 2010]
(a) 1000 V (b) 500 V (c) 250 V (d) zero
12. Assertion : A and B are two conducting spheres of same radius. A being solid and B hollow.
Both are charged to the same potential. Then, charge on A = charge on B.
Reason : Potentials on both are same. [AIIMS 2009]
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason is the correct explanation of
the assertion.
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of
the assertion.
(c) If assertion is true but reason is false.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
13. n identical mercury droplets charged to the same potential V coalesce to form a single bigger
drop. The potential of new drop will be [AFMC, Manipal 2009]
V
(a) (b) nV (c) nV2 (d) n2/3V
n
14. Two equal and opposite charge (+ q and – q) are situated at x distance from each other, the
value of potential at very far point will depend upon [AFMC 2009]
q
(a) only on q (b) only on x (c) on qx (d) on
x
15. Three concentric spherical shells have radii a, b and c(a< b< c) and have surface charge
densities , –  and  respectively. If V A , V B and V c denote the potentials of the three shell…
for c = a + b, we have [CBSE AIPMT 2009]
(a) V C =V A  V B (b) V c =V B  V A
(c) V c  V B  V A (d) V c =V B =V A

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 53

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
16. Three point charges q, –2q and –2q are placed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle of
side a. The work done by some external force to increase their separation to 2a will be
[UP CPMT 2009]
1 2q 2 1 q2 1 8q
(a) (b) (c) (d) zero
4 o a 4 o a 4 o a 2
17. The work done in carrying a charge Q once around a circle of radius r about a charge q at
the centre is [UP CPMT 2009]
qQ qQ qQ  1 
(a) (b) (c)   (d) zero
4 0 r 4 0 r 4 0  2 r 
18. Three charges -q,+Q and -q are placed in a straight line as shown.

q
If the total potential energy of the system is zero, then the ratio is [J&K CET 2009]
Q
(a) 2 (b) 5.5 (c) 4 (d) 1.5
19. The mutual electrostatic potential energy between two protons which are at a distance of
9 × 10 –15 m, in 92U235 nucleus is [J&K CET 2009]
(a) 1.56 × l0–14 J (b) 5.5 × l0–14 J (c) 2.56 × 10–14 J (d) 4.56 × 10–14 J
20. Three charges are placed at the vertex of an equilateral triangle as
shown in figure. For what value of Q, the electrostatic potential
energy of the system is zero? [OJEE 2009]
q
(a) –q (b)
2
–q
(c) –2q (d)
2
21. The charge q is projected into a uniform electric field E, work done when it moves a distance
y along the field is [OJEE 2009]
qy qE y
(a) qEy (b) (c) (d)
E y qE
22. Two charged spheres of radii R1 and R2 have equal surface charge density. The ratio of their
potential is [OJEE 2009]
(a) R1/R2 (b) R2/R1 (c) (R1/R2)2 (d) (R2/R1)2
23. A small conducting sphere of radius r is lying concentrically inside a bigger hollow conducting
sphere of radius R. The bigger and smaller spheres are charged with Q and q(Q> q) and are
insulated from each other. The potential difference between the spheres will be [KCET 2008]
1 q q  1 q Q
(a)  –  (b)  – 
4 0  r R  4 0  R r 
1 q Q 1 Q q 
(c)  –  (d)   
4 0  r R  4 0  R r 

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 54

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
24. The charges Q, + q and +q are placed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side . If the
net electrostatic potential energy of the system is zero, then Q is equal to [KCET 2008]
q q
(a) – (b) –q (c) (d) zero
2 2
25. A charge Q is placed at each corner of a cube of side a. The potential at the centre of the
cube is [EAMCET 2008]
8Q 4Q 4Q 2Q
(a) (b) (c) (d)
 0a 4 0 a 3 0 a  0a
26. If 20 J of work has to be done to move an electric charge of 4 C from a point, where potential
is 10V to another point, where potential is F volt, find the value of F. [Guj CET 2008]
(a) 2 V (b) 70 V (c) 5 V (d) 15 V
27. The work done in bringing a unit positive charge from infinity distance to a point at distance X
from a positive charge Q is W. When, the potential  at that point is [J&K CET 2008]
WQ W
(a) (b) W (c) (d) WQ
X Q
28. The electric potential inside a conducting sphere [J&K CET 2008]
(a) increases from centre to surface (b) decreases from centre to surface
(c) remains constant from centre to surface (d) is zero at every point inside
29. In the figure, a proton moves a distance d in a uniform electric field E as shown in the figure.
Does the electric field do a positive or negative work on the proton? Does the electric
potential energy of the proton increase or decrease?
[AIIMS 2007]
(a) Negative, increase (b) Positive, decrease
(c) Negative, decrease (d) Positive, increase

30. The potential of a large liquid drop when eight liquid drops are combined is 20 V. Then the
potential of each single drop was [KCET 2007]
(a) 10 V (b) 7.5 V (c) 5 V (d) 2.5 V
31. In bringing an electron towards another electron, the electrostatic potential energy of the
system [MHT CET 2007]
(a) decreases (b) increases (c) remains same (d) becomes zero
32. If a positive charge is shifted from a low potential region to a high potential region, then
electric potential energy [RPMT 2007]
(a) decreases (b) increases
(c) remains the same (d) may increase or decrease

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 55

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
33. An electric field is spread uniformly along positive y-axes. Consider a point A as origin point.
The co-ordinates of point B are equal to (0, 2) m. The co-ordinates of point C are (2, 0) m. At
points A, B and C, electric potentials are V A, V B and V c respectively. From the following
options, which is correct ? [Guj CET 2007]
(a) V A =V C <V B (b) V A =V B =V C (c) V A = V B >V C (d) V A =V C >V B
34. Electric potential at the centre of a charged hollow metal sphere is [J&K CET 2007]
(a) zero (b) twice as that on the surface
(c) half of that on the surface (d) same as that on the surface
35. What is not true for equipotential surface for uniform electric field? [AFMC 2006]
(a) Equipotential surface is flat
(b) Two equipotential surfaces can cross each other
(c) Electric lines are perpendicular to equipotential surface
(d) Work done is zero
36. Figure shows three points A, B and C in a region of uniform electric field E. The line AB is
perpendicular and BC is parallel to the field lines. Then which of the following holds good?
(a) V A = V B =V C (b) V A = V B >V C
(c) V A =V B <V C (d) V A >V B =V C
where V A V B and V c represent the electric potentials at the
points A, B and C respectively. [BHU 2006]
37. Two electric charge 12 C and –6 C are placed 20 cm apart in air. There will be a point P on
the line joining these charges and outside the region between them, at which the electric
potential is zero. The distance of P from -6 C charge is [Kerala CEE 2006]
(a) 0.10 m (b) 0.15 m (c) 0.20 m (d) 0.25 m
38. The electric potential at the surface of an atomic nucleus (Z = 50) of radius 9 × 10–15 m is
(a) 80 V (b) 8 × 106 V [Guj CET 2006]
5
(c) 9 V (d) 9 × l0 V
39. As per this diagram a point charge +q is placed at the origin O. Work done in taking another
point charge -Q from the point A [co-ordinates (0, a)] to another point B [co-ordinates (a, 0)]
along the straight path AB is [CBSE AIPMT 2005]
 – qQ 1 
(a) Zero (b)  2 
2a
 4 0 a 
 qQ 1  a  qQ 1 
(c)  2 
. (d)  2 
2a
 4 0 a  2  4 0 a 

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 56

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
40. Two charges q1, and q 2 are placed 30 cm apart, as shown in the
figure. A third charge q 3 is moved along the arc of a circle of radius
40 cm from C to D. The change in the potential energy of the
q3
system is k, where k is [CBSE AIPMT 2005]
4 0
(a) 8q 2 (b) 8q 1
(c) 6q 2 (d) 6q 1

41. A solid metal sphere of radius 50 cm carries a charge 25 × 10–l0C. The electrostatic potential
at the surface of the sphere will be [DUMET 2005]
(a) 25 V (b) 15 V (c) 35 V (d) 45 V
42. The work done in carrying a charge q once round a circle of radius r with a charge Q at the
centre is [KCET 2005]
qQ qQ qQ
(a) (b) (c) (d) None of these
 0 r  02 r 2  0 r 2

Capacitance and Capacitors

1. A parallel plate capacitor has a uniform electric field E (V/m) in the space between the plates.
If the distance between the plates is d(m) and area of each plate is A(m2) the energy (joule)
stored in the capacitor is [CBSE AIPMT 2011]
1
(a)  0 E 2 (b) 0EAd
2
1
(c)  0E 2 Ad (d) E 2 Ad /  o
2
2. Charges 5 C and 10 C are placed 1 m apart. Work done to bring these charges at a
distance 0.5 m from each other is (k = 9 × 109 SI) [J&K CET 2011]
(a) 9 × 104 J (b) 18 × l04 J
(c) 45 × 10–2 J (d) 9 × 10–1 J

3. A parallel plate capacitor is connected to a 5 V battery and charged. The battery is then
disconnected and a glass slab is introduced between the plates. Then the quantities that
decrease are [KCET 2011]
(a) charge and potential difference (b) charge and capacitance
(c) capacitance and potential difference (d) energy stored and capacitance
(e) energy stored and potential difference
4. Two identical conductors maintained at different temperatures are given potential differences
in the ratio 1:2. Then the ratio of their drift velocities is [Kerala CEE 2011]
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 3 : 2 (c) 1 : 1 (d) 1 : 21/2
(e) 1 : 4

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 57

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
5. On increasing the temperature of a conductor, its resistance increases because the
(a) relaxation time increases (b) mass of electron increases
(c) electron density decreases (d) relaxation time decreases
(e) relaxation time remains constant [Kerala CEE 2011]
6. If the equivalent capacitance between points P and Q
of the combination of the capacitors show in figure
below is 30F, the capacitor C is [J&K CET 2011]
(a) 60 F (b) 30 F
(c) 10 F (d) 5 F

7. A capacitor of capacitance C1 is charge to a potential v and then connected in parallel to an

uncharged capacitor of capacitance C2. The final potential difference across each capacitor
will be
C1V C2V
(a) l (b) [J&K CET 2011]
C1  C2 C1  C2
C2 C2
(c) 1  (d) 1 –
C1 C1

8. In the given network, the value of C, so that an equivalent

capacitance between points a and b is 3 F, is
130
(a) F [KCET 2011]
29
31
(b) F
5
150
(c) F
41
(d) 36 F

9. How many 1 F capacitors must be connected in parallel to store a charge of 1 C with a

potential of 110 V across the capacitors? [DUMET 2011]
(a) 990 (b) 900 (c) 9090 (d) 909
–18
10. Work done in placing a charge of 8 × l0 C on a condenser of capacity 100 F is
–32
(a) 16 × 10 J (b) 31 × 10–26 J [AFMC 2010]
(c) 4 × 10–10 J (d) 32 × 10–32 J

11. A charged oil drop of mass 2.5 × l0–7 kg is in space between the two plates, each of area 2 ×
10–2 m2 of a parallel plate capacitor. When the upper plate has a charge of 5 × 10–7 C and the
lower plate has an equal negative charge, the oil remains stationary. The charge of the oil
drop is (Take g = 10 m/s 2)
(a) 9 × l0–1 C (b) 9 × 10–6 C [AIIMS 2010]
–13 –14
(c) 8.85 × l0 C (d) 1.8 × 10 C

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 58

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
12. The capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with air as medium is 3 F. With the introduction
of a dielectric medium between the plates, the capacitance becomes 15 F. The permittivity
of the medium is [BHU 2010]
(a) 5 C2 N–1 m–2 (b) 15 C2N–1 m–2
(c) 0.44 × 10–9 C2 N–1 m–2 (d) 8.845 × l0–11C2N–1m–2
13. A 500 F capacitor is charged at the steady rate of l00C/s. How long will it take to raise the
potential difference between the plates of the capacitor to 10 V? [BHU 2010]
(a) 5 s (b) 10 s (c) 50 s (d) 100 s
14. Two conducting spheres of radii R1 and R2 are charged with charges Q1 and Q2 respectively.
On bringing them in contact, there is [BHU 2010]
(a) no increase in the energy of the system
(b) an increase in the energy of the system if Q1R2  Q2R1
(c) always a decrease in the energy of the system
(d) a decrease in the energy of the system if Q1R2 = Q2R1
15. A parallel plate air capacitor of capacitance C0 is connected to a cell of emf v and then
disconnected from it. A dielectric slab of dielectric constant K, which can just fill the air gap of
the capacitor, is now inserted in it. Which of the following is incorrect? [BHU 2010]
(a) The potential difference between the plates decreases Ktimes
(b) The energy stored in the capacitor decreases K times
Q2 Q2  1
(c) The change in energy is (d) The change in energy is 1  
2KC 2C  K 
16. A charged oil drop of mass 9.75 × 10–15 kg and charge 30 × 10–16 C is suspended in a uniform
electric field existing between two parallel plates. The field between the plates, (taking g = 10
ms–2) is
(a) 3.25V/m (b) 3000V/m [CMC 2010]
(c) 325V/ m (d) 32.5V/ m
17. The radii of the inner and outer spheres of a condenser are 9 cm and 10 cm respectively.If
the dielectric constant of the medium between the two spheres is 6 and charge on the inner
sphere is 18 x 10–9 C, then the potential of inner sphere will be, if the other sphere is earthed
(a) 180 V (b) 30 V [Haryana PMT 2010]
(c) 18V (d) 90V
18. Energies stored in capacitor and dissipated during charging a capacitor bear a ratio
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : 2 [MP PMT 2010]
(c) 1 : 1/2 (d) 2 : 1
19. An uncharged capacitor with a solid dielectric is connected to a similar air capacitor charged
to a potential of V0. If the common potential after sharing of charges becomes V, then the
dielectric constant of the dielectric must be [VMMC 2010]

(a) V0 / V (b)
V
(c)
V0 – V  (d)
V0 – V 
V0 V V0

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 59

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
20. If the energy of a 100 F capacitor charged to 6 kV could all be used to lift a 50 kg mass,
what would be the greatest vertical height through which mass could be raised?
(a) 0.6mm (b) 3.6 m [MGIMS 2010]
(c) 1.2 mm (d) 12 m
21. What is the value of capacitance if the thin metallic plate is introduced between two parallel
plates of area A and separated at distance d? [MP PMT 2010]
0 A 2 0 A 4 0 A 0 A
(a) (b) (c) (d)
d d d 2d
22. The energy stored in a condenser of capacity C which has been raised to a potential V is
given by [UP CPMT 2010]
1 1 1
(a) CV (b) CV 2 (c) CV (d)
2 2 2CV
23. Capacity of a capacitor is 48 F. When it is charged from 0.1 C to 0.5, change in the energy
stored is
(a) 2500 J (b) 2.5 ×10–3 J [MHT CET 2010]
(c) 2.5 × 106 J (d) 2.42 ×10–2 J

24. The plates in a parallel plate capacitor are separated by a distance d with air as the medium
between the plates. In order to increase the capacity by 66% a dielectric slab of dielectric
constant 5 is introduced between the plates. What is the thickness of the dielectric slab?
d d
(a) (b) [EAMCET 2010]
4 2
5d
(c) (d) d
8

25. What is called electrical energy tank? [MP PMT 2010]

(a) Resistor (b) Inductor (c) Capacitor (d) Motor
26. In a parallel plate capacitor the separation between the plates is 3 mm with air between them.
Now a 1 mm thick layer of a material of dielectric constant 2 is introduced between the plates
due to which the capacity increases. In order to bring its capacity of the original value the
separation between the plates must be made [Haryana PMT 2010]
(a) 1.5 mm (b) 2.5 mm (c) 3.5 mm (d) 4.5 mm
27. The capacitance of a metallic sphere is 1 F, then its radius is nearly [Manipal 2010]
(a) 1.11m (b) 10 m (c) 9 km (d) 1.11cm
28. In a parallel plate capacitor, the capacity increase if [MHT CET 2010]
(a) area of the plate is decreased (b) distance between the plates increases
(c) area of the plate is increased (d) dielectric constant decrease

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 60

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
29. A capacitor is charged by a battery and the energy stored is U. The battery is now removed
and the separation distance between the plates is doubled. The energy stored now is
U
(a) (b) U [Manipal 2010]
2
(c) 2U (d) 4U
30. Assertion Circuit containing capacitors should be handled cautiously even when there is no
current.
Reason The capacitors are very delicate and so quickly break down. [AIIMS 2009]
31. The potential energy of a charged parallel plate capacitor is U 0 . If a slab of dielectric constant
K is inserted between the plates, then the new potential energy will be [AFMC 2009]
U U
(a) 0 (b) U0K2 (c) 02 (d) U02
K K
32. A capacitor of 10 F is charged to a potential 50 V with a battery. The battery is now
disconnected and an additional charge 200 C is given to the positive plate of the capacitor.
The potential difference across the capacitor will be [UP CPMT 2009]
(a) 100 V (b) 60 V
(c) 80 V (d) 50 V
33. A parallel plate capacitor of plate area A has a charge Q. The force on each plate of the
capacitor is [BCECE 2009]
2Q 2 Q2 Q2
(a) (b) (c) (d) Zero
0 A 0 A 2 0 A
34. What is the area of the plates of a 3 F parallel plate capacitor. If the seperation between the
plates is 5 mm? [MGIMS 2009]
(a) 1.694 × 109m2 (b) 4.529 × l09m2
(c) 9.281 × l09m2 (d) 12.981 × 109m2
35. A condenser of capacitance 6 F was originally charged to 10 V. Now potential difference is
made 20 V. The increase in potential energy is [MGIMS 2009]
(a) 3 × 10–4 J (b) 6 × 10–4 J
(c) 9 × 10–4 J (d) 12 × 10–4 J

36. The outer sphere of a spherical air capacitor is earthed. For increasing its capacitance
(a) vacuum is created between two spheres [MGIMS 2009]
(b) dielectric material is filled between the two spheres
(c) the space between two spheres is increased
(d) the earthing of the outer sphere is removed
37. A capacitor of capacitance C is charged to potential V. If it carries a charge Q, then the
energy stored in it is [Kerala CEE 2009]
1 1
(a) CV (b) QV (c) QV 2 (d) CV 2
2 2

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 61

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
1
(e) QV
2
38. Energy stored per unit volume of a parallel plate capacitor having plate area A and plate
separation d when charged to a potential of V volt is (air space in between the plates)
1 2 2 q2
(a) CV (b) [J&K CET 2009]
2 4C
1 V  1 V 2 
(c) 0   (d) 0  
2 d  2  d2 
39. A parallel plate air capacitor has a capacitance C. When it is half filled with a dielectric of
dielectric constant 5, the percentage increase in the capacitance will be [JCECE 2009]
(a) 400% (b) 66.6 % (c) 33.3 % (d) 200 %
40. Three capacitor of capacitance C (F) are connected in parallel to which a capacitor of
capacitance C is connected in series. Effective capacitance is 3.75, then capacity of each
capacitor is [MHT CET 2009]
(a) 4 F (b) 5 F (c) 6 F (d) 8 F
41. Capacitors are used in electrical circuits where appliances need more [BVP 2009]
(a) current (b) voltage (c) watt (d) resistance
42. If the circumferences of a sphere is 2 m, then capacitance of sphere in water would be
(a) 2700 F (b) 2760 F [BVP 2009]
(c) 2780 F (d) 2800 F
43. In figure, for parallel of equal area A and spacing d
are arrange, then effective capacitance between a
and b is
 A
(a) 0 [BVP, MP PMT 2009]
d
2 0 A
(b)
d
3 0 A 4 0 A
(c) (d)
d d
44. Capacitance (in Farad) of spherical conductor with radius 1 m is [Manipal 2009]
(a) 1.1 × 10–10 (b) 10–6
(c) 9 × 10–9 (d) 10–3

45. If dielectric is inserted in charged capacitor (battery removed), the quantity that remain
constant is
(a) capacitance (b) potential [MHT CET 2009]
(c) intensity (d) charge

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 62

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
46. The energy required to charge a parallel plate condenser of plate separation d and plate area
of cross-section A such that the uniform electric field between the plates is E, is
1
 0E 2  E2
(a) 2 (b) 0 [CBSE AIPMT 2008]
Ad Ad
1
(c) 0E2Ad (d)  0E 2 Ad
2
47. Assertion A parallel plate capacitor is connected across battery through a key. A dielectric
slab of dielectric constant K is introduced between the plates. The energy which is stored
becomes K times. [AIIMS 2008]
Reason The surface density of charge on the plate remains constant or unchanged.
48. A capacitor of capacitance C has charge Q and stored energy is W . If the charge is
increased to 2Q, the stored energy will be [AMU 2008]
W W
(a) (b)
4 2
(c) 2W (d) 4W
49. The plates of a parallel plate capacitor are not exactly parallel. The surface charge density
(a) is lower at the closer end [Manipal 2008]
(b) will not be uniform
(c) each plate will have the same potential at every point
(d) Both (b) and (c)
50. A sheet of aluminium foil of negligible thickness is introduced between the plates of a
capacitor. The capacitance of the capacitor [MP PMT 2008]
(a) decreases (b) remains unchanged
(c) becomes infinite (d) increases
51. The work done in placing a charge of 8 × 10–I8C on a condenser of capacity 100 F is
(a) 16 × 10-32J (b) 3.1 × l0–26J [RPMT 2008]
(c) 4 × l0–10J (d) 32 × l0–32J
52. 64 small drops of water having same charge and same radius are combined to form one big
drop. The ratio of capacitance of big drop to small drop is [Guj CET 2008]
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 1 : 2 (c) 4 : 1 (d) 1 : 4
53. The capacitance C of a capacitor is [J&K CET 2008]
(a) independent of the charge and potential of the capacitor
(b) dependent on the charge and independent of potential
(c) independent of the geometrical configuration of the capacitor
(d) independent of the dielectric medium between the two conducting surfaces of the
capacitor

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 63

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
54. Two condensers, one of capacity C and the other of C and the
C
other of capacity , are connected to a, V volt battery, as
2
shown. The work done is charging fully both the condensers is
1
(a) 2CV2 (b) CV 2
4
3 1
(c) CV 2 (d) CV 2 [CBSE AIPMT 2007]
4 2
55. A capacitor of 20 F charged upto 500 V is connected in parallel with another capacitor of 10
F which is charged upto 200 V. The common potential is [AFMC 2007]
(a) 250 V (b) 300 V (c) 400 V (d) 600 V
56. Consider a parallel plate capacitor of 10 F (micro-farad) with air
filled in the gap between the plates. Now one-half of the space
between the plates is filled with a dielectric of dielectric constant
4, as shown in the figure. The capacity of the capacitor changes
to [Punjab PMET 2007]
(a) 25 F (b) 20 F
(c) 40 F (d) 5 F
57. Two identical capacitors each of capacitance 5 F are charged to potentials 2 kV and 1 kV
respectively. Their negative ends are connected together. When the positive ends are also
connected together, the loss of energy of the system is [KCET 2007]
(a) 160 J (b) zero
(c) 5 J (d) 1.25 J
58. An insulator plate is passed between the plates of a capacitor.
Then current [MP PMT 2007]
(a) first flows from A to B and then from B to A
(b) first flows from B to A and then from A to B
(c) always flows from B to A
(d) always flows from A to B
59. Two parallel large thin metal sheets have equal surface charge densities ( = 26.4 × 10–12Cm–
2
) of opposite signs. The electric field between these sheets is [RPMT 2007]
(a) 1.5 NC–1 (b) 1.5 × l0–10NC–1
(c) 3 NC–1 (d) 3 × l0–10NC–1
60. The capacity of an isolated conducting sphere of radius R is proportional to [RPMT 2007]
1 1
(a) R2 (b) (c) (d) R
R2 R
61. To increase the charge on the plate of a capacitor means to [Guj CET 2007]
(a) decrease the potential difference between the plates
(b) decrease the capacitance of the capacitor

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 64

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
(c) increase the capacitance of the capacitor
(d) increase the potential difference between the plates

62. In a capacitor of capacitance 20 F the distance between the plates is 2 mm. If a dielectric
slab of width 1 mm and dielectric constant 2 is inserted between the plates, then the new
capacitance will be
(a) 22 F (b) 26.6 F [BCECE 2007]
(c) 52.2 F (d) 13 F
63. 27 small drops each having charge q and radius r coalesce to from big drop. How many
times charge and capacitance will become? [JCECE 2007]
(a) 3, 27 (b) 27, 3 (c) 27, 27 (d) 3, 3
64. A dielectric of dielectric constant K is introduced such that half of its area of a capacitor of
capacity C is occupied by it. The new capacity is [J&K CET 2007]
(a) 2 C (b) C/2 (c) (1 + K) C/2 (d) 2C(1 + K)
65. A parallel plate air capacitor is charged to a potential difference of V volts. After disconnecting
the charging battery the distance between the plates of the capacitor is increased using an
insulating handle. As a result the potential difference between the plates
(a) decreases (b) does not change
(c) becomes zero (d) increases [CBSE AIPMT, J&K CET 2006]
66. A capacitor having capacitance 1 F with air, is filled with two
dielectrics as shown. How many times capacitance will increase?
[Punjab PMET 2006]
(a) 12 (b) 6
(c) 8/3 (d) 3
67. The potentials of the two plates of capacitors are +10 V and -10V. The charge on one of the
plates is 40 C. The capacitance of the capacitor is [Punjab PMET 2006]
(a) 2 F (b) 4 F (c) 0.5 F (d) 0.25 F
68. A network of four capacitors of capacity equals to C l = C, C 2 = 2 C, C3
= 3C and C 4 =4C are connected to a battery as shown in the figure.
The ratio of the charges on C 2 and C 4 q is [DUMET 2006]
22 3
(a) (b)
3 22
7 4
(c) (d)
4 7
69. A capacitor of capacitance 6 F is charged upto 100 V. The energy stored in the capacitor is
(a) 0.6 J (b) 0.06 J [Manipal 2006]
(c) 0.03 J (d) 0.3 J
70. If the plates of a parallel plate capacitor are not equal in area, then quantity of charge
(a) on the plates will be same but nature of charge will differ [MHT CET 2006]

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 65

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
(b) on the plates as well as nature of charge will be different
(c) on the plates will be different but nature of charge will be same
(d) as well as nature of charge will be same
71. A capacitor is connected to a cell of emf E having some internal resistance r. The potential
difference across the [MP PMT 2006]
(a) cell is <E (b) cell is E (c) capacitor is > E (d) capacitor is <E
72. Two capacitors of capacitance C, and C2, are connected in parallel. If a charge Q is given to
the combination, the charge gets shared. The ratio of the charge on the capacitor C, to the
charge on the capacitor C2 is [Guj CET 2006]
(a) C 1 C 2 (b) C2 / C 1 (c) C l + C 2 (d) C l / C 2
73. The two capacitors C1and C2 are charged to potentials V 1 and V 2 and then connected in
parallel. There will be no flow of energy, if [JCECE 2006]
C1 C2
(a) C1V1 = C2V2 (b) V1 = V2 (c) C1 = C2 (d) 
V1 V2
74. Two capacitors each of capacity 2 F are connected in parallel. If they are connected to 100
V battery, then energy stored in them is [J&K CET 2006]
(a) 0.02 J (b) 0.04 J (b) 0.01 J (d) 200 J
75. For the given arrangement of capacitors C1 and C2, which of the following statements is true?
(a) When S1 and S3 closed, V 1 = 30 V, V 2 = 20 V [Punjab PMET 2005]
(b) When S 1 and S 2 closed, V 1 =V 2 =0
(c) When S1 is closed, V 1 =15 V,V 2 = 20V
(d) When S 3 is closed, V x = V 2 = 20 V
76. An air parallel plate capacitor has capacity C. The capacity and distance between plates are
doubled when immersed in a liquid then dielectric constant of the liquid is [Punjab PMET]
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4
77. If the potential of a capacitor having capacity 6 F is increased from 10 V to 20 V then
increase in its energy is [Punjab PMET 2005]
(a) 12 × 10–6 J (b) 9 × 10×4 J (c) 4.5 × 10–6J (d) 2.25 × l0–6J
78. Across each of two capacitors of capacitance 1 F, a potential difference of 10 V is applied.
Then positive plate of one is connected to the negative plate of the other, and negative plate
of one is connected to the positive plate of the other. After contact [DUMET 2005]
(a) charge on each is zero (b) charge on each is same but non-zero
(c) charge on each is different but non-zero (d) None of the above
79. Two plates (area = S) charged to + q1 and +q 2 ( q 2 <q 1 ) are brought closer to form a
capacitor of capacitance C. The potential difference across the plates is [DUMET 2005]
q1 – q2 q1 – q2 q1 – q2 2  q1 – q2 
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2C C 4C C

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 66

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
80. An air filled parallel plate condenser has a capacity of 2F. The separation of the plates is
doubled and the interspace between the plates is filled with wax. If the capacity is increased
to 6 F, the dielectric constant of wax is [KCET 2005]
(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 4 (d) 6
81. A10 F capacitor is charged to a potential difference of 1000 V. The terminals of the charged
capacitor are disconnected from the power supply and connected to the terminals of an
uncharged 6 F capacitor. What is the final potential difference across each capacitor?
(a) 167 V (b) 100 V [Kerala CEE 2005]
(c) 625 V (d) 250 V
82. Energy E is stored in a parallel plate capacitor C 1 . An identical uncharged capacitor C2 is
connected to it, kept in contact with it for a while and then disconnected, the energy stored in
C2 is [EAMCET 2005]
E E E
(a) (b) (c) (d) zero
2 3 4
83. 700 F capacitor is charged by 50 V battery. Electrostatic energy is stored by it will be
(a) 17.0 × 10–8 J (b) 13.0 × 10–9J [RPMT 2005]
(c) 8.7 × 10–7 J (d) 6.7 × 10–7 J
84. The charge on capacitors in the following figure is
[Haryana PMT 2005]
32
(a) C (b) 8 C
3
(c) zero (d) 
85. If each capacitor of 9 F is arranged as shown in figure, then the equivalent
capacitance between the points A and B is [Haryana PMT 2005]
(a) 15 F (b) 18 F
(c) 9 F (d) 4.5 F

86. The plates of a charged condenser are connected to a voltmeter. If the plates are moved
apart, the reading of voltmeter will [J&K CET 2005]
(a) increase (b) decrease
(c) remain unchanged (d) information is insufficient
–6
87. The capacity of a condenser is 4 × l0 F and its potential is 100 V. The energy released on
discharging it fully will be [AMU 2004]
(a) 0.04 J (b) 0.02 J (c) 0.025 J (d) 0.05 J
88. A parallel plate capacitor having a plate separation of 2 mm is charged by connecting it to a
300 V supply. The energy density is [BHU 2004]
–3 –3 –3 –3
(a) 0.01 Jm (b) 0.l Jm (c) 1.0 Jm (d) 10 Jm
89. A capacitor of 20 F capacity charged up to 500 V is connected in parallel with another
capacitor of l0 F which is charged up to 200 V. Their common potential is [BHU 2004]
(a) 500 V (b) 400 V (c) 300 V (d) 200 V

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 67

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
90. The ratio of charge to the potential of body [Punjab PMET 2004]
(a) resistance (b) inductance (c) conductance (d) capacitance
91. A spherical drop of capacitance 1 F is broken into eight drops of equal radius. Then, the
capacitance of each small drop is [KCET 2004]
1 1 1
(a)  F (b)  F (c) F (d) 8F
2 4 8
92. A parallel plate capacitor filled with a material of dielectric constant K is charged to a certain
voltage. The dielectric material is removed. Then [EAMCET 2004]
(a) the capacitance decreases by a factor K
(b) the electric field reduces by a factor K
(c) the voltage across the capacitor increases by a factor K
(d) the charge stored in the capacitor increases by a factor K
(a) A and B are true (b) A and C are true (c) B and C are true (d) B and D are true
7
93. Capacitance of a capacitor becomes times its original value if a dielectric slab of thickness
6
2
t  d is introduced in between the plates, d is the separation between the plates. The
3
dielectric constant of the dielectric slab is [EAMCET 2004]
14 11 7 11
(a) (b) (c) (d)
11 14 11 7
94. If the condenser shown in the circuit is charged to 5V and left in the
circuit, in 12 s the charge on the condenser will become
10 e2
(a) C (b) C [JCECE 2004]
e 10
10 10
(c) 2 C (d) C
e e
95. A parallel plate capacitor is immersed in an oil of dielectric constant 2. The field between the
plates is [JCECE 2004]
1
(a) decreased, by a factor of (b) increased, by a factor of 2
2
1
(c) increased, by a factor of (d) decrease, by a factor of 2
2
96. The capacity of parallel plate capacitor in air and on immersing it into oil is 50 F and 110 F
respectively. The dielectric constant of oil is [J&K CET 2004]
(a) 0.45 (b) 0.55 (c) 1.10 (d) 2.20
97. The energy stored in a condenser is in the form of [J&K CET 2004]
(a) kinetic energy (b) potential energy (c) elastic energy (d) magnetic energy
98. On increasing the plate separation of a charged condenser, the energy [J&K CET 2004]
(a) increases (b) decreases (c) remains unchanged (d) becomes zero
99. The electrostatic capacitance depends on [AFMC 2003]
(a) nature of conductor (b) size of conductor

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 68

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
(c) thickness of conductor (d) colour of conductor
100. The capacity of an air condenser is 2.0 F. If a medium is placed between its plates. The
capacity becomes 12F. The dielectric constant of the medium will be [Punjab PMET 2003]
(a) 5 (b) 4 (c) 3 (d) 6
101. Taking the earth to be a spherical conductor of diameter 12.8 × 103km. Its capacity will be
(a) 711 F (b) 611 F [Punjab PMET 2003]
(c) 811 F (d) 511 F
102. The capacitors A and B have identical geometry. A material with a
dielectric constant 3 is present between the plates of B. The
potential difference across A and B are respectively
[Kerala CEE 2003]
(a) 2.5 V, 7.5 V (b) 2V, 8V
(c) 8V, 2V (d) 7.5 V, 2.5 V
103. Between the plates of parallel plate capacitor of capacity C, two parallel plates of the same
material and area same as the plate of the original capacitor, are placed. If the thickness of
these plates is equal to l/5th of the distance between the plates of the original capacitor, then
the capacity of the new capacitor is [EAMCET 2003]
5 3 3C 10C
(a) C (b) C (c) (d)
3 5 10 3

Grouping of Capacitors
1. Two thin dielectric slabs of dielectric constants K1 and K2 (K1 < K2) are inserted between
plates of a parallel plate capacitor, as shown in the figure. The variation of electric field 'E'
between the plates with distance 'd' as measured from plate P is correctly shown by:

(a) (b)

(c) (d)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 69

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
2. A number of condensers, each of the capacitance 1 F and each one of which gets punctured
if a potential difference just exceeding 500 V is applied, are provided. An arrangement
suitable for giving capacitance of 2 F across which 3000 V may be applied requires at least
[AFMC 2010]
(a) 6 component capacitors (b) 12 component capacitors
(c) 72 component capacitors (d) 2 component capacitors
3. A network of four capacitors of capacities equal to C1 = C, C2 = 2C,
C3 = 3C and C4 = 4C are connected to a battery as shown in the figure.
The ratio of the charges on C2 and C4 is [AIIMS 2010]
22 3
(a) (b)
3 22
3 10
(c) (d)
10 3
4. In the circuit shown in the figure, the potential difference
across the 4.5 F capacitor is [AIIMS 2010]
8
(a) V (b) 4V
3
(c) 6 V (d) 8V

5. A series combination of n1capacitors, each of value C1, is charged by a source of potential

difference 4V. When another parallel combination of n 2 capacitors, each of value C2, is
charged by a source of potential difference V, it has the same (total) energy stored in it, as
the first combination has. The value of C2, in terms of C 1 is, then [CBSE AIPMT 2010]
2C1 n1 n2 16C1
(a) (b) 16 C1 (c) 2 C1 (d)
n1n2 n2 n1 n1n2
6. Effective capacitance between A and B in the figure shown is (C1 =
C 2 = 20 F, C3 = C4 = 10 F) [OJEE 2010]
(a) 10 F (b) 15 F
(c) 20 F (d) 25 F

7. Two capacitors, one 4 F and the other 6 F, connected in parallel are charged by a 100V
battery. The energy stored in the capacitors is [MGIMS 2010]
(a) 1.2 × 10–8 J (b) 2.4 × l0–8 J
(c) 5.0 × 10–8 J (d) 1.2 × l0–6 J

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 70

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
8. In the connections shown in the adjoining figure,
the equivalent capacity between A and B will be
13
(a) [UP CPMT 2010]
6
6
(b)
13
(c) 6
(d) 13
9. The equivalent capacitance between points A and
B in the given figure, is [CG PMT 2010]
36
(a) (b) 2F
13  F
(c) 1F (d) 3F

10. Three capacitors of capacitances 1 F, 2 F and 4 F are connected first in a series
combination, and then in parallel combination. The ratio of their equivalent capacitances will
be [JIPMER 2010]
(a) 2 : 49 (b) 49 : 2 (c) 4 : 49 (d) 49 : 4

11. 0.2 F capacitor is charge to 600 V by a battery, on removing the battery, it is connected with
another uncharged parallel plate condenser of 1 F. The potential decreases to [VMMC 2010]
(a) 100 V (b) 120 V (c) 300 V (d) 600 V
12. Parallel plate capacitor is constructed using three different dielectric
materials as shown in the figure. The parallel plates, across which a
potential difference is applied of area A m 2 and separated by a
distance d metre. The capacitance across A and B is
 A K K 2K 3   0 A  K1  K 2  K 3  
(a) 0  1   (b)   
d  2 K2  K3  d  2 K 2K 3 
0 A  2 K 2K 3   0 A  2 K 2  K3 
(c)    (d)   
d  K1 K 2  K 3  d  K1 K 2K 3 

13. In the figure below, the capacitance of each capacitor is

3F . The effective capacitance between A and B is
[WB JEE 2010]
3
(a) F (b) 3F
4
(c) 6F (d) 5F

14. n identical capacitors each of capacitance C when connected in parallel give the effective
capacitance 90F and when connected in series give 2.5 F. Then the values of n and C
respectively are [Manipal 2010]
(a) 6 and 15 F (b) 5 and l8F (c) 15 and 6 F (d) 18 and 5 F

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 71

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
15. The number of ways one can arrange three identical capacitors to obtain distinct effective
capacitances is [Manipal 2009]
(a) 8 (b) 6 (c) 4 (d) 3
16. Three capacitors each of capacitance C and of breakdown voltage V are joined in series.
The capacitance and breakdown voltage of the combination will be [CBSE AIPMT 2009]
C V V C
(a) , (b) 3C, (c) ,3V (d) 3C, 3V
3 3 3 3
17. Four capacitors of equal capacitance have an equivalent capacitance Cl when connected in
C
series and an equivalent capacitance C2 when connected in parallel. The ratio 1 is
C2
1 1 1 1
(a) (b) (c) (d)
4 16 8 12
18. The charge deposited on 4F capacitor in the circuit is
[KCET 2009]
–6
(a) 6 × 10 C
(b) 12 × 10–6C
(c) 24 × 10–6C
(d) 36 × 10–6C

19. The effective capacitance between A and B is [OJEE 2009]

(a) 9F (b) 3F
(c) 6F (d) lF

20. How many 6 F, 200 V condensers are needed to make a condenser of 18 F, 600 V?
(a) 9 (b) 18 [KCET 2008]
(c) 3 (d) 27
21. The total energy stored in the condenser system shown in the figure
will be [KCET 2008]
(a) 2 J
(b) 4 J
(c) 8 J
(d) 16 J
22. Six capacitors each of capacitance of 2 F are connected as
shown in the figure. The effective capacitance between A and B
is [Kerala CEE 2008]
(a) 12 F (b) 8/3 F
(c) 3 F (d) 6 F

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 72

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
23. Four capacitors are connected in a circuit as shown in the
following figure. Calculate the effective capacitance between
the points A and B [J&K CET 2008]
4 24
(a)  F (b) F
3 5
(c) 9  F (d) 5  F

24. A parallel plate capacitor is made by stacking n equally spaced plates connected
alternatively. If the capacitance between any two adjacent plates is C, then the resultant
capacitance is [AIIMS 2007]
(a) (n – 1)C (b) (n + 1)C (c) C (d) nC
25. In the figure, the equivalent capacitance between
A and B is [AMU 2007]
(a) 3.75 F (b) 5.25 F
(c) 6.5 F (d) 10.5 F

26. Three capacitors each of capacity 4F are to be connected in such a way that the effective
capacitance is 6F . This can be done by [BHU 2007]
(a) connecting two in series and one in parallel
(b) connecting two in parallel and one in series
(c) connecting all of them in series (d) connecting all of them in parallel
27. A parallel plate capacitor with air as the dielectric has
capacitance C. A slab of dielectric constant K and having
the same thickness as the separation between the plates
is introduced so as to fill one-fourth of the capacitor as
shown in the figure. The new capacitance will be
C C C KC
(a)  K  3  (b)  K  2  (c)  K  1 (d)
4 4 4 4
28. The equivalent capacity between the points X and Y
in the circuit with C = 1 F is
[EAMCET 2007]
(a) 2 F (b) 3 F
(c) l F (d) 0.5 F
29. A parallel plate condenser with oil (dielectric constant 2) between the plates has capacitance
C. If oil is removed, the capacitance of capacitor becomes [MHT CET 2007]
C C
(a) 2C (b) 2C (c) (d)
2 2

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 73

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
30. A capacitor having capacitance 1 F with air, is filled with
two dielectric as shown. How many times capacitance will
increase? (Given that K1  8, K 2  4 ) [DUMET 2006]
(a) 12 (b) 6
(c) 8/3 (d) 3

31. A gang capacitor is formed by interlocking a number of plates as

shown in figure. The distance between the consecutive plates is
0.885 cm and the overlapping area of the plates is 5 cm2. The
capacity of the unit is [KCET 2006]
(a) 1.06 F (b) 4 F
(c) 6.36 F (d) 12.72 F
32. The combined capacitance of the arrangement
shown in figure given below, in F is
30 8
(a) (b)
11 11
(c) 4 (d) 1

33. What is equivalent capacitance of the network?

Each capacitor has 1 F capacitance
1
(a)  F (b) 2 F
3
3
(c) F (d) 3 F
2
34. In the given network capacitance C 2 =10 F, C 1 =5 F
and C3 = 4 F. The resultant capacitance between P and
Q will be [RPMT 2005]
(a) 4.2 F (b) 1.2 F
(c) 3.2 F (d) 3 F
35. The equivalent capacitance between the points A and B
in the following circuit is [BCECE 2005]
(a) 1 F (b) 2 F
(c) 4 F (d) 8 F

Question Asked in Year 2015

36. A parallel plate air capacitor of capacitance C is connected to a cell of e.m.f. V and then
disconnected from it. A dielectric slab of dielectric constant K, which can just fill the air gap of
the capacitor, is now inserted in it. Which of the following is incorrect? [AIPMT 2015]
(a) The energy stored in the capacitor decreases K times

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 74

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
1 1 
(b) The change in energy stored is CV 2   1
2  K 
(c) The charge on the capacitor is not conserved
(d) The potential difference between the plates decreases K times

37. A parallel plate air capacitor has capacity ‘C’ distance of separation between plates is ‘d’ and
potential difference ‘V’ is applied between the plates. Force of attraction between the plates of
the parallel plate air capacitor is: [AIPMT 2015]
C2 V 2 C2 V 2 CV 2 CV 2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2d 2 2d 2d d

38. If potential (in volts) in a region is expressed as V(x, y, z) = 6xy – y + 2yz, the electric field (in
N/C) at point (1, 1, 0) is: [AIPMT 2015]
 
(a)  6iˆ  9ˆj  kˆ  
(b)  3iˆ  5ˆj  3kˆ 
(c)  6iˆ  5jˆ  2kˆ   
(d)  2iˆ  3jˆ  kˆ

Question Asked in Year 2016 to 2022

39.

A capacitor of 2 F is charged as shown in the diagram. When the switch S is turned to

position 2, the percentage of its stored energy dissipated is : [AIPMT 2016]
(a) 20% (b) 75% (c) 80% (d) 0%

40. A parallel-plate capacitor of area A, plate separation d and capacitance C is filled with four
dielectric material having dielectric constants k1 , k2 , k3 and k4 as shown in the figure below. If
a sing dielectric material is to be used to have the same capacitance C in this capacitor, then
its dielectric constant k is given by [NEET 2016]

2
(a) k  k1  k2  k3  3k4 (b) k   k1  k2  k3   2k4
3
2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
(c)   (d)    
k k1  k2  k3 k 4 k k1 k2 k3 2k4

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 75

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
41. A capacitor is charged by a battery. The battery is removed and another identical uncharged
capacitor is connected in parallel. The total electrostatic energy of resulting system
[NEET 2017]
(a) increases by a factor of 4 (b) decreases by a factor of 2
(c) remains the same (d) increases by a factor of 2

42. Suppose the charge of a proton and an electron differ slightly. One of them is –e, the other is
 e  e  . If the net of electrostatic force and gravitational force between two hydrogen atoms
placed at a distance d (much greater than atomic size) apart is zero, then e is of the order of
[Given mass of hydrogen m h  1.67  10 27 kg ] [NEET 2017]
(a) 1020 C (b) 1023 C (c) 1037 C (d) 1047 C

43. The electrostatic force between the metal plates of an isolated parallel plate capacitor C having
a charge Q and area A, is [NEET 2018]
(a) Proportional to the square root of the distance between the plates
(b) inversely proportional to the distance between the plates
(c) linearly proportional to the distance between the plates
(d) independent to the distance between the plates

44. A hollow metal sphere of radius R is uniformly charged. The electric field due to the sphere at
a distance r from the centre: [NEET 2019]
(a) increases as r increases for r < R and for r > R
(b) zero as r increases for r < R, decreases as r increases for r > R
(c) zero as r increases for r < R, increases as r increases for r > R
(d) decreases as r increases for r < R and for r > R.

45. Two parallel infinite line charges with linear charge densities + C/m and – C/m are placed at
a distance of 2R in free space. What is the electric field mid-way between the two line
charges? [NEET 2019]
2  
(a) zero (b) N/C (c) N/C (d) N/C
0 R 0 R 20 R

46. Two point charges A and B, having charges +Q and –Q respectively, are placed at certain
distance apart and force acting between them is F. If 25% charge of A is transferred to B, then
force between the charges becomes: [NEET 2019]
9F 16F 4F
(a) F (b) (c) (d)
16 9 3

47. The electric field at a point on the equatorial plane at a distance r from the centre of a dipole

having dipole moment P is given by (r >> separation of two charges forming the dipole,
0  permittivity of free space) [NEET 2020 oct]
P 2P P P
(a) E  (b) E  (c) E  (d) E 
40 r 3 40 r 3 40 r 2 40 r 3

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 76

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
48. The acceleration of an electron due to the mutual attraction between the electron and proton
o
when they are 1.6 A apart is,  m  9  1031 kg,e  1.6  1019 C  [NEET 2020 oct]
 1 
 Take,  9  109 Nm 2 / C 2 
 40 
(a) 1024 m/s2 (b) 1023 m/s2 (c) 1022 m/s2 (d) 1025 m/s2

49. The variation of electrostatic potential with radial distance r from the centre of a positively
charged metallic thin shell of radius R is given by the graph [NEET 2020 oct]

(a) (b)

(c) (d)

50. A parallel plate capacitor having cross-sectional area A and separation d has air in between the
plates. Now, an insulting slab of same area but thickness d/2 is inserted between the plates as
shown in figure having dielectric constant K(= 4). The ratio of new capacitance to its original
capacitance will be [NEET 2020 oct]

(a) 2 : 1 (b) 8 : 5 (c) 6 : 5 (d) 4 : 1

51. The equivalent capacitance of the combination shown in the figure is : [NEET 2021]

(a) 3C (b) 2C (c) C/2 (d) 3C/2

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 77

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
52. Polar molecules are the molecules : [NEET 2021]
(a) having zero dipole moment.
(b) acquire a dipole moment only in the presence of electric field due to displacement of
charges.
(c) acquire a dipole moment only when magnetic field I absent.
(d) having a permanent electric dipole moment.

53. A dipole is placed in an electric field as shown. In which direction will it move? [NEET 2021]

(a) Towards the left as its potential energy will increase.

(b) Towards the right its potential energy will decrease.
(c) Towards the left as its potential energy will decrease.
(d) Towards the right as its potential energy will increase.

54. A parallel plate capacitor has a uniform electric field ' E ' in the space between the plates. If the
distance between the plates is ‘d’ and the area of each plate is ‘A’, the energy stored in the
capacitor is : ( 0  permittivity of free space) [NEET 2021]
1 1 E 2 Ad
(a) 0 E 2 (b) 0 EAd (c)  0 E 2 Ad (d)
2 2 0

55. Two charged spherical conductors of radius R1 and R2 are connected by a wire. Then the ratio
of surface charge densities of the spheres  1  2  is : [NEET 2021]

R1 R2  R1  R 12
(a) (b) (c)   (d)
R2 R1  R2  R 22

56. Twenty seven drops of same size are charged at 220 V each. They combine to from a bigger
drop. Calculate the potential of the bigger drop [NEET 2021]
(a) 660 V (b) 1320 V (c) 1520 V (d) 1980 V

57. The angle between the electic lines of force and the equipotential surface is: [NEET 2022]
  
(a) 45 (b) 90 (c) 180 (d) 0

58. Two hollow conducting sphers of radii R 1 and R 2  R 1  R 2  have equal charges. The
potential would be: [NEET 2022]
(a) more on smaller sphere

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 78

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
(b) equal on both the spheres
(c) dependent on the material property of the sphere
(d) more on bigger sphere

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 79

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII

ANSWER KEY
LEVEL – 1
Electric Potential & Energy
1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (b) 5. (d)
6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (c) 10. (d)
11. (b) 12. (d) 13. (a) 14. (c) 15. (c)
16. (c) 17. (b) 18. (d) 19. (c) 20. (a)
21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (a) 24. (c) 25. (c)
26. (d) 27. (a) 28. (b) 29. (a) 30. (c)

Capacitance
31. (c) 32. (c) 33. (a) 34. (a) 35. (d)
36. (a,d) 37. (c) 38. (b) 39. (b) 40. (c)
41. (c) 42. (a) 43. (b) 44. (d) 45. (c)
46. (d) 47. (a) 48. (d) 49. (b) 50. (b)
51. (b) 52. (b) 53. (a) 54. (b) 55. (d)
56. (c) 57. (b) 58. (c) 59. (b) 60. (a)

Grouping of Capacitor
61. (d) 62. (a) 63. (c) 64. (a) 65. (a)
66. (c) 67. (c) 68. (d) 69. (b) 70. (d)
71. (d) 72. (a) 73. (b) 74. (c) 75. (c)
76. (b) 77. (b) 78. (b) 79. (c) 80. (c)
81. (c) 82. (c) 83. (a) 84. (c) 85. (d)
86. (a) 87. (a) 88. (c) 89. (b) 90. (c)

LEVEL – 2
Electric Potential & Energy
1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (b) 5. (c)
6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (a) 9. (b) 10. (d)
11. (b) 12. (c) 13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (a)
16. (c) 17. (c) 18. (d) 19. (d) 20. (a)
21. (b) 22. (a) 23. (c) 24. (a) 25. (a)
26. (c) 27. (b) 28. (a) 29. (c) 30. (d)
31. (c) 32. (c) 33. (d) 34. (b) 35. (a)

Capacitance
36. (c) 37. (b) 38. (b) 39. (a) 40. (d)
41. (d) 42. (c) 43. (b) 44. (c) 45. (a)
46. (b) 47. (a) 48. (b) 49. (a) 50. (c)
51. (d) 52. (c) 53. (b) 54. (c) 55. (a)
56. (d) 57. (b) 58. (d) 59. (d) 60. (b)
61. (c) 62. (d) 63. (a) 64. (c) 65. (b)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 80

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
66. (c) 67. (a) 68. (d) 69. (b) 70. (c)
71. (d) 72. (a)

Grouping of Capacitor

73. (c) 74. (a) 75. (d) 76. (b) 77. (b)
78. (c) 79. (d) 80. (b) 81. (d) 82. (c)
83. (a) 84. (d) 85. (d) 86. (d) 87. (a)
88. (a) 89. (b) 90. (b) 91. (b) 92. (a)
93. (a) 94. (d) 95. (c)

ASSERTION & REASON

1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (d) 4. (c) 5. (a)
6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (c) 9. (b) 10. (a)
11. (a) 12. (d) 13. (d) 14. (d) 15. (b)
16. (d) 17. (a) 18. (c) 19. (b) 20. (b)

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS

Electric Potential & Energy

1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (a) 5. (a)
6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (a) 10. (c)
11. (a) 12. (a) 13. (d) 14. (c) 15. (a)
16. (d) 17. (d) 18. (c) 19. (c) 20. (d)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (a) 25. (c)
26. (d) 27. (b) 28. (c) 29. (a) 30. (c)
31. (b) 32. (b) 33. (d) 34. (d) 35. (b)
36. (b) 37. (c) 38. (b) 39. (a) 40. (a)
41. (d) 42. (d)

Capacitance
1. (c) 2. (d) 3. (e) 4. (a) 5. (d)
6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (c) 9. (c) 10. (d)
11. (c) 12. (c) 13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (c)
16. (d) 17. (b) 18. (b) 19. (c) 20. (b)
21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (a) 24. (b) 25. (c)
26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (c) 29. (c) 30. (c)
31. (a) 32. (b) 33. (c) 34. (a) 35. (c)
36. (b) 37. (e) 38. (d) 39. (b) 40. (b)
41. (a) 42. (d) 43. (c) 44. (a) 45. (d)
46. (c) 47. (c) 48. (d) 49. (d) 50. (b)
51. (d) 52. (c) 53. (c) 54. (c) 55. (c)
56. (a) 57. (d) 58. (b) 59. (c) 60. (d)
61. (d) 62. (b) 63. (b) 64. (c) 65. (d)
66. (b) 67. (a) 68. (b) 69. (c) 70. (a)
71. (b) 72. (d) 73. (b) 74. (a) 75. (a)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 81

 Electric Potential and Capacitance Phy. XII
76. (d) 77. (b) 78. (c) 79. (a) 80. (d)
81. (c) 82. (c) 83. (c) 84. (b) 85. (b)
86. (a) 87. (b) 88. (b) 89. (b) 90. (d)
91. (a) 92. (b) 93. (a) 94. (a) 95. (d)
96. (d) 97. (b) 98. (a) 99. (b) 100 (d)
101 (a) 102 (d) 103 (a)

Grouping of Capacitor
1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (d) 5. (d)
6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (b) 9. (d) 10. (c)
11. (a) 12. (a) 13. (d) 14. (a) 15. (c)
16. (c) 17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (d)
21. (c) 22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (a) 25. (a)
26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (a) 29. (d) 30. (b)
31. (b) 32. (c) 33. (d) 34. (c) 35. (a)
36. (c) 37. (c) 38. (c) 39. (c) 40. (c)
41. (b) 42. (c) 43. (d) 44. (b) 45. (c)
46. (b) 47. (d) 48. (c) 49. (b) 50. (b)
51. (b) 52. (d) 53. (b) 54. (c) 55. (b)
56. (d) 57. (b) 58. (a)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 82

 ELECTRIC CHARGE AND FIELD
INDEX
Topic Name Page No.
 Chapter at a Glance 83-110
 Solved Example 111-118
 Exercise
 Level-I 119-123
 Level-II 123-126
 Previous Year’s Questions 127-141
 Answer key 142-143

This chapter includes:

 Electric charge
 Coulomb’s law
 Electrostatic field
 Electrostatic lines of force
 Electric field due to some common charge distributions
 Electric dipole & dipole moment
 Motion of a charged particle in uniform electric field
 Electric flux
 Gauss’s law and it’s application
 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII

ELECTRIC CHARGE AND FIELD

INTRODUCTION
The branch of physics which deals with electric effect of static charge is called electrostatics.

ELECTRIC CHARGE AND PROPERTIES:

Charge is a scalar quantity which is categorised into two types.
(a) Positive charge (anciently called Vitreous)
(b) Negative charge (anciently called Resinous)
A body having no charge, is said to be neutral in nature i.e. on a neutral body the sum of positive charges is equal
to the sum of negative charges.
The positive charge means deficiency of electrons, whereas the negative charge on a body implies excess of
electrons.
The S.I. unit of charge is coulomb (C) :

PROPERTIES:
The S.I. unit of charge is Coulomb (C) :
(a) Like charges repel each other and unlike charges attract each other.
(b) Charge Conservation
The algebraic sum of all the charges in an isolated system is a constant. In crude language we can say that
charge can neither be created nor be destroyed, however it can simply be transferred from one body to the
other.
(c) Relativistic Invariance
Charge on a body is relativistically invariant. i.e. charge on the body at rest equals the charge on the
body at relativistic speeds. However charge density is not relativistically invariant.
Mathematically
(q)at rest = (q)in motion
or (q)at rest = (q)at relativistic speeds
(d) Charge Quantisation
Charge on a body q must always exist as an integral multiple of some fundamental unit of charge
(called electronic charge) e, where e = 1.6 × 10–19 C.
Mathematically, q = ± ne, n = 1, 2, 3, .............
From here we conclude that a neutral body can have +1C of charge when it falls deficient of
6.25 × 1018 electrons.

METHODS OF CHARGING
A body can be charged by following methods
1. By friction: By rubbing two bodies together, both positive and negative charges in equal amounts appear
simultaneously due to transfer of electrons from one body to the other.
(i) When a glass rod is rubbed with silk, the rod becomes positively charged while the silk becomes negatively
charged. The decrease in the mass of glass rod is equal to the total mass of electrons lost by it.
(ii) Ebonite on rubbing with wool becomes negatively charged making the wool positively charged.
(iii) Clouds also get charged by friction.
(iv) A comb moving through dry hair gets electrically charged. It starts attracting small bits of paper.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 83

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
(v) During landing or take-off, the tyres of an aircraft get electrified therefore special material is used to manufacture
them.
2. Charging by conduction: Take two conductors, one charged and other uncharged. Bring the conductors in
contact with each other. The charge (whether –ve or +ve) under its own repulsion will spread over both the
conductors. Thus the conductors will be charged with the same sign. This is called as charging by conduction
(through contact).
3. By electrostatic induction: If a charged body is brought near an uncharged body, one side of neutral body
(closer to charged body) becomes oppositely charged while the other side becomes similarly charged as shown
in the figure.
i) Bring two metal spheres, A and B, supported on insulating stands, in contact
as shown in Fig. (a).
ii) Bring a positively charged rod near one of the spheres; say A, taking care
that it does not touch the sphere. The free electrons in the spheres are
attracted towards the rod. This leaves an excess of positive charge on the
rear surface of sphere B. Both kinds of charges are bound in the metal
spheres and cannot escape. They, therefore, reside on the surfaces, as
shown in Fig. (b). The left surface of sphere A, has an excess of negative
charge and the right surface of sphere B, has an excess of positive charge.
However, not all of the electrons in the spheres have accumulated on the left
surface of A. As the negative charge starts building up at the left surface of
A, other electrons are repelled by these. In a short time, equilibrium is
reached under the action of force of attraction of the rod and the force of
repulsion due to the accumulated charges. Fig. (b) shows the equilibrium
situation. The process is called induction of charge and happens almost
instantly. The accumulated charges remain on the surface, as shown, till
the glass rod is held near the sphere. If the rod is removed, the charges are
not acted by any outside force and they redistribute to their original neutral
state.

iii) Separate the spheres by a small distance while the glass rod is still held near sphere A, as shown in Fig. (c).
The two spheres are found to be oppositely charged and attract each other.

iv) Remove the rod. The charges on spheres rearrange themselves as shown in Fig. (d). Now, separate the
spheres quite apart. The charges on them get uniformly distributed over them, as shown in Fig. (e). In this
process, the metal spheres will each be equal and oppositely charged. This is charging by induction. The
positively charged glass rod does not lose any of its charge, contrary to the process of charging by contact.

Illustration 1 : How can you charge a metal sphere positively without touching it?
Solution : Figure (a) shows an uncharged metallic sphere on an insulating metal stand. Bring a negatively charged
rod close to the metallic sphere, as shown in Fig.(b). As the rod is brought close to the sphere, the free
electrons in the sphere move away due to repulsion and start piling up at the farther end. The near end
becomes positively charged due to deficit of electrons. This process of charge distribution stops when
the net force on the free electrons inside the metal is zero. Connect the sphere to the ground by a
conducting wire. The electrons will flow to the ground while the positive charges at the near end will
remain held there due to the attractive force of the negative charges on the rod, as shown in Fig. (c).
Disconnect the sphere from the ground. The positive charge continues to be held at the near end [Fig.
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 84
 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
(d)]. Remove the electrified rod. The positive charge will spread uniformly over the sphere as shown in
Fig. (e).

In this experiment, the metal sphere gets charged by the process of induction and the rod does not lose any
of its charge. Similar steps are involved in charging a metal sphere negatively by induction, by bringing a
positively charged rod near it. In this case the electrons will flow from the ground to the sphere when the
sphere is connected to the ground with a wire.

THE GOLD LEAF ELECTROSCOPE

It is a simple apparatus by which the presence of
electric charge on a body is detected (see figure). When
metal knob is touched with a charged body, some
charge is transferred to the gold leaves, which then
diverges due to repulsion. The separation gives a rough
idea of the amount of charge on the body. When a
charged body is brought near a charged electroscope,
the leaves will further diverge, if the charge on body is
similar to that on electroscope and will usually converge
if opposite. If the induction effect is strong enough
leaves after converging may again diverge.

Electroscopes: (a) The gold leaf electroscope,

(b) Schematics of a simple electroscope.

Illustration 2 : Charge conservation is always valid. Is it also true for mass ?

Solution : No, mass conservation is not valid. Mass can be converted into energy.

Illustration 3 : What are the differences between charging by induction and charging by conduction ?

Solution : Major differences between two methods of charging are as follows :

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 85

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
(i) In induction, two bodies are close to each other but do not touch each other while in conduction
they touch each other.
(ii) In induction, total charge of body remains unchanged while in conduction it changes.
(iii) In induction, induced charge is always opposite in nature to that of source charge while in
conduction charge on two bodies is of same nature.

Illustration 4 : A glass rod rubbed with silk is used to charge a gold leaf electroscope and the leaves are
observed to diverge. The electroscope thus charged is exposed to X-rays for a short period.
Then
(a) The divergence of leaves will not be affect
(b) The leaves will diverge further
(c) The leaves will collapse
(d) The leaves will melt
Solution : (b)
Charge on glass rod is positive, so charge on gold leaves will also be positive. Due to X-rays, more
electrons from leaves will be emitted, so leaves becomes more positive and diverge further.
COULOMB’S LAW :
The magnitude of the force (F) of attraction or repulsion between two point charges q1 and q2 placed in vacuum at
separation r is
(a) directly proportional to the product of the magnitude of the two charges.
F  q1q2 .......(1)
(b) inversely proportional to the square of the distance of separation between them.

1
F (called Inverse Square Law) .......(2)
r2
Combining (1) and (2), we get

q1q2 1 q1q2
F  F ..........(3)
r2 40 r 2

1 9 2 2
where 4  9  10 Nm C
0

and  0  8.85  10 12 C2N1m2 is the absolute permittivity of free space or vacuum.
If the charges are placed in a medium, then

1 q1q2
Fmed  ..........(4)
4  r 2
where  (read as Epsilon) is the permittivity of the medium given by,    0  r

where  r  Relative permittivity of the medium, called the dielectric constant (K). So

 1 q1q2 Fvacuum/air
r 
0
K  Fmed  4 K r 2  Fmed 
0 K
1  k  
PROBLEMS SOLVING TECHNIQUE :
(a) While calculating the force between the two charges from Coulomb’s Law, never take into account, the sign of the
two charges. The sign just indicates the nature of the force.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 86

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
  
(b) F12 is the force on charge 1 due to 2. F12 is the force on charge 2 due to 1. Fij is the force on charge i due to j.
(c) When we are to calculate the force on charge 1 due to charge 2, then we assume charge 2 to be fixed and vice
versa, unless and otherwise states.

| F12 | m1a1

| F21 | m2a 2
i.e., m 1a1 = m 2a2 (by Newton’s Third Law)
where m 1 and m 2 are the masses of charges q1 and q2 respectively.
(d) If we are to calculate the force on charge q0, due to assembly of charges q1, q2, ........ qn, then we have
    
F0  F01  F02  F03  .......  F0n

where F01 is calculated as if only q 0 and q 1 are present and all others are absent and so on for other
combinations. This principle is called the Principle of Superposition.
(e) When two identical bodies having charges q1 and q2 respectively are brought in contact and separated, then the
q1  q2
charge on each body is
2
Illustration 5 : If the distance between two equal point charges is doubled and their individual charges are also
doubled, what would happen to the force between them?
1 q q 1 ( 2q) ( 2 q)
Solution : F= ....(1) ; Again, F' =
4 0 r 2 4 0 ( 2r ) 2

1 4q2 1 q2
or F' = = =F
4 0 4r 2 4 0 r 2
So, the force will remain the same.
Illustration 6 : A particle of mass m carrying charge q 1 is revolving around a fixed charge –q 2 in a circular path
of radius r. Calculate the period of revolution and its speed also.

1 q1q 2 2
42mr
Solution : = mr = '
4 0 r 2 T2

( 4 0 )r 2 ( 4 2mr ) 0mr

T2 = or T = 4r q1q2
q1q2

q1q 2 mv 2 q1q2
and also we can say that 2 =  V= 4 0mr
4  0 r r

Illustration 7 : A total charge Q is broken in two parts Q1 and Q2 and they are placed at a distance R
from each other. The maximum force of repulsion between them will occur, when

Q Q Q 2Q
(a) Q2  ,Q1  Q  (b) Q2  ,Q1  Q 
R R 4 R

Q 3Q Q Q
(c) Q2  ,Q1  (d) Q1  , Q2 
4 4 2 2

Solution : (d)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 87

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII

kQ1Q 2
Q1 + Q2 = Q …. (i) and F  … (ii)
r2

kQ1(Q  Q1 )
From (i) and (ii) F 
r2

dF Q
Fro F to be maximum dQ  0  Q1  Q2 
2
1

Illustration 8 : Two small spherical balls each carrying a charge Q = 10C (10 micro-coulomb) are
suspended by two insulating threads of equal lengths 1m each, from a point fixed in the
ceiling. If is found that in equilibrium threads are separated by an angle 60° between them,
1 9 2
as shown in the figure. What is the tension in the threads (Given: (4 )  9  10 Nm / C )
0

(a) 18N (b) 1.8 N

(c) 0.18 N (d) None of the above

Solution : (b)
In the following figure, in equilibrium Fe = T sin 30°, r = 1 m

Q2 1
  9  109 2
 T
r 2

(10  10 6 )2 1
 9  109 2
 T  T = 1.8N
1 2
Illustration 9: Two equally charged identical metal sphere A and B repel each other with a force 2 × 10–5N .
Another identical uncharged sphere C is touched to B and then placed at the mid point between A and
B. What is the net electric force on C?
Solution : Let initially the charge on each sphere be q and separation between their centres be r; then
according to given problem.

1 q q
F= = 2 × 10–5 N
4 0 r 2

When sphere C touches B, the charge of B, q will distribute equally on B and C as sphere are identical
conductors, i.e., now charges on spheres;
q B = q C = (q/2)
So sphere C will experience a force

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 88

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII

1 q( q / 2)
FCA = 4 2 = 2F along AB due to charge on A
0 (r / 2)

1 ( q / 2)(q / 2)
and, FCB = 4 = F along BA due to charge on B
0 (r / 2)2
So the net force FC on C due to charges on A and B,
FC = FCA – FCB = 2F – F = 2 × 10–5 N along AB .

Illustration 10 : Five point charges, each of value q are placed on five vertices of a regular hexagon of side L.
What is the magnitude of the force on a point charge of value – q coulomb placed at the centre of the
hexagon?
Solution : If there had been a sixth charge +q at the remaining vertex of hexagon force due to all the six
charges on –q at O would be zero (as the forces due to individual charges will balance each other), i.e.,
FR  0
 
Now if f is the force due to sixth charge and F due
to remaining five charges.
   
F + f =0 i.e. F = –f

1 q q 1 q2
or, F=f= = Ans.
4 0 L2 4 0 L2

INCHAPTER EXERCISE # 1
1. Answer the following questions.

a) Two identical metallic spheres of exactly equal masses are taken. One is given positive charge of q
coulombs and an equal negative charge to second one. Are their masses after charging equal?

b) An electrically neutral object can be given a net charge by several means. Does this violate the
conservation of charge ?

c) Why is it relatively safer to remain in your car during a thunderstorm ?

d) Vehicles carrying inflammable materials usually have metallic ropes touching the ground during motion.
Why ?

e) A comb runs through one’s dry hair and attracts small bits of paper. Why ? What happens if the hair
is wet or it is a rainy day ?

f) What kind of charges are produced on each when :(i) a glass rod is rubbed with silk and (ii) an
ebonite rod is rubbed with wool ?

g) Can two like charged ball be attracted to each other ? If yes, why ?

h) If only one charged body is available, can it be used to obtain a charge exceeding many times in
absolute magnitude that which it itself has ?

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 89

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
i) A charge can be transferred completely from one conductor to another conductor. Explain how?

j) A person claims that he can hold two charged objects , each weighing 10 kg and each carrying
positive charge of 1 Coulomb, at a distance of 1 m from each other. Do you agree with his claim?

2. State the following statements as TRUE/FALSE

a) A point charge q1 exerts a force F on q2. Another charge q3 is now kept near q2 . The resultant force
on q2 due to q1 remains unchanged.

b) The order of ratio of electrostatics and gravitational force acting between two electrons is
approximately 1043.

c) If a body is charged by rubbing it, its weight may increase slightly or may decrease slightly.

d) The dielectric constant of a material can have any value from zero to infinity.

e) Charge cannot exist without matter.

f) Charge of a body depends on its velocity.

g) Coulomb force is a central force.

3. Two spheres A and B , having identical size and charge, are at a certain distance such that force of
repulsion between them has magnitude F. A third sphere C of same size but uncharged is brought in
contact with sphere A, then with sphere B, and finally removed far away from both A and B. What will
be the force of repulsion between A and B now?

ELECTROSTATIC FIELD ( E ):
The region of space around a source charge (q) in which it can exert a force on a test charge (q0).
Mathematically, strength of electric field is the force experience per unit test charge q0 placed in the electrostatic
influence of source charge q.

 F
E
q0
Electric field strength is a vector quantity directed away from a positive charge and towards the negative charge. SI unit
of electric field is newton/coulomb (NC–1) or volt/metre (Vm –1).
The dimensional formula for E is MLT–3A–1.

 1 qq0  F q
Since F  4  r 2 rˆ  E  rˆ
2 is the electric field due to a source point charge q at a distance r
0 q 0 4  0r

from it.

PROBLEMS SOLVING TECHNIQUE :

(a) For calculating the electric field due to a charge at a point P at distance r we proceed as follows.
Step I : Place a charge of +1C at point P.
Step II : Calculate the force between q and +1C.
Step III : This force is the value of E due to q at the point P.
Step IV : The direction of force experienced by a charge of +1 C is the direction of E due
to q at the point P.
(b) If we are to find the electrostatic field due to assembly of charge q1, q2, .........., qn at a point P, then we apply
Superposition Principle and then
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 90
 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
   
Ep  E1  E2  ..........  En

  
where we find E1  E2 ,..........En at point P by the technique mentioned above.

(c) If we are to find the electric field at a point P due to a uniform charge distribution, then we calculate the field
due to an infinitesimal element of the distribution at the point P and then integrate it within appropriate limits.

1 dq
E   dE 
4 0  r 2

1 d
For charge distributed on a wire with linear charge density  , E  
40 r 2

1 dA
For charge distributed on a surface with surface charge density  , E  
40 r 2

1 dV
For charge distributed on a volume with volume charge density  . E  4  r 2
0

If the charge distributions are uniform, then charge densities can be taken out of the integral to get desired results.

Illustration 11 :
Calculate the electric field intensity which would be just sufficient to balance the weight of a particle of
charge –10 c and mass 10 mg.

Solution : As force on a charge q in an electric field E is
 
F q = qE
So according to given problem

 
| Fq |  | W | i.e., |q|E = mg

mg
i.e., E = | q | = 10 N/C., in downward direction.

Illustration 12 : Electrostatic force experienced by –3C charge placed

at point P due to a point charge system S as shown in
figure is

F  21 î  9 ĵ N.

(i) Find out electric field intensity at point P due to S.

(ii) If now 2C charge is placed and –3 C is removed at point P then force expereniced by it will
be.
 
Solution : (i) F  qE
 
21 î  9 ĵ  3C(E)  E = – 7 î – 3 ĵ
(ii) Since the source charges are not disturbed the electric field intensity at 'P' will remain same.
 
F 2C = +2( E  = 2(–7 î – 3 ĵ ) = –14 î – 6 ĵ N
Illustration 13 : Find out electric field intensity at point A (0, 1m, 2m) due to a point charge –20C situated at
point B( 2 m, 0, 1m).

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 91

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
KQ  KQ
Solution : E=  3 r =  2 r̂
|r| |r|

r = P.V. of A – P.V. of B (P.V. = Position vector) = (- 2 î + ĵ + k̂ )

|r | = ( 2 )2  (1)2  (1)2 = 2

9  10 9  ( 20  10 6 )
E= (– 2 î + ĵ + k̂ ) = – 22.5 × 103 (– 2 î + ĵ + k̂ ) N/C.
8

NEUTRAL POINT
A neutral point is a point where resultant electrical field is zero.
(1) Neutral point Due to a system of two like point charges: For this case neutral point is obtained at an internal point
along the line joining two like charges. If N is the neutral point at a distance x1 from Q1 and at a distance x2 ( = x
– x1) from Q2 then

At N | E.F. due to Q1| = |E.F due to Q2|

2
1 Q1 1 Q Q1  x1 
i.e., .  . 2   
40 x12 4 0 x 22 Q2  x 2 

x x
Short Trick: x1  Q / Q  1 and x 2  Q / Q  1
2 1 1 2

(2) Neutral point due to a system of two unlike point charge: For this condition neutral point lies at an external
point along the line joining two unlike charges. Suppose two unlike charge Q1 and Q2 are separated by a
distance x from each other.

Here neutral point lies outside the line joining two unlike charges and also it lies nearer to charge which is
smaller in magnitude.
If |Q1|  |Q2| then neutral point will be obtained on the side of Q1, suppose it is at a distance l from Q1
2
kQ1 kQ2 Q   
Hence at neutral point 2   1  
 (x   )2 Q2  x   

x
So  
( Q2 / Q1  1

Illustration 14 :
Two equal positive point charges 'Q' are placed at points A(a, 0) and B(–a, 0). Another test charge q 0 is
also placed at O(0, 0). Show that the equilibrium at 'O' is
(i) stable for displacement along X-axis.
(ii) unstable for displacement along Y-axis.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 92

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
    KQq0
Solution : (i)Initially FAO + FBO = 0  | FAO | = | FBO | =
a2
When charge is slightly shifted towards + x axis by a
small distance x, then.

 
| FAO | < | FBO |
Therefore the particle will move towards origin
(its original position) hence the equilibrium is stable.

(ii) When charge is shifted along y axis

After resolving components net force will be along y axis so the particle will not return to its original
position so it is unstable equilibrium. Finally the charge will move to infinity.
Illustration 15 :
Two point charges of charge q 1 and q 2 (both of same sign) and each of mass m are placed such that
gravitation attraction between them balances the electrostatic repulsion. Are they in stable equilibrium?
If not then what is the nature of equilibrium?
Solution :
K q1 q 2 Gm 2
In given example : =
r2 r2
We can see that irrespective of distance between them charges will remain in equilibrium. If now distance
is increased or decreased then there is no effect in their equilibrium. Therefore it is a neutral equilibrium.

ELECTROSTATIC LINES OF FORCE : PROPERTIES

A line of force is an imaginary path straight or curved such that the tangent to it at any point gives the direction of
electrostatic field at that point. The lines of force are drawn such that the number of lines per unit area of cross-section,

(area held normally to the field lines) is proportional to magnitude of E .

PROPERTIES OF FIELD LINES

(a) Field lines always come out of positive charge and enter the negative charge.
(b) Field lines never cross each other
(c) Field lines never form closed loops.
(d) Field lines are always directed from higher potential to lower potential.
(e) Field lines never exist inside a conductor. +2q + – –q

(f) If N1 is the number of field lines coming out of a charge q1 and

N2 is the number of field lines entering q2, then
|q1| N 1

|q 2| N 2
(g) If N 1 is the number of field lines coming out of a charge q 1 and N 2 is the number of field lines coming
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 93
 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
q1 N 1
out of charge q2, then q  N . This relation also exists if field lines are entering both the charges.
2 2
(h) Tangent to field line at a point gives the direction of field at that point.
(i) Field lines exhibit longitudinal (length wise) contraction, thus indicating that unlike charges attract each other.
(See Figure 1)
(j) Field lines exhibit lateral (sideways) expansion, thus indicating that like charges repel each other. (See Figure 2)

+2q + – –q

+ – + +

Figure 1 : The electric field lines for two equal and Figure 2 : The electric field lines for two equal
opposite point charges are of those an electric dipole. positive point charge
Note that the number of lines that leave the positive charge
equals the number that terminate at the negative
charge
(k) Field lines always enter or leave a conducting surface at right angles.
Illustration 16 :
If number of electric lines of force from charge q are 10 then find out number of electric lines of force from
2q charge.
Solution :
No. of ELOF  charge
10  q
 20  2q
So number of ELOF will be 20.

Illustration 17 : A charge + Q is fixed at a distance of d in front of an infinite metal plate. Draw the lines of force
indicating the directions clearly.
Solution : There will be induced charge on two surfaces of conducting plate, so ELOF will start from +Q charge and
terminate at conductor and then will again start from other surface of conductor.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 94

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII

INCHAPTER EXERCISE # 2
1. State the following statements as TRUE/FALSE
a) Electric lines of force can form a closed loop.
b) Electric lines of force can pass through neutral point.
c) Relative magnitudes of the electric field in different regions can be determined from electric field line
by observing relative spacing of the field lines.
d) Electric lines of force can flow from low potential to high potential.
e) A small test charge free to move will always follow an electric line of force passing through its point
of release.
f) An electric line of force in the xy plane is given by the equation x2 +y2 = 1. A particle with unit
positive charge, initially at rest at the point x = 1, y = 0 in the xy plane will move along the circular
line of force.
2. Draw appropriate electric lines of force in the following situations.
+Q +Q
(a)

+Q
(b)

+Q +Q

(c) A point positive charge + Q placed in front of infinite conducting plane.

+Q
Infinite conducting plane
(d) A metallic sphere placed in a uniform electric field.
3. Two point charges Q and 4Q are fixed at a distance of 12 cm from each other. Sketch the lines of force
and locate the neutral point , if any.

4. Identify the possibility of the following field patterns by stating Yes or No.

(a) (b)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 95

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII

(c) (d)

ELECTRIC FIELD DUE TO SOME COMMON CHARGE DISTRIBUTIONS

1. Electric field at a distance r from a point charge q is


 E
r

q 
 E
 kq kq  Here unit vector r
E   2 rˆ   3 r, r̂  
|r | |r | |r|

2. Electric field at a point situated at a normal distance r from an infinitely long wire having linear charge density
 is

2k 
E 
r 2 0r

Infinitely Long Wire Semi Infinite Long Wire


 
 
 
r 2K
 E 
r   r k ˆ
 E  i
  r
k ˆ
E||   j
r

Finite Wire

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 96

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII


 1 k
 E  [sin 1  sin 2 ] ˆi
2 r

 k
  E||  [cos 1  cos 2 ] ˆj
r

3. In case of charged cylinder

i) For a cylindrical shell of uniform charge of linear charge density  and radius R, the electric field

E for r  R, and E = 0 for r  R.
20r

r
ii) For a solid cylinder of uniform charge density (), for r  R, E  2
0

4. In case of charged conducting sphere or a spherical shell let us have a charged conducting sphere/shell of
radius R and total charge Q, then

Q Q
i) For r  R, E = 0 ii) For r = R, E  4 R2 and iii) For r  R, E  4  r 2
0 0

5. In case of charged non-conduction (dielectric sphere let a charge Q is uniformly distributed over entire volume
of a non-conducting sphere of radius R. Then

1 Q 1 Q 1 Qr
i) For r  R, E  4 . r 2 ii) For r = R, E  4  . R 2 iii) For r  R, E  4  . R 3
0 0 0

6. For infinite thin plane sheet of charge

i) Let there be an infinitely large non-conducting thin sheet of uniform surface charge density . Then,

electric field intensity at a point near the sheet E  2 and it is independent of distance.
0

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 97

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
ii) For a conducting thick sheet, since charge lies on both its surfaces hence,

E
0
iii) If we have thin sheets A and B having surface charge densities 1 and 2 respectively, then as shown in
figure.

1 1 1
Ep  (E A  EB )   ( 1   2 ) ; EQ  E A  EB  (1  2 ) and ER  E A  EB  (1  2 )
20 20 2 0
Special cases

i) If 2 = 1 = , then | Ep |  | ER |   and EQ  0
0


ii) If 2 = – and 1 = +, then EP = EB = 0 and EQ = 
0

7. For uniformly charged circular ring let there be a charged circular ring of radius R and total charge Q, then
electric field E

i) at a point P on its axial line at a distance r

1 Qr
E .
4 0 (R2  r 2 )3/2
ii) at a point O at the centre of ring E = 0
1 Q
iii) at a point on axial line such that r   R, then E  4 . r 2
0

R Q
iv) is maximum at a point r   , then Emax  6 3 R 2
2 0

8. Electric field due to uniformly charge disc of radius r

  z 
E 1 
20  2 2
z R 
 If we let R   while keeping z finite, the second term in the parentheses
in equation approaches zero, and this equation reduces to

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 98

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII

E (inf inite sheet)
20

Illustration 18 :
Figure shows a uniformly charged sphere of radius R and total
charge Q. A point charge q is situated outside the sphere at a
distance r from centre of sphere. Find out the following :
(i) Force acting on the point charge q due to the sphere.
(ii) Force acting on the sphere due to the point charge.
Solution :
(i) Electric field at the position of point charge
 KQ  KqQ
E  2 r̂ so, F  2 r̂
r r
 KqQ
|F| 2
r
(ii) Since we know that every action has equal and opposite reaction so

 KqQ  KqQ
F sphere =  2 r̂  | F sphere| = 2 .
r
r
Illustration 19 :
Figure shows a uniformly charged sphere of total charge Q and
radius R. A point charge q is also situated at the centre of
the sphere. Find out the following :
(i) Force on charge q
(ii) Electric field intensity at A.
(iii) Electric field intensity at B.
Solution :
(i) Electric field at the centre of the uniformly charged hollow sphere = 0
So force on charge q = 0
(ii) Electric field at A
   Kq
E A = E Sphere  E q =0+ ; r = CA
r2
E due to sphere = 0 , because point lies inside the charged hollow sphere.
  
(iii) Electric field E B at point B = E Sphere  E q

KQ Kq K(Q  q)
= 2
.r̂  2
.r̂ .r̂ = ; r = CB
r r r2
Note : Here we can also assume that the total charge of sphere is concentrated at the centre, for calculation of
electric field at B.

ELECTRIC DIPOLE AND DIPOLE MOMENT

Two equal and opposite charges separated by a distance together constitute a dipole.

Dipole moment ( p ) is defined as the simple product of magnitude of either charge and the distance of
separation between the two charges.
 
p  q(2a)
Dipole moment always points from –q to +q. Its SI unit is coulombmetre (Cm).
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 99
 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII

Equitorial Line

+q O –q Axial Line

a a
Electric Field due to a Dipole at a Point Lying on The Axial Line (End on Position)
The electric field due to a dipole at point P at distance r from the centre of the dipole is
Eaxial = EB – EA
q q
 Eaxial  4  (r  a)2  4 (r  a)2 –q E
0 0 +q O B
P EA

A a a B (r– a)
1 4raq
 Eaxial  r
40 (r  a2 )2
2

(r+a)
Since, p = q(2a). So,
1 2pr
Eaxial 
40 (r  a2 )2
2

For r >> a
1 2p
Eaxial 
40 r 3

Electric Field Due to a Dipole at a Point Lying on The Equitorial Line

(Broad Side on Position)
The electric field due to the dipole at the point P at distance r from O is
q
Eequitorial = 2EA cos  where E A  4 (r 2  a2 )
0

(Because the components E A sin  and E A sin  cancel out)

q a  a 
 Eequitorial  2  cos   2 2

40 (r 2  a2 ) r 2  a 2  a  r 
EAsin  EA
1 p  frompositive to 
 E equitorial    
4 0 (r 2  a2 )3/2 negative charge  P 2EAcos 

  |E A||E B|
1 ( p) EB
E equitorial  EAsin 
4 0 (r 2  a2 )3/2
r2  a2
r2  a2
For r >> a  
+q –q
1 p A O B
E equitorial 
40 r 3 a a
So we conclude that at points lying far away from the centre of the dipole {for r >> a}
Eaxial  2Eequitorial

Electric Field Due to a Dipole at Any Point P(r, )


Consider a point P(r, ) at a distance r from the centre O of the dipole at an angle  with p . If Er and E  be
the radial and transverse fields respectively then

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 100

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII

E  Er2  E2

where, E, is the field in the direction of increasing value of r and E  is the field in the direction of increasing
value of  . So,

1 2p cos  1 p sin 
Er  3 and E 
4 0 r 40 r 3

1 p Er
 E 1  3 cos2 
40 r 3 +q P

E

a  E
p
E 1
If  is the angle made by E with, Er then, tan     tan 
Er 2 O
a
1  1 
   tan  2 (tan ) –q
 
Illustration 20 :
A system has two charges q A = 2.5 × 10–7 C and q B = – 2.5 × 10–7 C located at points A : (0, 0, – 0.15 m)
and B ; (0, 0, + 0.15 m) respectively. What is the net charge and electric dipole moment of the system?
Solution :
Net charge = 2.5 × 10–7 – 2.5 × 10–7 = 0
Electric dipole moment,
P = (Magnitude of charge) × (Separation between charges)
= 2.5 × 10–7 [0.15 + 0.15] C m
= 7.5 × 10–8 C m
The direction of dipole moment is from B to A.

Illustration 21 :
The electric field due to a short dipole at a distance r, on the axial line, from its mid point is the same as
r
that of electric field at a distance r', on the equatorial line, from its mid-point. Determine the ratio .
r´
Solution :

1 2p 1 p
4 0 r 3 = 4 0 r ' 3

2 1 r3 r
or 3 = 3 or 3 = 2or = 21/3
r r´ r´ r´

Illustration 22 :
Two charges, each of 5 C but opposite in sign, are placed 4 cm apart. Calculate the electric field
intensity of a point that is at a distance 4 cm from the mid point on the axial line of the dipole.
Solution :
We can not use formula of short dipole here because distance of the point is comparable to the distance
between the two point charges.
q = 5 × 10–6 C, a = 4 ×10–2 m, r = 4 × 10–2 m
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 101
 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
K(5C) K(5C)
Eres = E+ + E– = 2 –
2cm 6 cm2
144
= NC–1 = 108 N C–1
144  10 8
Torque on a Dipole Placed in a Uniform Electric Field

Suppose an electric dipole is placed in a uniform external field E where the dipole moment makes an angle
 with the field. The forces on the two charges are equal and opposite as shown, each having a magnitude
F = qE
Thus, we see that the net force on the dipole is zero. However, the two forces produce a net torque on the
dipole, and the dipole tends to rotate such that its axis gets aligned with the field.

The torque due to the force on the positive charge about an axis through O is given by Fa sin  where, a sin 
is the moment arm of F about O. This force tends to produce a clockwise rotation.

Likewise, the torque on the negative charge about O is also Fa sin  , and so that net torque  about O is
given by

  2Fa sin 
+q F
Since F = qE and p = 2aq

   2aqE sin 
E
–F –q
   pE sin 
 
It is convenient to express the torque in vector from as the cross product of the vectors p and E , so
vectorially,

ˆi ˆj kˆ
  
  p  E  px py pz
Ex Ey Ez

Potential Energy of a Dipole Placed in A Uniform Electric Field

Work must be done by an external agent to rotate the dipole through a given angle in the field. This work done
is then stored as potential energy in the system, that is, the dipole and the external field. The work dW
required to rotate the dipole through an angle d is given by

dW  d Since,   pE sin 

This work is transformed into potential energy U, We find this for a rotation from  0 to  , So,

  
U   d   pE sin  d  pE  sin  d
0 0 0

 U  pE(  cos) |0  pE(cos 0  cos )

The term involving cos 0 is a constant that depends on the initial orientation of the dipole. It is convenient to
choose 0  90 , so that cos 0  cos90  0 . In this case, we can express U as

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 102

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
U  pE cos 
 
This is equivalent to the dot product of the vector p and E . So


U  p.E  (p xE x  p yE y  p zE z )

Small Oscillations of a Dipole Placed in A Uniform Electric Field

Let the dipole possess a moment of inertia I about O. Since
  pE sin 
where negative sign indicates that this is the restoring torque which tries to restore dipole to its mean position.
For small  , sin       pE

 pE 

Further   I  I  I
  pE       
 I 
This equation shows that the dipole will execute oscillations when given a small angular displacement
from the mean position. The time period of oscillations is T given by

 I
T  2   2
|| pE

Illustration 22 :
An electric dipole is placed along the x-axis at the origin O. A point P is at a distance of 20 cm from

this origin such that OP makes an angle with the x-axis. If the electric field at P makes an angle
3
 with the x-axis, the value of  would be
  1
 3
(a) (b) 3  tan  2 
3  

2 1
 3
(c) (d) tan  2 
3  

Solution : (b)

2kpsin  / 3
r3 3

    where
tan   
3
kpcos  / 3 2
r3

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 103

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII

1 
   tan 3 / 2 so,    tan1 3 / 2 a
3

Illustration 24 :
Three point charges +q, –2q and +q are placed at points (x = 0, y = a, z = 0), (x = 0, y = 0, z =
0) and (x = a, y = 0, z = 0) respectively. The magnitude and direction of the electric dipole
moment vector of this charge assembly are
(a) 2qa along + y direction
(b) 2qa along the line joining points (x = 0, y = 0, z = 0) and (x = a, y = a, z = 0)
(c) qa along the line joining points (x = 0, y = 0, z = 0) and (x = a, y = a, z = 0)
(d) 2qa along + x-direction

Solution: (b)

MOTION OF A CHARGED PARTICLE IN UNIFORM ELECTRIC FIELD

A. When charged particle, Initially at Rest is placed in the Uniform Field

Consider a charged particle of charge q, mass m situated in a uniform electric field E. Force on the particle
is
F = qE (in the direction of field)
F qE
 a 
m m
Since, initially the particle is at rest, so u = 0
 qE 
 v = 0 + at  v t
m 
If s is the distance travelled by the particle in time t, then
1 2 1  qE  2
 s at  s  t
2 2 m 
If K is the kinetic energy gained by the particle then
1 q2E2 t 2
K mv 2  K
2 2m

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 104

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII

B. When a charged Particle Enters with an Initial Velocity at Right angle to the Uniform Field
a) Equation of Trajectory

Consider a charged particle of charge q, mass m entering uniform electric field E with initial velocity

u at right angles to the field. Vectorially,,
 
u  u ˆi and E  Ejˆ … (1)
 
 F qE qE
a   ˆj … (2)
m m m
y
E

P(x, y)
x
u
Applying equations of motion in vector form we have
  1 2
r  ut  at
2
 1  qEt 2  ˆ
 r  (ut)iˆ   j
2 m 
Comparing with

r  xiˆ  yjˆ
we have x = ut … (3)
1  qE  2
y  t … (4)
2 m 

x
From (3), t 
u
 qE  2
Put in (4), we get y   2 
x
 2mu 
which is the equation of a parabola.

b) Velocity at any instant

  
Also, v  u  at
  qEt  ˆ
 v  u ˆi   j V
 m 
Comparing with
 Vy
v  v x ˆi  v y ˆj


we have vx = u … (5) Vx

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 105

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
qEt
vy  … (6)
m

 2 q2E2 t 2
Since, v | v | v 2x  v 2y  v  u 
m2
If  is the angle made by v with x-axis, then
vy qEt
tan   
vx mu

INCHAPTER EXERCISE # 3
1. State the following statements as TRUE/FALSE
a) Net force acting on an electric dipole placed in uniform electric field is always zero but torque may
or may not be zero.
b) Net force acting on a dipole placed in non-uniform electric field is non-zero but torque may or may
not be zero.
c) No work is done in moving a charge on the equatorial line of a dipole.
d) An electric dipole can produce zero potential but it can not produce zero electric field at finite distance
.
e) No work is done in bringing a charge from infinity to any point on the equatorial line of a dipole.
2. An electric dipole is placed along the x-axis at the origin O. A point P is at a distance of 20 cm from
the origin such that OP makes an angle 600with x-axis. If the electric field at p makes an angle è with

the x-axis then show that θ   tan1( 3 /2) .
3
3. A point charged is placed at a distance d on the axis of a dipole and it experiences a force F. Show that
force will become F/8 if the separation becomes 2d.assuming d is large compared to length of dipole.
4. An amount of work W is required to rotate the dipole from its equilibrium position in a uniform external
electric field. Show that the torque required to maintain this position is numerically equal to W 3 .

5. The electric field due to an electric dipole at a distance r from its centre in axial position is E. If the dipole
is rotated through an angle 900 about its perpendicular axis, the electric field at the same point will be
E/N. Find the value of N.
ELECTRIC FLUX
A
Mathematically, electric flux (  ) is the dot product of the electric field with area.

 
 = E. A 
E
Geometrically, flux gives the number of electric field lines crossing a unit area

of a surface, the surface held normally to the field lines.

If a surface S is large, then it is divided into a large number of infinitesimal area elements such that
 
total = E.dA= Surface integral of electric field over the surface.
s

 
For a closed surface S, total  
 E.dA s

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 106

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
PROBLEM SOLVING TRICK(S)
(a) Further flux is taken to be positive for field lines leaving a surface (0    90 ) and negative for field
lines entering a surface (90    180 )
(b) Electric flux is a scalar physical quantity.
Illustration 24 :
  
The electric field in a region is given by E  3 E 0 i  4 E 0 j with E0 = 2.0 × 103 N/C. Find the flux of this field
5 5
through a rectangular surface of area 0.2m2 parallel to the Y–Z plane.
Solution :
   3  4 
E = E  S
5 5 

=  E 0 i  E 0 j  . 0.2 î 
N  m2
= 240
C
llustration 24 :
A point charge Q is placed at the corner of a square of
side a, then find the flux through the square.

Solution :
The electric field due to Q at any point of the square will be along the plane of square and the electric
field line are perpendicular to square ; so  = 0.
In other words we can say that no line is crossing the square so flux = 0.

Illustration 24 :
Find out flux through the curved surface of the hemisphere of radius
R if it is placed in uniform electric field E as shown in figure.

Solution :
The electric lines which are passing through area R2 are also the same which will pass through hemisphere.
so,  = ER2

GAUSS LAW
 
Flux of electric field E through any area A is defined as
 
  E. A  E A cos 


(Here, the direction of area vector A is outward normal to the
area A) In case of non-uniform electric field of curved area
 
   E.dA

A cylinder of radius R and length l is placed in a uniform electric field E such that its axis is perpendicular
to E
 
Flux linked with flat surfaces  E.A  0 [ as   90 and 270°]
 
Flux linked with curved surfaces  E. A  0 [ as net incoming flux  net outgoing flux]

 Net flux 0

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 107

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
GAUSS’ THEOREM
1
The net electric flux emerging out of a closed surface is equal to the  times the net charge enclosed by
0

it.
  qin
 E.dA  0
This law is true for any closed surface, but is useful only in case of symmetry , because in other cases
the integral on the left hand side becomes very difficult to evaluate
Note : (i) Flux through gaussian surface is independent of its shape.
(ii) Flux through gaussian surface depends only on total charge present inside gaussian surface.
(iii) Flux through gaussian surface is independent of position of charges inside gaussian surface.
(iv) Electric field intensity at the gaussian surface is due to all the charges present inside as well as out
side the gaussian surface.
(v) In a close surface incoming flux is taken negative while outgoing flux is taken positive, because n̂ is
taken positive in outward direction.
(vi) In a gaussian surface  = 0 does not imply E = 0 at every point of the surface but E = 0 at every point
implies  = 0.

Illustration 24 :
Find out flux through the given gaussian surface.

Solution

Q in 2C  3C  4C 3  10 6

= = = Nm 2/C
0 0 0

Illustration 24 :
If a point charge q is placed at the centre of a cube then find out flux through any one surface of cube.
Solution :
q
Flux through 6 surfaces = . Since all the surfaces are symmetrical
0
1 q
so, flux through one surfaces =
6 0
Illustration 24 :
A charge Q is placed at a distance a/2 above the centre of a horizontal,
square surface of edge a as shown in figure. Find the
flux of the electric field through the square surface.

Solution :

We can consider imaginary faces of cube such that the charge lies at the centre of the cube. Due to symmatry
Q
we can say that flux through the given area (which is one face of cube)  = 6
0

APPLICATIONS OF GAUSS’ LAW:

(a) Electric field due to a uniformly charged spherical shell: From symmetry, the electric field at any point
on the Gaussian surface is same and is directed radially outward. So,

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 108

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
 
 E.dA  E 4r   cos   1
 
2

From Gauss’s law

Q
 
E 4 r 2 
0 (if r  R )

Q
 E  40r 2
or E  4r   0
2
(if r  R)
 E=0
Thus, electric field inside the shell is zero and outside it is similar to that of a point charge placed at
the centre. The same result is true for a charged solid conducting sphere because the charge given to
a conductor resides on its outer surface.
Similarly, for a uniformly charged solid dielectric sphere carrying a charge Q and having radius R, it
can be shown that
Q
E (if r > R )
4 0r 2
Qr
E (if r  R )
4 0R 3
(b) For an infinite line charge using a cylindrical Gaussian surface, it can be shown that

E
2 0r . where  is the charge per unit length and r is the distance of the point from the line charge.
(c) Electric field close to an infinite plane sheet having uniform surface charge density (charge per unit area)
 is


E
20 , which is directed perpendicular to the plane sheet.
Note: that this value is independent of the distance of the point from the sheet. Thus it isa uniform
electric field.
(d) Electric field close to an infinite plane-conducting surface of charge density  is given as

E
0

INCHAPTER EXERCISE # 4
1. State the following statements as TRUE/FALSE
a) A cube of side L is placed in a uniform electric field. The net flux through the cube is always zero.
b) A point charge Q is placed at a distance a/2 directly above the centre of a square of side a. The
electric flux through the square is zero.
c) The expression of electric field in the Gauss’s law is contribution of charges only inside the closed
surface.
d) The incoming and outgoing flux through a closed surface is Ø1 and Ø2 respectively. The net charge
enclosed within the surface is ε0 (Ø2– Ø1 ).
e) A long string with a charge of λ per unit length passes through an imaginary cube of edge L. The maximum
possible flux of the electric field through the cube is “3λL/ε0.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 109

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
f) If charges q/2 and 2q are placed at the centre of face and at the corner, of a cube. Then total flux
q
through the cube is 2ε .
0

g) If  E .ds over a closed surface is negative, it means the surface encloses a net negative charge.
h) We may have a guassian surface in which three field lines enter and five field lines are comming out.

i) The quantity  E .ds is independent of the charge distribution inside the surface.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 110

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII

SOLVED EXAMPLE
Example 1: Charge q2 of mass m revolves around a stationary charge – q1 in a circular orbit of
radius r. The orbital periodic time of q2 would be
1/ 2 1/ 2
 4 2mr 3   kq q 
(a)   (b)  21 2 3 
 kq1q2   4  mr 
1/2 1/ 2
 4 2mr 4   4 2mr 2 
(c)   (d)  
 kq1q2   kq1q2 
Solution: (a)
1 q1q2 42mr
2
 mr2 
40 r T2
(40 )r 2 (42mr)
T2 
q1q2
1/2
 42mr 3 
T 
 kq1q2 

Example 2: The work done in carrying a charge q once round a circle of radius a with a charge Q at
its centre is
qQ qQ
(a) (b)
40 a 40 a2
q
(c) zero (d)
40 a2

Solution: (c)
The work done is zero because displacement is zero.
Solution 3: Four charges equal to –Q are placed at the four corners of a square and a charge q is at
its centre. If the system is in equilibrium, the value of q is
Q Q
(a) (1  2 2) (b) (1  2 2)
4 4
Q Q
(c) (1  2 2) (d) (1  2 2)
2 2
Solution: (b)
The system is in equilibrium means the force experienced by each charge in zero. It is clear
that charge placed at centre would be in equilibrium for any value of q, so we are considering
the equilibrium of charged placed at any corner.
1 ( Q)( Q) 1 ( Q)( Q) 1 (Q)q
  2 + 0
40 a2 40 ( 2a)2 40 ( 2a / 2)2
Q
 q (2 2  1)
4

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 111

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
Example 4: A charge q is placed at the centre of the line joining two equal charges Q. The system of
the three charges will be in equilibrium if q is equal to
Q Q
(a)  (b) 
2 4
Q Q
(c)  (d) 
4 2
Solution: (b)
For equilibrium of Q
Qq Q2
2
 0
 1 40 l2
40  
 2
 4q + Q = 0
Q
 q
4
Here, we are asked to calculate equilibrium for system. In this system q is already in
equilibrium.
So, we are calculating equilibrium condition for Q.

Example 5: A charged particle is free to move in an electric field. It will travel

(a) Always along a line of force
(b) along a lie of force, if its initial velocity is zero
(c) along a line of force, if it has same initial velocity in the direction ofn active angle
with the line of force
(d) None of the above
Solution: (b)
Because E point along the tangent to the lines of force. If initial velocity is zero, then due to the
force, moves in the direction of E.
Example 6: A charged particle of mass m and charge q is released from rest in uniform field E.
Neglecting the effect of gravity, the kinetic energy of the charged particle after t second
is
Eq2M 2E 2 t 2
(a) (b)
2t 2 mq
E2 q2 t 2 Eqm
(c) (d)
2m t
Solution: (c)
When charge q is released in uniform electric field E then its acceleration
qE
q (constant)
m
So, its motion will be uniformly accelerated motion and its velocity after t second is given by
qE
v  at  t
m

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 112

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
The KE of charged particle
2
1 1  qE  q2E2 t 2
KE = mv 2  m  t 
2 2 m  2m

Example 7: Two parallel infinite line charges +  and –  are placed with a separation distance R in
free space. The net electric field exactly mid-way between the two line charges is
2
(a) zero (b)
0R
 1
(c) (d)
0R 20R

Solution: (b)
According to Gauss’s theorem
q

0

 E.2  R / 2   l 
0
1 
 E 2 (l = 1)
2 0 (R / 2)
2

0R

Example 8: The electric field at a point due to an electric dipole, on an axis inclined at an angle  (
90°) to the dipole axis, is perpendicular to the dipole axis, if the angle  is
 1
(a) tan1(2) (b) tan1  
 2
 1 
(c) tan1( 2) (d) tan1  
 2
Solution: (c)
Here,  +  = 90°

1
tan   tan 
2
or tan = 2tan 
or tan  = 2tan (90 – )
or tan2 = 2
or tan   2
  tan1( 2)

Example 9: The electric field and the potential of an electric dipole vary with distance r as
1 1 1 1
(a) and 2 (b) 2 and
r r r r
1 1 1 1
(c) 2 and 3 (d) 3 and 2
r r r r
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 113
 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
Solution: (d)
Electric field and electric potential at a general point at a distane r from the centre of the dipole
is
1 P 1 pcos 
Eg  3
(3cos 2   1) and Vg 
40 r 4 0 r2

Example 10: The electric potential at a point (x, y, z) is given by

V = –x2 y – xz3 + 4
The electric field E at that point is
(a) E = I (2xy + z3) + Jx2 + k3xz2
(b) E = i2xy + j (x2 + y2) + k(3xz – y2)
(c) E = iz3 + j xyz + kz2
(d) E = i (2xy – z3) + j xy2 + k3z2x
Solution: (a)
Electric field a point is equal to the negative gradient of the electrostatic potential at that point.
Potential gradient related with electric field according to the following relation
dV
E
dr
V  V V V 
E   i j k
r  x y z 

= [I (2xy + z3) + jx2 + k3xz2]

Example 11: Three point charge + q, –2q and +q are placed at points (x = 0, y = a, z = 0), (x = 0, y = 0, z
= 0) and (x = a, y = 0, z = 0), respectively. The magnitude and direction of the electric
dipole moment vector of this charge assembly are
(a) 2qa along + y direction
(b) 2qa along the line joining points (x = 0, y = 0, z = 0) and (x = a, y = a, z= 0)

(c) qa along the line joining points (x = 0, y = 0, z = 0) and (x = a, y = a, z = 0)

(d) 2qa along + x direction

Solution: Choose the three coordinate axes as x, y and z and plot the charges with the given coordinates
as shown
O is the origin at which -2q charge is placed.
The system is equivalent to two dipoles along x and y-directions respectively. The dipole
moments of two dipoles are shown in figure.
The resultant dipole moment will be directed along OP whee P = (a, a, 0). The magnitude of
resultant dipole moment is
p  p2  p2

 (qa)2  (qa)2
 2qa

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 114

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
Example 12: A charge situated at a certain distance along the axis of an electric dipole experience of
force F. If the distance of the charge from the dipole is doubled, the force acting on it
will become
F
(a) 2F (b)
2
F F
(c) (d)
4 8
Solution: The electric field at a point distance r from electric dipole is
1 2P
E . 3 (axial line)
40 r

where p is dipole moment and r is the distane of charge from centre of dipole.
1
or E  3
r
Force on charge is
1
F  QE or F
r3
3
F2  r1 
  
F1  r2 

Given r1 = r, r2 = 2r, F1 = F
3
F2  r  1 F
    or F2 
F  2r  8 8
Example 13: A square surface of side L metre in the plane of the paper is placed in a uniform electric
field E (volt/m) acting along the same place at an angle  with the horizontal side of the
square shown in figure. The electric flux linked to the surface in unit of V-m, is

(a) EL2 (b) EL2 cos 

(c) EL2 sin  (d) zero
Solution: (d)
Flux of electric field E through any area A is defined as  = E A cos  or  = E . A = 0 the lines
are parallel to the surface.
Example 14: Gauss’s law is valid for
(a) any closed surface (b) only regular closed surfaces
(c) any open surface (d) only irregular open surfaces
Solution: (a)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 115

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
Example 15: In figure +Q charge is located at one of the edge of the cube, then electric flux through
cube due to +Q charge is

Q Q
(a) (b)
0 20
Q Q
(c) (d)
40 80

Solution: (c)
Example 16: A hollow cylinder has a charge q C within it. If  is the electric flux in unit of voltmeter
associated with the curved surface B, the flux linked with the plane surface A in unit of
voltmeter will be

1 q  q
(a)    (b)
2  0  20
 q
(c) (d) 
3 0

Solution: (a)
Gauss’s law states that the net electric flux through any closed surface is equal to the net
charge inside the surface divided by 0.
q
i.e.,  total 
0
Let electric flux linked with surfaces A,B and C are A, B and C respectively. That is
total = A + B + C
Since, C = A
q
 2A + B = total =
0
1 q 
or A    B 
2  0 
But B =  (given)
1 q 
Hence,  A     
2  0 

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 116

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
Example 17: It is required to hold equal charges, q in equilibrium at the corners of a square. What
charge when placed at the centre of the square will do this?
Solution: Let ABCD be a square of side a, and Q be the charge placed at the centre.
a 2 a
r 
2 2
 kq2 ˆ  kq2
FBA  2 i, FBC  2 ˆj
a a
 kq2 D C y ĵ
FBD 
(a 2)2

cos 45 ˆi  sin 45 ˆj  q

 kQq
FBQ 
(a / 2)2

cos 45 ˆi  sin 45 ˆj  Q a x
î

Here ˆi and ˆj have usual meaning. r

B
FBA
Net force on the charge at B is A a 45o
FBD FBQ
FBC

 
  kq2 kq2 kQq  ˆ
FR   2  2
cos 45  2
cos 45 i
 a a 2   
a/ 2  
 
 2 
 kq kq2 kQq 
 2  2
sin 45  2
sin 45   ˆj
 a a 2   a/ 2   
 
= Fx ˆi  Fy ˆj

For charge, q to be in equilibrium at B, the net force on it must be zero.

 Fx = 0 & Fy = 0
 2 
q q2 1 Qq 1 
 k  2  .  . 0
2
2 2
a
 a 2   2 a / 2  
q
 Q   (1  2 2)
4
q
Similarly, Fy  0,if Q   (1  2 2) .
4
Example 18: Two tiny spheres, each of of mass M, and charges +q and -q respectively, are connected
by a massless rod of length, L. They are placed in a uniform electric field at an angle 

with the E (  0o). Calculate the minimum time in which the dipole axis becomes
parallel to the field line.

Solution:   = pE sin , (as   0,sin   )

  = (pE) (If we assume angular displacement to be anti-clockwise, torque is clockwise)
 pE  2
  =    =  
 I 
As torque is proportional to '' and oppositely directed, the motion will be an angular S.H.M.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 117

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
Here, p = q.L.and moment of inertia, I = M
p +
(L/2)2 + M (L/2)2 L


= ML2/2
E
-
I
As, time period or T = 2
pE
T
The minimum time required to align itself is sec .
4

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 118

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII

EXERCISE
LEVEL – 1
1. Two point charges +q and –q are held fixed at (–d, 0) and (d, 0) respectively of a (X, Y)
coordinate system. Then

(a) The electric field E at all points on the X-axis has the same direction

(b) E at all points on the Y-axis is along î
(c) Work has to be done in bringing a test charge from infinity to the origin
(d) The dipole moment is 2qd directed along î
2. In a region of space around two point charges, the number of points at which electric field
intensity is zero, is
(a) one
(b) Two
(c) Infinite
(d) Depends on whether the charges are like or unlike
3. Three point charges Q1, Q2 and Q3 are placed sequentially, at equal distances, along a
straight line. Q2 and Q3 are equal in magnitude but opposite in signs. If the net force on
charge Q3 is zero, the value of Q1 is:
(a) 4Q3 (b) 2Q3
(c) Q 3 (d) 2Q3
4. A charge situated at a certain distance from an electric dipole in the end-on position,
experiences a force F. If the distance of the charge is doubled, the force acting on the charge
will become:
(a) F/4 (b) F/8
(c) 2F (d) F/2
5. Five balls, numbered 1 to 5, are suspended using separate threads. Pairs (1, 2), (2, 4), (4, 1)
show electrostatic attraction, while pairs (2, 3) and (4, 5) show repulsion, therefore ball 1 must
be:
(a) Positive charged (b) Negatively charged
(c) Neutral (d) Made of metal
6. A point charge Q1 exerts some force on a second point charge Q2. If a 3rd point charge Q3 is
brought near, the force of Q1 exerted on Q2 (without changing their respective positions):
(a) will increase
(b) will decrease
(c) will remain unchanged
(d) will increase if Q3 is of the same sign as Q1 and will decrease if Q3 is of opposite sign
7. Three charge +8q, Q and q are placed in that sequence along a straight line. The distance
between two successive charges is equal. What should be the value of Q in order to make the
net force on q to be zero?
(a) –q (b) –2q
(c) –q/2 (d) 4q

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 119

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
8. Two small balls, each having positive charge Q, are suspended by two insulating strings of
equal length L, from a hook fixed to a stand. If the whole set up is taken in a satellite then the
angle  between the two (in equilibrium) string will be:
(a) 0° (b) 90°
(c) 180° (d) 0° <  < 180°

9. In above question the tension in each string is:

1 Q2
(a) 0 (b) .
40 L2
1 Q2 1 Q2
(c) . (d) .
4 0 2L2 40 4L2

10. There is a uniform electric field in X-direction. If the work done in moving a charge of .2 C
through a distance of 2 metre along the line making an angle of 60° with X-direction is 4 joule,
then the value of E is:
(a) 3N / C (b) 4 N/C
(c) 5 N/C (d) 20 N/C
11. Two point charges of the same magnitude and opposite sign are fixed at points A and B. A
third point charge is to be balanced at point P by the electrostatic force due to these two
charges. The point P:

(a) lies on the perpendicular bisector of line AB

(b) is at the mid point of line AB
(c) lies to the left of A
(d) none of these
12. Two equal negative charges are fixed at the points [0, a] and [0, –a] on the y-axis. A positive
charge Q is released from rest at the points [2a, 0] on the x-axis. The charge Q will
(a) execute simple harmonic motion about the origin
(b) move to the origin and remain at rest
(c) move to infinity
(d) execute oscillatory but not simple harmonic motion
13. A and B are two points on the axis and the perpendicular bisector respectively of an electric
dipole. A and B are far away from the dipole and at equal distance from it. The field at A and
 
B E A are EB .
   
(a) EA  EB (b) EA  2EB
 
(c) EA  2EB
1  
(d) EB  E A , and EB is perpendicular to E A
2

14. Electric flux (in V-m) through a surface of area 100 m2 lying in the xy plane, if E  ˆi  2ˆj  3kˆ ,
is
(a) 100 (b) 141.4
(c) 173.2 (d) 200

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 120

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII

15. Charges located at the corners of an equilaterals  of side a

are: q; –q and 2q. The work done to remove the charge 2q to q
infinity is:
1 q2 1 3q2
(a) (b)
40 a 40 a
1 q2
(c) zero (d)
4 0 2a

16. Three charges 2q, –q, –q are located at the vertices of an equilateral triangle. The number of
points inside the triangle where the electric field will be zero is
(a) zero (b) One
(c) Two (d) Three
17. An electric dipole is kept in the surrounding of another dipole, it experiences
(a) a force and a torque (b) a force but not a torque
(c) a force but not necessarily a torque (d) neither a force nor a torque
18. A charge situated on the perpendicular bisector of a short electric dipole experiences a force
F. If the distance of the charge is doubled while still keeping it on the bisector, the force acting
on the charge will become:
(a) 2F (b) F/2
(c) F/4 (d) F/8
19. Dimensions of 0 (permittivity of free space) are:
(a) [M–1L–3T4A2] (b) [M–1L–3T2A4]
3 –4 –2
(c) [ML T A ] (d) [M–1L–3T2A2]
20. A sphere of radius R, is charged uniformly with total charge Q. Then magnitude of electric
field is (r = distance from centre):
KQr KQ
(a) , where r < R (b) , where r  R
R3 r2
(c) greater outside than inside the sphere
(d) (a) and (b) both
21. Choose the correct statements
(i) The tangent drawn at any point on the line of force gives the direction of the force acting
on a positive charge at that point
(ii) The normal drawn at any point on the line of force gives the direction of the force acting
on a positive charge at that point
(iii) Electric lines of force start from a negative charge and end on a positive charge
(iv) Electric lines of force start from a positive charge and end on a negative charge
(a) (i,iii) (b) (ii, iv)
(c) (i, iv) (d) (ii, iii)
22. Choose the correct statements:
(i) The density of electric lines of force at a point is independent of the magnitude of electric
intensity vector E at that point
(ii) The density of electric lines of force at a point is proportional to the magnitude of electric
field intensity at that point
(iii) Actually, the electric field lines do not exist. This is just a graphical description of the
electric field
(iv) Actually, the electric field lines exist
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 121
 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
(a) (ii, iii) (b) (iii, iv)
(c) (ii, iv) (d) (i, iv)
23. Two point charge q1 and q2 are placed at a distance of 50 cm from each other in air, and
interact with a certain force. Now the same charges are put in an oil whose relative
permittivity is 5. If the interacting force between them is still the same, their separation now is:
(a) 16.6 cm (b) 22.3 cm
(c) 35.0 cm (d) 28.4 cm
24. A ring of radius R is charged uniformly with a charge +Q. The electric field at any point on its
axis at a distance r from the circumference of the ring will be
KQ KQ
(a) (b)
r r2
KQ 1/2 KQr
r

(c) 3 r 2  R 2  (d)
R3
25. Two positive charges of 1C and 2C are placed 1 metre apart. The value of electric field in
N/C at the middle point of the line joining the charges will be
(a) 10.8 × 104 (b) 3.6 × 104
(c) 1.8 × 104 (d) 5.4 × 104
26. Two charges are placed as shown in fig. Where should be a third charge be placed on the
line segment joining the two charges so that it remains at rest

(a) 30 cm from 9 e (b) 40 cm from 16 e

(c) 40 cm from 9 e (d) (a) or (b)
27. A sphere of radius R and charge Q is placed inside an imaginary sphere of radius 2R whose
centre coincides with the given sphere. The flux related to imaginary sphere is
Q Q
(a) (b)
0 2 0
4Q 2Q
(c) (d)
0 0
28. 20 C charge is placed inside a closed surface then flux related to surface is . If 80 C
charge is added inside the surface then change in flux is
(a) 4 (b) 5
(c)  (d) 8

29. A non-conducting solid sphere of radius R is uniformly charged. The magnitude of the electric
field due to the sphere at a distance r from its centre
(a) increases as r increases, for r < R
(b) decreases as r increases, for 0 < r < 
(c) decreases as r increases, for R < r < 
(d) is discontinuous at r = R
(a) (a),(c) (b) (c), (d)
(c) (a), (b) (d) (b), (d)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 122

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
30. Two balls carrying charges +7 C and –5 C attract each other with a force F. If a charge –2
C is added to both, the force between them will be
F
(a) F (b)
2
(c) 2F (d) zero
31. The dielectric constant of a metal is
(a)  (b) 0
(c) 1 (d) none of these
32. Four charges 2q, –3q, –4q and 5q are placed sequentially at four corners of a square of edge
length a. The electric field at the centre of the square is
10Kq 20Kq
(a) (b)
a2 a2
Kq 2Kq
(c) (d)
a2 a2
 K 
33. The electric field in a certain region is given by E   2  ˆi. The dimensions of K are
x 
3 –3 –1
(a) ML T A (b) ML–2T–3A–1
(c) ML4T–3A–1 (d) dimensionless

34. Two infinite linear charges are placed parallel to each other at a distance 0.1 m from each
other. If the linear charge density on each is 5 C/m, then the force acting on a unit length of
each linear charge will be
(a) 2.5 N/m (b) 3.25 N/m
(c) 4.5 N/m (d) 7.5 N/m
35. Two point charge of +2 C and + 6 C repel each other with a force of 12 N. If each is given
an additional charge of –4 C, then force will become
(a) 4 N (attractive) (b) 60 N (attractive)
(c) 4 N (Repulsive) (d) 12 N (attractive)
36.  
The electric field in a region of space is given by E  5iˆ  2ˆj N/C. The electric flux due to the
field through an area 2(iˆ  ˆj)m2 , in S.I. units is:
(a) 10 (b) 20
(c) 14 (d) 10 2

LEVEL – 2
1. 4 charges are placed each at a distance ‘a’ from origin. The dipole y
moment of configuration is
(a) 2qajˆ (b) 3qajˆ 3q

(c) 2aq  ˆi  ˆj  (d) none a

x
–2q a a –2q
a

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 123

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
2. An infinite, uniformly charged sheet with surface charge density 
cuts through an imaginary spherical surface of radius R at a
distance x from its center, as shown in the figure. The electric flux
 through the surface is

(a)
R 2 
(b)

2 R2  x 2  
0 0

(c)
 2
 R x  2
 (d)

 R  x2 
2

0 2 0

3. A point charge 50  C is located at r  (2iˆ  3ˆj)m. What is the magnitude of electric field at a
point whose position vector is (8iˆ  5ˆj)m ?
(a) 1200 V/m (b) 0.04 V/m
(c) 900 V/m (d) 4500 V/m
4. An electric dipole is placed at the origin O such that its equator is y-axis. At a point P far away
from dipole the electric field direction is along y-direction. OP makes an angle a with the x-
axis such that:
(a) tana  3 (b) tana  2
1
(c) tana  1 (d) tana 
2
5. Charge Q distributed on two concentric metallic shells of radii ‘r’ and ‘R’ in such a way that
their surface charge densities are equal. Electric field at their common centre would be
Q r  R 
(a) (b) Zero
4 0 R3
Q Q r  R 
(c) (d)
40 4 0 (R3  r 3 )

6. In a region of space the electric field in given by E  8iˆ  4ˆj  3k.
ˆ The electric flux through a
hemispherical surface of area of 100 units with its flat face (which is missing) down and on the
x-y plane is
(a) 75 units (b) 300 units
(c) 400 units (d) 1500 units

7. A particle of mass m and charge q is placed at rest in a

uniform electric field E as shown and released. The + + + + +
kinetic energy it attains after moving a distance y is q
1
(a) qEy (b) qEy – – – – –
2
1
(c) qE2y (d) m(qEy )
2
8. Three identical metallic uncharged spheres A, B and C of radius a are kept at the corners of
an equilateral triangle of side d (d >>a). The fourth sphere (of radius a) which has a charge q
touches A and is then removed to a position far away. B is earthed and then the earth
connection is removed. C is then earthed. The charge on C is
qa  2d  a  qa  2d  a 
(a)   (b)  
2d  2d  2d  d 
qa  d  a  2qa  d  a 
(c)    (d)  
2d  d  d  2d 

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 124

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
9. Two similar conducting balls of mass m are hung from silk
threads of length L and carry similar charges q as shown in the  L
L
figure. Assuming  to be small, the distance x between the balls
q q
is m m
1/ 3 1/ 3 x
 q 2L   q 2L 
(a)   (b)  
 4  0 mg   2 0 mg 

3/2 1/ 2
 q 2L   q 2L 
(c)   (d)  
 4  0 mg   2 0 mg 
10. A charge Q is placed at each of the two opposite corners of a square. A charge q is placed at
each of the other two corners. If the resultant force on Q is zero, then
(a) Q  2 q (b) Q   2 q
(c) Q  2 2 q (d) Q  2 2 q
11. Three charges –q1, +q2 and –q3 are placed as shown in the y
figure. The x-component of the force on –q1 is proportional to –q3
q q q q
(a) 22  32 sin  (b) 22  32 cos 
b a b a
q 2 a3 q 2 q3 a

(c) 2  2 sin  (d) 2  2 cos 
b a b a
–q1 +q2
b

12. A particle of mass m and charge q starts moving from rest along a straight line in an electric
field E = E0 – ax where a is a positive constant and x is the distance from starting point. Find
the distance travelled by the particle till the moment it came to instantaneous rest
2E 0 E E q E
(a) (b) 0 (c) 0 (d) 0
a a m q
13. Three positive and three negative charges of equal magnitude P Q
are placed at the corners of a regular hexagon PQRSTU. If
electric field at O due to all the charges is twice the field at O U O R
due to a positive charge at R only, the order in which the S
charges are placed at PQRSTU is T
(a) +  +  +  (b)  + + +   (c) + + +    (d)  + +  + 
 
14. Charge Q is given a displacement r  aiˆ  bˆj in an electric field E  E1iˆ  E 2 ˆj . The work done
is
(a) Q(E1a + E2b) (b) Q (E1a ) 2  (E 2 b ) 2
(c) Q(E1 + E2) a 2  b 2 (d) Q E12  E 22 ) a2  b2

15. A conducting sphere of radius 10 cm is charged with 10C. Another uncharged sphere of
radius 20 cm is allowed to touch it for some time. After that if the spheres are separated, then
surface density of charges on the spheres will be in the ratio of
(a) 1 : 4 (b) 1 : 3 (c) 1 : 2 (d) 1 : 1

16. Five vertices of a regular hexagon of side L are occupied by five point charges. The value of
each point charge is +q. Another point charge –q is placed at the centre of the hexagon. What
is the magnitude of the force on –q due to all the charges placed at the vertices of hexagon?

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 125

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
2 2 2
q 3q q
(a) (b) (c) zero (d)
4 3  0 L 2
4 0 L2
4 0 L2

17. A, B, C, D corners of a square are occupied by q, –q, 2Q and Q charges respectively. The
q
side of square is 2a. The field at the mid point of side CD is zero. What is the value of ?
Q
5 5 2 2 2 5
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2 5 5 2
18. Two large parallel plates charged uniformly with surface  –
charge density  and – are located as shown in the
figure. Which one of the following graphs shows the
variation of electric field as one moves from A to B?
A B

E E

(a) (b)

x x
E E

(c) (d)

x x
19. The variation of electric field between the two charges q1 E
and q2 along the line joining the charges is plotted
against distance from q1 (taking rightward direction of
electric field as positive) as shown in the figure. Then the
correct statement is x
(a) q1 and q2 are positive charge and q1  q2 q1 q2
(b) q1 and q2 are positive charges and q1.  q2
(c) q1 and q2 are negative charges and q1  q2
(d) q1 and q2 are negative charges and q1.  q2

20. Charge q is distributed uniformly on an arc of radius R ++

+ +q
subtending an angle /2 at its centre. Another charge –q
+
is placed at the centre of the arc. The electric dipole +
moment of the system is +
-q

2 2qR 2qR qR 2qR

(a) (b) (c) (d)
   
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 126
 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII

PREVIOUS YEARS QUESTIONS

Question Asked in 2013, 2014 , 2015, 2016
1. Two pith balls carrying equal charges are suspended
from a common point by strings of equal length, the
equilibrium separation between them is r. Now the
strings are rigidly clamped at half the height. The
equilibrium separation between the balls now become :

2
 2r   1   r   2r 
(a)   (b)   (c)  3  (d)   [NEET 2013]
3  2  2  3

2. In a region, the potential is represented by V(x,y,z) = 6x – 8xy – 8y + 6yz, where V is in volts

and x, y, z are in meters. The electric force experienced by a charge of 2 coulomb situated at
point (1, 1, 1) is [AIPMT 2014]

(a) 24 N (b) 4 35 N (c) 6 5 N (d) 30 N

3. A conducting sphere of radius R is given a charge Q. The electric potential and the electric
field at the centre of the sphere respectively are : [AIPMT 2014]

Q Q Q Q
(a) & (b) Both are zero (c) Zero & (d) and zero
4 πε 0R 4 πε 0R 2 4 πε 0R 2 4 πε 0R

4. The electric field in a certain region is acting radially outward and is given by E = Ar. A
charged contained in a sphere of radius ‘a’ centred at the origin of the field, will be given by
[AIPMT 2015]
(a) A 0 a 2 (b) 4 0 Aa 3 (c) 0 Aa 3 (d) 4 0 Aa 2 ]

5. Two identical charged spehere suspended from a common point by two massless strings of
lengths are initially at a distance d (d<<1) apart because of their mutual repulsion. The
charges begin to leak from both the sphere at a constant rate. As a result, the spheres
approach each other with a velocity v. Then v varies as a function of the distance x between
the spheres, as [AIPMT 2016]
1 1
2 1 2
(a) v  x (b) v  x (c) vx (d) v  x
o 5
6. An electric dipole is placed at an angle of 30 with an electric field intensity 2 10 N / C . It
experiences a torque equal to 4Nm. The charge on the dipole, if the dipole length 2 mc, is
[NEET 2016]
(a) 8 mC (b) 2 mC (c) 5 mC (d) 7 C

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 127

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII

Electric Charge and Coulomb's Law

1. Four electric charges +q, +q, -q and -q are placed at the corners of a square of side 2L (see
figure). The electric potential at point A, mid-way between the two charges + q and + q, is
[CBSE AIPMT 2011]
1 2q  1  1 2q  1 
(a) 1   (b)  1– 
40 L  5 40 L  5
1 2q
(c) zero (d)
40 L

1 5 

2. A charge Q is placed at the origin. The electric potential due to this charge at a given point in
space is v. The work done by an external force in bringing another charge q from infinity up to
the point is [J&K CET 2011]
V
(a) (b) Vq
q
(c) V + q (d) V

3. Which of the following is not true? [DUMET 2011]

(a) For a point charge, the electrostatic potential varies as 1/r
(b) For a dipole, the potential depends on the position vector and dipole moment vector
(c) The electric dipole potential varies as 1/r at large distance
(d) For a point charge, the electrostatic field varies as 1/r2

4. The mobility of charge carriers increases with [DUMET 2011]

(a) increase in the average collision time (b) increase in the electric field
(c) increase in the mass of the charge carriers (d)decrease in the charge of the mobile
carriers

5. Two positive ions, each carrying a charge q, are separated by a distance d. If F is the force
of repulsion between the ions, the number of electrons missing from each ion will bn (e being
the charge on an electron) [CBSE AIPMT 2010]
40Fd2 4 0Fe2
(a) (b)
e d2
4 0Fd2 40Fd2
(c) (d)
e2 e2
6. Two copper balls, each weighing 10 g, are kept in air 10 cm apart. If one electron from every
106 atoms is transferred from one ball to the other, the coulomb force between them is
(atomic weight of copper is 63.5) [Manipal 2010]
10 4
(a) 2.0 × 10 N (b) 2.0 × 10 N
(c) 2.0 × 108 N (d) 2.0 × 106 N

7. If 1010 electrons are acquired by a body every second, the time required for the body to get a
total charge of C will be [DUMET 2010]
(a) 2h (b) 2 days
(c) 2 yr (d) 20 yr
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 128
 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
8. A ball with charge –50e is placed at the centre of a hollow spherical shell has a net charge of
–50e. What is the charge on the shell's outer surface? [DUMET 2010]
(a) –50e (b) Zero
(c) +100e (d) – 100e

9. Two identical conducting balls A and B have positive charges q 1 and q2 respectively but q 1 
q 2 . The ball are brought together so that they touch each other and then kept in their original
positions, the force between: them is [UP CPMT 2010]
(a) less than that before the balls touched (b) greater than that before the balls touched
(c) same as that before the balls touched (d) zero

10. Two small spheres of masses M1 and M2 are suspended by

weightless insulating threads of lengths L 1 and L1. The spheres
carry charges Q 1 and Q 2 respectively. : spheres are suspended
such that they are in level with one another and the threads are
inclined to the vertical at angles of 1, and 2 as shown. Which
one of the following conditions is essential, if 1 = 2?
(a) M1  M2, but Q1 = Q2 (b) M1 = M2
(c) Q1 = Q2 (d) L1 = L2

11. A charged particle of mass 0.003 g is held stationary in space by placing it in a downward
direction of electric field of 6 × 104 N/C. Then the magnitude of charge is [UP CPMT 2010]
(a) 5 × 10–4 C (b) 5 × l0–10 C
(c) 5 × 10–6 C (d) 5 × 10–9 C

12. When l019 electrons are removed from a neutral metal plate, the electric charge on it is
(a) –1.6 C (b) +1.6 C [VMMC 2010]
(c) 10+19 C (d) 10–19 C

13. Among two discs A and B, first has radius 10 cm and charge 10–6 C and second has radius
30 cm and charge 10–5C. When they are touched, charges on both are, q A and q B
respectively, will be [Manipal 2010]
(a) q A =2.75C, q B = 8.25C (b) q A = 1.09C, q B =1.53C
(c) q A =q B = 5.5C (d) None of these

14. The charge given to any conductor resides on its outer surface, because [AFMC 2009]
(a) the free charge tends to be in its minimum potential energy state
(b) the free charge tends to be in its minimum kinetic energy state
(c) the free charge tends to be in its maximum potential energy state
(d) the free charge tends to be in its maximum kinetic energy state
15. Two spherical conductors B and C having equal radii and carrying equal charges in them
repel each other with a force F when kept apart at some distance. A third spherical conductor
having same radius as that of B but uncharged, is brought in contact with B, then brought in
contact with C and finally removed away from both. The new force of repulsion between B
and C is [JIPMER 2009]
F 3F F 3F
(a) (b) (c) (d)
4 4 8 8

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 129

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
16. A pendulum bob of mass m carrying a charge a is at rest with its string making an angle 
with the vertical in a uniform horizontal electric field E. The tension in the string is
mg qE mg qE
(a) and (b) and [BCECE 2009]
sin  cos  cos  sin 
qE mg
(c) (d)
mg qE

17. The specific charge of a proton is 9.6 × 10–7 Ckg-1. The specific charge of an alpha particle
will be [JCECE 2009]
7 -1 11 –1
(a) 9.6 × 10 C kg (b) 19.2 × 10 Ckg
7 –1
(c) 4.8 × 10 Ckg (d) 2.4 × l07Ckg–1

18. The distance between charges 5 × 10–11C and –2.7 ×10–11 C is 0.2 m. The distance at which a
third charge should be placed from second charge in order that it will not experience any force
along the line joining the two charges is [Manipal 2009]
(a) 0.44 m (b) 0.65 m
(c) 0.556 m (d) 0.350m

19. The number of electrons in 2 C of charge is

(a) 5 × 1029 (b) 12.5 × 1018
19
(c) 1.6 × l0 (d) 9 × 1011

20. When air medium in which two charges kept apart at a distance r is replaced by a dielectric
medium of dielectric constant K, the force between the charges [J&K CET 2009]
(a) remains unchanged (b) decreases K times
(c) increases K times (d) increases K2 times

21. A comb run through one's dry hair attracts small bits of paper. This is due to [AFMC 2008]
(a) comb is a good conductor
(b) paper is a good conductor
(c) the atoms is the paper get polarized by the charged comb
(d) the comb possesses magnetic properties

22. Each of the two point charges are doubled and their distance is halved. Force of interaction
becomes n times, where n is [AMU 2008]
(a) 4 (b) 1
(c) 1/16 (d) 16

23. A cylindrical conductor is placed near another positively charged conductor. The net charge
acquired by the cylindrical conductor will be [AMU 2008]
(a) positive only (b) negative only
(c) zero (d) either positive or negative

24. A table tennis ball which has been covered with a conducting paint is suspended by a silk
thread so that it hangs between two metal plates. One plate is earthed. When the other plate
is connected to a high voltage generator, the ball [BHU 2008]
(a) is attracted to the high voltage plate and stays there

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 130

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
(b) hangs without moving
(c) swings backward and forward hitting each plate in turn
(d) is repelled to the earthed plate and stays there

25. Three charges 1C, 1C and 2C are kept at the vertices A, B and C of an equilateral
triangle ABC of 10 cm side, respectively. The resultant force on the charge at C is
[Punjab PMET 2008]
(a) 0.9 N (b) 1.8 N
(c) 2.72 N (d) 3.12 N

26. Two identical metal spheres charged with +12 F and –8 F are kept at certain distance in
air. They are brought into contact and then kept at the same distance. The ratio of the
magnitudes of electrostatic forces between them before and after contact is [KCET 2008]
(a) 12 : 1 (b) 8 : 1
(c) 24 : 1 (d) 4 : 1

27. Consider a non spherical conductor shown in the figure

which is given a certain amount of positive charge. The
charge distributes itself on the surface such that the
charge densities are 1 ,  2 and 3 at the region 1, 2 and 3
respectively. Then [Kerala CEE 2008]
(a) 1 > 2 > 3 (b) 2 > 3 > 1
(c) 3 > 1 > 2 (d) 2 > 1 > 3

28. A circle of radius a has charge density given by  =  0 cos2  on its circumference. What will
be the total charge on the circle? [Guj CET 2008]
(a) 2a (b) Zero
(c) a 0 (d) None of these

29. Electrical force between two point charges is 200 N. If we increase 10% charge on one of the
charges and decrease 10% charge on the other, then electrical force between them for the
same distance becomes [Guj CET 2008]
(a) 198 N (b) 100 N
(c) 200 N (d) 99 N

30. Assertion : The lightning conductor at the top of high building has sharp pointed ends.
[AIIMS 2007]
Reason : The surface density of charge at sharp points very high resulting in setting up of
electric wind.

31. Two point charges +2 C and + 6 C repel each other with a force of 12 N. If a charge of –2C is
given to each of these charges the force will now be [AMU 2007]
(a) zero (b) 8 N (attractive)
(c) 8 N (repulsive) (d) None of these

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 131

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
32. An electron is moving round the nucleus of a hydrogen atom in a circular orbit of radius r. The
Coulomb force F between the two is [BHU 2007]
e2  e2 
(a) k r (b) –k r
r3 r3
e2  e2 
(c) k r (d) –k r
r r
33. Two identical charges repel each other with a force equal to 10 mg wt when they are 0.6 m
apart in a (g = 10 ms–2). The value of each charge is [KCET 2007]
–7
(a) 2 mC (b) 2 × 10 C
(c) 2 nC (d) 2 C

34. Two identical spheres carrying charges –9 C and 5 C respectively are kept in contact and
then separated from each other. Point out true statement from the following. In each sphere
[Kerala CEE 2007]
13 13
(a) 1.25 × 10 electrons are in deficit (b) 1.25 × l0 electrons are in excess
(c) 2.15 × 1013 electrons are in excess (d) 2.15 × 1013 electrons are in deficit
(e) 1.52 × 1013 electrons are in excess
35. The voltage of clouds is 4 × l06V with respect to ground. In a lightning strike lasting 100 ms, a
charge of 4 C is delivered to the ground. The power of lightning strike is [AIIMS 2006]
(a) 160 MW (b) 80 MW
(c) 20 MW (d) 500 kW
36. The top of the atmosphere is about 400 kV with respect to the surface of the earth,
corresponding to an electric field that decreases with altitude. Near the surface of the earth,
the field is about 100 Vm–1. Still, we do not get an electric shock as we step out of our house
into the open house because
(assume the house to be a steel cage so that there is no field inside) [KCET 2006]
(a) there is a potential difference between our body and the ground
(b) 100 Vm-1 is not a high electric field so that we do not feel the shock
(c) our body and the ground forms an equipotential surface
(d) the dry atmosphere is not a conductor
37. A pendulum bob carriers a negative charge -q. A positive charge +q is held at the point of
support. Then, the time period of the bob is [MHT CET 2006]
L L
(a) greater than 2 (b) less than 2
g g
L L
(c) equal to 2 (d) equal to 2
g g
38. Two equal -ve charge -q are fixed at the point (0, a) and (0, - a) on the y-axis. A positive
charge Q is released from rest at the point (2a, 0) on the x-axis. The charge will [BHU 2005]
(a) execute SHM about the origin (b) move to the origin and remain at rest
(c) move to infinity (d) execute oscillatory but not SHM

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 132

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
39 Charges 4Q, q and Q are placed along x-axis at position x = 0, x = l/2 and x = l,
respectively. Find the value of q, so that force on charge Q is zero. [DUMET 2005]
Q
(a) Q (b)
2
Q
(c) – (d) –Q
2
40. Four metal conductors having different shapes [KCET2005]
1. a sphere 2. cylinder
3. pear 4. lightning conductor
are mounted on insulating stands and charged. The one which is best suited to retain the
charges for a longer time is
(a) 1 (b) 2
(c) 3 (d) 4

ELECTRIC FIELD
1. There exists an electric field of 1 N/C along Y direction. The flux passing through the square
of 1 m placed in XY plane inside the electric field is [J&K CET 2011]
2 –1 2 -1
(a) l.0Nm C (b) 10.0 Nm C
(c) 2.0 Nm2C–1 (d) zero

2. Two identical charged spheres of material density , suspended from the same point by
inextensible strings of equal length make an angle  between the strings. When suspended in
a liquid of density  the angle  remains the same. The dielectric constant K of the liquid is
[KCET 2011]
 –
(a) (b)
– 
 
(c) (d)
 

3. An electron moving with the speed 5 × 106 per sec is shooted parallel to the electric field of
intensity 1 × 103 N /C. Field is responsible for the retardation of motion of electron. Now
evaluate the distance travelled by the electron before coming to rest for an instant (mass of e
= 9 × l0–31 kg, charge = 1.6 x 10–19 C) [BHU 2010]
(a) 7 m (b) 0.7 mm
(c) 7 cm (d) 0.7 cm
4. At what distance along the central axis of a uniform charged plastic disc of radius R is the
magnitude of the electric field equal to one-half the magnitude of the field at the centre of the
surface of the disc? [CMC 2010]
R R
(a) (b)
2 3
(c) 2R (d) 3R
(e) None of these
5. The distance between two charges 6 C and 15 C is 2 m. At what point on the line joining
the two, the intensity will be zero? [OJEE 2010]
(a) At a distance 1 m from 6 C (b) At a distance 1 m from 15 C
(c) At a distance 0.77 from 6 C (d) At a distance 0.77 from 15 C

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 133

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
6. A particle of mass 2 × 10–3 kg, charge 4 × 10–3 C enters in an electric field of 5 V/m, then its
kinetic energy after 10 s is [OJEE 2010]
(a) 0.1 J (b) 1 J
(b) 10 J (d) 100 J
7. The figure shows some of the electric field lines corresponding to an electric field. The figure
suggests [OJEE 2010]

(a) E A > E B > E C (b) E A = E B = E C

(c) EA =EC > EB (d ) E A = E C < E B
8. Charge Q is distributed over a ring, then the force on charge q placed at the centre of the ring
will be [OJEE 2010]
Q
(a) zero (b)
4
Q
(c) (d) Q
2
9. An electron of mass m and charge q is accelerated from rest in a uniform electric field of
strength E. The velocity acquired by it as it travels a distance l is [Manipal 2010]
2Eql 2Eq
(a) (b)
m ml
2Em Eq
(c) (c)
ql ml
q
10. Two point charges - q and  are situated at the origin and at the point (a, 0,0) respectively.
2
The point along the X-axis where the electric field vanishes is [Haryana PMT 2010]
a
(a) x  (b) x  2a
2
2a 2a
(c) x  (d) x 
2 –1 2 1
11. The electric intensity outside a charged sphere of radius R at a distance r(r > R) is
[MHT CET 2010]
R 2 r 2
(a) (b)
0 r 2 0R 2
r R
(c) (d)
 0R 0 r
12. The ionisation potential of mercury is 10.39 V. How far an electron must travel in an electric
field of 1.5 × l06 V/m to gain sufficient energy to ionize mercury? [Manipal 2010]
10.39 10.39
(a) m (b) m
1.6  10–19 2  1.6  10–19
10.39
(c) 10.39 × 1.6 × 10–19 m (d) m
1.5  106
13. A charged oil drop is suspended in uniform field of 3 × 104 V/m so that it neither falls nor rises.
The charge on the drop will be (Take the mass of the charge = 9.9 × l0–15 kg and g = 10m/s2)
[JIPMER 2009]

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 134

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
(a) 3.3 × 10–18 C (b) 3.2 × l0–18 C
(c) 1.6 × l0–18 C (d) 4.8 × 10–18 C
14. One of the following is not a property of field lines [DUMET 2009]
(a) field lines are continuous curves without any breaks
(b) two field lines cannot cross each other
(c) field lines start at positive charges and end at negative charges
(d) the form closed loops

15. The relation between electric field vector E, the displacement vector D and the polarization
vector P for a dielectric placed in electric field E is given by [Haryana PMT, CG PMT 2009]
(a) P = 0E + D (b) P = D + E
(c) D = 0E + P (d) E = D + P

16. A oil drop having a mass 4.8 × l0–10 g and charge 24 × 10–18 C stands still between two
charged horizontal plates separated by a distance of 1 cm. If now the polarity of the plates is
changed, instantaneous acceleration of the drop is (g = 10 ms –2) [JCECE 2009]
–2 –2
(a) 5ms (b) 10ms
(c) 20 ms–2 (d) 15 ms–2

17. The figure shows electric field E at a distance r in any direction from
the origin O. The electric field E is due to [Haryana PMT 2009]
(a) a charged hollow metallic sphere of radius OP with centre at O
(b) a charged solid metallic sphere of radius OP with centre at O
(c) a uniformly charged non-conducting solid sphere of radius OP with
centre at O
(d) a uniformly charged non-conducting hollow sphere of radius OP
with centre at O

18. The electric potential at any point x, y, z in metres is given by V = 3x 2 . The electric field at a
point (2,0,1) is [KCET 2009]
–1 –1 –1 –1
(a) 12 Vm (b) –6 Vm (c) 6 Vm (d) –12 Vm

19. If the linear charge density of a cylinder is 4Cm–1, then electric field intensity at point 3.6 cm
from axis is [MHT CET 2009]
5 –1 6 –1 7 –1
(a) 4 × 10 NC (b) 2 × l0 NC (c) 8 × 10 NC (d) 12 × 107 NCT–1

20. The electric potential at a point in free space due to a charge Q coulomb is Q × 1011 V. The
electric field at that point is [CBSE AIPMT 2008]
22 –1 20 –1
(a) 40Q × 10 Vm (b) 1270 Q × 10 Vm
20 –1
(c) 40Q × 10 Vm (d) l20Q × 1022 Vm–1
21. A thin conducting ring of radius R is given a charge +Q. The electric
field at the centre O of the ring due to the charge on the part AKB of
the ring is E. The electric field at the centre due to the charge on the
part ACDB of the ring is [CBSE AIPMT 2008]
(a) 3E along KO (b) E along OK
(c) E along KO (d) 3E along OK

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 135

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
22. Charge q is uniformly distributed over a thin half ring of radius R. The electric field at the
centre of the ring is [AIIMS 2008]
q q q q
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2  0R 2
2
4  0R 2
2
40R2 20R2
23. A charge Q is uniformly distributed over a large square plate of copper. The electric field at a
point very close to the centre of the plate is 10 Vm–1. If the copper plate is replaced by a
plastic plate of the same geometrical dimensions and carrying the same charge Q uniformly
distributed, then the electric field at the point P will be [BHU 2008]
–1 –1 –1
(a) 5 Vm (b) zero (c) 10 Vm (d) 20 Vm

24. Figure below show regular haxagons, with charges at the vertices. In which case is the
electric field at the centre zero? [BHU 2008]

(a) (b)

(c) (d)

25. How does, the electric field (E) between the plates of a charged cylindrical capacitor vary with
the distance from the axis of the cylinder? [Manipal 2008]
1 1
(a) E  (b) E 
r2 r
(c) E  r 2 (d) E  r

26. Consider a thin spherical shell of radius R consisting of uniform surface charge density . The
electric field at point of distance x from its centre and outside the shell is
[J&K CET 2008]
2
(a) inversely proportional to x (b) directly proportional to x
(c) directly proportional to x (d) inversely proportional to x 2
27. Two parallel plates have equal and opposite charge. When the space between them is
evacuated, the electric field between the plates is 2 × l05 Vm-1. When the space is filled with
dielectric the electric field becomes l × l05 Vm–1. The dielectric constant of dielectric material
is [Punjab PMET 2007]
(a) 1/2 (b) 1
(c) 2 (d) 3

28. Two spheres of radii R1 and R2 respectively are charged and joined by a wire. The ratio of
electric fields of spheres is [RPMT 2007]

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 136

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
R2 R2
(a) 22 (b) 12
R1 R2
R2 R1
(c) (d)
R1 R2
29. If the uniform surface charge density on the infinite plane sheet is , electric field near the
surface will be [Guj CET 2007]
 3
(a) (b)
20 0
 2
(c) (d)
0 0
30. A solid metallic sphere has a charge + 3 Q. Concentric with this sphere is a conducting
spherical shell having charge –Q. The radius of the sphere is a and that of the spherical shell
is b(b> a). What is the electric field at a distance R (a<R<b) from the centre?
[BCECE 2007]
4Q 3Q
(a) (b)
20R2 40R2
3Q Q
(c) (d)
20R2 20R
31. Two unlike charges of the same magnitude Q are placed at a distance d. The intensity of the
electric field at the middle point in the line joining the two charges [J&K CET 2007]
8Q
(a) zero (b)
40 d2
6Q 4Q
(c) (d)
40 d2 40 d2
32. The spatial distribution of the electric field due to
charges (A, B) is shown in figure. Which one of the
following statements is correct ? [AIIMS 2006]
(a) A is +ve and B –ve and | A | > |B|
(b) A is –ve and B +ve; | A| = |B|
(c) Both are +ve but A > B
(d) Both are –ve but A > B
33. The electrical potential on the surface of a sphere of radius r due to a charge 3 × 10–6C is 500
 1 
V. The intensity of electric field on the surface of the sphere is  
 9  109 Nm2 C–2  in NC–1 
 4 0 
(a) < 10 (b) > 200 [EAMCET 2006]
(c) Between 10 and 20 (d) < 5
34. A cube has point charges of magnitude —q at all its vertices. Electric field at the centre of the
cube is
[RPMT 2006]
1 6q 1 8q
(a) (b)
40 3a2 4 0 a2
1 –8q
(c) zero (d)
4 0 a2

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 137

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
35. Which of the following plots represents the variation of the electric field with distance from the
centre of a uniformly charged non-conducting sphere of radius R? [BCECE 2006]

(a) (b)

(c) (d)

36. Forces exerted by a uniform electric field on an electron having mass me and proton of mass
mp are represented as F e and F p respectively are related as [J&K CET 2006]
Fe m e
(a) FP = Fe (b) 
Fp mp
Fe mp Fe m e2
(c)  (d) 
Fp m e Fp mp2
37. Which of the following is not the property of equipotential surfaces? [AFMC 2005]
(a) They do not cross each other
(b) They are concentric spheres for uniform electric field
(c) Rate of change of potential with distance on them is zero
(d) They can be imaginary spheres

38. Two infinitely long parallel conducting plates having surface charge densities +  and –
respectively, are separated by a small distance. The medium between the plates is vacuum. If
0 is the dielectric permittivity of vacuum, then the electric field in the region between the
plates is [AIIMS 2005]
–1 –1
(a) 0 volt m (b)  / 20 volt m
–1
(c)  / 0 volt m (d) z / 0 volt m–1

Electric Dipole
1. An electric dipole is placed in a uniform electric field with the dipole axis making an angle 
with the direction of the electric field. The orientation of the dipole for stable equilibrium is
[J&K CET 2011]
  
(a) (b) (c) 0 (d)
6 3 2
2. An electric dipole of moment p is placed in a uniform electric field E. Then[Kerala CEE 2010]
(i) the torque on the dipole is p × E (ii) the potential energy of the system is p • E
(iii) the resultant force on the dipole is zero.
(a) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct (b) (i) and (iii) are correct and (ii) is wrong

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 138

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
(c) Only (i) is correct (d) (i) and (ii) are correct and (iii) is wrong
(e) (i), (ii) and (iii) are wrong

3. Let E a be the electric field due to a dipole in its axial plane distant l and let E q be the field in
the equatorial plane distant l, then the relation between E a and E q will be [JCECE 2010]
(a) E a = 4E q (b) E q =2E a (c) E a = 2E q (d) E q = 3 E a

4. The direction of electric field intensity (E) at a point on the equatorial line of an electric dipole
of dipole moment P is [Kerala CEE 2008]
(a) along the equatorial line towards the dipole
(b) along the equatorial line away from the dipole
(c) perpendicular to the equatorial line and the opposite to p
(d) perpendicular to the equatorial line and parallel to p
(e) along the axial line in the direction of p

5. An electric dipole of moment p is lying along a uniform electric field E. The work done in
rotating the dipole by 90° is [Haryana PMT 2008]
pE
(a) 2pE (b) (c) 2pE (d) pE
2
6. An electric dipole has a pair of equal and opposite point charges q and -q separated by a
distance 2x. The axis of the dipole is defined as [J&K CET 2008]
(a) direction from positive charge to negative charge
(b) direction from negative charge to positive charge
(c) perpendicular to the line joining the two charges drawn at the centre and pointing upward
direction
(d) perpendicular to the line joining the two charges drawn at the centre and pointing
downward direction

7. The dipole moment of a dipole in a uniform external field E is p. Then, the torque acting on
the dipole is [J&K CET 2008]
(a)  = p × E (b)  = p . E (c)  = 2(p + E) (d)  = (p + E)
8. An electric dipole consists of two opposite charges each 0.05 C separated by 30 mm. The
dipole is placed in an uniform external electric field of 106NC–1. The maximum torque exerted
by the field on the dipole is [Kerala CEE 2007]
(a) 6 × l0–3N-m–1 (b) 3 × 10–3N-m–1
(c) 15 × 10–3 N-m–1 (d) 1.5 × 10–3N-m–1
9. What is the angle between the electric dipole moment and the electric field strength due to it
on the equatorial line? [Punjab PMET 2006]
(a) 0° (b) 90° (c) 180° (d) None of these

10. A Gaussian sphere encloses an electric dipole within it. The total flux across the sphere is
[Guj CET 2006]
(a) zero (b) half that due to a single charge
(c) double that due to a single charge (d) dependent on the position of the dipole
11. As electric dipole placed in a non-uniform electric field in such a way that angle between p
and E is not 0° or 180°, so it experiences [Guj CET 2006]
(a) only a force but no torque (b) only a torque but no net force

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 139

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
(c) no torque and no net force (d) both a torque and net force
12. The electric field due to an electric dipole at a distance r from its centre in axial position is E.
If the dipole is rotated through an angle of 90° about its perpendicular axis, the electric field at
the same point will be [J&K CET 2005]
E
(a) E (b)
4
E
(c) (d) 2E
2

Electric Flux and Gauss’s Theorem

1. A charge Q is enclosed by a Gaussian spherical surface of radius R. If the radius is doubled,
then the outward electric flux will [CBSE AIPMT 2011]
(a) be reduced to half (b) remain the same
(c) be doubled (d) increase four times
2. The Gaussian surface for calculating the electric field due to a charge distribution is
(a) any surface near the charge distribution [J&K CET 2011]
(b) always a spherical surface
(c) a symmetrical closed surface containing the charge distribution, at every point of which
electric field has a single fixed value
(d) None of the given options
3. The total electric flux emanating from a closed surface enclosing an  -particle (e = electronic
charge) is [Kerala CEE 2011]
2e e 0 e
(a) (b) (c) e0 (d)
0 0 4
4. A point charge Q is placed at one of the vertices of a cubical block. The electric flux flowing
through this cube is [Manipal 2010]
Q Q Q Q
(a) (b) (c) (d)
60 40 80 0
5. The electric flux for Gaussian surface A that encloses the
charged particles in free is (Given q 1= –14C, q 2 = 78.85
C, q 3 = –56C)
[MP PMT 2010]
3 2 –1
(a) 10 Nm C
(b) 103CN_1C–2
(c) 6.32 × l03Nm2C–1
(d) 6.32 × 103CN-1m-2

6. A point charge +q is placed at the centre of a cube of side L. The electric flux emerging from
the cube is [WB JEE 2010]
q 6qL2 q
(a) (b) zero (c) (d)
0 0 6L2 0

7. The total electric flux through a cube when a charge 8q is placed at one corner of the cube is
0
(a) 0q (b) [Kerala CEE 2009]
q
q
(c) 40q (d)
40
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 140
 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
q
(e)
0
8. Electric flux emanating through a surface element ds = 5 i placed in an electric field E = 4i + 4
j + 4k is [J&K CET 2009]
(a) 10 units (b) 20 units
(c) 4 units (d) 16 units
9. A charge q is located at the centre of a cube. The electric flux through any face is
[BHU, JIPMER 2007]
q q
(a) (b)
6  40  6  40 
2q 4q
(c) (d)
6  40  6  40 

10. If the electric flux entering and leaving an enclosed surface respectively are 1 and 2, the
electric charge inside the surface will be [RPMT, AFMC 2007]
 2 – 1  2  1
(a) (b)
0 0
(c)  1 – 2   0 (d) (2 – 1)0

11. A square surface of side L m is in the plane of the paper.

A uniform electric field E(Vm–1), also in the plane of the
paper, is limited only to the lower half of the square
surface, (see figure). The electric flux in SI units
associated with the surface is
[CBSE AIPMT 2006]
2
(a) EL /(20) (b) EL2/2
(c) zero (d) EL2

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 141

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII

ANSWER KEY
LEVEL – 1
1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (b) 5. (c)
6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (c) 9. (d) 10. (d)
11. (d) 12. (d) 13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (c)
16. (a) 17. (a) 18. (d) 19. (a) 20. (d)
21. (c) 22. (a) 23. (b) 24. (c) 25. (b)
26. (d) 27. (a) 28. (a) 29. (a) 30. (a)
31. (a) 32. (b) 33. (a) 34. (c) 35. (a)
36. (c)

LEVEL – 2
1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (d) 4. (b) 5. (b)
6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (c) 9. (b) 10. (d)
11. (a) 12. (a) 13. (d) 14. (a) 15. (c)
16. (d) 17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (a)

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS

Question Asked in 2013, 2014, 2015 & 2016
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (b) 5. (b)
6. (b)

Electric Charge and Coulomb’s Law

1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (a) 5. (c)
6. (c) 7. (d) 8. (d) 9. (b) 10. (b)
11. (b) 12. (b) 13. (a) 14. (a) 15. (d)
16. (b) 17. (c) 18. (c) 19. (b) 20. (b)
21. (c) 22. (d) 23. (c) 24. (c) 25. (d)
26. (c) 27. (d) 28. (c) 29. (a) 30. (a)
31. (a) 32. (b) 33. (d) 34. (b) 35. (a)
36. (d) 37. (a) 38. (d) 39. (d) 40. (a)
Electric Field
1. (d) 2. (a) 3. (c) 4. (b) 5. (c)
6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (a) 9. (a) 10. (c)
11. (a) 12. (d) 13. (a) 14. (d) 15. (c)
16. (c) 17. (c) 18. (d) 19. (b) 20. (a)
21. (b) 22. (a) 23. (c) 24. (a) 25. (b)
26. (d) 27. (c) 28. (c) 29. (a) 30. (b)
31. (b) 32. (a) 33. (a) 34. (c) 35. (d)
36. (a) 37. (b) 38. (c)
Electric Dipole
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (c) 5. (d)
6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (d) 9. (c) 10. (a)
11. (d) 12. (c)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 142

 Electric Charge and Field Phy. XII
Electric Flux and Gauss's Theorem
1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (c) 5. (a)
6. (a) 7. (e) 8. (b) 9. (d) 10. (d)
11. (c)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 143

 CURRENT ELECTRICITY

INDEX
Topic Name Page No

 Chapter at a Glance 144-191

 Solved Example 192-198
 Exercise
 Level – I 199-201
 Level – II 201-205
 Level – III 206-213
 Previous Year’s Questions 214-241
 Answer Key 242-243

This Chapter Includes:

 Electric Current
 Current density (J)
 Conduction of Current in Metals
 Ohm’s Law
 Variation of Resistance With Temperature
 Colour Coding of Resistance
 Combination of Resistors
 Cell
 Grouping of Cell
 Kirchoff’s Laws
 Joule’s Heating Effect And Power
 Measuring Instruments
 Additional Points For Synopsis
 Current Electricity Phy. XII

CURRENT ELECTRICITY

ELECTRIC CURRENT
(a) Time rate of flow of charge through a cross section area is called current.
q
Iav  and
t
Instantaneous current
q dq
i  lim 
t 0 t dt

(b) Direction of current is along the direction of flow of positive charge or opposite to the
direction of flow of negative charge. But the current is a scalar quantity.
i
 i  
q   velocity qӨ   velocity
SI unit of current is ampere and
1 Ampere = 1 coloumb/sec
1 coloumb/sec = 1 A

Current in difference situation : + +

+ +
(i) Due to translatory motion of charge + +
In n particle each having a charge q, pass through a given area in
nq
time t then i 
t
If n particles each having a charge q pass per second per unit area,
the current associated with cross-sectional area A is i  nqA
If there are n particle per unit volume each having a charge q and
moving with velocity v, the current thorough, cross section A is
i  nqvA

(ii) Due to rotatory motion of charge r q

If a point charge q is moving in a circle of radius r with speed v

(frequency , angular speed  and time period T) then
q qv qω
corresponding currents i=qν= = =
T 2πr 2π

Illustration 1:Two boys A and B are sitting at two points in a field. Both boys are sitting near
assemblage of charged balls each carrying charge +3e. A throws 100 balls per
second towards B while B throws 50 balls per second towards A. Find the current at
the mid point of A and B.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 144

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
Solution: Let mid point be C as shown
Charge moving to the right per unit time = 100 × 3e = 300e
Charge moving to the left per unit time = 50 × 3e = 150e

Charge crossing C per unit time is 300e –150e = 150e towards right
I = 150e = 150 1.6 10–19 A.

Illustration 2: Flow of charge through a surface is given as

(a) Find the current through the surface at t = 5sec.
(b) Find the average current for (t = 0 to t = 10sec)
Solution: (a) Instantaneous current
dQ d
I  (4t 2  2t)  8t  2 at t = 5 sec; I = Amp
dt dt
(b) Average current
Q Q 4  (10)2  2  10 420
I     42 Amp
t t 10 10
CONDUCTOR
In some materials, the outer electrons of each atoms or molecules are only weakly bound to it.
These electrons are almost free to move throughout the body of the material and are called free
electrons. They are also known as conduction electrons. When such a material is placed in an
electric field, the free electrons move in a direction opposite to the field. Such materials are called
conductors.

INSULATOR
Another class of materials is called insulators in which all the electros are tightly bound to their
respective atoms or molecules. Effectively, there are no free electrons. When such a material is
placed in an electric field, the electrons may slightly shift opposite to the field but they can’t leave
their parent atoms or molecules and hence can’t move through long distances. Such materials are
also called dielectrics.
SEMICONDUCTOR
In semiconductors, the behaviour is like an insulator at low levels of temperature. But at higher
temperatures, a small number of electrons are able to free themselves and they respond to the
applied electric field. As the number of free electrons in a semiconductor is much smaller that in a
conductor, its bahaviour is in between a conductor and an insulator and hence, the name
semiconductor. A freed electron in a semiconductor leaves a vacancy in its normal bound position.
These vacancies also help in conduction.
CURRENT DENSITY (J)
In case of flow of charge through a cross-section, current density is defined as a vector having
magnitude equal to current per unit area surrounding that point. Remember area is normal to the
direction of charge flow (or current passes) through that point. Current density at point P is given by
 di
J= nˆ
dA ˆ
dA
dA
 
i J
i P J

dA cos

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 145

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
If the cross-sectional area is not normal to the current, the cross-sectional area normal to current in
accordance with following figure will be dA cos and so in this situation:
di    
J i.e. di  JdA cos  or di  J.dA  i   J  dA
dA cos 
i.e., in terms of current density, current is the flux of current density.
 
Note :  If current density J is uniform for a normal cross-section A then :
    
i   J  ds  J   ds [as J = constant]
  i  
or i  J  A  JA cos0  JA  J  [as  dA  A and  = 0o]
A

Current density J is a vector quantity having S.I. unit Amp/m2 and dimension.[L–2A]

CONDUCTION OF CURRENT IN METALS

According to modern views, a metal consists of a ‘lattice’ of fixed positively charged ions in which
billions and billions of free electrons are moving randomly at speed which at room temperature (i.e.
300 K) in accordance with kinetic theory of gases is given by
3kT 3  (1.38  10 23 )  300
v rms   – 105 m / s
m 9.1 10 31
The randomly moving free electrons inside the metal collide with the lattice and follow a zig-zag path
as shown in figure (A).

– +

(A) (B)
However, in absence of any electric field due to this random motion, the number of electrons
crossing from left to right is equal to the number of electrons crossing from right to left (otherwise
metal will not remain equipotential) so the net current through a cross-section is zero.

When an electric field is applied, inside the conductor due to electric force the path of electron in
general becomes curved (parabolic) instead of straight lines and electrons drift opposite to the field
figure (B). Due to this drift the random motion of electrons get modified and there is a net transfer of
electrons across a cross-section resulting in current.

RELATION BETWEEN DRIFT VELOCITY AND ELECTRIC FIELD

Due to random motion, the free electrons of metal collide with positive metal ions and undergo
change in direction after every collision. So, the thermal velocities are randomly distributed in all
possible directions. Therefore, the average velocity
  
 u1  u2  .....  un
u  zero
N

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 146

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
  
Here, u1,u2 , . . . , un are the individual thermal velocities of the free electrons at any given time and N
is the total number of free electrons in the conductor.

However, when some potential difference V is applied across the two ends of a conductor of length
, an electric field is set up. which is given by, E=V/
Since charge on an electron is e, each free electron in the conductor experiences a force
 
F  eE
in a direction opposite to the direction of electric field.

 eE
If m is the mass of the electron, then acceleration produced is a  
m
   
At any given time, an electron has a velocity such that v1  u1  a1 , where u1 is the thermal velocity

and a1 is the velocity acquired by the electron under the influence of the applied electric field.
where 1 being the time that has elapsed since the last collision.
        
Similarly, the velocities of the other electrons are v 2 ,v 3 .....v N , such that v 2  u2  a2 , v 3  u3  a3 ,
  
. . ., v n  un  aN


The average velocity of all the free electrons in the conductor is equal to the drift velocity v d of the
free electrons. Drift velocity is defined as the average velocity with which the free electrons get
drifted towards the positive terminal under the effect of the applied electric field.
   
 v1  v 2  v 3  ...  v N
Now, vd 
N
     
 (u  a1 )  (u2  a2 )  ....  (uN  aN )
or, vd  1
N
  
 (u1  u2  ....uN )   1  2  ....  N 
or, vd   a 
N  N 
  
u1  u2  ...  uN
But, 0
N
      ....  N  
 vd  a 1 2 or, v d  a .
N

Here,  is the average time elapsed between two successive collisions.


 eE
or, vd   
m
5
Drift velocity is very small it is of the order of 10–4 m/s as compared to thermal speed (–10
 m / s) of
electrons at room temperature.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 147

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
RELATION BETWEEN CURRENT & DRIFT VELOCITY OF ELECTRONS IN A CONDUCTOR
l
Suppose for a conductor
v
n = Number of electron per unit volume of the conductor E

A = Area of cross-section +
V
–

V = potential difference across the conductor

E = electric field inside the conductor

Let us assume that the positive charge carriers move with the same drift speed vd across the wire’s
cross- sectional area A as shown in the figure.

The number of charge carriers in a length L of the wire is nAL, where n is the number of charge
carriers per unit volume. The total charge of the carriers, each with charge e, in the length L is
q = (nAL)e
Since all charge carriers move along the wire with speed vd, therefore total charge moves through
any cross section of the wire in the time interval,
L
t=
vd
q
 Current (i) =
t
or, i = nAevd
i
or , vd =
nAe

 i J
or, vd =  .
nAe ne
Note :  The direction of drift velocity for electron in a metal is opposite to that of applied electric

field (i.e. current density J ).
 v d  E i.e., greater the electric field, larger will be the drift velocity.

 When a steady current flows through a conductor of non-uniform cross-section drift

 1
velocity varies inversely with area of cross-section  v d  
 A
 If diameter of a conductor is doubled, then drift velocity of electrons inside it will not
change.

Illustration 3: The potential difference applied to an X-ray tube is 5 KV and the current through it
is 3.2 mA. Then the number of electrons striking the target per second is
(a) 2  1016 (b) 5  106 (c) 1  1017 (d)4  1015
q ne it 3.2  10 3  1
Solution : (a) i    n   2  1016
t t e 1.6  1019

Illustration 4:A beam of electrons moving at a speed of 106 m/s along a line produces a current of
1.6  10–6 A. The number of electrons in the 1 metre of the beam is
(a) 106 (b) 107 (c) 1013 (d)1019

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 148

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
6
q q qv nev ix 1.6  10  1
Solution : (b) i     n   107
t (x / v) x x ev 1.6  10 19  106

Illustration 5:In the Bohr’s model of hydrogen atom, the electrons moves around the nucleus in a
circular orbit of a radius 5  10–11 metre. It’s time period is 1.5  10–16 sec. The
current associated is
(a) Zero (b) 1.6  10–19 A
(c) 0.17 A (d) 1.07  10–3 A
q 1.6  1019
Solution : (d) i  16
 1.07  10 3 A
T 1.5  10
llustration 6: A wire has a non-uniform cross-
sectional area as shown in figure. A
steady current i flows through it. Which A B
one of the following statement is correct
(a) The drift speed of electron is
constant
(b) The drift speed increases on moving
from A to B
(c) The drift speed decreases on
moving from A to B
(d) The drift speed varies randomly

1
solution : (c) For a conductor of non-uniform cross-section v d 
Area of cross-section

Illustration 7: In a wire of circular cross-section with radius r, free electrons travel with a drift
velocity v, when a current i flows through the wire. What is the current in another wire
of half the radius and of the some material when the drift velocity is 2v
[MP PET 1997]
(a) 2i (b) i (c) i/2 (d)i/4

2
r  ner 2 v i
Solution : (c) i  neAv d = ner2v and i'  ne   .2v  
2 2 2

Illustration 8: A potential difference of V is applied at the ends of a copper wire of length l and
diameter d. On doubling only d, drift velocity
(a) Becomes two times (b) Becomes half
(c) Does not change (d) Becomes one fourth
Solution : (c) Drift velocity doesn’t depends upon diameter.
Illustration 9:A current flows in a wire of circular cross-section with the free electrons travelling with
a mean drift velocity v. If an equal current flows in a wire of twice the radius new
mean drift velocity is
v
(a) v (b)
2
v
(c) (d) None of these
4
i 1 v
Solution : (c) By using v d   vd   v' 
neA A 4
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 149
 Current Electricity Phy. XII

Illustration 10: Two wires A and B of the same material, having radii in the ratio 1 : 2 and carry
currents in the ratio 4 : 1. The ratio of drift speeds of electrons in A and B is
(a) 16 : 1 (b) 1 : 16 (c) 1 : 4 (d)4 : 1
i1 A 1 v d1 r12 v d1 v d1 16
Solution : (a) As i  neA v d     .  
i2 A 2 v d2 r22 v d2 v d2 1
Tricky Example:
In a neon discharge tube 2.9  1018 Ne+ ions move to the right each second while
1.2  1018 electrons move to the left per second. Electron charge is 1.6  10–19 C.
The current in the discharge tube
(a) 1 A towards right (b) 0.66 A towards right
(c) 0.66 A towards left (d) Zero
Solution: (b) Use following trick to solve such type of problem.
Trick : In a discharge tube positive ions carry q units of charge in t seconds from anode to
cathode and negative carriers (electrons) carry the same amount of charge from
q q'
cathode to anode in t second. The current in the tube is i   .
t t'
2.9  1018  e 1.2  1018  e
Hence in this question current i    0.66A towards right.
1 1

OHM’S LAW

If the physical circumstances of the conductor (length, temperature, mechanical strain etc.) remains
constant, then the current flowing through the conductor is directly proportional to the potential
difference across it’s two ends i.e. i  V
V
 V  iR or  R ; where R is a proportionality constant, known as electric resistance.
i
(1) Ohm’s law is not a universal law, the substance which obeys ohm’s law are known as ohmic
substance for such ohmic substances graph between V and i is a straight line as shown. At
different temperatures V-i curves are different.
V
V T1
1
T2
2

1 2

i
i
V Here tan1 > tan2
Slope of the line = tan    R So R1 > R2 i.e. T1 > T2
i
(2) The device or substances which doesn’t obey ohm’s law e.g. gases, crystal rectifiers,
thermoionic valve, transistors etc. are known as non-ohmic or non-linear conductors. For
these V-i curve is not linear. In these situation the ratio between voltage and current at a
particular voltage is known as static resistance. While the rate of change of voltage to
change in current is known as dynamic resistance.
i Crystal
V 1 rectifier
Rst  
i tan 
V 1
while Rdyn  
I tan    V
A V

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 150

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
(3) Some other non-ohmic graphs are as follows :

Tetrode i
i valve i i Semi
conductor
Torch
B Diode
bulb
C

A V V V V
(A) (B) (C) (D)

RESISTANCE
Definition : The property of substance by virtue of which it opposes the flow of current through it, is
known as the resistance.
Cause of resistance of a conductor : It is due to the collisions of free electrons with the ions or
atoms of the conductor while drifting towards the positive end of the conductor.
Formula of resistance : For a conductor of cross sectional area A, resistance between the

sections A and B separated by length  is given by, R AB  
A
where  = length of the conductor 
A = Area of cross-section, and A B

 = resistivity or specific resistance of the conductor. (Its value depends upon the nature of
the material of the conductor and its temperature.)

Unit and dimension : It’s S.I. unit is Volt/Amp. or Ohm (). Also 1 ohm
1volt 108 emuof potential
  = 109 emu of resistance. It’s dimension is [ML2T 3 A 2 ] .
1Amp 10 1emuof current
Note : (i) Length of the conductor : Resistance of a conductor is directly proportional to it’s length
i.e. R  l e.g. a conducting wire having resistance R is cut in n equal parts. So
R
resistance of each part will be .
n
(ii) Resistance of a l
l
conductor is inversely
proportional to it’s area of
Less : Area of cross- More : Area of cross-
1 section
cross-section i.e. R  section
A
(iii) If a conducting wire stretches, it’s length increases, area of cross-section decreases so
resistance increases but volume remain constant.
Suppose for a conducting wire before stretching it’s length = l1, area of cross-section =
l
A1, radius = r1, diameter = d1, and resistance R1   1
A1
Before stretching After stretching
l1 l2
 

Volume remains constant i.e. A1l1 = A2l2

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 151

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
After stretching length = l2, area of cross-section = A2, radius = r2, diameter = d2 and resistance
l2
 R2  
A2

2 2 4 4
R1 l1 A2  l1   A2   r2   d 2 
Ratio of resistances          
R2 l2 A1  l 2   A1   r1   d 1 

2
2R l 
(1) If length is given then R  l  1   1 
R2  l2 

4
1 R r 
(2) If radius is given then R  4
 1  2 
r R2  r1 

Note :  After stretching if length increases by n times then resistance will increase by
1
n2 times i.e. R2  n2R1 . Similarly if radius be reduced to times then area of cross-
n
1
section decreases 2 times so the resistance becomes n4 times i.e. R2  n4R1 .
n
 After stretching if length of a conductor increases by x% then resistance will increases by 2x
% (valid only if x < 10%)
(iv) Resistance according to potential difference : Resistance of a conducting body is not
unique but depends on it’s length and area of cross-section i.e. how the potential
difference is applied. See the following figures

  

b c b c b c
a a a

CONDUCTANCE (C)
1 1
Reciprocal of resistance is known as conductance. C  It’s unit is or –1 or “Siemen”.
i
R 

i 1
Slope = tan    C
V R

V

RESISTIVITY ()
Let us consider a conductor of length  and area of cross section A. If n be the number of electrons
per unit volume in the conductor and E is the applied electric field across the two ends of the
conductor, then magnitude of drift velocity of electrons is
eE
vd =  . . . (i)
m
The current flowing through the conductor due to drift of electrons is
I = nAvde . . . (ii)
From equations (i) and (ii)
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 152
 Current Electricity Phy. XII
2
nAe E
I= . . . (iii)
m
If V is the potential difference applied across the two ends of the conductor, then
V
E= . . . (iv)

From equations (iii) and (iv)
nAe2 V V m
I= or,  2
m I ne A
m  V
or, R= 2 [ R = ]
ne  A I

or, R=
A
It means the resistivity of the material of a conductor is
m
=
ne2 
It shows that,
1
(i)   [where n = number of free electrons per unit volume of the conductor]
n
1
(ii)   [where  = average relaxation time of free electrons in the conductor]

VARIATION OF RESISTIVITY / RESISTANCE WITH TEMPERATURE
 is independent of the shape and size of the conductor. It depends on temperature.
As temperature increases,  increases in case of Ohmic conductors.
At any temperature t,  is given by the following expression
(t) = 0 (1 + T),
where 0 = the resistivity at 0C, and  = temperature coefficient of resistivity.
(  o ) 1 d
Also,     .
o .T  dT
l
Since R  . , the above equations can also be written for
A Rt
the resistance i.e.
(R  Ro ) 1 dR
   R0
Ro .T R dT
where R0 = the resistance at 0C, and  = temperature O toC
coefficient of resistance.

The resistivity of a semiconductor decreases rapidly with increasing temperature. We can explain
these facts from the equation
m
= 2 . . . (i)
ne 
(i) In case of conductors, the number of free electrons is fixed. Due to increase of temperature,
the amplitude of vibration of atoms / ions increases. As a constant result of this, the
collisions of electrons with the atoms become more effective and frequent. Therefore, 
decreases and hence  increases.

(ii) In case of insulators and semiconductors, the number of charge carriers at temperature T is
given by
E /k T
n (T) = n0e g B . . . (ii)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 153

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
where Eg is the energy gap between valence and conduction bands in a solid.
Combining equations (i) and (ii),
T = 0 eEg /kBT
which shows that for semiconductors and insulators, resistivity increases with decreasing
temperature.

Metal Semiconductor Superconductor

 

TC

T T T

 increases with  decreases with temperature  decreases with temperature and

temperature becomes zero at a certain
temperature
CONDUCTIVITY ()
1
Reciprocal of resistivity is called conductivity () i.e.   with unit mho/m and dimensions

[M1L3T 3 A 2 ] .

Illustration 11: Two wires of resistance R1 and R2 have temperature co-efficient of resistance 1
and 2 respectively. These are joined in series. The effective temperature co-efficient
of resistance is
1   2
(a) (b) 1 2
2
1R1   2R2 R1R 212
(c) (d)
R1  R 2 R12  R22
Solution : (c) Suppose at toC resistances of the two wires becomes R1t and R2t respectively and
equivalent resistance becomes Rt. In series grouping Rt = R1t + R2t, also R1t = R1(1 +
1t) and R2t = R2(1 + 2t)
Rt = R1(1 + 1t) + R2(1 + 2t) = (R1 + R2) + (R11 + R22)t =
 R   R 22 
(R1  R2 ) 1  1 1 t .
 R1  R 2 
R11  R 2 2
Hence effective temperature co-efficient is .
R1  R 2
Illustration 12: The resistance of a wire at 20oC is 20  and at 500oC is 60. At which
temperature resistance will be 25
(a) 50oC (b) 60oC (c) 70oC (d) 80oC
R1 (1   t1 ) 20 1  20 1
Solution : (d) By using     
R 2 (1   t 2 ) 60 1  500 220

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 154

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
 1 
 1  20 
20  220   t =
Again by using the same formula for 20 and 25  
25  1 
1  t
 220 
80oC
Illustration 13: A rod of certain metal is 1 m long and 0.6 cm in diameter. It’s resistance is 3  10–
3
. A disc of the same metal is 1 mm thick and 2 cm in diameter, what is the
resistance between it’s circular faces.
(a) 1.35  10–6 (b) 2.7  10–7 
(c) 4.05  10–6 (d) 8.1  10–6 
l R disc ldisc A rod R disc 103 (0.3  10 2 )2
Solution : (b) By using R  . ;     
A Rrod lrod A disc 3  10 3 1 (10 2 )2

 Rdisc = 2.7  10–7.

Illustration 14: Length of a hollow tube is 5m, it’s outer diameter is 10 cm and thickness of it’s wall
is 5 mm. If resistivity of the material of the tube is 1.7  10–8 m then resistance of
tube will be
(a) 5.6  10–5  (b) 2  10–5 
(c) 4  10–5  (d) None of these
l
Solution : (a) By using R  . ; here A  (r22  r12 )
A r2 5 mm
r1
Outer radius r2 = 5cm 10 cm

Inner radius r1 = 5 – 0.5 = 4.5 cm

5
So R  1.7  108   5.6  10 5 
{(5  10 )  (4.5  10 2 )2 }
2 2

Illustration 15: Equal potentials are applied on an iron and copper wire of same length. In order to
 r 
have same current flow in the wire, the ratio  iron  of their radii must be [Given
r
 copper 
that specific resistance of iron = 1.0  10–7 m and that of copper = 1.7  10–8 m]
(a) About 1.2 (b) About 2.4 (c) About 3.6 (d) About
4.8
Solution: (b) V = constant., i = constant. So R = constant
ili CulCu l  l
   2i i  Cu2 Cu
Ai A Cu ri rCu

ri i 1.0  10 7 100
     2.4
rCu Cu 1.7  10 8 17

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 155

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
Illustration 16: Following figure shows cross-sections through three long conductors of the same
length and material, with square cross-section of edge lengths as shown. Conductor
B will fit snugly within conductor A, and conductor C will fit snugly within conductor B.
Relationship between their end to end resistance is
3a
2a
(a) RA = RB = RC a
(b) RA > RB > RC
A B C
(c) RA < RB < R
(d) Information is not sufficient
Solution : (a) All the conductors have equal lengths. Area of cross-section of A is
( 
3 a)2  ( 2 a)2  a2

Similarly area of cross-section of B = Area of cross-section of C = a2

l
Hence according to formula R   ; resistances of all the conductors are equal i.e.
A
RA = RB = RC
Illustration 17: Dimensions of a block are 1 cm  1 cm  100 cm. If specific resistance of its material
is 3  10–7 ohm-m, then the resistance between it’s opposite rectangular faces is
(a) 3  10–9 ohm (b) 3  10–7 ohm (c) 3  10–5 ohm (d) 3  10–3 ohm
Solution: (b) Length l = 1 cm  10 2 m
Area of cross-section A = 1 cm  100 cm
= 100 cm2 = 10–2 m2
1 cm

10 2 100 cm
Resistance R = 3  10–7  2
= 3  10–7 
10 1 cm

Note :  In the above question for calculating equivalent resistance between two
opposite square faces.
l = 100 cm = 1 m, A = 1 cm2 = 10–4 m2, so resistance
1
R = 3  10–7  = 3  10–3 
10 4

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 156

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
Tricky Example:
Two rods A and B of same material and length have their electric resistances are in
ratio 1:2. When both the rods are dipped in water, the correct statement will be
(a) A has more loss of weight
(b) B has more loss of weight
(c) Both have same loss of weight
(d) Loss of weight will be in the ratio 1 : 2
L R A A R
Solution: (a) R    1  2 (, L constant)  1  2  2
A R2 A1 A 2 R1
Now when a body dipped in water, loss of weight = VLg = ALLg
(Loss of weight)1 A1
So   2 ; So A has more loss of weight
(Loss of weight)2 A 2
Tricky Example:
The V-i graph for a conductor makes an angle  with V-axis. Here V denotes the
voltage and i denotes current. The resistance of conductor is given by
(a) sin (b) cos
(c) tan (d) cot
Solution: (d) At an instant approach the student will choose tan will be the right answer. But it is
to be seen here the curve makes the angle  with the V-axis. So it makes an angle
(90 – ) with the i-axis. So resistance = slope = tan (90 – ) = cot.

Colour coding of resistance

The resistance, having high values are used in different electrical and electronic circuits. They are
generally made up of carbon, like 1 k, 2 k, 5 k etc. To know the value of resistance colour code
is used. These code are printed in form of set of rings or strips. By reading the values of colour
bands, we can estimate the value of resistance.
The carbon resistance has normally four coloured rings or strips say A, B, C and D as shown in
A B C D
following figure.

Colour band A and B indicate the first two significant figures of resistance in ohm, while the C band
gives the decimal multiplier i.e. the number of zeros that follows the two significant figures A and B.
Last band (D band) indicates the tolerance in percent about the indicated value or in other ward it
represents the percentage accuracy of the indicated value.
The tolerance in the case of gold is  5% and in silver is  10%. If only three bands are marked on
carbon resistance, then it indicate a tolerance of 20%.
The following table gives the colour code for carbon resistance.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 157

 Current Electricity Phy. XII

Letters as an Colour Figure Multiplier Colour Tolerance

aid to memory (A, B) (C) (D)
B Black 0 10o Gold 5%
B Brown 1 101 Silver 10%
2
R Red 2 10 No-colour 20%
O Orange 3 103
Y Yellow 4 104
G Green 5 105
B Blue 6 106
V Violet 7 107
G Grey 8 108
W White 9 109

Note :  To remember the sequence of colour code following sentence should kept in memory.
B B R O Y Great Britain Very Good Wife.

COMBINATION OF RESISTORS

(i) Series combination

Consider the series combination of two resistors with resistances R1 and R2 respectively as
shown in the diagram.
R1
A B
R2

It is obvious that they will carry the same current when connected to a battery. By equivalent
of R1 & R2 between A and B in the above network, we mean a single resistor which will carry
the same current for an identical potential difference across ends A and B. If V&I be the
corresponding potential difference and current then for the series combination shown above,
V = IR1 + IR2
If Req be the equivalent resistance then,
V = I Req
Using these equations, we get
Req = R1 + R2
In general, for a series combination of n resistors the equivalent resistance will be given as
Req = R1 + R2 + . . . . . + Rn

(ii) Parallel combination

For this network shown here, if Req be the equivalent resistance,

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 158

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
VA – VB = I Req. R1
I1
But, I = I1 + I2
V I I
V
And I1 = ; I2 =
R1 R2 A B
V V V R2
Hence, = +
Req R1 R2 I2

1 1 1
or = +
Req R1 R2
For n resistors in parallel, the equivalent resistance will be given as
n
1 1
=
Req i1 Ri
Methods of Determining Equivalent Resistance

(1) Method of successive reduction: It is the most common technique to determine the
equivalent resistance. So far, we have been using this method to find out the equivalent
resistances. This method is applicable only when we are able to identify resistances in
series or in parallel. The method is based on the simplification of the circuit by
successive reduction of the series and parallel combinations. For example to calculate
the equivalent resistance between the point A and B, the network shown below
successively reduced.
R R

R R R R

2R R
2R  2R  R  R R 3R/2

R 2R R 2R R 2R RA R B A B
A R B A R B A R B

(2) Method of equipotential points : This method is based on identifying the points of same
potential and joining them. The basic rule to identify the points of same potential is the
symmetry of the network.
(i) In a given network there may be two axes of symmetry.
(a) Parallel axis of symmetry, that is, along the direction of current flow.
(b) Perpendicular axis of symmetry, that is perpendicular to the direction of flow of current.
For example in the network shown below the axis AA is the parallel axis of symmetry,
and the axis BB is the perpendicular axis of symmetry. B 2
R R
6 7
R R R
A R A
1 O R 3
R R R
5 8
R R
B4

(ii) Points lying on the perpendicular axis of symmetry may have same potential. In the
given network, point 2, 0 and 4 are at the same potential.
(iii) Points lying on the parallel axis of symmetry can never have same potential.
(iv) The network can be folded about the parallel axis of symmetry, and the overlapping
nodes have same potential. Thus as shown in figure, the following points have same
potential

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 159

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
(a) 5 and 6 (b) 2, 0 and 4 (c) 7 and 8
2, 4
R R
R/2 R/2 3R/2
R R
5, 6 7, 8  1 3
 R/2 R/2
R R
R/2 R/2
R R R
R R R 1 3

1 O 3
Note :  Above network may be split up into two equal parts about the parallel axis of symmetry as
shown in figure each part has a resistance R, then the equivalent resistance of the
R'
network will be R  .
2
2
R R
R  = 3R
R R 
1 3
1 R R 3
A A
Illustration 18: What is the resistance of a carbon resistance which has bands of colours brown,
black and brown
(a) 100  (b) 1000  (c) 10  (d) 1 
1
Solution : (a) R = 10  10  20%  100 

4 16 
Illustration 19: In the following circuit reading of voltmeter V is
(a) 12 V (b) 8 V V
2A
(c) 20 V (d) 16 V
16  4

Solution : (a) P.d. between X and Y is 4 Y 16 

VXY = VX – VY = 1  4 = 4 V …. (i) 1A
2A
and p.d. between X and Z is V
X
1A
VXZ = VX – VZ = 1  16 = 16 V …. (ii)
16  Z 4
On solving equations (i) and (ii) we get potential
difference between Y and Z i.e., reading of
voltmeter is VY  VZ  12V

Illustration 20: The equivalent resistance between points A and 1 1 1

A
B of an infinite network of resistance, each of 1
, connected as shown is
1 1 1 
(a) Infinite (b) 2 
1 5 B
(c)  (d) Zero
2

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 160

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
Solution : (c) Suppose the effective resistance between A and B is Req. Since the network consists
of infinite cell. If we exclude one cell from the chain, remaining network have infinite
cells i.e. effective resistance between C and D will also Req R R
A C
RReq 1
So now Req  Ro  (R|| R eq )  R   Req  [1  5] Req
R  Req 2 R

B D
Illustration 21: Four resistances 10 , 5 , 7  and 3  are connected so that they form the sides
of a rectangle AB, BC, CD and DA respectively. Another resistance of 10  is
connected across the diagonal AC. The equivalent resistance between A & B is
(a) 2 (b) 5 (c) 7 (d) 10 
Solution : (b)
Series Parallel
(7 S 3) = 10 (10 ||10) = 5
7 Series
D C C C
(5 S 5) = 10
10
10 10 5
3 5  5  5

10 10 10

A B A B A B


10
10  10
So R eq   5  10
10  10
A B

Illustration 22: The equivalent resistance between A and B in r

the circuit shown will be
5 6 r r
(a) r (b) r r r
4 5
7 8 A
r C r
B
(c) r (d) r
6 7

Solution : (d) In the circuit, by means of symmetry the point C is at zero potential. So the
equivalent circuit can be drawn as
Series
r (r S r) = 2r r Parallel

r r r 2r r
r r 

A B A r r B
r r
Series

2 Series
8
rr r  r
3 3
2
r
 8r  8 r 3 r
R eq   || 2r   r 
3  7 

A 2r B A 2r B

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 161

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
Illustration 23: If each resistance in the figure is of 9  then reading of ammeter is
(a) 5 A
(b) 8 A
+
(c) 2 A 9V
(d) 9 A –

9 A
Solution : (a) Main current through the battery i   9A . Current through each resistance will be
1
1A and only 5 resistances on the right side of ammeter contributes for passing
current through the ammeter. So reading of ammeter will be 5A.

Illustration 24: A wire of resistance 0.5 m–1 is bent into a circle of radius 1 m. The same wire
is connected across a diameter AB as shown in fig. The equivalent resistance is
(a)  ohm
(b)  ( + 2) ohm
(c)  / ( + 4) ohm A B
(d) ( + 1) ohm
i i
Solution : (c) Resistance of upper semicircle = Resistance of lower
semicircle 0.5 

= 0.5  (R) = 0.5 

Resistance of wire AB = 0.5  2 = 1  A 1 B
Hence equivalent resistance between A and B
1 1 1 1  i i
    R AB  
R AB 0.5 1 0.5  (   4) 0.5 

i R 60
Illustration 24: If in the given figure i = 0.25 amp, then the value R will be
20
(a) 48 
12 V
(b) 12  10
(c) 120 
(d) 42  Parallel
V 12 i R 60
Solution : (d) i = 0.25 amp V = 12 V Req    48  20
i 0.25
Now from the circuit Req  R  (60 || 20 || 10) 12 V
10
=R+6
 R = Req – 6 = 48 – 6 = 42 
Tricky Example:
The effective resistance between point P and Q of the electrical circuit shown in the
figure is
2R 2R

r 2R
r
P Q
2R

2R 2R
2Rr 8R(R  r) 5R
(a) (b) (c) 2r + 4R (d)  2r
Rr 3R  r 2

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 162

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
Solution : (a) The points A, O, B are at same potential. So the figure can be redrawn as
follows
A Series
2R 2R

Series
r r
P Q  P Q
O
Series
2R 2R
B
(II)
(I) 
4R

2r
2Rr P Q
R eq   4R || 2r || 4R 
Rr 4R

Tricky Example:
In the following circuit if key K is pressed then the galvanometer reading becomes
half. The resistance of galvanometer is
+ –
2R 2R

r 2R
r
P R G
Q
2R K

2R 2R S = 40 
(a) 20  (b) 30  (c) 40  (d) 50 
Solution : (c) Galvanometer reading becomes half means current distributes equally between
galvanometer and resistance of 40 . Hence galvanometer resistance must be
40 .
CELL
The device which converts chemical energy into electrical energy is known as electric cell.

+
Anode A
Cathode –

+ –

–
+

Electrolyte

(1) A cell neither creates nor destroys charge but maintains the flow of charge present at
various parts of the circuit by supplying energy needed for their organised motion.
(2) Cell is a source of constant emf but not constant current.
(3) Mainly cells are of two types :
(i) Primary cell : Cannot be recharged (ii) Secondary cell : Can be recharged
(4) The direction of flow of current inside the cell is from negative to positive electrode while
outside the cell is form positive to negative electrode.
(5) A cell is said to be ideal, if it has zero internal resistance.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 163

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
(6) Emf of cell (E) : The energy given by the cell in the flow of unit charge in the whole circuit
W
(including the cell) is called it’s electromotive force (emf) i.e. emf of cell E  , It’s unit is
q
volt or The potential difference across the terminals of a cell when it is not given any current
is called it’s emf.
(7) Potential difference (V) : The energy given by the cell in the
R
flow of unit charge in a specific part of electrical circuit
(external part) is called potential difference. It’s unit is also volt
or i
The voltage across the terminals of a cell when it is supplying
current to external resistance is called potential difference or
terminal voltage. Potential difference is equal to the product of B E r A
current and resistance of that given part i.e. V = iR.
(8) Internal resistance (r) : In case of a cell the opposition of electrolyte to the flow of current
through it is called internal resistance of the cell. The internal resistance of a cell depends
on the distance between electrodes (r  d), area of electrodes [r  (1/A)] and nature,
concentration (r  C) and temperature of electrolyte [r  (1/temp.)]. Internal resistance is
different for different types of cells and even for a given type of cell it varies from cell to cell.
Cell in Various Position
(1) Closed circuit (when the cell is discharging)
R
E
(i) Current given by the cell i 
Rr V = iR
(ii) Potential difference across the resistance V  iR i

(iii) Potential drop inside the cell = ir

(iv) Equation of cell E  V  ir (E > V)
E, r
E 
(v) Internal resistance of the cell r    1  R
V 
Pmax = E2/4r
(vi) Power dissipated in external resistance (load)
2
V2  E  P
P  Vi  i2R   .R
R  R  r 
Power delivered will be maximum when R=r
2
E R
R  r so Pmax  .
4r
This statement in generalised from is called “maximum power transfer theorem”.
(vii) Short trick to calculate E and r : In the closed circuit of a cell having emf E and
internal resistance r. If external resistance changes from R1 to R2 then current changes
from i1 to i2 and potential difference changes from V1 to V2. By using following relations
we can find the value of E and r.
i1i2  i R  i R  V  V1
E (R1  R2 ) r  2 2 1 1 2
i2  i1  i1  i 2  i1  i 2
Note :  When the cell is charging i.e. current is given to the cell then E = V – ir and
E < V. + V –

E, r

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 164

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
(2) Open circuit and short circuit
Open circuit Short circuit
R
C D A B R=0

E, r E, r

(i) Current through the circuit i = 0 (i) Maximum current (called short
circuit current) flows momentarily
E
isc 
r
(ii) Potential difference between A and B, VAB = E (ii) Potential difference V = 0
(iii) Potential difference between C and D,
VCD = 0
Note :  Above information’s can be summarized by the following graph

V
Vmax =E; i = 0

imax =E/r ; V = 0 i

CONCEPTS

 It is a common misconception that “current in the circuit will be maximum when power
consumed by the load is maximum.”

Actually current i  E / (R  r) is maximum (= E/r) when R = min = 0 with

2
PL  (E / r)  0  0min. while power consumed by the load E2R/(R + r)2 is maximum
(= E2/4r) when R = r and i  (E / 2r)  max(  E / r).

 Emf is independent of the resistance of the circuit and depends upon the nature of
electrolyte of the cell while potential difference depends upon the resistance between the
two points of the circuit and current flowing through the circuit.

 Emf is a cause and potential difference is an effect.

 Whenever a cell or battery is present in a branch there must be some resistance (internal
or external or both) present in that branch. In practical situation it always happen because
we can never have an ideal cell or battery with zero resistance.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 165

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
Illustration 25: A new flashlight cell of emf 1.5 volts gives a current of 15 amps, when connected
directly to an ammeter of resistance 0.04 . The internal resistance of cell is
(a) 0.04  (b) 0.06  (c) 0.10  (d) 10 
E 1.5
Solution : (b) By using i   15   r = 0.06 
Rr 0.04  r
Illustration 26: For a cell, the terminal potential difference is 2.2 V when the circuit is open and
reduces to 1.8 V, when the cell is connected across a resistance, R = 5. The
internal resistance of the cell is
10 9 11 5
(a)  (b)  (c)  (d) 
9 10 9 9
Solution : (a) In open circuit, E = V = 2.2 V, In close circuit, V = 1.8 V, R = 5
E   2.2  10
So internal resistance, r    1 R    1  5  r  
V   1.8  9
Illustration 27: The internal resistance of a cell of emf 2V is 0.1 . It’s connected to a resistance of
3.9 . The voltage across the cell will be
(a) 0.5 volt (b) 1.9 volt (c) 1.95 volt (d) 2 volt
E  2 
Solution : (c) By using r    1 R  0.1    1  3.9  V  1.95 volt
V  V 
Illustration 28: When the resistance of 2  is connected across the terminal of the cell, the
current is 0.5 amp. When the resistance is increased to 5 , the current is 0.25 amp.
The emf of the cell is
(a) 1.0 volt (b) 1.5 volt (c) 2.0 volt (d) 2.5 volt
ii 0.5  0.25
Solution : (b) By using E  1 2 (R1  R2 )  (2  5)  1.5 volt
(i2  i1 ) (0.25  0.5)
Illustration 29: A primary cell has an emf of 1.5 volts, when short-circuited it gives a current of 3
amperes. The internal resistance of the cell is
(a) 4.5 ohm (b) 2 ohm
(c) 0.5 ohm (d) 1/4.5 ohm
E 1.5
Solution : (c) isc   3  r = 0.5 
r r
Illustration 30: A battery of internal resistance 4  is connected to the network of resistances as
shown. In order to give the maximum power to the network, the value of R (in )
should be R R

(a) 4/9
R 6R R
(b) 8/9 E
R
(c) 2
4R
(d) 18
Solution : (c) The equivalent circuit becomes a balanced wheatstone bridge
R 2R
R 2R 3R
6R
 6R  2R 4R
2R 4R 6R

4R 4R 4
For maximum power transfer, external resistance should be equal to internal
resistance of source
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 166
 Current Electricity Phy. XII
(R  2R)(2R  4R) 3R  6R
  4 i.e.  4 or R = 2
(R  2R)  (2R  4R) 3R  6R

Illustration 31: A torch bulb rated as 4.5 W, 1.5 V is connected as shown in the figure. The emf of
the cell needed to make the bulb glow at full intensity is 4.5 W, 1.5 V
(a) 4.5 V
(b) 1.5 V 1
(c) 2.67 V
(d) 13.5 V
E (r = 2.67)
Solution : (d) When bulb glows with full intensity, potential difference across it is 1.5 V. So current
through the bulb and resistance of 1 are 3 A and 1.5 A respectively. So main
current from the cell i = 3 + 1.5 = 4.5 A. By using E  V  iR  E = 1.5 + 4.5  2.67 =
13.5 V.

Tricky Example

Potential difference across the terminals of the battery shown in figure is (r = internal
resistance of battery)
10 V r =1

4

(a) 8 V (b) 10 V (c) 6 V (d) Zero

Solution : (d) Battery is short circuited so potential difference is zero.

GROUPING OF CELL
Group of cell is called a battery.
(1) Series grouping : In series grouping anode of one cell is connected to cathode of other cell
and so on.
(i) n identical cells are connected in series
E1, r1 E2, r2 E3, r3 En, rn
(a) Equivalent emf of the combination Eeq  nE
(b) Equivalent internal resistance req  nr
i
nE
(c) Main current = Current from each cell  i 
R  nr
R
(d) Potential difference across external resistance V  iR
V
(e) Potential difference across each cell V ' 
n
i
(f) Power dissipated in the circuit i' 
n
 E2 
(g) Condition for maximum power R  nr and Pmax  n  
 4r 
(h) This type of combination is used when nr << R.

(ii) If non-identical cell are connected in series

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 167

 Current Electricity Phy. XII

Cells are connected in right order Cells are wrongly connected

E1, r1 E2, r2
(E1 > E2)
E1, r1 E2, r2

i 1 2
R
i
R
(a) Equivalent emf Eeq  E1  E2
E eq (a) Equivalent emf Eeq = E1 – E2
(b) Current i  E  E2
R  req (b) Current i  1
R  req
(c) Potential difference across each cell
V1  E1  ir1 and V2  E 2  ir2 (c) in the above circuit cell 1 is discharging so
it’s equation is E1  V1  ir1  V1  E1  ir1
and cell 2 is charging so it’s equation
E2  V2  ir2  V2  E 2  ir2

(2) Parallel grouping : In parallel grouping all anodes are connected at one point and all
cathode are connected together at other point. E, r

(i) If n identical cells are connected in parallel E, r

(a) Equivalent emf Eeq = E
(b) Equivalent internal resistance Req  r / n E, r

i
E
(c) Main current i  R
Rr /n
(d) P.d. across external resistance = p.d. across each cell = V = iR
i
(e) Current from each cell i' 
n
2
 E 
(f) Power dissipated in the circuit P    .R
R r / n
 E2 
(g) Condition for max power R  r / n and Pmax  n   (h) This type of combination is
 4r 
used when nr >> R

(ii) If non-identical cells are connected in parallel : If cells are connected with right polarity as
shown below then
i1 E1, r1
E r  E 2r1
(a) Equivalent emf Eeq  1 2
r1  r2
E eq
(b) Main current i 
r  Req i i2 E2, r2

E1  iR E  iR R
(c) Current from each cell i1  and i2  2
r1 r2

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 168

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
Note :  In this combination if cell’s are connected with reversed polarity as shown in figure
then :
i1 E1,r1

E1r2  E 2r1
Equivalent emf E eq 
r1  r2
i i2 E2, r2

R
(3) Mixed Grouping : If n identical cell’s are connected in a row and such m row’s are
connected in parallel as shown.
E, r E, r E, r
(i) Equivalent emf of the combination Eeq  nE
1
1 2 n
nr
(ii) Equivalent internal resistance of the combination req  2
m i
nE mnE m
(iii) Main current flowing through the load i  
nr mR  nr V
R
m R
(iv) Potential difference across load V  iR
V
(v) Potential difference across each cell V ' 
n
i
(vi) Current from each cell i' 
n
nr E2
(vii) Condition for maximum power R  and Pmax  (mn)
m 4r
(viii) Total number of cell = mn

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 169

 Current Electricity Phy. XII

Concepts
 In series grouping of cell’s their emf’s are additive or subtractive while their internal
resistances are always additive. If dissimilar plates of cells are connected together their
emf’s are added to each other while if their similar plates are connected together their
emf’s are subtractive.

E1 E2 E1 E2
Eeq  E1  E 2 & req  r1  r2 Eeq  E1  E 2 (E1  E2 ) & req  r1  r2
 In series grouping of identical cells. If one cell is wrongly connected then it will cancel out
the effect of two cells e.g. If in the combination of n identical cells (each having emf E and
internal resistance r) if x cell are wrongly connected then equivalent emf Eeq  (n  2x)E
and equivalent internal resistance req  nr .
 In parallel grouping of two identical cell having no internal resistance
Eeq  E Eeq  0
R R

E E

E E

 When two cell’s of different emf and no internal resistance are connected in parallel then
equivalent emf is indeterminate, note that connecting a wire with a cell but with no
resistance is equivalent to short circuiting. Therefore the total current that will be flowing
will be infinity.
R

E1

E2

Illustration 32: Two batteries A and B each of emf 2 volt are connected in series to external
resistance R = 1 . Internal resistance of A is 1.9  and that of B is 0.9 , what is
the potential difference between the terminals of battery A
(a) 2 V
(b) 3.8 V A B
(c) 0
(d) None of these
E  E2 22 4
Solution : (c) i  1   .
R  r1  r2 1  1.9  0.9 3.8 R
4
Hence VA  E A  irA 2 1.9  0
3.8
Illustration 33: In a mixed grouping of identical cells 5 rows are connected in parallel by each row
contains 10 cell. This combination send a current i through an external resistance of
20 . If the emf and internal resistance of each cell is 1.5 volt and 1  respectively
then the value of i is
(a) 0.14 (b) 0.25 (c) 0.75 (d) 0.68

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 170

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
Solution : (d) No. of cells in a row n = 10; No. of such rows m = 5
nE 10  1.5 15
i   = 0.68 amp
 nr   10  1  22
 R    20  
 m  5 
Illustration 34: In the adjoining circuit, the battery E1 has as emf of 12 volt and zero internal
resistance, while the battery E has an emf of 2 volt. If the galvanometer reads zero,
then the value of resistance X ohm is 500 O
A G B
(a) 10
(b) 100 E1 X E
(c) 500
(d) 200 D C
P
Solution : (b) For zero deflection in galvanometer the potential differ
ent across X should be E = 2V
12X
In this condition 2
500  X
 X = 100 
Illustration 35: In the circuit shown here E1 = E2 = E3 = 2V and R1 = R2 = 4 . The current flowing
between point A and B through battery E2 is E1 R1

(a) Zero
(b) 2 A from A to B E2
B
A
(c) 2 A from B to A
(d) None of these E3
R2

Solution : (b) The equivalent circuit can be drawn as since E1 & E3 are parallely connected
2V R = (R1 ||R2) = 2
22
So current i   2Amp from A to B.
2
2V
A B

Illustration 36: A wire of length L and 3 identical cells of negligible internal resistances are
connected in series. Due to this current, the temperature of the wire is raised by T
in time t. A number N of similar cells is now connected in series with a wire of the
same material and cross-section but of length 2L. The temperature of wire is raised
by same amount T in the same time t. The value of N is
(a) 4 (b) 6 (c) 8 (d) 9
Solution : (b) Heat = mST = i2Rt
Case I : Length (L)  Resistance = R and mass = m
Case II : Length (2L)  Resistance = 2R and mass = 2m
m1S1T1 i12R1t1 mST i2Rt
So  2   21
m2S2 T2 i2r2 t 2 2mST i2 2Rt
(3E)2 (NE)2
 i1  i2   N=6
12 2R

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 171

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
Tricky Example
n identical cells, each of emf E and internal resistance r, are joined in series to form a
closed circuit. The potential difference across any one cell is
E  n  1
(a) Zero (b) E (c) (d)  E
n  n 
nE E
Solution: (a) Current in the circuit i  
nr r
The equivalent circuit of one cell is shown in the figure. Potential difference across
E – + i
the cell  VA  VB  E  ir  E  .r  0
r A E r B

KIRCHOFF’S LAWS
To maintain a steady current in a conductor, a constant potential difference must be maintained
across its ends. Cells or batteries are used to accomplish this task. If one or more conductors are
connected in such a manner that it offers one or more closed paths for current to flow, the
arrangement is referred to as an electric circuit. The analysis of such circuits is accomplished with
the help of two laws known as Kirchoff’s laws: Kirchoff’s Current law (KCL) and Kirchoff’s Voltage
law (KVL).

KCL : Kirchoff’s current law states that sum of the currents entering a junction point in a
circuit must be equal to the sum of the current leaving it. In other words algebraic sum of all
the currents meeting at a junction is zero.

The word algebraic here means that we have to take into account the current direction in the
summation, i.e. if the currents reaching the junction are taken as positive, the current leaving it is to
be taken as negative.
For the shown diagram, KCL gives us I2
I1 - (I2) + (-I3) = 0
or, I1 = I2 + I3 I1

KCL is a direct consequence of the principle of conservation
of electric charge. I3

KVL : Kirchoff’s voltage law states that the algebraic sum of the potential differences in any
loop including those associated with emf must be equal to zero.

Mathematically,
  vi =  ei
In order to get the correct value of potential drop for different type of elements, you may
consider following facts.

(i) In a resistor current flows from high potential to low potential end.
Hence for the resistor shown below.
V A - VB = IR
R B
 
A
I

(ii) If E & r be the EMF and internal resistance of the cell shown below
VB-V A = E – Ir
I
 
B A

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 172

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
(iii) If you encounter a capacitor with charges on its plates as shown in the diagram
q -q
 
A B

V A - VB = q/C where C is its capacitance and

I = dq/dt
(5) Determination of equivalent resistance by Kirchoff’s method : This method is useful
when we are not able to identify any two resistances in series or in parallel. It is based on
the two Kirchhoff’s laws. The method may be described in the following guideline.
(i) Assume an imaginary battery of emf E connected between the two terminals across
which we have to calculate the equivalent resistance.
(ii) Assume some value of current, say i, coming out of the battery and distribute it among
each branch by applying Kirchhoff’s current law.
(iii) Apply Kirchhoff’s voltage law to formulate as many equations as there are unknowns. It
should be noted that at least one of the equations must include the assumed battery.
E
(iv) Solve the equations to determine ratio which is the equivalent resistance of the
i
network.
e.g. Suppose in the following network of 12 identical resistances, equivalent resistance
between point A and C is to be calculated.
B
R R
E F
R R R
R
A C
R
R R R
H G
R R
D
According to the above guidelines we can solve this problem as follows
Step (1) Step (2)
B B
R R R R
i i
E F E F
R R R R i R R
R 2i R i 2i
A C A 2i C
R i R
i 2i
R R R R R R
H Hi G
G
R i R
R R 4i 4i
D
D
E
E

An imaginary battery of emf E is assumed The current in each branch is distributed

across the terminals A and C by assuming 4i current coming out of the
battery.
Step (3) Applying KVL along the loop including the nodes A, B, C and the battery E. Voltage
equation is 2iR  iR  iR  2iR  E  0

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 173

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
Step (4) After solving the above equation, we get 6iR = E  equivalent resistance between
E 6iR 3
A and C is R    R
4i 4i 2

Concepts
 Using Kirchoff’s law while dividing the current having a junction through different arms of a
network, it will be same through different arms of same resistance if the end points of these
arms are equilocated w.r.t. exit point for current in network and will be different through
different arms if the end point of these arms are not equilocated w.r.t. exit point for current
of the network.
e.g. In the following figure the current going in arms AB, AD and AL will be same because
the location of end points B, D and L of these arms are symmetrically located w.r.t. exit
point N of the network.
B i
C
2i
6i i i
A D
i i
2i i
M 2i N
i 6i
2i
L i K

Illustration 37: In the following circuit E1 = 4V, R1 = 2 E1 R1

E2 = 6V, R2 = 2 and R3 = 4. The current i1 is
i1
(a) 1.6 A R2
(b) 1.8 A
(c) 2.25 A i2 R3
(d) 1 A E2

Solution : (b) For loop (1) 2i1  2(i1  i2 )  4  0  2i1  i2  2 4V 2

For loop (2) 4i2  2(i1  i2 )  6  0  3i2  i1  3 i1 1 (i1 – i2) i1

2
After solving equation (i) and (ii) we get i1  1.8A
i2 2 i2
and i2  1.6A
6V 4

Illustration 38: In the circuit shown in figure, find the current A 6 B 3 C

through the branch BD
(a) 5 A 15 V
3
(b) 0 A 30 V
(c) 3 A
D
(d) 4 A
Solution : (a) The current in the circuit are assumed as shown 6 i1 B 3 i1 – i2 C
A
in the fig.
Applying KVL along the loop ABDA, we get 30 V
15 V 3
– 6i1 – 3 i2 + 15 = 0 or 2i1 + i2 = 5
i2
Applying KVL along the loop BCDB, we get
i1 D
– 3(i1 – i2) – 30 + 3i2 = 0 or – i1 + 2i2 = 10
Solving equation (i) and (ii) for i2, we get i2 = 5 A

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 174

 Current Electricity Phy. XII

Illustration 39: Consider the circuit shown in the figure. The 28 54
current i3 is equal to
(a) 5 amp 6V

i3
(b) 3 amp
(c) – 3 amp 8V 12 V

(d) – 5/6 amp

Solution : (d) Suppose current through different paths of the 28 54
circuit is as follows.
6V
After applying KVL for loop (1) and loop (2) 1 2
i3
1
We get 28i1  6  8  i1   A
2 8V 12 V

and 54i2  6  12 
1
i2   A
3
5
Hence i3  i1  i2   A
6

Illustration 40: A part of a circuit in steady state along with the

1A
current flowing in the branches, with value of
3
each resistance is shown in figure. What will be 3 A 5 D
the energy stored in the capacitor C0 2A i1
4F 1
(a) 6  10–4 J i2 i3
2A B C
1 2 4
(b) 8  10–4 J 3
1A
(c) 16  10–4 J
(d) Zero

Solution : (b) Applying Kirchhoff’s first law at junctions A and B respectively we have 2 + 1 – i1 = 0
i.e., i1 = 3A

and i2 + 1 – 2 – 0 = 0 i.e., i2 = 1A

Now applying Kirchhoff’s second law to the mesh ADCBA treating capacitor as a
seat of emf V in open circuit

– 3  5 – 3  1 – 1  2 + V = 0 i.e. V(= VA – VB) = 20 V

1 1
So, energy stored in the capacitor U  CV 2  (4  10 6 )  (20)2  8  10 4 J
2 2

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 175

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
Tricky Example
As the switch S is closed in the circuit shown in figure, current passed through it is
20 V 2 4 5V
A B
2

(a) 4.5 A (b) 6.0 A (c) 3.0 A (d) Zero

Solution : (a) Let V be the potential of the junction as shown in figure. Applying junction law, we
have 20 V 2 4 5V
20  V 5  V V  0 A i1 i2 B
or   or 40 – 2V + 5 – V = 2V
2 4 2 2
or 5V = 45  V = 9V i3
V 0V
 i3   4.5A
2

JOULE’S HEATING EFFECT AND POWER

When a current I flows for time t from a source of emf E, then the amount of charge that
flows in time t is Q = I t.
Electrical energy delivered W = Q. V = V I t
 r

Thus, Power given to the circuit, = W/t =VI or V2/R or I2R

In the circuit
E. I = I2R + I2r, where

E I is the rate at which chemical energy is converted to

electrical energy, I2R is power supplied to the external resistance R and I2r is the power
dissipated in the internal resistance of the battery. An electrical current flowing through
conductor produces heat in it. This is known as Joule heating. The heat developed in Joules
is given by H = I2.R.t

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 176

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
MAXIMUM POWER TRANSFER THEOREM
In a circuit, for what value of the external resistance the maximum power will be drawn from
a battery?
 r

For the shown network power developed in resistance R equals

E2R  E 
P 2 
I  and P  I2R 
R  r   Rr 
dP
Now, for dP/dR = 0 (for P to be maximum 0 )
dR
2

E .
R  r 
2  2 R R  r 
0
4
R  r 
or R = r  The power output is maximum, when the external resistance equals the
internal resistance. R = r
R
Illustration 36: Three equal resistances, each of R ,
R
are connected as shown in figure. A
battery of emf 2 V and internal
I R I
resistance 0.1  is connected across
the circuit. Calculate the value of R for
which the heat generated in the circuit is
maximum?

Solution: The given network is a parallel combination of three resistances.

Combined resistance R = R/3
E
Current (I) =
R/3r
2
 E  R E2R / 3
Power (P) =   = 2
R / 3r  3 R  4Rr
r
3   3

 
R
For maximum power, r= 0
3
or R = 3r = 0.3 

Illustration 37: An electric bulb rated 220 V and 60 W is connected in series with another electric
bulb rated 220 V and 40 W. The combination is connected across a 220 volt source
of e.m.f. Which bulb will glow brighter?
V2
Solution: R
P
V2 V2
 Resistance of first bulb is R1  , and resistance of the second bulb is R2 
P1 P2
In series same current will pass through each bulb

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 177

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
2
V V2
 Power developed across first is P1'  I2 and that across second is P2'  I2
P1 P2
P1' P2
 
P2' P1
P2 P1'
As P2  P1  1  1  P1'  P2'
P1 P2'

The bulb rated 220 V and 40 W will glow more.

MEASURING INTRUMENTS

GALVANOMETER
Galvanometer is represented as follow :

It consists of a pivoted coil placed in the magnetic field of a permanent magnet. Attached to
the coil is a spring. In the equilibrium position, with no current in the coil, the pointer is at
zero and spring is relaxed. When there is a current in the coil, the magnetic field exerts a
torque on the coil that is proportional to current. As the coil turns, the spring exerts a
restoring torque that is proportional to the angular displacement. Thus, the angular
deflection of the coil and pointer is directly proportional to the coil current and the device can
be calibrated to measure current.
When coil rotates the spring is twisted and it exerts an opposing torque on the coil.
There is a resistive torque also against motion to damp the motion. Finally in equilibrium
    magnetic =  spring

Note : Shunting a galvanometer decreases its current sensitivity.

A linear scale is obtained the marking on the galvanometer are proportionate.

The galvanometer coil has some resistance represented by Rg . It is of the order few
ohms. It also has a maximum capacity to carry a current known as g. g is also the
current required for full scale deflection. This galvanometer is called moving coil
galvanometer.

AMMETER
A shunt (small resistance) is connected in parallel with galvanometer to convert into
ammeter; An ideal ammeter has zero resistance

Ammeter is represented as follow -

If maximum value of current to be measured by ammeter is  then

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 178

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
G . RG = ( – G)S
 .R
S= G G
  G
G  RG
S= when  >> G.

where  = Maximum current that can be measured using the given ammeter.
For measuring the current the ammeter is connected is series.
In calculation it is simply a resistance

Resistance of ammeter
R .S
RA = G
RG  S
for S << RG
 RA = S
No te : Ideal ammeter is equivalent to zero resistance wire for calculation potential difference
across it is zero.

VOLTMETER
A high resistance is put in series with galvanometer. It is used to measure potential
difference across a resistor in a circuit.

For maximum potential difference

V
V = G . RS + G RG RS = – RG
G
V
If RG << RS  RS 
G
For measuring the potential difference a voltmeter is connected across that element.
(parallel to the that element it measures the potential difference that appears between
terminals ‘A’ and ‘B’.)
For calculation it is simply a resistance

Resistance of voltmeter RV = RG + RS  RS
Vo
g = . R  Ideal voltmeter.
Rg  R
A good voltmeter has high value of resistance.
Ideal voltmeter  which has high value of resistance.

Note : For calculation purposes the current through the ideal voltmeter is zero.
V  V´
Percentage error in measuring the potential difference by a voltmeter is = × 100
V

Illustration 38: A galvanometer, having a resistance of 50  gives a full scale deflection for a
current of 0.05 A. the length in meter of a resistance wire of area of cross-section

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 179

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
2.97  10–2 cm2 that can be used to convert the galvanometer into an ammeter which
can read a maximum of 5A current is : (Specific resistance of the wire = 5  10–7 m)
(a) 9 (b) 6 (c) 3 (d) 1.5
–2 2
Solution : (c) Given G = 50 , ig = 0.05 Amp., i = 5A, A = 2.97  10 cm
and  = 5  10–7-m
i G
By using  1 
ig S
G.ig l Gig GigA
 S   l on putting values l = 3 m.
(i  ig ) A (i  ig ) (i  ig )

Illustration 39: 100 mA current gives a full scale deflection in a galvanometer of resistance 2 .
The resistance connected with the galvanometer to convert it into a voltmeter of 5 V
range is
(a) 98  (b) 52  (c) 80  (d) 48 
V 5
Solution : (d) R  G   2  50  2  48  .
Ig 100  103

Illustration 40: In the following figure ammeter and voltmeter reads 2 amp and 120 volt respectively.
Resistance of voltmeter is
X 75  Y
(a) 100  A
(b) 200 
(c) 300 
V
(d) 400 

Solution : (c) Let resistance of voltmeter be RV. Equivalent resistance between X and Y is
75R V
R XY 
75  R V
Reading of voltmeter = potential difference across X and Y = 120 = i  RXY =
75R V
2  RV = 300
75  R V

Illustration 41: In the circuit shown in figure, the voltmeter reading would be
1 2
(a) Zero
(b) 0.5 volt
A V
(c) 1 volt
(d) 2 volt + –
3V
Solution : (a) Ammeter has no resistance so there will be no potential difference across it,
hence reading of voltmeter is zero.

Illustration 42: A moving coil galvanometer is converted into an ammeter reading upto 0.03 A
by connecting a shunt of resistance 4r across it and into an ammeter reading upto
0.06 A when a shunt of resistance r connected across it. What is the maximum
current which can be through this galvanometer if no shunt is used
(a) 0.01 A (b) 0.02 A (c) 0.03 A (d) 0.04 A

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 180

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
ig
Solution: (b) For ammeter, S  G  igG  (i  ig )S
(i  ig )

So igG  (0.03  ig )4r …… (i)

and igG  (0.06  ig )r …… (ii)

(0.03  ig ) 4
Dividing equation (i) by (ii) 1  0.06  ig  0.12  4ig
0.06  ig

 3ig = 0.06  ig = 0.02 A

Illustration 43: The resistance of 1 A ammeter is 0.018 . To convert it into 10 A ammeter, the
shunt resistance required will be
(a) 0.18  (b) 0.0018  (c) 0.002  (d) 0.12 

i 4 10 0.018
Solution : (c) By using  1   1  S = 0.002 
ig S 1 S
WHEATSTONE BRIDGE
Figure shows the fundamental diagram of Wheatstone bridge. The bridge has four resistive arms,
together with a source of emf (a battery) and a galvanometer. The current through the
galvanometer depends on the potential difference between the point c and d. The bridge is said to
be balanced when the potential difference across the galvanometer is 0 V so that there is no current
through the galvanometer. This condition occurs when the potential difference from point c to point
a, equals the potential difference from point d to point a; or by referring to the other battery terminal,
when the voltage drop from other point c to point b equals the voltage drop from point d to point b.
Hence, the bridge is balanced when
I1R1 = I2R2 …(i)
if the galvanometer current is zero, the following conditions also exist:


I1  I3  …(ii)
R1  R3

and I2  I4  …(iii)
R2  R4
a

I1 I2

R1 R2

c G d

R3 R4 Unknown
I3
I4
Standard
arm
b

Combining equations (i), (ii) and (iii) and simplifying,

we obtain
R1 R2
 …(iv)
R1  R3 R2  R 4

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 181

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
from which we get
R1R4 = R2R3 …(v)
Equation (v) is the well known expression for balance of the Wheatstone bridge. If three of
the resistances have known values, the fourth may be determined from equation (v). Hence,
if R4 is the unknown resistor, its resistance can be expressed in terms of remaining resistors
R
R 4  R3 2 …(vi)
R1
Resistance R3 is called the standard arm of the bridge and resistors R2 and R1 are called the
ratio arms.

POTENTIOMETER
A potentiometer is a linear conductor of uniform cross section with a steady current set up in it. This
maintains a uniform potential gradient along the length of the wire. Any potential difference which is
less than the potential difference maintained across the potentiometer
wire can be measured with this device.

 ,r
Potentiometer wire
Resistance =R

A B

L R
 
I , VA  VB  .R
Rr Rr

The wire of potentiometer should have low expansion coefficient and high resistivity e.g. Manganin.

Potential gradient (z): Potential difference per unit length of wire

V  VB  R
z A = .
L Rr L

APPLICATION OF POTENTIOMETER

(1) To find emf of unknown cell and compare emf of two cells.
In case I, see figure, (2) is joined to (1) ; if balance length=l1  ,r
then
1  zl1 . . . . (1)
In case II, see figure, (3) is joined to (2); if balance length=l2
A B
2  zl2 . . . . (2)
G
 l 1 ,r1
hence 1  1 . If any one of them is known, we can find the
2 l2 1
emf of other 2
3
cell but if z is known then both emf can be found.
 2 ,r2

Note : In case of zero deflection in the galvanometer current flows in the primary circuit of the
potentiometer, not in the galvanometer circuit.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 182

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
(2) To find current if resistance is known
 ,r
zl
VA - VC =z hence IR1=z  I  1
R1
Similarly we can find value of R2 also. C
A B
l1
G

R1 R2

1

NOTE : Potentiometer is ideal voltmeter because it does not draw any current from circuit, at the
balance point.
(3) To find internal resistance of cell
 ,r
By first arrangement '  zl1
by second arrangement  ,r
IR= zl2
zl ' C
I  2 also I  A B
R Rr' C l2
A B G
' zl2 l1
 =
Rr' R G
zl1 zl2 l  l 
 =  r'   1 2 R  ',r'
Rr' R  l2 

 ',r' R(known)
First arrangement Second arrangement

(4) To determine thermo emf

(i) The value of thermo-emf in a thermocouple for
ordinary temperature difference is very low (10–6 + – K Rh
volt). For this the potential gradient x must be also
very low (10–4 V/m). Hence a high resistance (R)
is connected in series with the potentiometer wire R A
A HRB
in order to reduce current. B
(ii) The potential difference across R must be equal to G
+ –
E G
the emf of standard cell i.e. iR = E0  i  0 E0 1 2 3
R
(iii) The small thermo emf produced in the Cold ice Hot sand

thermocouple e = xl
iR iRl
(iv) x  i   e where L = length of potentiometer wire,  = resistance per
L L
unit length, l = balancing length for e

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 183

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
(5) To calibrate ammeter and voltmeter
Calibration of ammeter
e K1
(i) If p.d. across 1 resistance is measured by + –
potentiometer, then current through this (indirectly +
A B
measured) is thus known or if R is known then i = V/R E1
+ –
can be found. 1
2 G
(ii) Circuit and method 1 3
A
(a) Standardisation is required and per formed as already + –
K2
described earlier. (x = E0/l0) + –

(b) The current through R or 1 coil is measured by the

connected ammeter and same is calculated by
potentiometer by finding a balancing length as
described blow.
Let i' current flows through 1 resistance giving p.d.
as V '  i'(1)  xl1 where l1 is the balancing length. So
error can be found as [i (measured by ammeter)
 E  
i'  i  i'   xl1   0  l1 
  l0  
Calibration of voltmeter
(i) Practical voltmeters are not ideal, because these do
e K1 Rh
not have infinite resistance. The error of such practical
+ –
voltmeter can be found by comparing the voltmeter
reading with calculated value of p.d. by potentiometer. +
A B
E0 C
+ – 1
(ii) Circuit and procedure 2
+ – G
(a) Standardisation : If l0 is balancing length for E0 the V 3
emf of standard cell by connecting 1 and 2 of bi- RB
directional key, then x = E0/l0. + –
K2

(b) The balancing length l1 for unknown potential Rh

difference V is given by (by closing 2 and 3)

V '  xl1  (E0 / l0 )l1 .

If the voltmeter reading is V then the error will be (V – V)

which may be +ve, – ve or zero.

Illustration 44: Voltmeters V1 and V2 are connected in series across a d.c. line. V1reads 80 V
and has a per volt resistance of 200 , V2 has a total resistance of 32 k. The line
voltage is
(a) 120 V (b) 160 V (c) 220 V (d) 240 V

Solution : (d) Resistance of voltmeter V1 is R1 = 200  80 = 16000  and resistance of voltmeter

V2 is R2 = 32000 
 R' 
By using relation V '   V; where V = potential difference across any
 R  R1 R2
 eq 
resistance R in a series grouping. V1 V2
So for voltmeter V1 potential difference across it is 80 V

+ –
V
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 184
 Current Electricity Phy. XII
 R1 
80    .V  V = 240 V
 R1  R 2 

Tricky Example
The ammeter A reads 2 A and the voltmeter V reads 20 V. The value of resistance R is
R
A

(a) Exactly 10 ohm (b) Less than 10 ohm

(c) More than 10 ohm (d) We cannot definitely say
20
Solution: (c) If current goes through the resistance R is i then iR = 20 volt  R  . Since i < 2A
i
so R > 10.
Illustration 44: A battery with negligible internal resistance is connected with 10m long wire. A
standard cell gets balanced on 600 cm length of this wire. On increasing the length
of potentiometer wire by 2m then the null point will be displaced by
(a) 200 cm (b) 120 cm (c) 720 cm (d) 600 cm
L1 l1 10 600
Solution : (b) By using     l2  720cm .
L 2 l2 12 l2
Hence displacement = 720 – 600 = 120 cm

Illustration 45: In the following circuit a 10 m long – R1

+
potentiometer wire with resistance 1.2
ohm/m, a resistance R1 and an i
accumulator of emf 2 V are connected in 5m
series. When the emf of thermocouple is A
B
2.4 mV then the deflection in galvanometer G
is zero. The current supplied by the
accumulator will be
(a) 4  10–4 A
Hot Cold
(b) 8  10–4 A Junction Junction

(c) 4  10–3 A
(d) 8  10–3 A .
E E 2.4  10 3
Solution : (a) E  xl  i l  i    4  10 4 A .
l l 1.2  5
Illustration 46: In an experiment to measure the internal resistance of a cell by potentiometer, it is
found that the balance point is at a length of 2 m when the cell is shunted by a 5 
resistance; and is at a length of 3 m when the cell is shunted by a 10  resistance.
The internal resistance of the cell is, then
(a) 1.5  (b) 10  (c) 15  (d) 1 
l l  l 2
Solution : (b) By using r   1 2  R '  r   1 5 …… (i)
 l2   2 

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 185

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
l 3
and r  1   10 ……. (ii)
 3 
On solving (i) and (ii) r = 10 
Illustration 47: A potentiometer has uniform potential gradient across it. Two cells connected in
series (i) to support each other and (ii) to oppose each other are balanced over 6 m
and 2 m respectively on the potentiometer wire. The emf’s of the cells are in the ratio
of
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 1 (c) 3 : 1 (d) 2 : 1
Solution : (d) If suppose emf’s of the cells are E1 and E2 respectively then
E1 + E2 = x  6 ……. (i) [x = potential gradient) ]
and E1 – E2 = x  2 …….(ii)
E1  E2 3 E 2
   1 
E1  E 2 1 E2 1
Illustration 48:In the following circuit the potential difference between the points B and C is
balanced against 40 cm length of potentiometer wire. In order to balance the
potential difference between the points C and D, where should jockey be pressed
Rh
+ –
40 cm
X Y

10  G
4
C D
B 10 
r = 1 K
A + –
F
6V

(a) 32 cm (b) 16 cm (c) 8 cm (d) 4 cm

1 1 1 2 1
Solution : (a)     or R1 = 5 
R 10 10 10 5
R2 = 4, l1 = 40 cm, l2 = ?
R2 40  4
l2  l1 or l2   32cm
R1 5

Tricky Example
A cell of internal resistance 1.5 and of emf 1.5 volt balances 500 cm on a
potentiometer wire. If a wire of 15 is connected between the balance point and the
cell, then the balance point will shift
(a) To zero (b) By 500 cm
(c) By 750 cm (d) None of the above
Solution : (d) In balance condition no current flows in the galvanometer circuit. Hence there will be
no shift in balance point after connecting a resistance between balance point and
cell.

METER BRIDGE OR SLIDE WIRE BRIDGE

This is the simplest form of Wheatstone bridge and is especially useful for comparing resistances
more accurately. The construction of the metre bridge is shown in the figure. It consists of one

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 186

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
metre resistance wire clamped between two metallic strips bent at right angles and it has two points
for connection. There are two gaps; in one of them an unknown resistance whose value is to be
determined is connected and in another gap resistance box (known resistance) is connected .
The galvanometer is connected with the help of jockey and the cell is connected across AC. After
making connections, the jockey is moved along the wire and the null point is obtained. The segment
of length  and (100 -  ) form two resistances of the Wheatstone bridge, the other two resistances
being R (known) and S (unknown). The wire used is of uniform material and cross-section. The
resistance can be found with the help of the following relation:
R P l R l R(100  l)
    S
S Q (100  l) S (100  l) l
Where  is the resistance per unit length of the wire and l1 is the length of the wire from one end
where null point is obtained. The bridge is most sensitive when null point is somewhere near the
middle point of the wire.

POST OFFICE BOX

It is so named because its shape is like a box and it was
originally designed to determine
the resistances of electric cables and telegraph wires. It
was used in post office to determine
the resistance of transmission lines. A Post Office Box can
also be used to measure an unknown resistance.
It is a Wheatstone bridge with three arms P, Q and
R(known resistances); while the fourth arm(S) is the
unknown resistance. P and Q are known as the ratio arms
while R is known as the rheostat arm.

At balance, the unknown resistance

S = (P/Q) R ..........(1)

The ratio arms are first adjusted so that they carry 100  each. The resistance in the rheostat arm
is now adjusted so that the galvanometer deflection is in one direction. If R = R0  and R = (R0 + 1)
 are the resistance in rheostat arm, for which the deflection in galvanometer is in opposite
direction, then it implies that the unknown resistance ‘S’ lies between R0 and (R0 + 1). Now, the
resistance in P and Q are made 100 and 1000 , respectively, and the process is repeated.
Equation (1) is used to compute S. The ratio P/Q is progressively made 1:10, and then 1:100. Thus,
the resistance S can be accurately measured.

ADDITIONAL POINTS FOR SYNOPSIS

Joule’s law of heating :
It states that the amount of heat produced in a conductor is directly proportional to the :
(i) square of the current flowing through the conductor (R,t-constant)
(ii) resistance of the conductor (i,t- constant)
(iii) time for which the current is passed (i, R-constant)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 187

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
2
i Rt
Thus H = i2 Rt joule = calorie
4.2

Electric Power:
It is defined as the rate at which work is done in maintaining the current in electric circuit.
Electric power, P = VI = I2 R = V2/R
Unit: watt or joule/second.

Electric Energy:
The electric energy consumed in a circuit is defined as the total work done in maintaining
the current in an electric circuit for a given time.
Electrical energy = VIt=Pt = I2Rt = V2 t / R
S.I. unit of electric energy is joule (denoted by J)
where 1 joule = 1 watt  1 second
= 1 volt  ampere  1 second
1 KWh = 1000Wh = 3.6  106 J
The electric appliances are connected in parallel and the electrical energy consumed is
measured in KWh.
watt  hour
Number of units =
1000
If resistances (or electrical appliances ) are connected in series, then the current through
each resistance is same.

Power through the combination of resistor

The power of an electrical appliance

PR and VR.  P  i2Rt 
(i) In series combination of resistances, the potential difference and power consumed will
be more in larger resistance.
(ii) If resistances (i.e. electrical appliances ) are connected in parallel, then the potential
difference across each resistance is same.
P1/ R and I1/ R
(iii) In parallel combination of resistances the current and power consumed will be more in
smaller resistances.
When the appliances of powers P1, P2 , P3... are in series, the effective power
consumed (P) is
1 1 1 1
    ...
P P1 P2 P3
i.e. the effective power is less than the power of individual appliance.
(iv) When the appliances of powers P1, P2 , P3... are in parallel, the effective power
consumed (P) is
P = P1+ P2 + P3+......
The effective power of various electrical appliance is more than the power of individual
appliance.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 188

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
ADDITIONAL POINTS
(i) Filament of lower wattage bulb is thinner than that of higher wattage bulb i.e. filament of
60 watt bulb is higher than that of 100 watt bulb.
(ii) When two lamps of different wattage are connected in series in a house the lamp of
lower wattage glows more brightly.
(iii) In parallel grouping of bulbs across a given sources of voltage, the bulb of greater
wattage will give more brightness and will allow more current through it, but will have
lesser resistance and same potential difference across it.
(iv) If I is the current through the fuse wire of length  , radius r, specific resistance  and Q
is the rate of loss of heat per unit area of a fuse wire, then at steady state,
I2 22Q 3
I2R  QA or  Q  2 r  or I2
 r  Ir 3/2
r 2 
(v) If t1 and t2 are the time taken by two different coils for producing same heat with same
supply, then
If they are connected in series to produce same heat, time taken is t = t1 + t2
t1t 2
If they are connected in parallel to produce same heat, time taken is t  ,
t1  t 2
V2
(vi) The output power of a cell is given by P  2
R
r  R 
Maximum power is delivered to the load only when the internal resistance of the source
is equal to the load resistance (R).
V2 V2
Then Pmax   r  R 
4R 4r
R
Efficiency of a source of current is    100
Rr
If R = r, then output power is maximum
R
  100  50%
RR
Electro-chemical cells :
Convert chemical energy into electrical energy.
(a) Primary Cell :
In which chemical reaction is irreversible - hence can not be charged.
(b) Secondary cell or battery :
Chemical reaction is reversible - hence can be charged.
While charging a secondary cell, we send a current in the cell by some external electric
source (i.e. a battery or battery charger) by connecting the positive terminal of battery
charger to the positive electrode of the cell and the negative terminal of the battery
charger to the negative electrode of the cell.
While charging, the direction of current inside the cell will be from positive electrode to
negative electrode. In this case, the potential difference between the two electrodes of
the cell will be greater than the emf of the cell

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 189

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
V=E+Ir
While discharging a cell i.e. when current is drawn from the cell, the potential difference
across the two electrodes of a cell is less than the emf of the cell.
V=E-Ir

Charging current for a secondary cell =

 emf of charger -emf of cell
total resistance of the circuit

Faraday’s laws of electrolysis

(i) First Law :
The mass of the substance liberated or deposited at an electrode during electrolysis is
directly proportional to the quantity of charge passed through the electrolyte i.e.
mq or m  zq  zIt where z = electro chemical equivalent of substance.
(ii) Second Law :
When the same amount of charge is passed through different electrolytes, the masses
of the substance liberated or deposited at the various electrodes are proportional to
their chemical equivalents i.e.
m1 E1

m 2 E2
where m1 & m2 are the masses of the substances liberated or deposited on electrodes
during electrolysis and E1 & E2 are their chemical equivalents.

Faraday’s Constant :
(i) Faraday’s constant is equal to the amount of charge required to liberate the mass of a
substance at an electrode during electrolysis, equal to its chemical equivalent in gram
(i.e. one gram equivalent)
(ii) One Faraday = 1F = 96500 C/gram equivalent.
If  is the density of the material deposited and A is the area of deposition, then the
m ZIt
thickness (d) of the layer deposited in electroplating process is d   .
A A
SEEBECK EFFECT

If the junctions are kept at the different temperatures, there is an electric current in the loop.
This effect is called the Seebeck effect and the emf developed is called the Seebeck emf or
thermo-emf.
The magnitude and the direction of the emf depend on the metals and the temperatures of
the hot and cold junctions. Such a combination of two metals is called a thermocouple.
The Seeback’s series is :
Bi, Ni, Co, Pd, Pt, U, Cu, Mn, Ti, Hg, Pb, Sn, Cr, Mo, Rh, Ir, Au, Zn, W, Cd, Fe, As, Sb, Te.
The separation of the meals in this series is the representative of the magnitude of the emf
to be expected with a given temperature difference between junctions. Thus we can see that
the emf produced between the junction of a Bi  Sb couple is greater than that of Cu  Fe
couple.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 190

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
NEUTRAL AND INVERSION TEMPERATURE :
There will be a current in the circuit as shown in the figure. At the cold junction it is form
copper to nickel and at the hot junction it is from nickel to copper.

As the temperature of the hot junction is gradually increased, the magnitude of the current
increases till the temperature becomes nearly 390°C. After this, the current decreases till the
temperature of the hot junction becomes 780°C. At this temperature the current becomes
zero. If the hot junction is heated further, the direction of the current is reversed and the
magnitude increases.
The temperature of the hot junction at which maximum current flows is constant for a given
thermocouple. It is independent of the temperature of cold junction and is called the neutral
temperature, for the couple. On further increasing the temperature of hot junction the current
decreases to zero and is then reversed.

Ti

The temperate at which the current is zero and its reversal begins is called inversion
temperature. It depends on the temperature of cold junction and the chosen couple. It is
always as much above the neutral temperature as the cold junction is below it. Thus,
Ti  Tn  Tn  Tc
Here, Ti  inversion temperature
Tn = neutral temperature and
Tc = cold junction temperature

The graph between the emf and the temperature difference of the two junctions is of the
parabolic form for majority of couples. Thus emf can be given as,
AB = a + bT + cT2
d AB
The quantity is called thermoelectric power at temperature T.
dT
d AB
The emf is maximum when = 0.
dT

PELTIER EFFECT
Suppose the two junctions of a thermocouple are initially at the same temperature and an
electric current is passed through the circuit by using an external battery. It is observed that
heat is produced at one junction and is absorbed at the other. Thus, one junction is warmed
up and the other is cooled down due to the currents through the junctions. It is reverse of the
seebeck effect and is called the Peliter effect. If the direction of the current is reversed, the
cooling and warming are also reversed.
The heat developed in Peltier effect should not be confused with the Joule heat when a
current is passed through a resistor. Joule heat always warms up the resistor whatever be

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 191

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
the direction of the current. But one has both Peltier heating and Peltier cooling of the
junction depending on the direction of the current.
Another difference is that the Peltier heat in a given time is proportional to the current
through the junction whereas the Joule heat is proportional to the square of the current,
HPeltier  i , HJoule  i2
Also, the Peltier heating or cooling is observed only at a junction, whereas the Joule heating
is throughout the resistor.

THOMSON EFFECT
If a metallic wire has a non uniform temperature and a current is passed through it, heat
may be absorbed or produced in different sections of the wire. This heat is over and above
the Joule heat i2Rt and is called the Thomson heat. The effect itself is called the Thomson
effect.

Illustration 49: Two identical batteries each of emf E = 2V and internal resistance r = 1  are
available to produce heat in an external circuit. The maximum rate of production of
heat that can be obtained in the external circuit is
(a) 1 W (b) 2 W (c) 4 W (d) 8 W

Solution : (b) Power output is maximum when external resistance is 2 . Current in the circuit is
4V/4 = 1A and power in external circuit is (1)2  2 = 2 W

Illustration 50: How many lamps each of 50 W and 100 V can be connected in parallel across a
120 V battery of internal resistance 10  , so that each glows to full power ?
(a) 16 (b) 8 (c) 4 (d) 2
Solution : (c) Each glows to full power, if the terminal voltage of the battery is 100 V. That is
maximum drop of potential in the battery should be 20 V. If external resistance be R,
120
then 20  I  10   10
R  10
This gives R = 50, which will be the case with 4 lamps in parallel.

Illustration 51: Silver and zinc voltameters are connected in series and same current is passed
through both of them for same time. If x Kg of silver is liberated then the amount of
zinc liberated will be very near to
(a) x (b) x/ 5 (c) x/ 3 (d) x / 2

Solution : (c) Equivalent weight of silver and zinc respectively are 108 and 33. Same is the ratio of
their chemical equivalents.

SOLVED PROBLEMS

Problem 1: A cylindrical conductor has uniform cross section. Resistivity of its material Increases linearly
from left end to right end. If a constant current is flowing through it and at a section of
distance x from left end, magnitude of electric field intensity is E, which of the following
graphs is correct ?

(A) E (B) E

O x O x

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 192

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
(C) E
(D) E

O x O x

Solution: If you take resistivity at a distance ‘x’ from left end as  = (0 + x), then electric field intensity
i
at this point will be E =, where i is the current flowing through the conductor.
A
i
Therefore E   and E(x) = (0  x)
A
 Hence (B) is correct.

Problem 2: If E denotes electric field in a uniform conductor and v d the corresponding drift velocity of free
electrons in the conductor then which of the following graph is correct?
(A) v
d
(B) vd

O E O E

(C) vd (D) vd

O E O E

iR i
Solution: Consider the relation E = 
 A
As i = neAvd
Therefore, E = nev d
Hence, graph between v d and E will be straight line passing through the origin.
Hence choice (A).

Problem 3: A source of constant potential difference is P

connected across a conductor having irregular
Q
cross section as shown.
(A) Electric field intensity at P is greater than that at
Q.
(B) Rate of electrons crossing per unit area of cross-section at P is less than that at Q.
(C) The rate of generation of heat per unit length at P is greater than at Q.
(D) Mean kinetic energy of free electrons at P is greater than that at Q.
Solution: When a source is connected, a current starts to flow through the conductor. Let it be I. Then
current density at a section is equal to I/A where A = cross-sectional area.
Since cross-sectional area at P is maximum, therefore current density at P is minimum.
Hence (B) is correct.
J  I I 
Since electric field is     , therefore at P electric field is minimum while that at Q
  A A 
is maximum.
I2
Rate of generation of heat per unit length at a section will be equal to . It is minimum at P
A
and maximum at Q.
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 193
 Current Electricity Phy. XII
1
The mean kinetic energy of free electrons = mv 2d which is minimum at P and maximum at
2
Q.
 Hence (B) is correct.

Problem 4: In the given network the batteries getting charged are

(A) 1 and 3 (B) 1 3 and 5
(C) 1 and 4 (D) 1, 2 and 5
20  5 5
15 V
20 V 4A
1
3A 15 V 15 V 8A
5V 3 4
2 9A

Solution: Applying Kirchhoff law at A, C, D the direction of the currents in each branch will be as shown
in the figure. Now it is clear from the figure the batteries 1 and 4 getting charged.
20  A 5 5
B 15 V
20 V 4A
1 9A
3A 3 15 V
-5V
2 4
15 V
3A D 1A C 8A
 Hence (C) is correct.

Problem 5: When a galvanometer is shunted with a 4 resistance the deflection is reduced to 1/5. If the
galvanometer is further shunted with a 2 wire the new deflection will be ( assuming the main
current remains the same)
(A) 5/13 of the deflection when shunted with 4  only
(B) 8/13 of the deflection when shunted with 4  only
(C) 3/4 of the deflection when shunted with 4  only
(D) 3/13 of the deflection when shunted with 4  only.

Solution : When only 4  resistance is shunted, (ig), = i/5

G  i/5 = 4  (4/5)  G = 16 
4

G Case - I i Case -II

G
A i/5 B
2
4/3 
4
i Case -III
G A B Case -IV
(ig)2 16  G
A (ig2)
4/3 1
(ig)2 = i i
16  4 / 3 13
 Hence (A) is correct.

Problem 6: When the key k is pressed at time t = 0, which of K

1 k
the following statements about the current I, in the
resistor AB of the given circuit is true. A B
(A) 2 mA at all time 1k
(B) oscillates between 1 mA and 2 mA 2V 1F
(C) 1 mA at all time

(D) At t = 0, I = 2 mA and with time it finally reduces to 1 mA

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 194
 Current Electricity Phy. XII
Solution: Initially the capacitance acts as short circuited and at steady state it acts as open circuit.
2
Hence at t = 0, i = = 2 mA
1 103
2
At steady state i = = 1 mA
2  103
 Hence (D) is correct.
Problem 7: Two electric bulbs rated P1 and P2 watt at V volt are connected in series across V volt mains
then their total power consumption P is
(A) (P1 + P2 ) (B) P1P2
(C) P1 P2 /(P1 + P2 ) (D) (P1 + P2)/P1P2
V2
Solution: Resistance of Ist = bulb R1 =
P1
V2
Resistance of IInd bulb R2 =
P2
When both bulbs are connected in series
 1 1  V 2 (P1  P2 )
Req. = V2   
 P1 P2  PP
1 2

V2 V2 PP1 2
Hence power consumed P =  =
R  P P  P1  P2
V2  1 2 
 PP1 2 

 Hence (C) is correct.

Problem 8: If two bulbs of 25 W & 100 W rated at 200 volts are connected in series across a 440 volts
supply.
(A) 100 watt bulb will fuse (B) 25 watt bulb will fuse
(C) none of the bulb will fuse (D) both the bulbs will fuse
v 2 2002
Solution: R1 =  = 1600 
w 25
200 2
R2 = = 400 .
100
When both bulbs are connected in series 25 W 100 W
R1 1600
V1 =440   440 
R1  R 2 1600  400
R1 R2
= 352 V
400
V2 = 440  = 88 V
2000
Voltage across 25 W bulb is greater than specified 440 V
voltage, hence it will fuse.
Hence (B) is correct

Problem 9: In the given circuit, R1 = 10 , A2 R1 R1 R1 R1

R2 =6  and E = 10 V
R2
correct statements are R2 R2
R1 A3
(A) Effective resistance of the circuit is 20 
(B) Reading of A1 is ½ amp. R1 R1 R1
(C) Reading of A2 is ¼ amp
(D) Reading of A3 is 1/8 amp.
A1

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 195

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
Solution: Potential difference across R2 is zero, A2 10  10  10  10 
therefore current in three branches is
zero, therefore current in two branch
containing R1 will be same, and the 10  10  10  10 
circuit will be simplified as shown.

A1 10 V
40  40
Effective resistance of the circuit Reff = = 20 
40  40
10
Current through the circuit I = = (1/2) amp
20
Hence reading of A1 = ½ amp.
Hence reading of A2 =1/4 amp.
 Hence (A), (B) & (C) are correct.

Problem 10: In the circuit shown 10 V 20 V

(A) the potential at P is - 7.5 V. P Q
(B) the potential at Q is - 1V. 0.5  1 
1
(C) current in circuit is 1 amp. 7.5 
(D) the potential at S is zero G
S R

(20  10) 10
Solution: The current in the circuit I = = = 1 amp.
(7.5  .5  1  1) 10
The potential difference across PS VPS = 7.5  1 = 7.5 V
The potential difference across Q R, VQR = 1 1 = 1V
As point G is connected to earth hence potentials of S is zero.
The direction of the current in the circuit is from P to S, hence point P is at higher potential.
 Vp = 7.5 V
similarly VQ = - 1V
 Hence (B), (C) & (D) are correct.
Problem 11: Three voltmeters A, B and C, having resistances R, 1.5R and 3R, respectively, are connected
as shown. When some potential difference is applied between X and Y, the voltmeter
readings are VA, VB and VC respectively. Then,
(a) VA  VB = VC B
X A Y
(b) VA = VB  VC
(c) VB  VA = VC C
(d) VA = VB = VC
Solution: The division of current I into the two parallel branches will be as shown,
 VA = IR
 2I 
VB =   1.5 R = IR
3
I
VC =   3R = IR
3
 VA = VB = VC
Hence, (d) is correct

Problem 12: An electric bulb rated for 500 W at 100 V is used in a circuit having a 200 V supply. The
resistance R that must be put in series with the bulb, so that the bulb draws 500 W is
(a) 100  (b) 50 
(c) 20  (d) 10 
Solution: In order that the bulb draws 500 W, there should be 100 V applied across it. The remaining
100 V should be dropped in the series resistance R. Now, the current in the bulb is given by
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 196
 Current Electricity Phy. XII
P = V.I 500 W
P 500
 I   5A
V 100
R
The same current flows through R. Hence,
100 V
V 100
R   20 
I 5
Hence, answer (c) is correct. 200 V
Problem 13: A capacitor charges from a cell through a series resistance. The time constant of the circuit is
. The time taken by the capacitor to collect 10% of its final charge is
(a)  ln (0.1) (b)  ln (9/10)
(c)  ln (10/9) (d)  ln (10/11)
Solution: At any time t, the charge on the capacitor is given as
Q = q0 (1 – e–t/)
Here, q = 0.1 q0. Therefore,
0.1 q0 = q0 (1 – e–t/)
10
or e–t/ = 0.9  e t/  
9
 t =  ln (10/9)
Hence, answer (c) is correct.

Problem 14: The given network is a part of a bigger network. I1 = 3A

Determine the value of current flowing in resistor 10 
R6. 5 R1 20 
(a) 9 A (b) 8 A I2 = 5A R2 R3 I3 = 1A
(c) 7 A (d) 1 A 7 9
R4 R6 R5
20 
I
Solution: The current I in R6 can be calculated by applying Kirchhoff’s current law. However, here it is
not necessary to first find the currents through individual resistances, R2, R3, R4 and R5.
Instead, we can treat the whole network inside the dotted box as a single junction. To this
junction, currents I1 and I2 are entering and currents I3 and I are leaving. Hence, according to
KCL,
I1 + I2 – I3 – I = 0
or I = I1 + I2 – I3
=3+5–1
=7A
Hence, answer (c) is correct.
Problem 15: A wire of length L and 3 identical cells of negligible internal resistances are connected in
series. Due to the current, the temperature of the wire is raised by T in a time t. A number N
of similar cells is now connected in series with a wire of the same material and cross-section
but of length 2L. The temperature of the wire is raised by the same amount T in the same
time t. the value of N is
(a) 4 (b) 6
(c) 8 (d) 9
3E
Solution: In the first case, i =
R
where E is the emf of each cell and R(  L) is the resistance of the wire.
Also i2Rt  m.s.T (1)
where m is the mass of L length of wire and S is the specific heat of the material of the wire.
NE
In the second case, i'  where R  2L
R'
and i'2 R ' t  m' sT (2)
Dividing equation (2) by equation (1)
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 197
 Current Electricity Phy. XII
2 2 2
 i'   R'  m' N R m' N 1
i .    .   . 2
  R m 9 R' m 9 2
 N=6
(b)
Problem 16: A 100 W bulb B1 , and two 60 W bulbs B2 and B3 , are B1 B2
connected to a 250 V source, as shown in the figure.
Now W1 , W2 and W3 are the output powers of the
bulbs B1 , B2 and B3 respectively. Then
B3
(a) W1  W2  W3 (b) W1  W2  W3
(c) W1  W2  W3 (d) W1  W2  W3

250 V
Solution: Voltage across bulb B2 will be less than that across B3
 W2  W3
(d)

Problem 17: Find the reading of ammeter ? Is this the current 3

through 6  ? A

6
1
18 V

36
Solution: Req  1 3 
36
Current through battery
18
I 6 A
3
So, current through ammeter
6
=6 =4A
9
No, it is not the current through the 6  resistor.

Problem 18: In the given circuit, with steady current, the potential difference V R
across the capacitor is
(a) V (b) V/2 C
(c) 2V/3 (d) none of these V R
R

2V
Solution: 2V  V  iR  iR = 0
2V  V  VC  iR = 0
 VC = V/2
 (b)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 198

 Current Electricity Phy. XII

EXERCISE
LEVEL - I

1. Two wires of same material and same masses have their lengths in the ratio 1 :2. On connecting them one
at a time to the source of same current the power dissipated in the smaller wire is 10W, then the power
dissipated in the thicker wire is
(A) 2.5 W (B) 5 W (C) 20 W (D) 40 W
2. A lamp is marked 60W – 220 V. If it operates at 200V, the rate of consumption of energy will
(A) increase (B) decrease
(C) remain unchanged (D) first increases and then decreases
3. The effective wattage of the 100 W and 60W lamps connected in parallel to each other is
(A) 160 W (B) 80 W (C) 40 W (D) 24 W
4. The effective wattage of 40 W and 60 W lamps connected in series with each other is
(A) 160W (B) 80W (C) 40W (D) 24 W
5. Two 1000 W heater when connected in parallel across 220 V supply produce heat QP in time t. If they
are connected in series across the same power supply the heat produced in the same time is QS. Then
QP/QS is
(A) 4 (B) 2 (C) 0.5 (D) 0.25
6. When a 40 watt lamp is connected in series with a 100 watt lamp across a 220 V supply, which one
glows brighter ?
(A) 100 watt lamp (B) 40 watt lamp
(C) both will glow with equal brightness (D) it cannot be predicted
7. The wattage of a 100 W – 220V lamp when used on 110 V power supply is
(A) 100 W (B) 75 W (C) 50 W (D) 25 W
8. The heating coils rated at 220 V and producing 50 cal/sec heat are available with the resistance of
55  ,110  , 220  and 440  . The heater of maximum power will be of
(A) 400  (B) 220  (C) 110  (D) 55 
9. An electric heater has resistance of 12 ohm and is operated from 220 V power line. If no heat escapes
from it, how much time is required to raise the temperature of 40 kg of water from 150 C to 80° C ?
(A) 2400 sec (B) 644 sec (C) 2500 sec (D) 2600 sec
10. A housewife uses a 100W bulb 8 hours a day, and an electric heater of 300 W for 4 hours a day. The
total cost for the month of June at the rate of 50 paise per unit will be
(A) Rs. 20 (B) Rs. 25 (C) Rs. 30 (D) Rs. 30 paise 50
11. A 5° C rise in temperature is observed in a conductor by passing the current. When the current is doubled,
then the rise in temperature will be approximately
(A) 50C (B) 100C (C) 200C (D) 400C

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 199

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
12. A long resistance wire is divided into 2 n parts. Then n parts are connected in series and the other n-
parts in parallel separately. Both combinations are connected to identical supplies. Then the ratio of heat
produced in series to parallel combinations will be
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 1 : n2 (C) 1 : n4 (D) n2 : 1
13. A 24 V battery of internal resistance 4 is connected to a variable resistor. The rate of heat production
in the resistor is maximum when the current in the circuit is
(A) 2 A (B) 3 A (C) 4 A (D) 6 A
14. If the current in an electric bulb drops by 2 %, then the power decreases by
(A) 1% (B) 2% (C) 4% (D) 16%
15. If 1 A of current is passed through CuSO4 solution for 10 seconds, then the number of copper ions
deposited at the cathode will be about
(A) 1.6 x 1019 (B) 3.1 x 1019 (C) 4.8 x 1019 (D) 6.2 x 1019
16. If 100 KWh of energy is consumed at 33 V in a copper voltameter, the mass of copper liberated is
(ECE for copper as 0.33 x 10–6 kg C–1)
(A) 3.6 kg (B) 3.3 kg (C) 1 kg (D) 1 mg

17. A copper wire of cross-sectional area 2.0 mm2 , resistivity = 1.7 10 8 m , carries a current of 1 A.
The electric field in the copper wire is

(A) 8.5 105 V / m (B) 8.5 104 V / m (C) 8.5 103 V / m (D) 8.5 102 V / m
18. When there is an electric current through a conducting wire along its length, then an electric field must
exist
(A) outside the wire but parallel to it. (B) outside the wire but perpendicular to it.
(C) inside the wire but parallel to it. (D) inside the wire but perpendicular to it.
19. Which of the following is true when the cells are connected in parallel ?
(A) Current capacity decreases (B) Current capacity increases
(C) The emf decreases (D) The emf increases
20. Which of the following are true when the cells are connected in series ?
(A) Current capacity decreases (B) Current capacity increases
(C) The emf decreases (D) The emf increases
21. The internal resistance of a cell depends on
(A) the distance between the plates (B) the area of the plates immersed
(C) the concentration of the electrolyte (D) all the above
22. If in the experiment of Wheatstone's bridge, the positions of cells and galvanometer are interchanged,
then balance points will
(A) change (B) remain unchanged
(C) depend on the internal resistance of cell and resistance of galvanometer
(D) none of these

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 200

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
23. The element of an electric heater is made of
(A) copper (B) platinum (C) nichrome (D) tungsten
24. A steady current is passing through a linear conductor of nonuniform cross-section. The net quantity of
charge crossing any cross section per second is
(A) independent of area of cross-section (B) directly proportional to the length of the conductor
(C) directly proportional to the area of cross section.
(D) inversely proportional to the length of the conductor
25. A potentiometer has high sensitivity is
(A) battery in auxillary circuit has higher emf (B) the resistivity of the wire is higher
(C) the wire is larger in length (D) none
26. When null point is obtained in the potentiometer, the current is drawn from
(A) cell only (B) main battery only
(C) both cell and main battery (D) none
27. Potentiometer is a better device for measuring the p.d. than the volta-meter because
(A) it uses a longer wire
(B) it uses main battery of higher emf
(C) it is based on the principle of Wheatstone's bridge
(D) it does not change the p.d. to be measured
28. The thermistors are usually made of
(A) metals with low temperature coefficient of resistivity
(B) metals with high temperature coefficient of resistivity
(C) metal oxides with high temperature coefficient of resistivity
(D) semiconducting materials having low temperature coefficient of resistivity
29. A piece of copper and another of germanium are college from room temperature to 77 K, the resistance of
(A) Each of them increases
(B) each of them decreases
(C) copper decreases and germanium decreases
(D) copper increases and germanium decreases

LEVEL-II

1. A steady current is set up in a metallic wire of non-uniform cross-section. How is the rate of flow of
electrons (R) related the area of cross-section (A)
(A) R  A1 (B) R  A (C) R  A 2 (D) R is independent of A
2. Two plates R and S are in the form of a square and have the same thickness. A side of S is twice the side
of R. Compare their resistances. The direction of current is shown by an arrow head. Figure

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 201

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
(A) the resistance of R is twice that of S
(B) both have the same resistance
(C) the resistance of S is four times that of R
(D) the resistance of R is half that of S
3. A platinum wire has a resistance of 10  at 0o C and 20  at 273o C . The value of temperature
coefficient of platinum is

 1  1  1  o 1
(A)  K (B) 273 K (C)   C (D) 273 o C
 273   273 
4. A typical thermistor can easily measure a change in temperature of the order of
(A) 10 3 o C (B) 10 2 o C (C) 102 o C (D) 103 o C
5. A potential difference V is applied to a copper wire of length l and thickness d. If thickness is doubled,
the drift velocity
(A) is doubled (B) is halved (C) remains same (D) becomes zero
6. In cosmic rays 0.15 protons/ cm 2 sec. are entering the earth's atmosphere. If the radius of the earth is
6400 km, the current received by the earth in the form of cosmic rays is nearly
(A) 0.12 A (B) 1.2 A (C) 12 A (D) 120 A

7. A amount of charge Q passed in time t through a cross-section of a wire is Q  5t 2  3t  1 . The value

of current at time t=5 s is
(A) 9 A (B) 49 A (C) 53 A (D) none of the above
8. In an experiment to measure the internal resistance of a cell by potentiometer, it is found that the balance
point is at a length of 2 m when the cell is shunted by a 4  resistance; and is at length of 3m when the cell
is shunted by a 8  resistance. The internal resistance of the cell is, then
(A) 12  (B) 8  (C) 16  (D) 1 
9. If the radius of a potentiometer wire is increased four times, keeping its length constant then the value of
its potential gradient will become
(A) half (B) two times (C) four times (D) constant
10. The fuse-wire is made of
(A) copper (B) tungsten (C) lead tin alloy (D) nichrome
11. The material of the fuse-wire should have
(A) a high specific resistance and a high melting point
(B) a low specific resistance and a low melting point
(C) a high specific resistance and a low melting point
(D) a low specific resistance and a high melting point
12. A 25 watt, 220 volt bulb and a 100 watt, 220 volt bulb are connected in series across 440 volt line
(A) only 100 watt bulb will fuse (B) only 25 watt bulb will fuse
(C) none of the bulb will fuse (D) both bulbs will fuse

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 202

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
13. A 25 watt, 220 volt bulb and a 100 watt, 220 volt bulb are connected in parallel across a 440 volt lines
(A) only 100 watt bulb will fuse (B) only 25 watt bulb will fuse
(C) both bulb will fuse (D) none of the bulb will fuse
14. A electric current of 16 A exists in a metal wire of cross section 106 m 2 and length 1 m. Assuming one
free electrons per atom, the drift speed of the free electrons in the wire will be (Density of metal =
5 103 kg / m3 , atomic weight = 60)

(A) 5 103 m / s (B) 2 103 m / s (C) 4 103 m / s (D) 7.5 103 m / s

15. Choose the correct statement
(A) alloys of metals usually have less resistivity than that of their constituent metals
(B) dopping of a semiconductors increases its resistivity
(C) the resistivity of a semi conductor increases rapidly with increasing temperature
(D) the resistivity of nichrome heater wire is nearly independent of temperature
16. Material used in the construction of standard resistance must have
(A) Positive temperature co-efficient (B) Negative temperature co-efficient
(C) Almost negligible temperature co-efficient (D) Any of these
17. Select the correct statements
1) Resistivity of metal increases with temperature
2) emf of the cell is independent of area of plate
3) Internal resistance of cell depends on strength of electrolyte
4) manganese dioxide is added to electrolyte of cell for reducing the back emf.
(A) 1, 2 (B) 1, 2, 3 (C) 1, 3 (D) all
18. A student connects four cells, each of internal resistance 0.25 ohm in series but one cell is wrongly
connected. The external resistance is 1 ohm. If each cell has an emf 1.5 volt. What will be the current in
the circuit ?
(A) 2 A (B) 1.5 A (C) 1 A (D) 0.5 A
19. Two cells A and B are connected in the secondary circuit of a potentiometer one at a time and the
balancing length are respectively 400 cm and 440 cm. The emf of the cell A is 1.08 volt. The emf of the
second cell B in volts is
(A) 1.08 (B) 1.188 (C) 11.88 (D) 12.8
20. In a potentiometer experiment, the balancing length with a cell is 560 cm. When an external resistance of
10  is connected in parallel to the cell, the balancing length changes by 412 cm. The internal resistance
of the cell in ohm is
(A) 3.6 (B) 2.4 (C) 1.2 (D) 0.6
21. Two resistances of 400  and 800  are connected in series with 6 volt battery of negligible internal
resistance. A voltameter of resistance 10,000  is used to measure the potential difference across 400
 . The error in the measurement of potential difference in volts approximately is :
(A) 0.01 (B) 0.02 (C) 0.03 (D) 0.05

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 203

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
22. An electric current is passed through a circuit containing two wires of the same material, connected in
parallel. If the lengths and radii of the wires are in the ratio of 4/3 and 2/3, then the ratio of the currents
passing through the wire will be
(A) 3 (B) 1/3 (C) 8/9 (D) 2
23. In a metre bridge experiment null point is obtained at 20 cm from one end of the wire when resistance X is
balanced then where will be the new position of the null point from the same end, if one decides to balance
a resistance of 4 X against Y ?
(A) 50 cm (B) 80 cm (C) 40 cm (D) 70 cm
24. In a meterbridge, with a standard resistance of 5  in the left gap, the ratio of balancing lengths on the
meter bridge wire is 2:3. The unknown resistance is
(A) 1  (B) 15  (C) 10  (D) 7.5 
25. Two batteries A and B each of emf 2V are connected in series to an external resistance R=1 ohm. If the
internal resistance of battery A is 1.9 ohms and that of B is 0.9 ohm, what is the potential difference
between terminals of battery A?

(A) 2 V (B) 3.8 V (C) zero (D) none of these

26. AB is a potentiometer wire of length 100 cm and its resistance is 10 ohms. It is connected in series with a
resistance R=40 ohms and a battery of emf 2V and negligible internal resistance. If a source of unknown
emf E is balanced by 40 em length of the potentiometer wire, the value of E is

(A) 0.8 V (B) 1.6 V (C) 0.08 V (D) 0.16

27. A cell has emf E and its internal resistance is of r ohm. The cell is connected to a load resistance of r ohm.
The potential difference across the terminals of the cell is
E E
(A) E (B) (C) (D) 2 E
4 2
28. To get maximum current in a resistance of 3 ohm, one can use 'n' parallel rows each row having 'm' cells
in series. If the total number of cells is 24 and the internal resistance of each cell is 0.5 ohm, then
(A) m=12, n=2 (B) m=8, n=3 (C) m=2, n=12 (D) m=6, n=4

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 204

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
29. We know that the emf of a cell
(A) depends on the resistance of the circuit
(B) exists even when the circuit is not closed
(C) is equal to the p.d. between any two points of a conductor
(D) exists throughout the circuit
30. An electric kettle has two coils. When one coil is connected to the ac mains, the water in the kettle boils in
10 minutes. When the other coil is used, the same quantity of water takes 15 minutes to boil. How long will
it take for the same quantity of water to boil of the two coils are connected in parallel?
(A) 6 min (B) 12 min (C) 18 min (D) 24 min
31. A 12 V, 24 W tungsten filament bulb is supplied the current from n cells connected in series. Each cell
has an emf 1.5 V and internal resistance of 0.25  . What is the value of n in order that the bulb runds
at its rated power?
(A) 6 (B) 8 (C) 12 (D) 16
32. A series battery of six lead accumulators, each of emf 2.0V and internal resistance 0.50  is charged by
a 100 V dc supply. What series resistance should be used in the charging circuit in order to limit the
current to 8.0A?
(A) 4 (B) 6 (C) 8 (D) 10
33. In Q. 32, using R  8.0 , the power supplied by the dc source will be
(A) 200 W (B) 400 W (C) 800 W (D) 1600 W
34. In Q. 32, using R  8.0 , the power dissipated as heat will be
(A) 704 W (B) 706 W (C) 708 W (D) 710 W
35. In Q. 32, the energy stored in the battery in 2 minutes will be
(A) 96000 J (B) 84480 J (C) 11520 J (D) 9800 J
36. An electric bulb has a rating of 100 W, 200 V. If the supply voltage drops to 100 V, what is the total heat
and light energy produced by the bulb in 20 minutes?
(A) 10 kW (B) 20 kW (C) 30 kW (D) 40 kW
37. A set of n identical resistors, each of resistance R ohm when connected in series has an effective resistance
of x ohm. When the resistors are connected in parallel, the effective resistance is y ohm. What is the
relation between R, x and y?
xy
(A) R   x  y  (B) R   y  x  (C) R  xy (D) R   x  y 

38. In a potentiometer experiment for measuring the emf of a cell, the null point is at 220 cm when we have
a 600  resistance in series with the cell and galvanometer. If the series resistance is reduced to half,
the null point will be at
(A) 440 cm (B) 220 cm (C) 110 cm (D) 55 cm
39. A copper wire (resistivity = 1.7  10-8  m, density = 8900 kg m-(C) and an aluminium wire (resistivity =
2.8  108  m, density = 2700 kg m-(C) have the same mass per unit length. The ratio of the resistance
per unit length of aluminium and copper wire is
(A) 1: 2 (B) 1: 2 (C) 2 : 3 (D) 2 : 3

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 205

 Current Electricity Phy. XII

LEVEL-III

1. There are two concentric spheres of radius (A) and (B) respectively. If the space between them is filled
with medium of resistivity  , then the resistance of the intergap between the two spheres will be

  1 1   1 1   1 1
(A) (B)    (C)  (D)   
4(b  a) 4  b a  4  a 2 b2 
 4  a b 

2. In a region 1019  -particles and 1019 protons move to the left, while 1019 electrons move to the right
per second. The current is
(A) 3.2 A towards left (B) 3.2 A towards right
(C) 6.4 A towards left (D) 6.4 A towards right
3. A straight conductor of uniform cross-section carries a current, I. If s is the specific charge of an elec-
tron, the momentum of all the free electrons per unit length of the conductor, due to their drift velocity
only is

2
I I I
(A) Is (B) (C) (D)  
s s s
4. A current through a wire depends on time as I  10  4t . The charge crossing through the section of the
wire in 10 seconds is
(A) 50 C (B) 300 C (C) 400 C (D) 4 C
5. The effective resistance between points A and B in the circuit shown in figure is

(A) R/3 (B) R/2 (C) 2R/5 (D) 3R/5

6. Nine resistors each of resistance R are connected in the circuit as shown in figure. The effective resis-
tance between A and B is

7 3 2
(A) R (B) R (C) R (D) R
6 5 9
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 206
 Current Electricity Phy. XII
7. A uniform wire of resistance 36  is bent in the form of a circle. The effective resistance across the
points A and B is

(A) 36  (B) 18  (C) 9  (D) 2.75 

8. The steady state current in a 2  resistor when the internal resistance of the battery is negligible and the
capacitance of the condenser is 0.1  F is

(A) 0.6 A (B) 0.9 A (C) 1.5 A (D) 0.3 A

9. In the circuit shown in figure, the cells E1 and E 2 have e.m.fs of 4 V and 8 V and internal resistance 0.5
 and 1  respectively. Then the p.d. across E1 and E 2 will be

(A) 4.25 V; 4.25 V (B) 3.75 V; 3.75 V (C) 4.25 V; 7.5 V (D) 3.75 V; 7.5 V
10. A cell emf E having an internal resistance r is connected to an external resistance R. The potential drop
V across the resistance R varies with R as shown in figure by the curve marked as

(A) 4 (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) 3

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 207

 Current Electricity Phy. XII

11.  2

Resistance of a resistor at temperature t o C is R t  R 0 1  t  t . Here R 0 is the resistance at

0o C . The temperature coefficient of resistance at temperature t o C is

1  t   t 2    2t   2t
(A)
  2 t
(B)   2 t

(C) 1  t  t 2
 
(D) 2 1  t  t 2

12. In a copper voltameter, the mass deposited in 30s is m grams. If the current-time graph is as shown in
the figure, the electrochemical equivalent of copper (in g/(C) is

(A) 0.1 m (B) 0.6 m (C) m/2 (D) m

13. The circuit shown here is used to compare the emf of two cells E1 and E2  E1  E 2  . The null point is
at C when the galvanometer is connected to E1 . When the galvanometer is connected to E 2 , the null
point will be

(A) to the left of C (B) to the right of C (C) at C itself (D) no where on AB
14. In the following circuit fig., the resistance of wire AB is 10  and its length is 1 m. Rest of the quantities
are shown in the fig. The length of the wire AJ at which null point is obtained, will be

(A) 3.75 cm (B) 6.25 cm (C) 75 cm (D) 27.5 cm

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 208

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
15. In the following circuit fig., the resistance of wire AB is 10  and its length is 1 m. Rest of the quantities
are shown in the figure. The potential gradient on potentiometer wire will be

(A) 0.048 V/m (B) 0.08 V/m (C) 0.008 V/m (D) none of the above

16. The potentiometer wire of length 100 cm and resistance 9  is joined to a cell of emf 10 V and internal
resistance 1  . Another cell of emf 5V and internal resistance 2  is connected as shown in fig. The
galvanometer G shows no deflection when the length AC is

(A) 52.52 cm (B) 53.56 (C) 54.52 (D) 55.55 cm

17. The length of a potentiometer wire is l. A cell of emf E is balanced at a length 1/5 from the positive end
of the wire. If length of the wire is increased by l/2. At what distance will the same cell give a balance
point
2 3 3 4
(A) l (B) l (C) l (D) l
15 15 10 10
18. The resistance of a carbon filament at 0o C is 104 ohm. It is connected in series to an iron wire. The
temperature coefficient of resistivity of carbon and iron are -0.0003 and +0.00052 per o C respec-
tively. What must be the resistance of the iron wire so that the combined resistance does not change with
temperature ?
(A) 15 ohm (B) 60 ohm (C) 75 ohm (D) 156/104 ohm

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 209

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
19. Variation of current passing through a conductor as the voltage applied across its ends as varied is
shown in the adjoining fig. If the resistance is determined at the points A, B, C and D, we will find that

D
C

(A) resistance at C and D are equal (B) resistance at B is higher than at A

(C) resistance at C is higher than at B (D) resistance at B is higher than at C
20. In a potentiometer experiment the balancing length with a cell in open circuit is 250 cm. On shunting the
cell with a resistance of 2  , the balacing length becomes 200 cm. The internal resistance of the cell is
(A) 0.1  (B) 0.5  (C) 1  (D) 2 
21. Resistance of one carbon filament and one tungsten lamp are measured individually when the lamps are
lit and compared with their respectively resistance when cold. Which one of the following statements will
be true ?
(A) Resistance of the carbonf filament lamp will increase but that of tungsten will diminish when hot
(B) Resistance of the tungsten filament lamp will increase but that of carbon will diminish when hot
(C) Resistance of both the lamps will increase when hot
(D) Resistance of the lamps will decrease when hot.
22. The two electric bulb have tungsten filament of same length. If one of them gives 60 watts and the other
100 watt then
(A) 100 watts bulb has thicker filament
(B) 60 watts bulbs has thicker filament
(C) both filament are of same thickness
(D) it is not possible to get different wattage unless the length are different.
23. You are given a resistance wire of length 50 m and a battery of negligible resistance. In which of the
following cases is largest amount of heat generated ?
(A) When the wire is connected to the battery directly
(B) When the wire is divided in two parts and both the parts connected to the battery in parallel
(C) When the wire is divided in four parts and all the four parts connected to the battery in parallel
(D) When only half the wire is connected to the battery
24. Two heating coils, one of fine wire and the other of thick wire of the same material and of the same
length, are connected in series and in parallel, which of the following statement is true ?
(A) In series, fine wire liberates more energy while in parallel, thick wire will liberate more energy

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 210

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
(B) In series, fine wire liberates less energy while in parallel, thick wire will liberate more energy
(C) Both will liberate equally
(D) In series the thick wire will liberate more while in parallel it will liberate less energy

25. A copper wire having a cross-sectional area of 0.5 mm2 and a length of 0.1 m is initially at 25o C and
is thermally insulated from the surroundings. If a current of 10 A is set up in this wire, then the time in
which the wire starts melting. The change of resistance of the wire with temperature may be neglected.

(Density of Cu  9 103 Kg m 3 specific heat of Cu  9 102 Cal Kg 1 o C1 , M.P. (Cu)

1075o C and specific resistance = 1.6  10 8 m ).

(A) 558 s (B) 552 s (C) 560 s (D) 540 s

26.  3 1
An aluminium   4 10 K  
3 1
resistance R1 and a carbon   0.5 10 K resistance R 2 
are connected in series to have a resultant resistance of 36 at all temperatures. The values of R1 and
R 2 in  respectively are
(A) 32, 4 (B) 16, 20 (C) 4, 32 (D) 20, 16

27.  3 1
Aluminium   4 10 K  3 1
resistance of 60  and carbon   0.5 10 K 
resistance of 
40  are connected in parallel. The combination is heated. The effective resistance
(A) Greater than 24  (B) Less than 24 
(C) Greater than 40  (D) Greater than 100 
28. Find the minimum number of cells (some in series and some in parallel) required to produced a maximum
current of 1.5 A through an external resistance of 30 ohm, given the emf of each cell is 1.5 volt and
internal resistance 1 ohm
(A) 40 (B) 80 (C) 120 (D) 180
29. The total current supplied to the circuit by the battery is

(A) 1 A (B) 2 A (C) 4 A (D) 6 A

30. The resistance of the series combination of two resistances is S. When they are joined in parallel the total
resistance is P. If S=nP, then the minimum possible value of n is
(A) 4 (B) 3 (C) 2 (D) 1
31. The length of a wire of a potentiometer is 100 cm and the emf of its standard cell is E volt. It is employed
to measure the emf of a battery whose internal resistance is 0.5  . If the balance point is obtained at l
= 30 cm from the positive end, the emf of the battery is
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 211
 Current Electricity Phy. XII

30E 30E 30E 30(E  0.5i)

(A) (B) (C) (D)
100 100.5 (100  0.5) 100

32. Express which of the following setups can be used to verify Ohm's law

(A) (B)

(C) (D)

33. Thirteen resistances each of resistance R ohm are connected in the circuit as shown in the figure below.
The effective resistance between A and B is

2R 4R
(A) R  (B)  (C)  (D) 2R 
3 3
34. Equivalent resistance across AB in following network will be

(A) 1  (B) 2  (C) 3  (D) 4 

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 212

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
35. In the potentiometer circuit shown in Fig, the balance point with R  10 when switch S1 is closed and
S 2 is open is 50cm, while that when S 2 is closed and S1 is open is 60 cm. What is the value of X?

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4

36. A 50 V dc power supply is used to charge a battery of eight lead accumulators, each of emf 2V and
internal resistance 1/8  . The charging current also runs a motor connected in series with the battery..
The resistance of the motor is 5 and the steady current supply is 4A, the chemical power stored in the
battery is
(A) 80 W (B) 76 W (C) 64 W (D) 50 W
37. A 500 W heating unit is designed to operate on a 115 V line. If the line voltage drops to 110V line, then
the percentage drop in heat output will be
(A) 10.2 % (B) 8.1 % (C) 8.5% (D) 7.6%
38. A fuse wire with a radius 1 mm blows at 1.5 A. If the fuse wire of the same material should blow at 3A,
then the radius of the wire must be
(A) 41/3 mm (B) 2 mm (C) 0.5 mm (D) 8.0 mm
39. A house, served by a 220 V supply line, is protected by a 9 ampere fuse. The maximum number of 60
W bulb in parallel that can be turned on is
(A) 11 (B) 22 (C) 33 (D) 44
40. A Daniel cell has internal resistance 2  . It is short circuited and 0.1 gram of zinc is consumed. The heat
generated inside the cell be Q1. Then a resistance of 2  is connected across its terminal and again 0.1
gram of zinc is consumed. In this case, the heat generated within the cell is Q2. Then the ratio Q1/Q2 is
(A) 2 (B) 1 (C) 1/2 (D) 1/4
41. In an electroplating experiment, m grams of silver is deposited when 4A of current flows for 2
minutes. The amount (in grams) of silver deposited by 6A of current flowing for 40s will be
(A) 4 m (B) m/2 (C) m/4 (D) 2 m

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 213

 Current Electricity Phy. XII

PREVIOUS YEARS QUESTIONS

Electric Conduction, Ohm's Law and Resistance

1. A wire of resistance 4 is stretched to twice its original length. The resistance of stretched
wire would be : [NEET 2013]
(A) 16  (B) 2
(C) 4 (D) 8

2. The masses of the three wires of copper are in the ratio 5 : 3 : 1 and their lengths are in the
ratio 1 : 3 : 5 . The ratio of their electrical resistances is [J&K CET 2011]
(A) 5 : 3 : 1 (B) 125 :15:l
(C) 1:15:125 (D) 1 : 3 : 5

3. Two wires of the same material but of different diameters carry the same current I. If the
ratio of their diameters is 2 : 1, then the corresponding ratio of their mean drift velocities will
be
(A) 4 : 1 (B) 1 : 1 [AFMC 2010]
(C) 1 : 2 (D) 1 : 4

4. The temperature (T) dependence of resistivity (p) of a semiconductor is represented by

(A) (B) [BHU 2010]

(C) (D)

5. The unit of specific conductivity is [Punjab PMET 2010]

(A)  cm 1 (B)  cm 2

1
(C)  cm (D)  1 cm 1 .

6. The resistance of a wire at 20°C is 20 and at 500°C is 60 . At which temperature its
resistance will be 25? [Punjab PMET 2010]
(A) 50°C (B) 60°C
(C) 70°C (D) 80°C

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 214

 Current Electricity Phy. XII

7. The current–voltage graph for a given metallic wire at two

different temperatures T1 and T2 is shown in the figure. The
temperatures T1 and T2 are related as [EAMCET 2010]
(A) T 1 > T 2 (B) T 1 < T 2
(C) T 1 = T 2 (D) T1 >2T2.

8. A battery is connected to a uniform resistance wire AB and B is earthed. Which one of the
following graphs below shows how the current density J varies along AB?

(A) (B) [Haryana PMT 2010]

(C) (D)

9. The mobility of free electrons (charge = e, mass = m and relaxation time = ) in a metal is
proportional to [Manipal 2010]
e m
(A)  (B) 
m e
e m
(C) (D) .
m e

10. A steady current is set up in a metallic wire of non–uniform cross–section. How is the rate of
flow K of electrons related to the area of cross–section A? [AIIMS 2009]
1
(A) K is independent of A (B) K  A
(C) K  A (D) K  A 2 .

11. Assertion The power delivered to a light bulb is more just after it is switched ON and the
glow of the filament is increasing, as compared to when the bulb is glowing steadily, ie, after
sometime of switching ON.
Reason As temperature decreases, resistance of conductor increases. [AIIMS 2009]
(A) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion.
(B) Both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of assertion.
(C) If assertion is true but reason is false.
(D) Both assertion and reason are false.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 215

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
12. A student measures the terminal potential difference (V) of a cell (of emf  and internal
resistance r) as a function of the current (I) flowing through it. The slope arc intercept of the
graph between V and I, then respectively, equal [CBSE AIPMT 2009]
(A)  and –r (B) – r and 
(C) r and – (D) – and r.
V
13. For a metallic wire, the ratio (V = applied potent12. difference and i = current flowing) is
i
(A) independent of temperature [AFMC 2009]
(B) increases as the temperature rises
(C) decreases as the temperature rises
(D) increases or decreases as temperature rises depending upon the metal

14. A flash light lamp is marked 3.5 V and 0.28 A. The filament temperature is 425°C. The
filament resistance at 0°C is 4. Then, the temperature coefficient of resistance of the
material of the filament is [EAMCET 2009]
–3 –1 –3 –1
(A) 8.5  10 K (B) 3.5  10 K
–3 –1
(C) 0.5  10 K (D) 5  10–3 K–1
15. The current flowing through a wire depends on time as I =3t 2 +2t + 5. The charge flowing
through the cross–section of the wire in time from t = 0 to t = 2s is [DUMET 2009]
(A) 22 C (B) 20 C
(C) 18 C (D) 5C.
16. A wire of a certain material is stretched slowly by ten per cent. Its new resistance and
specific resistance become respectively [CBSE AIPMT 2008]
(A) 1.2 times, 1.1 times (B) 1.21 times, same
(C) both remain the same (D) 1.1 times, 1.1 times
17. The electron drift speed is small and the charge of the electron is also small but still, we
obtain large current in a conductor. This is due to [AFMC 2008]
(A) the conducting property of the conductor
(B) the resistance of the conductor is small
(C) the electron number density of the conductor is small
(D) the electron number density of the conductor is enormous
18. There is current of 40 A in wire of 10–6 m2 area of cross–section. If the number of free
electrons per cubic metre is 1029, then the drift velocity is [BHU 2008]
–3 –1 –3 –1
(A) 250  10 ms (B) 25.0  10 ms
(C) 2.50  10–3 ms–1 (D) 1.25  10–3 ms–1
19. A metal wire is subjected to a constant potential difference. When the temperature of the
metal wire increases, the drift velocity of the electron in it [KCET 2008]
(A) increases, thermal velocity of the electron decreases
(B) decreases, thermal velocity of the electron decreases
(C) increases, thermal velocity of the electron increases
(D) decreases, thermal velocity of the electron increases
20. An aluminium rod and copper rod are taken such that their lengths are same and their
resistances are also same. The specific, resistance of copper is half that of aluminium, but its
density is three times that of aluminium. The ratio of the mass of aluminium rod and that of
copper rod will be

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 216

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
1 2
(A) (B) [UP CPMT 2007]
6 3
(C) 4 (D) 6.

21. A copper wire of length 1 m and radius 1 mm is joined in series with an iron wire of length 2
m and radius 3 mm and a current is passed through the wires. The ratio of the current density
in the copper and iron wires is [Punjab PMET 2007]
(A) 18:1 (B) 9:1
(C) 6:1 (D) 2:3

22. The electric resistance of a certain wire of iron is R. If its length and radius are both doubled,
then
(A) the resistance will be doubled and the specific resistance will be halved [Manipal 2007]
(B) the resistance will be halved and the specific resistance will remain unchanged
(C) the resistance will be halved and specific resistance will be doubled
(D) the resistance and the specific resistance, will both remain unchanged

23. Consider the following statements A and B and identify the correct answer
A: Thermistors can have only negative temperature coefficients of resistance.
B: Thermistors with negative temperature coefficients of resistance are used as resistance
thermometers, to measure low temperature of the order of 10 K. [EAMCET 2006]
(A) Both A and B are true (B) Both A and B are false
(C) A is true, but B is false (D) A is false, but B is true

24. A potential difference is applied across the ends of a metallic wire. If the potential difference
is doubled, the drift velocity will [MHT CET 2006]
(A) be doubled (B) be halved
(C) be quadrupled (D) remain unchanged

25. If resistance of wire at 50°C is 5R  and at 100°C is 6R , find resistance of 0° C

(A) 0R  (B) 2R  [RPMT 2006]
(C) 3R  (D) 4R 

26. An electrical cable of copper has just one wire of radius 9 mm. Its resistance is 5 . the
single wire of the cable is replaced by 6 different well insulated copper wires each of radius 3
mm. The total resistance of the cable will now be equal to [UP CPMT 2005]
(A) 270  (B) 90 
(C) 45  (D) 7.5 .

27. What is the drift velocity of electrons, if the current flowing through a copper wire of 1 mm
diameter is 1.1 A ? Assume that each atom of copper contributes on electron.
(Given, density o f Cu =9g cm – 3 and atomic weight of Cu = 63) [DUMET 2005]
(A) 0.3 mm s–1 (B) 0.5 mm s–1
(C) 0. l mm s–1 (D) 0.2 mm s–1

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 217

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
28. The temperature coefficient of resistivity of a material is 0.0004/K. When the temperature of
the material is increased by 50°C, its resistivity increases by 2  10–8 ohm–m. The initial
resistivity of the material in ohm–m is [EAMCET 2004]
–8 –8
(A) 50  10 (B) 90  10
–8
(C) l00  10 (D) 200  10–8

29. Ohm's law is not obeyed by [AFMC 2004]

(A) electrolytes (B) discharge tubes
(C) vacuum tubes (D) All of these

Combination of Resistances

1. If power dissipated in the 9 resistor in the circuit

shown is 36 W, the potential difference across the
2, resistor is [CBSE AIPMT
2011]
(A) 8 V (B) 10 V
(C) 2 V (D) 4 V

2. The equivalent resistance between points A and B in the

given circuit is [J&K CET2011]
(A) 3 (B) 6

(C) 12 (D) 1.5

3. The maximum power dissipated in an external resistance R, when connected to a cell of emf
E and internal resistance r, will be [J&K CET 2011]
2 2
E E
(A) (B)
r 2r
2
E E2
(C) (D) .
3r 4r

4. Two batteries of emfs 2 V and 1 V of internal resistances 1 and 2 respectively are

connected in parallel. The effective emf of the combination is [Kerala CEE 2011]
3 5
(A) V (B) V
2 3

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 218

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
3
(C) V (D) 2V .
5
(E) 5V.

5. The resistance across A and B in the figure below will

be [WB JEE 2011]
(A) 3R (B) R
R
(C) (D) None of these
3

6. The current I drawn from the 5 V source will be

[AFMC 2011]
(A) 0.33 A (B) 0.5 A
(C) 0.67 A (D) 0.17 A

7. The effective resistance between points A and C for the

network shown in figure is [OJEE 2010]
2 3
(A) R (B) R
3 2
1
(C) 2R (D) .
2R

8. The current in the given circuit is

[JCECE 2010]
(A) 0.3 A (B) 0.4 A
(C) 0.1 A (D) 0.2 A

9. Three resistances 5, 5 and 6 are connected as shown

in figure. If the point S divides [Kerala CEE 2010]
(A) 11 (B) 8
(C) 6 (D) 10
(E) 4.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 219

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
10. The numerical value of charge on either plate of capacitor C
shown in figure [BCECE 2010]
CER 1
(A) CE (B)
R1  r
CER 2 CER 1
(C) (D)
R2  r R2  r

11. Two resistors 400 and 800 are connected in series with a 6 V battery. The potential
difference measured by voltmeter of 10 k across 400 resistor is [BCECE 2010]
(A) 2 V (B) 1.95 V
(C) 3.8 V (D) 4 V

12. The potential difference in volt across the resistance R3 in the

circuit shown in figure, is (Rl = 15 , R2 = 15, R3 = 30, R4
=35) [BCECE 2010]
(A) 5 (B) 7.5
(C) 15 (D) 12.5

13. Seven resistances are connected as shown in

the given figure. The equivalent resistance
between A and B is [AIIMS 2009]
(A) 3  (B) 4 
(C) 4.5  (D) 15 

14. Four resistances 10 , 5 , 7  and 3  are connected so that they form the sides of a
rectangle AB, BC, CD and DA respectively. Another resistance of 10 is connected across
the diagonal AC. The equivalent resistance between A and B is [AFMC 2009]
(A) 2 (B) 5 
(C) 7 (D) 10

15. Three resistances P, Q, R each of 2n and an unknown resistance S form the four arms of a
Wheatstone's bridge circuit. When a resistance of6n is connected in parallel to S the bridge
gets balanced. What is the value of 5? [JIPMER 2009]
(A) 2 (B) 3
(C) 6 (D) 1

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 220

 Current Electricity Phy. XII

16. In the circuit, the potential difference across

PQ will be nearest to [UP CPMT 2009]
(A) 9.6 V (B) 6.6 V
(C) 4.8 V (D) 3.2.V

17. In the circuit shown, the current through the

4 resistor is 1 A when the points P and M are
connected to a DC voltage source. The
potential difference between the points M and
N is
[CBSE AIPMT 2008]
(A) 1.5 V (B) 1.0 V
(C) 0.5 V (D) 3.2 V

18. If the colour code of carbon resistor is as follows, then give the value of its resistance in k ,
Colour of I strip—yellow
Colour of II strip—blue
Colour of III strip—orange
Colour of IV strip—gold [DUMET 2008]
(A) 46 ±5% (B) 0.46 ±5%
(C) 46 ±10% (D) 0.46 ±10%

19. The equivalent resistance between the points A and B will

be (each resistance is 15 ) [KCET 2008]
(A) 30  (B) 8 
(C) 10  (D) 40 

20. A carbon resistor is marked with the ring coloured brown, black, green and gold. The
resistance in ohm is [Kerala CEE 2008]
(A) 3.2  105 ± 5% (B) 1 106 ± 10%
(C) 1 x 107 ± 5% (D) 1  106 ± 5%
(E) 1  105 ± 5%

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 221

 Current Electricity Phy. XII

21. The equivalent resistance between A and B (of the

circuit shown) is [AMU 2007]
(A) 4.5  (B) 12 
(C) 5.4  (D) 20 

22. Five equal resistances each of resistance R are connected as

shown in the figure. A battery of V volts is connected between
A and B. The current flowing in AFCEB will be
[Manipal 2007]
3V V
(A) (B)
R R
V 2V
(C) (D) .
2R R
23. In a network as shown in the figure, the potential
difference across the resistance 2 R is (the cell has an
emf of E volt and no internal resistance)
[BCECE 2007]
4E
(A) 2E (B)
7
E
(C) (D) E.
7

24. The effective resistance across the points A and I is

[Kerala CEE 2006]
(A) 2  (B) 1 
(C) 0.5  (D) 5 .
(E) 10 

25. You are given n resistors, each of resistance r. They are first combined to get minimum
possible resistance, then they are connected to get the maximum possible resistance. The
ratio between minimum to maximum resistance is [Guj CET 2006]
1
(A) (B) n
n
1
(C) n2 (D) 2 .
n
26. A wire has resistance 12 . It is bent in the form of a circle. The effective resistance between
the two points on any diameter of the circle is [Haryana PMT 2006]
(A) 12  (B) 24 
(C) 6  (D) 3 

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 222

 Current Electricity Phy. XII

27. In the circuit given E = 6.0 volt, R1 =100  R2 =

R3 = 50 , R4 = 75 . The equivalent resistance of
the circuit, in ohms, is [KCET 2005]
(A) 11.875
(B) 26.31
(C) 118.75
(D) None of the above

Kirchhoff Law, Cells and their Combinations

1. Two cities are 150 km apart. Electric power is sent from one city to another city through
copper wires. The fall of potential per km is 8 volt and the averge resistance per km is 0.5 .
The power loss in the wire is :
(A) 19.2 J (B) 12.2 kW
(C) 19.2 W (D) 19.2 kW
2. The internal resistance of a 2.1 V cell which gives a current of 0.2. A through a resistance of
10  is : [NEET 2013]
(A) 1.0  (B) 0.2 
(C) 0.5  (D) 0.8 
3. The resistance of the four arms P, Q, R and S in a Wheatstone’s bridge are 10 ohm, 30 ohm,
30 ohm and 90 ohm, respectively. The e.m.f. and internal resistance of the cell are 7 Volt and
5 ohm respectively. If the galvanometer resistance is 50 ohm, the current drawn from the cell
will be : [NEET 2013]
(A) 2.0 A (B) 1.0 A
(C) 0.2 A (D) 0.1 A

4. A current of 2 A flows through a 2 resistor when connected across a battery. The same
battery supplies a current of 0.5 A when connected across a 9 resistor. The internal
resistance of the battery is [CBSE AIPMT 2011]
(A) 1/3  (B) 1/4
(C) 1  (D) 0.5

5. In the circuit shown, the currents i1 and i2 are

(A) i1 = 1.5 A, i2 = 0.5A [KCET 2011]
(B) i1 = 0.5 A. i2 = 1.5 A
(C) i1 = 1 A, i2 = 3A
(D) i1 = 3A, i2 = 1A.

6. Consider the following two statements.

A. Kirchhoffs junction law follows from the conservation of charge.
B. Kirchhoffs loop law follows from the conservation of energy.
Which of the following is correct? [CBSE AIPMT 2010]
(A) Both (A) and (B) are wrong (B) (A) is correct and (B) is wrong
(C) (A) is wrong and (B) is correct (D) Both (A) and (B) are correct

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 223

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
7. When a resistance R1 is connected across the terminals of a cell, the current is I1. When the
resistance is changed to R2, the current is I2. The internal resistance of the cell is [OJEE 2010]
I R I R I R I R
(A) 1 1 2 2 (B) 1 2 2 1
I1  I 2 I1  I 2
I R I R I R I R
(C) 1 2 2 1 (D) 2 2 1 1 .
I1  I2 I1  I2
8. A 10 m long wire of resistance 20  is connected in series with a battery of emf 3V and a
resistance of 10. The potential gradient along the wire in V/m is [VMMC 2010]
(A) 0.02 (B) 0.1
(C) 0.2 (D) 1.2

9. A capacitor of capacitance 5 F is connected as shown in the

figure. The internal resistance of the cell is 05 . The amount of
charge on the capacitor plates is [JIPMER 2010]
(A) 80 C (B) 40 C
(C) 20 C (D) 10 C

10. A battery of emf 2.1 V and internal resistance 0.05  is shunted for 5 s by a wire of constant
resistance 0.02 , mass 1 g and specific heat 0.1 cal/g/°C. The rise in the temperature of the
wire is
(A) 10.7°C (B) 21.4°C [EMCET 2010]
(C) 107°C (D) 214°C

11. A battery of emf E has an internal resistance r. A variable resistance R is connected to the
terminals of the battery. A current i is drawn from the battery. V is the terminal potential
difference. If R alone is gradually reduced to zero, which of the following best describes i
and V? [KCET 2010]
E
(A) i approaches zero, V approaches E (B) i approaches , V approaches zero
r
E
(C) i approaches , V approaches E (D) i approaches infinity, V approaches E
r
12. The potential difference across the terminals of a battery is 50 V when 11 A current is drawn
and 60 V when 1 A current is drawn. The emf and the internal resistance of the battery are
(A) 62 V, 2  (B) 63V, 1 [AFMC 2009]
(C) 61V, 1 (D) 64 V, 2 

13. See the electrical circuit shown in this figure. Which of the
following equations is a correct equation for it?
(A) 1   i1  i 2  R  i1r1  03 [AFMC 2009]
(B)  2  i 2 r2  1  i1r1  0
(C)  2   i1  i 2  R  i 2 r2  0
(D) 1   i1  i 2  R  i1r1  0 .

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 224

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
14. A 8F capacitor is charged by a 400V supply through 0.1 M resistance. The time taken by
the capacitor to develop a potential difference of 300 V is (Given log 10 4 = 0.602)
(A) 2.2 s (B) 1.1 s [EAMCET 2009]
(C) 0.55 s (D) 0.48 s

15. Two non–ideal batteries are connected in parallel. Consider the following statements.
(i) The equivalent emf is smaller than either of the two emfs. [UP CPMT 2008]
(ii) The equivalent internal resistance is smaller than either of the two internal resistance.
(A) Both (i) and (ii) are correct
(B) (i) is correct but (ii) is wrong
(C) (ii) is correct but (i) is wrong
(D) Both (i) and (ii) are wrong

16. What is current I? [DUMET 2008]

(A) 6 A (B) 5 A
(C) 7 A (D) 8 A

17. For driving current of 2 A for 6 min in a circuit, 1000 J of work is to be done. The emf of the
source in the circuit is [BHIT 2007]
(A) 1.38 V (B) 1.68 V
(C) 2.03 V (D) 3.10 V

18. A cell of emf X is connected across a resistor R. The potential difference across the wire is
measured as Y. The internal resistance of the cell should be [Punjab PMET 2007]
Y R
(A) X  (B)  X  Y 
R Y
(C)  X  Y 
Y
(D)
X  Y .
R R

19. A voltmeter having a resistance of 998  is connected to a cell of emf 2 V and internal
resistance 2 . The error in the measurement of emf will be [DUMET 2007]
–1 –3
(A) 4  10 V (B) 2  10 V
–3
(C) 4  10 V (D) 2  10–1 V.

20. A battery consists of a variable number (n) of identical cells, each having an internal
resistance r connected in series. The terminals of the battery are short–circuited. A graph of
current (I) in the circuit versus the number of cells will be as shown in figure [KCET 2006]

(A) (B)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 225

 Current Electricity Phy. XII

(C) (D)

21. A teacher asked a student to connect N cells each of emf e in series to get a total emf of Ne.
While connecting, the student, by mistake, reversed by polarity of n cells. The total emf of
the resulting series combination [EAMCET 2006]
 n
(A) e  N   (B) e  N  n 
 2
(C) e  N  2n  (D) eN .

22. What is the current flowing in arm AB?

[AFMC 2005]
35 13
(A) A (B) A
4 7
5 7
(C) A (D) A.
7 5

23. To draw maximum current from a combination of cells, how should the cells be grouped?
(A) Series [AFMC 2005]
(B) Parallel
(C) Mixed
(D) Depends upon the relative values of external and internal resistance

24. The magnitude of I in ampere is [KCET 2005]

(A) 0.1
(B) 0.3
(C) 0.6
(D) None of these

25. A cell of emf E and internal resistance r is connected with external resistance R. The graph
between terminal voltage and current is [Haryana PMT 2005]

(A) (B)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 226

 Current Electricity Phy. XII

(C) (D)

26. Which of the following is secondary cell? [AFMC 2004]

(A) Voltaic cell (B) Daniell cell
(C) Leclanche cell (D) Edison cell
27. Eels are able to generate current with biological cells called electroplaques. The
electroplaques in an eel are arranged in 100 rows, each row stretching horizontally along the
body of the fish containing 5000 electroplaques. The arrangement is suggestively shown
below. Each electroplaque has an emf of 0.15 V and internal resistance of 0.25 . The water
surrounding the cell completes the circuit between the head and its tail. If the water
surrounding it has a resistance of 500 , the current an eel can produce in water is about

(A) 1.5 A (B) 3.0 A

(C) 15 A (D) 300 A

28. Assertion A larger dry cell has higher emf.

Reason The emf of a dry cell is proportional to its size. [AIIMS 2004]
(A) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion.
(B) Both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of assertion.
(C) Assertion is true but reason is false.
(D) Both assertion and reason are false.
29. A source of emf E = 15V and having negligible internal resistance, is connected to a variable
resistance, so that the current in the circuit increases with time as I = 1.2t + 3. Then, the
total charge that will flow in first 5 s will be [J&K CET 2004]
(A) 10C (B) 20 C
(C) 30 C (D) 40 C
30. A cube is constructed from 12 identical wires. Current enters one corner of the cube and it
leaves the opposite corner. If the resistance of each wire is r, then equivalent resistance will
be
6r 5r
(A) (B) [J&K CET 2004]
5 6

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 227

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
5r 12r
(C) (D) .
12 5

Different Measuring Instruments

1. In an ammeter 0.2% of main current passes through the galvanometer. If resistance of galvanometer is
G, the resistance of ammeter will be : [AIPMT 2014]
1 500 1 499
(A) G (B) G (C) G (D) G
500 499 499 500
2. The resistances in the two arms of the meter bridge are 5 and R
respectively. When the resistance R is shunted with an equal resistance, the new
balance point is at 1.6 l1. The resistance ‘R’, is : [AIPMT 2014]
(A) 20  (B) 25 
(C) 10  (D) 15 

3. A potentiometer circuit has been set up for finding the internal resistance of a given cell. The main
battery, used across the potentiometer wire, has an emf of 2.0 V and a negligible internal resistance.
The potentiometer wire itself is 4 m long. When the resistance, R, connected across the given cell, has
values of
(i) infinity (ii) 9.5 
the 'balancing lengths’, on the potentiometer wire are found to be 3 m and 2.85 m, respectively.
The value of internal resistance of the cell is : [AIPMT 2014]
(A) 0.5  (B) 0.75 (C) 0.25  (D) 0.95 
4. To send 10% of main current through a moving coil galvanometer of resistance 99 , shunt
required is [J&K CET 2011]
(A) 9 (B) 11
(C) 1 0  (D) 9.9 
5. For measurement of potential difference, potentiometer is preferred in comparison to
voltmeter because [MHT CET 2010]
(A) potentiometer is more sensitive than voltmeter
(B) the resistance of potentiometer is less than voltmeter
(C) potentiometer is cheaper than voltmeter
(D) potentiometer does not take current from the circuit

6. A moving coil galvanometer is converted into an ammeter reading upto 0.03 A by connecting
a shunt of resistance 4r across it and into an ammeter reading upto 0.06 A when a shunt of
resistance r is connected across it. What is the maximum current which can be sent through
this galvanometer if no shunt is used? [Haryana PMT 2010]
(A) 0.01 A (B) 0.02 A
(C) 0.03 A (D) 0.04 A

7. Two cells of emfs E1 and E2 (E1 > E2) are connected as shown in figure. When a
potentiometer is connected between A and B, the balancing length of the potentiometer wire
is 300 cm. On connecting the same potentiometer between A and C, the balancing length is

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 228

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
E1
100 cm. The ratio is [AFMC 2010]
E2
(A) 3 : 1 (B) 1 : 3
(C) 2 : 3 (D) 3 : 2

8. A galvanometer of resistance 15  gives full scale deflection for a current of 2 mA.

Calculate the shunt resistance needed to convert it into an ammeter of range 5 A.[AFMC 2010]
(A) 0.178  (B) 0.002 
(C) 0.006  (D) 5.
9. A galvanometer of resistance 50  is connected to a battery of 3 V along with a resistance of
2950  in series. A full scale deflection of 30 divisions is obtained in the galvanometer. In
order to reduce this deflection to 20 divisions the resistance in series should be [BHU 2010]
(A) 4450  (B) 5050 
(C) 5550  (D) 6050 
10. A voltmeter of resistance 1000  gives full scale deflection when a current of 100 mA flows
through it. The shunt resistance required across it to enable it to be used as an ammeter
reading 1 A at full scale deflection is [Punjab PMET 2010]
(A) 10000  (B) 9000 
(C) 222  (D) 111 

11. A galvanometer acting as a voltmeter should have [JIPMER 2010]

(A) low resistance in series with its coil (B) low resistance in parallel with its coil
(C) high resistance in series with its coil (D) high resistance in parallel with its coil
12. Two resistances are connected in two gaps of a metre bridge. The balance point is 20 cm
from the zero end. A resistance of 15  is connected in series with the smaller of the two.
The null point shifts to 40 cm. The value of the smaller resistance in ohm is [CMC 2010]
(A) 3 (B) 6
(C) 9 (D) 12
(E) None of these
13. A battery of four cells in series, each having an emf of 1.4 V and an internal resistance of 2 
is to be used to charge a small 2V accumulator of negligible internal resistance. What is the
charging current?
(A) 0.1 A (B) 0.2 A [MGIMS 2010]
(C) 0.3 A (D) 0.45 A
14. An ammeter reads up to 1 A. Its internal resistance is 0.81 . To increase the range to 10 A,
the value of the required shunt is [MGIMS 2010]
(A) 0.03  (B) 0.3 
(C) 0.9  (D) 0.09 
15. The length of a wire of a potentiometer is 100 cm, and the emf of its stand and cell is E volt.
It is employed to measure the emf of a battery whose internal resistance is 0.5 . If the
balance point is obtained at l = 30 cm from the positive end, the emf of the battery is
30E 30E
(A) (B) [MGIMS 2010]
100.5 100  05

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 229

 Current Electricity Phy. XII

30  E  0.5i 
(C) , where i is the current in the potentiometer wire
100
30E
(D)
100
16. A 36  galvanometer is shunted by resistance of 4 . The percentage of the total current,
which passes through the galvanometer is [JCECE 2010]
(A) 8% (B) 9%
(C) 10% (D) 91%
17. A galvanometer has a resistance of 100 . A potential difference of 100 mV between its
terminals gives a full scale deflection. The shunt resistance required to convert it into an
ammeter reading upto 5 A is [AIIMS 2009]
(A) 0.01  (B) 0.02 
(C) 0.03  (D) 0.04 
18. An ammeter and a voltmeter of resistance R are connected in series to an electric cell of
negligible internal resistance. Their readings are A and V respectively. If another resistance
R is connected in parallel with the voltmeter, then [AFMC 2009]
(A) both A and F will increase (B) both A and F will decrease
(C) A will decrease and F will increase (D) A will increase and F will decrease
19. In a potentiometer of one metre length, an unknown emf voltage source is balanced at 60 cm
length of potentiometer wire, while a 3V battery is balanced at 45 cm length. Then the emf of
the unknown voltage source is [AFMC 2009]
(A) 3 V (B) 2.25 V
(C) 4 V (D) 4.5 V
20. A galvanometer of resistance 10  gives full–scale deflection when 1 mA current passes
through it. The resistance required to convert it into a voltmeter reading upto 2.5 V is
(A) 24.9  (B) 249  [BCECE 2009]
(C) 2490  (D) 24900 .
21. When a galvanometer is shunted by resistance S, its current capacity increases n times. If the
same galvanometer is shunted by another resistance S', its current capacity will increase by n’
is given by

(A)
 n  1 S (B)
S  n  1  S
[MGIMS 2009]
S S
n S S  n  1  S
(C) (D) .
S S
22. A potentiometer has uniform potential gradient across it. Two cells connected in series (i) to
support each other and (ii) to oppose each other are balanced over 6 m and 2m, respectively
on the potentiometer wire. The emf s of the cells are in the ratio of [MGIMS 2009]
(A) 1 :2 (B) 1 : 1
(C) 3 : 1 (D) 4 : 1
23. A potentiometer having the potential gradient of 2 mVcm–1 is used to measure the difference
of potential across a resistance of 10 . If a length of 50 cm of the potentiometer wire is
required to get the null points the current passing through 10  resistor is (in mA)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 230

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
(A) 1 (B) 2 [MGIMS 2009]
(C) 5 (D) 10
24. In a meter bridge experiment, resistances are connected as
shown in figure. The balancing length l1 is 55 cm. Now an
unknown resistance x is connected in series with P and the
new balancing length is found to be 75 cm. The value of x is
[Kerala CEE 2009]
54 20
(A)  (B) 
13 11
48 11
(C)  (D) 
11 48
(E) 5 .

25. A galvanometer coil has a resistance of 15  and gives full scale deflection for a current of 4
mA. To convert it to an ammeter of range 0 to 6 A [Manipal 2009]
(A) 10 m  resistance is to be connected in parallel to the galvanometer
(B) 10 m  resistance is to be connected in series with the galvanometer
(C) 0.1  resistance is to be connected in parallel to the galvanometer
(D) 0.1  resistance is to be connected in series.

26. A galvanometer can be converted into an ammeter by connecting [Kerala CEE 2009]
(A) a high resistance in parallel (B) a very small resistance in series
(C) a very small resistance in parallel (D) a high resistance in series
(E) a low resistance in series
27. A 2V battery, a 990  resistor and a potentiometer of 2 m length, all are connected in series
of the resistance of potentiometer wire is 10 , then the potential gradient of the
potentiometer wire is
(A) 0.05 Vm–1 (B) 0.5 Vm–1 [MHT CET 2009]
–1 –1
(C) 0.01 Vm (D) 0.1 Vm

28. A cell can be balanced against 110 cm and 100 cm of potentiometer wire, respectively with
and without being short circuited through a resistance of 10 . Its internal resistance is
(A) 1.0  (B) 0.5  [CBSE AIPMT 2008]
(C) 2.0  (D) zero

29. A galvanometer of resistance 50 Q is connected to a battery of 3 V along with a resistance of

2950  in series. A full scale deflection of 30 divisions is obtained in the galvanometer, in
order to reduce this deflection to 20 divisions, the resistance in series should be
(A) 5050  (B) 5550  [CBSE AIPMT 2008]
(C) 6050  (D) 4450 

30. A galvanometer coil has a resistance of 15  and gives full scale deflection for a current of 4
mA. To convert it to an ammeter of range 0 to 6 A
(A) 10 m resistance is to be connected in parallel to the galvanometer
(B) 10 m resistance is to be connected in series with the galvanometer
(C) 0.1  resistance is to be connected in parallel to the galvanometer

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 231

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
(D) 0.1 resistance is to be connected in series with the galvanometer
31. A voltmeter of range 2 V and resistance 300  cannot be converted into ammeter of range
(A) 1A (B) 1 mA [AMU 2008]
(C) 100 mA (D) 10 mA
32. An ammeter reads upto 1A. Its internal resistance is 0.81 . To increase the range to 10 A
the value of the required shunt is [RPMT 2008]
(A) 0.03  (B) 0.3 
(C) 0.9  (D) 0.09 
33. The deflection in a moving coil galvanometer falls from 50 divisions to 10 divisions,when a
shunt of 12  is connected with it. The resistance of galvanometer coil is [Guj CET 2008]
(A) 24  (B) 12 
(C) 6  (D) 48 
34. In the circuit shown in figure, P  R and if the reading of the
galvanometer G is same while the switch S is opened or
closed, then [Manipal 2007]
(A) I Q =I R (B) IR =IG
(C) IP =IG (D) IQ = IG.

35. A galvanometer of 50  resistance has 25 divisions. A current of 4  10–4 A gives a

deflection of one division. To convent this galvanometer into a voltmeter having a range of
25 V, it should be connected with a resistance of [Manipal 2007]
(A) 2500  as a shunt (B) 245  as a shunt
(C) 2550  in series (D) 2450  in series
36. A voltmeter has resistance of G ohm and range of V voll The resistance required in series to
convert it into : voltmeter of range nV volt is [Guj CET 2007]
(A) (n – 1)G (B) nG
G G
(C) (D) .
n  n  1
37. To decrease the range of an ammeter, its resistance nee to be increased. An ammeter has
resistance R0 an range I. Which of the following resistance can be connected in series with it
I
to decrease its range to ? [MP PMT 2006]
n
R R0
(A) 0 (B)
n  n  1
R0
(C) (D) None of these.
 n  1

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 232

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
38. A galvanometer has a resistance 50 . A resistance of 5 is connected parallel to it. Fraction
of the total current flowing through galvanometer is [J&K CET 2006]
1 1
(A) (B)
10 11
1 2
(C) (D) .
50 15

39. Two resistances are connected in two gaps of a meter bridge. The balance point is 20 cm
form the zero end. A resistance of 15 is connected in series with the smaller of the two. The
null point shifts to 40 cm. The value of the smaller resistance in ohm is [KCET 2005]
(A) 3 (B) 6
(C) 9 (D) 12

40. A galvanometer has 30 divisions and a sensitivity 16, A/div. It can be converted into a
voltmeter to read 3 V by connecting [Kerala CEE 2005]
(A) resistance nearly 6 k in series (B) 6 k in parallel
(C) 500  in series (D) it cannot be converted
(E) 6.6 k in series

41. By the resistance of a galvanometer G = 6, maximum current of 2 A is measured by it.

Then required resistance to convert it into an ammeter reading up to 6 A, will be
(A) 5  (B) 4 [RPMT 2005]
(C) 3  (D) 2 

42. If resistance of voltmeter is 10000  and resistance of

galvanometer is 2 , then find R when voltmeter reads 12
V and galvanometer reads 0.1 A. [BCECE 2005]
(A) 118  (B) 120 
(C) 124  (D) 114 

43. The figure below shows a 2.0 V potentiometer used for

the determination of internal resistance of a 1.5 V cell.
The balance point of the cell in the open circuit is 75
cm. When a resistor of 10  is used in the external
circuit of the cell, the balance point shifts to 65 cm
length of potentiometer wire. The internal resistance of
the cell is [JCECE 2005]
(A) 2.5  (B) 2.0 
(C) 1.54  (D) 1.0 

44. A galvanometer gives full scale deflection with 0.2 A in

a coil as shown in the figure. The resistance of its coil is
10 . How much shunt resistance is required to convert
it into an ammeter to read current upto 1.8 A?
[BHU 2004]
(A) 1.25  (B) 2.5 
(C) 5.0  (D) 10.0 

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 233

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
45. The maximum current that can be measured by a galvanometer of resistance 40 , is 10 mA.
It is converted into a voltmeter that can read upto 50 V. The resistance to be connected in
series with the galvanometer (in ohms) is [KCET 2004]
(A) 2010 (B) 4050
(C) 5040 (D) 4960

46. A unknown resistance R1 is connected in series with a resistance of 10 . This combination

is connected to one gap of a metre bridge while a resistance R2 is connected in the other gap.
The balance point is at 50 cm. Now, when the 10  resistance is removed the balance point
shift to 40 cm. The value of R1 is ( in ohm) [KCET 2004]
(A) 20 (B) 10
(C) 60 (D) 40

47. An electrical meter of internal resistance 20  gives a full scale deflection when one
milliampere current flows through it. The maximum current, that can be measured by using
three resistors of resistance 12  each, in milliampere is [EAMCET 2004]
(A) 10 (B) 8
(C) 6 (D) 4

Heating Effects of Current

1. There are two electric bulbs of 40 W and 100 W. Which one will be brighter when first
connected in series and then in parallel? [AFMC 2010]
(A) 40 W in series and 100 W in parallel (B) 100 W in series and 40 W in parallel
(C) 40 W both in series and parallel will be uniform
(D) 100 W both in series and parallel will be uniform

2. It two bulbs of wattages 25 and 100 W respectively each rated by 220 V are connected in
series with the supply of 440 V, which bulb will fuse? [AIIMS 2010]
(A) 100 W bulb (B) 25 W bulb
(C) None of them (D) Both of them

3. The resistance of the filament of a lamp increases with the increase in temperature. A lamp
rated 100 W and 200 V is connected across 220 V power supply. If the voltage drops by
10%, then the power of the lamp will be [BHU 2010]
(A) 90 W (B) 81 W
(C) between 90 and 100 W (D) between 81 and 90 W

4. Two bulbs marked 60 W, 220 V and 100 W, 220 V are connected in series and the series
combination is now connected across a 220 V main supply. The power dissipiated in the
circuit is [AMU 2010]
(A) 37.5 W (B) 75 W
(C) 80 W (D) 40 W

5. An electric bulb is rated 220 V and 100 W. Power consumed by it when operated on 110 V is
(A) 50 W (B) 75 W [CG PMT 2010]
(C) 90 W (D) 25 W.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 234

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
6. Two bulbs consume same power when operated at 200 V and 300 V respectively. When
these bulbs are connected in series across a DC source of 500 V, then [Haryana PMT 2010]
(A) ratio of potential differences across them is 3/2
(B) ratio of potential differences across them is 9/4
(C) ratio of powers consumed across them is 4/9
(D) ratio of powers consumed across them is 2/3

7. A factory is served by a 220 V supply line. In a circuit protected by a fuse marked 10 A, the
maximum number of 100 W lamps in parallel that can be turned on is [Manipal 2010]
(A) 11 (B) 22
(C) 33 (D) 66

8. It takes 16 min to boil some water in an electric kettle. Due to some defect it becomes
necessary to remove 10% turns of heating coil of the kettle. After repairs, how much time
will it take to boil the same mass of water? [Manipal 2010]
(A) 17.7 min (B) 14.4 min
(C) 20.9 min (D) 13.9 min

9. Bl, B2 and B3 are the three identical bulbs connected to a

battery of steady emf with key K closed. What happens to
the brightness of the bulbs Bl and B2 when the key is
opened? [KCET 2010]
(A) Brightness of the bulb B1 increases and that of B2
decreases
(B) Brightness of the bulbs Bl and B2 increase
(C) Brightness of the bulb B1 decreases and B2 increases
(D) Brightness of the bulbs B1 and B2 decrease

10. A tap supplies water at 22°C, a man takes 1 L of water per min at 37°C from the geyser. The
power of geyser is [KCET 2010]
(A) 525 W (B) 1050 W
(C) 1775 W (D) 2100 W.

11. Two electric bulbs rated 50 W and 100 V are glowing at full power, when used in parallel
with a battery of emf 120 V and internal resistance 10 . The maximum number of bulbs that
can be connected in the circuit when glowing at full power, is [AIIMS 2009]
(A) 6 (B) 4
(C) 2 (D) 8

12. Two similar heater coils separately take 10 min to boil a certain amount of water. If both
coils are connected in series, time taken to boil the same amount of water will be[AFMC 2009]
(A) 15 min (B) 20 min
(C) 7.5 min (D) 25 min

13. An electric motor operates on a 50 V supply and a current of 12 A. If the efficiency of the
motor is 30%, what is the resistance of the winding of the motor? [Manipal 2009]
(A) 6  (B) 4 
(C) 2.9  (D) 3.1 

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 235

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
14. Heater coil A takes t1 second to boil certain quantity of water. Heater coil B takes t2 second
to boil same quantity of water. If A and B are connected in series, the time taken to boil the
same quantity of water by the combination is [J&K CET 2009]
(A) t1t 2 (B) t1  t 2
1 t 1t 2
(C)  t1  t 2  (D) .
2 t1  t 2

15. The tungsten filaments of two electric bulbs are of the same length. If one of them gives 25
W power and the other 60 W power, then [J&K CET 2009]
(A) both the filaments are of same thickness
(B) 25 W bulb has thicker filament
(C) 60 W bulb has thicker filament
(D) both the filaments have same cross–section area

16. 160 W–60 V lamp is connected at 60 V DC supply. The number of electrons passing through
the lamp in 1 min is [Haryana PMT, CG PMT 2009]
19 21
(A) 10 (B) 10
19
(C) 1.6  l0 (D) 1.4  l0 2 0
(The charge of electron e = 1.6  10 –19 C)
17. An electric bulb rated 220 V, 100 W is connected in series with another bulb rated 220 V, 60
W. If the voltage across the combination is 220 V, the power consumed by the 100 W bulb
will be about
(A) 25 W (B) 14 W [Kerala CEE 2009]
(C) 60 W (D) 100 W
(E) 80 W
18. Two identical cells each of emf E and internal resistance r are connected in parallel with an
external resistance R. To get maximum power developed across R, the value of R is
r
(A) R  (A) R = r [OJEE 2009]
2
r
(B) R  (D) R = 2r.
3

19. Three electric bulbs of 200 W, 200 W and 400 W are shown in
figure. The resultant power of the combination is
[OJEE 2009]
(A) 800 W (B) 400 W
(C) 200 W (D) 600 W

20. A: An electric bulb becomes dim, when an electric heater in parallel circuit is switched on.
R: Dimness decreases after sometime. [AIIMS 2008]
(A) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion.
(B) Both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of assertion.
(C) Assertion is true but reason is false.
(D) Both assertion and reason are false.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 236

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
21. A projector lamp can be used at a maximum voltage of 60 V, its resistance is 20 , the series
resistance (in ohms) required to operate the lamp from a 75 V supply is [EAMCET 2008]
(A) 2 (B) 3
(C) 4 (D) 5
22. Two electric bulbs are connected one by one across potential difference V. At that time
power consumed in them are P1 and P2 respectively. Now, if potential difference V is applied
across series combination of these bulbs, what will be total power consumed ?
P1P2
(A) (B) P1P2 [Guj CET 2008]
P1  P2
(C) P1  P2 (D) P1P2 .

23. The power dissipated across resistance R which is connected across a battery of potential V
is P. If resistance is doubled, then the power becomes [UP CPMT 2007]
1
(A) (B) 2
2
1
(C) (D) 4
4
24. Two bulbs 100 W, 250 V and 200 W, 250 V are connected in parallel across a 500 V line.
Then
(A) 100 W bulb will be fused (B) 200 W bulb will be fused [AMU 2007]
(C) both bulbs will be fused (D) no bulb will be fused
25. A battery is charged at a potential of 15 V for 8 H when the current flowing is 10 A. The
battery on discharge supplies a current of 5 A for 15 H. The mean terminal voltage during
discharge is 14 V. The "watt–hour" efficiency of the battery is [Manipal 2007]
(A) 82.5% (B) 80%
(C) 90% (D) 87.5%
26. When three identical bulbs of 60 W, 200 V rating are connected in series to a 200 V supply,
the power drawn by them will be [Manipal 2007]
(A) 60 W (B) 180 W
(C) 10 W (D) 20 W
27. A 5 A fuse wire can withstand a maximum power of 1 W in circuit. The resistance of the fuse
wire is
(A) 0.2 Q (B) 5 Q [MP PMT 2007]
(C) 0.4 Q (D) 0.04 Q

28. If two identical heaters each rated as (1000 W, 220 V) are connected in parallel to 220 V,
then the total power consumed is [AMU 2006]
(A) 200 W (B) 2500 W
(C) 250 W (D) 2000 W

29. An AC is represented by e = 220 sin (100 )t V and is applied over a resistance of 110 .
The heat produced in 7 min is [BHU 2006]
3 3
(A) 11  10 cal (B) 22  10 cal
3
(C) 33  10 cal (D) 25  103 cal

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 237

 Current Electricity Phy. XII

30. For ensuring dissipation of same energy in all three

resistors (R l ,R 2 ,R 3 ) connected as shown in figure, their
values must be related as [AIIMS 2005]
(A) R1 = R2 = R3 (B) R2 = R3 and R1 = 4R2
(C) R2 =R3 and R 1 =1/4 R2 (D) R1 =R2+R3

31. Three identical bulbs are connected in series and these together dissipate a power P. If now
the bulbs are connected in parallel, then the power dissipated will be [DUMET 2005]
(A) P/3 (B) 3P
(C) 9P (D) PI9

Thermoelectricity
2
1. If E = at + bt , what is the neutral temperature? [AFMC 2010]
a a
(A)  (B)
2b 2b
a a
(C)  (D) .
b b

2. A thermo–emf F appears across a conductor maintained at a temperature difference T. The

Thomson coefficient is then given by [DUMET 2010]
2
dV dV
(A) T 2 (B) T 2
dT dT
2
1dV 1 dV
(C)  2
(D)  2 .
T dT T dT
3. The inversion temperature of a copper–iron thermocouple is 540°C when the cold junction
temperature is 0°C. If the cold junction temperature is increased by 10°C, then the inversion
temperature and the neutral temperature of the thermocouple respectively are [Manipal 2010]
(A) 270°C and 530°C (B) 270°C and 550°C
(C) 280°C and 530°C (D) 280°C and 550°C
4. The thermo–emf of a thermocouple is 25 V/°C at room temperature. A galvanometer of
4 . resistance, capable of detecting current as low as 10–1 mA, is connected with the
thermocouple. The smallest temperature difference that can be detected by this system is
(A) 16°C (B) 12°C [Manipal 2010]
(C) 8°C (D) 20°C
5. In a thermocouple, which of the following statements is not true? [Kerala CEE 2009]
(A) Neutral temperature depends upon the nature of materials in the thermocouple
(B) Temperature of inversion depends upon the temperature of cold junction
(C) When the temperature of the hot junction is equal to the temperature of inversion, the
thermo emf becomes zero
(D) When the temperature of cold junction increases, the temperature of inversion also
increases
(E) When the temperature of hot junction increases beyond the temperature of inversion the
thermo emf increases in the opposite direction

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 238

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
6. If a current is allowed to pass through a circuit consisting of two dissimilar metals, there is
either evolution or absorption of heat at the junction, depending upon the direction of the
current. The effect is known as [Haryana PMT 2009]
(A) Seeback effect (B) Joule effect
(C) Peltier effect (D) Thomson effect
7. A thermoelectric refrigerator works on [RPMT 2007]
(A) Joule effect (B) Seeback effect
(C) Peltier effect (D) Thermionic effect
8. The thermocouple among the following that can produce maximum thermo emf for the same
temperature difference between the junction is [J&K CET 2007]
(A) Fe–Cu (B) Ag–Au
(C) Sb–Bi (D) Cu–Pb
9. The hot and cold junctions of iron–platinum and constantan–platinum thermocouples, when
held at a temperature difference of 100°C generate thermo emf of 1600 V and –3400 pV
respectively. The value of thermo emf for iron–constantan thermocouple (in V°C-1) is
(A) 14 (B) 25 [EAMCET 2005]
(C) 28 (D) 50

Chemical Effect of Current

1. When a copper voltmeter is connected with a battery of emf 12 V. 2 g of copper is deposited
in 30 min. If the same voltmeter is connected across a 6 V battery then the mass of copper
deposited in 45 min would be [AIIMS 2010]
(A)lg (B) 1.5 g
(C) 2 g (D) 2.5 g

2. In producing chlorine by electrolysis 100 kW power at 125 V is being consumed. How much
chlorine per minute is liberated (ECE of chlorine is 0.367  10–6 kgC–1)[CBSE AIPMT 2010]
(A) 1.76  10–3 kg (B) 9.67  10–3 kg
(C) 17.61  10–3 kg (D) 3.67  10–3 kg

3. Total surface area of a cathode is 0.05 m2 and 1 A current passes through it for 1 h.
Thickness of nickel deposited on the cathode is (given that density of nickel = 9 g/cc and its
ECE = 3.04  10–4 g/C)
(A) 2.4 m (B) 2.4 pm [Haryana PMT 2010]
(C) 2.4 mm (D) None of the above

4. Same current is being passed through a copper voltameter and a silver voltameter. The rate of
increase in weights of the cathode of the two voltameters will be proportional to
(A) atomic masses (B) atomic number [AFMC 2009]
(C) relative densities (D) None of these

5. Same current is being passed through a copper voltameter and a silver voltameter. The rate of
increase in weights of the cathode of the two voltameters will be proportional to [AMU 2009]
(A) atomic masses (B) atomic number
(C) relative densities (D) None of these

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 239

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
6. Faraday's laws are consequence of [AIIMS 2008]
(A) conservation of charges
(B) conservation of energy
(C) conservation of momentum
(D) lagging of current behind emf in purely resistive AC circuit

7. A steady current of 1.5 A flows through a copper voltameter for 10 min. If the
electrochemical equivalent of copper is 30  l0 – 5 gC – 1 , the mass of copper deposited on the
electrode will be
(A) 0.40 g (B) 0.50 g [UP CPMT, JIPMER 2008]
(C) 0.67 g (D) 0.27 g

8. When 1A of current is passed through CuS04 solution for 10 s, then the number of copper
ions deposited at the cathode will be [Manipal 2008]
19 19
(A) 1.6  l0 (B) 3.1  l0
19
(C) 4.8  l0 (D) 6.2  1019
9. The negative Zn pole of Daniell cell, sending a constant current through a circuit, decreases
in mass by 0.13 g in 30 min. If the electrochemical equivalent of Zn and Cu are 32.5 and 31.5
respectively, the increase in the mass of the positive Cu pole in this time is [RPMT 2008]
(A) 0.180 g (B) 0.141 g
(C) 0.126 g (D) 0.242 g

10. In producing chlorine through electrolysis 100 W power at 125 V is being consumed. How
much chlorine per min is liberated? [ECE of chlorine is 0367  10–6 kgC–1]
(A) 17.6 mg (B) 21.3 mg [CBSE AIPMT 2006]
(C) 24.3 mg (D) 13.6 mg

QUESTION ASKED IN YEAR 2015

1. A potentiometer wire of length L and a resistance r connected in series with a battery of
e.m.f. E0 and a resistance r1. An unknown e.m.f. E is balanced at a length l of the
potentiometer wire. The e.m.f. E will be given by [AIPMT 2015]
LE 0 r LE 0 r E0 r  E0 
(A) (B) (C)  (D)
 r  r1   r1  r  r1  L L

2. Two metal wires of identical dimensions are connected in series. If 1 and 2 are the
conductivities of the metal wires respectively, the effective conductivity of the combination
is: [AIPMT 2015]
12 212 1  2 1  2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
1  2 1  2 212 12

3. A circuit contains an ammeter, a battery of 30 V and a resistance 40.8 ohm all connected in
series. If the ammeter has a coil of resistance 480 ohm and a shunt of 20 ohm, the reading in
the ammeter will be: [AIPMT 2015]
(A) 1 A (B) 0.5 A (C) 0.25 A (D) 2 A

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 240

 Current Electricity Phy. XII
4. Across a metallic conductor of non-uniform cross section a constant potential difference is
applied. The quantity which remains constant along the conductor is: ' [AIPMT 2015]
(A) current (B) drift velocity (C) electric field (D) current density

5. A potentiometer wire has length 4 m and resistance 8. The resistance that must be
connected in series with the wire and an accumulator of e.m.f. 2V, so as to get a potential
gradient 1 mV per cm on the wire is: [AIPMT 2015]
(A) 40  (B) 44  (C) 48  (D) 32 

6. A, B and C are voltmeters of resistance R, 1.5R and 3R respectively as shown in the figure.
When some potential difference is applied between X and Y, the voltmeter readings are VA,
VB and VC respectively. Then : [AIPMT 2015]

(A) VA  VB = VC (B) VA = VB  VC (C) VA  VB  VC (D) VA = VB = VC

QUESTION ASKED IN YEAR 2016, 2017

1. The potential difference (V A  VB ) between the points A and B in the given figure is
[NEET 2016 – Phase II]

(A) 3V (B) 3V (C) 6V (D) 9V

2. A filament bulb (500 W, 100 V) is to be used in a 230 V main supply. When a resistance R
is connected in series, it works perfectly and the bulb consumes 500 W. The value of R is
[NEET 2016 – Phase II]
(A) 230  (B) 46  (C) 26  (D) 13 

3. The resistance of a wire is ‘R’ ohm. If it is melted and stretched to ‘n’ times its original
length, its new resistance will be: [NEET 2017]
R R
(A) nR (B) (C) n 2 R (D)
n n2

4. A potentiometer is an accurate and versatile device to make electrical measurements of EMF

because the method involves: [NEET 2017]
(A) cells
(B) Potential gradients
(C) a condition of no current flow through the galvanometer
(D) a combination of cells, galvanometer and resistances

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 241

 Current Electricity Phy. XII

ANSWER KEY
LEVEL – 1
1. (D) 2. (B) 3. (A) 4. (D) 5. (A)
6. (B) 7. (D) 8. (D) 9. (C) 10. (C)
11. (C) 12. (B) 13. (B) 14. (C) 15. (B)
16. (A) 17. (C) 18. (C) 19. (B) 20. (D)
21. (D) 22. (B) 23. (C) 24. (A) 25. (B)
26. (B) 27. (D) 28. (C) 29. (D)
LEVEL – 2
1. (A) 2. (B) 3. (C) 4. (A) 5. (C)
6. (A) 7. (C) 8. (B) 9. (D) 10. (C)
11. (C) 12. (B) 13. (C) 14. (B) 15. (D)
16. (C) 17. (D) 18. (B) 19. (B) 20. (A)
21. (D) 22. (B) 23. (A) 24. (D) 25. (C)
26. (D) 27. (C) 28. (A) 29. (B) 30. (A)
31. (C) 32. (C) 33. (C) 34. (A) 35. (C)
36. (C) 37. (C) 38. (B) 39. (B)
LEVEL – 3
1. (D) 2. (C) 3. (C) 4. (B) 5. (C)
6. (D) 7. (D) 8. (D) 9. (C) 10. (C)
11. (C) 12. (C) 13. (A) 14. (B) 15. (A)
16. (D) 17. (C) 18. (B) 19. (D) 20. (B)
21. (B) 22. (A) 23. (C) 24. (A) 25. (D)
26. (C) 27. (B) 28. (C) 29. (C) 30. (A)
31. (A) 32. (A) 33. (B) 34. (A) 35. (B)
36. (C) 37. (C) 38. (A) 39. (C) 40. (A)
41. (B)

PREVIOUS YEARS QUESTIONS

Electric Conduction, Ohm's Law and Resistance

1. (A) 2. (C) 3. (D) 4. (C) 5. (D)
6. (D) 7. (B) 8. (D) 9. (A) 10. (C)
11. (D) 12. (B) 13. (B) 14. (A) 15. (A)
16. (B) 17. (D) 18. (C) 19. (C) 20. (B)
21. (B) 22. (B) 23. (A) 24. (A) 25. (A)
26. (D) 27. (C) 28. (C) 29. (D)
Combination of Resistances
1. (B) 2. (D) 3. (D) 4. (B) 5. (C)
6. (B) 7. (A) 8. (C) 9. (E) 10. (B)
11. (B) 12. (C) 13. (B) 14. (B) 15. (B)
16. (D) 17. (D) 18. (A) 19. (B) 20. (D)
21. (A) 22. (C) 23. (B) 24. (B) 25. (D)
26. (D) 27. (C)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 242

 Current Electricity Phy. XII

Kirchhoff Law, Cells and their Combinations

1. (D) 2. (C) 3. (C) 4. (A) 5. (B)
6. (D) 7. (D) 8. (C) 9. (D) 10. (D)
11. (B) 12. (C) 13. (A) 14. (B) 15. (C)
16. (D) 17. (A) 18. (B) 19. (C) 20. (C)
21. (C) 22. (B) 23. (A) 24. (A) 25. (B)
26. (D) 27. (A) 28. (C) 29. (C) 30. (B)
Different Measuring Instruments
1. (A) 2. (D) 3. (A) 4. (B) 5. (D)
6. (B) 7. (D) 8. (C) 9. (A) 10. (A)
11. (C) 12. (C) 13. (D) 14. (D) 15. (D)
16. (C) 17. (B) 18. (D) 19. (C) 20. (C)
21. (B) 22. (A) 23. (A) 24. (C) 25. (A)
26. (B) 27. (C) 28. (A) 29. (D) 30. (A)
31. (B) 32. (D) 33. (D) 34. (B) 35. (D)
36. (A) 37. (D) 38. (B) 39. (C) 40. (A)
41. (C) 42. (A) 43. (C) 44. (A) 45. (D)
46. (A) 47. (C)

Heating Effects of Current

1. (A) 2. (B) 3. (D) 4. (A) 5. (D)
6. (C) 7. (B) 8. (B) 9. (C) 10. (B)
11. (B) 12. (B) 13. (C) 14. (B) 15. (C)
16. (B) 17. (B) 18. (A) 19. (C) 20. (B)
21. (D) 22. (A) 23. (A) 24. (C) 25. (D)
26. (D) 27. (D) 28. (D) 29. (B) 30. (C)
31. (C)

Thermoelectricity

1. (A) 2. (A) 3. (A) 4. (A) 5. (D)

6. (C) 7. (C) 8. (C) 9. (D)

Chemical Effect of Current

1. (B) 2. (C) 3. (B) 4. (A) 5. (A)

6. (B) 7. (D) 8. (B) 9. (C) 10. (A)

Question Asked in Year 2015

1. (C) 2. (B) 3. (B) 4. (A) 5. (D)
6. (D)
Question Asked in Year 2016, 2017
1. (D) 2. (C) 3. (C) 4. (C)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 243

 WAVE MOTION

INDEX
Topic Name Page No

 Theory 244-269
 Exercise
 Level – I 270-276
 Level – II 276-282
 Previous Year’s Questions 283-302
 Answer Key 303-304

This Chapter Includes:

 Wave
 Important terms regarding wave motion
 Sound waves
 Velocity of sound (Wave motion)
 Velocity of sound in elastic medium
 Reflection and refraction of waves
 Reflection of mechanical waves
 Progressive wave
 Principle of superposition
 Interference of sound waves
 Standing waves or stationary waves
 Standing waves on a string
 Standing wave in a closed organ pipe
 Standing waves in open organ pipes
 Vibration of a string
 Comparative study of stretched string and organ pipe
 Beats
 Determination of unknown frequency
 Doppler effect
 Some typical features of Doppler's effect in sound
 Wave Motion Phy. XII

WAVE MOTION
Wave

A wave is a disturbance which propagates energy and momentum from one place to the other without the
transport of matter.
(1) Necessary properties of the medium for wave propagation:
(i) Elasticity : So that particles can return to their mean position, after having been disturbed.
(ii) Inertia : So that particles can store energy and overshoot their mean position.
(iii) Minimum friction amongst the particles of the medium.
(iv) Uniform density of the medium.
(2) Characteristics of wave motion :
(i) It is a sort of disturbance which travels through a medium.
(ii) Material medium is essential for the propagation of mechanical waves.
(iii) When a wave motion passes through a medium, particles of the medium only vibrate simple
harmonically about their mean position. They do leave their position and move with the
disturbance.
(iv) There is a continuous phase difference amongst successive particles of the medium i.e., particle 2
starts vibrating slightly later than particle 1 and so on.
(v) The velocity of the particle during their vibration is different at different position.
(vi) The velocity of wave motion through a particular medium is constant. It depends only on the nature
of medium not on the frequency, wavelength or intensity.
(vii) Energy is propagated along with the wave motion without any net transport of the medium.
(3) Mechanical waves : The waves which require medium for their propagation are called mechanical waves.
Example : Waves on string and spring, waves on water surface, sound waves, seismic waves.
(4) Non-mechanical waves : The waves which do not require medium for their propagation are called non-
mechanical or electromagnetic waves.
Examples : Light, heat (Infrared), radio waves, - rays, X-rays etc.
(5) Transverse waves : Particles of the medium execute simple harmonic motion about their mean position
in a direction perpendicular to the direction of propagation of wave motion.
(i) It travels in the form of crests and troughs.
(ii) A crest is a portion of the medium which is raised temporarily above the normal position of rest of
the particles of the medium when a transverse wave passes through it.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 244

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
A C E

Vibration
Crest
Particle Normal Level Trough Wave
B D

(iii) A trough is a portion of the medium which is depressed temporarily below the normal position of
rest of the particles of the medium, when transverse wave passes through it.
(iv) Examples of transverse wave motion : Movement of string of a sitar or violin, movement of the
membrane of a Tabla or Dholak, movement of kink on a rope, waves set-up on the surface of water.
(v) Transverse waves can be transmitted through solids, they can be setup on the surface of liquids. But
they can not be transmitted into liquids and gases.

Trough
C C C

Crest
T T

Transverse-wave in a rod Transverse wave in a string

Transverse wave on water surface

(6) Longitudinal waves : If the particles of a medium vibrate in the direction of wave motion the wave is
called longitudinal.
(i) It travels in the form of compression and rarefaction.
C R C R C R
(ii) A compression (C) is a region of the medium in which particles
Vibration of
are compressed. particle

(iii) A rarefaction (R) is a region of the medium in which particles are

rarefied.
(iv) Examples sound waves travel through air in the form of longitudinal waves, Vibration of air
column in organ pipes are longitudinal, Vibration of air column above the surface of water in the
tube of resonance apparatus are longitudinal.
(v) These waves can be transmitted through solids, liquids and gases because for these waves
propagation, volume elasticity is necessary.
(7) One dimensional wave : Energy is transferred in a single direction only.
Example : Wave propagating in a stretched string.
(8) Two dimensional wave : Energy is transferred in a plane in two mutually perpendicular directions.
Example : Wave propagating on the surface of water.
(9) Three dimensional wave : Energy in transferred in space in all direction.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 245

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
Example : Light and sound waves propagating in space.

Important Terms Regarding Wave Motion

(1) Wavelength :
(i) It is the length of one wave.
(ii) Wavelength is equal to the distance travelled by the wave during the time in which any one particle
of the medium completes one vibration about its mean position.
(iii) Wavelength is the distance between any two nearest particles of the medium, vibrating in the same
phase.
(iv) Distance travelled by the wave in one time period is known as wavelength.
(v) In transverse wave motion : 

 = Distance between the centres of two consecutive crests.

 = Distance between the centres of two consecutive 

troughs.

 = Distance in which one trough and one crest are
contained. C R C R C R C

(vi) In longitudinal wave motion :

 
 = Distance between the centres of two consecutive
compression.
 = Distance between the centres of two consecutive rarefaction.
 = Distance in which one compression and one rarefaction contained.
(2) Frequency :
(i) Frequency of vibration of a particle is defined as the number of vibrations completed by particle in
one second.
(ii) It is the number of complete wavelengths traversed by the wave in one second.
(iii) Units of frequency are hertz (Hz) and per second.
(3) Time period :
(i) Time period of vibration of particle is defined as the time taken by the particle to complete one
vibration about its mean position.
(ii) It is the time taken by the wave to travel a distance equal to one wavelength.
(4) Relation between frequency and time period : Time period = 1/Frequency  T = 1/n
(5) Relation between velocity, frequency and wavelength : v = n
Velocity (v) of the wave in a given medium depends on the elastic and inertial property of the medium.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 246

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
Frequency (n) is characterised by the source which produces disturbance. Different sources may produce
vibration of different frequencies. Wavelength ( ) will differ to keep n  = v = constant

Sound Waves
The energy to which the human ears are sensitive is known as sound. In general all types of waves are
produced in an elastic material medium, Irrespective of whether these are heard or not are known as sound.
According to their frequencies, waves are divided into three categories :
(1) Audible or sound waves : Range 20 Hz to 20 KHz. These are generated by vibrating bodies such as
vocal cords, stretched strings or membrane.
(2) Infrasonic waves : Frequency lie below 20 Hz.
Example : waves produced during earth quake, ocean waves etc.
(3) Ultrasonic waves : Frequency greater than 20 KHz. Human ear cannot detect these waves, certain
creatures such as mosquito, dog and bat show response to these. As velocity of sound in air is 332 m/sec
so the wavelength of ultrasonics  < 1.66 cm and for infrasonics  > 16.6 m.
Note :  Supersonic speed : An object moving with a speed greater than the speed of sound is said to
move with a supersonic speed.
 Mach number : It is the ratio of velocity of source to the velocity of sound.
Velocity of source
Mach Number = .
Velocity of sound

 Difference between sound and light waves :

(i) For propagation of sound wave material medium is required but no material medium is
required for light waves.
(ii) Wavelength of sound waves ranges from 1.65 cm to 16.5 meter and for light it ranges from
4000 Å to 2000 Å.
Velocity of Sound (Wave motion)

(1) Speed of transverse wave motion :

T
(i) On a stretched string : v  T = Tension in the string; m = Linear density of string (mass per unit
m
length).

(ii) In a solid body : v   = Modulus of rigidity;  = Density of the material.

(2) Speed of longitudinal wave motion :
4
k 
(i) In a solid medium v  3 k = Bulk modulus;  = Modulus of rigidity;  = Density

Y
When the solid is in the form of long bar v  Y = Young's modulus of material of rod


Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 247

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
k
(ii) In a liquid medium v 

k
(iii) In gases v

Velocity of Sound in Elastic Medium

When a sound wave travels through a medium such as air, water or steel, it will set particles of medium
into vibration as it passes through it. For this to happen the medium must possess both inertia i.e. mass density
(so that kinetic energy may be stored) and elasticity (so that PE may be stored). These two properties of
matter determine the velocity of sound.
i.e. velocity of sound is the characteristic of the medium in which wave propagate.
E
v (E = Elasticity of the medium;  = Density of the medium)


Important points
(1) As solids are most elastic while gases least i.e. ES  EL  EG . So the velocity of sound is maximum
in solids and minimum in gases
vsteel > vwater > vair
5000 m/s > 1500 m/s > 330 m/s
As for sound vwater > vAir while for light vw < vA.
Water is rarer than air for sound and denser for light.
The concept of rarer and denser media for a wave is through the velocity of propagation (and not
density). Lesser the velocity, denser is said to be the medium and vice-versa.
(2) Newton's formula : He assumed that when sound propagates through air temperature remains
K P
constant.(i.e. the process is isothermal) vair =  As K = E = P ; E = Isothermal elasticity;
 
P = Pressure.
By calculation vair = 279 m/sec.
However the experimental value of sound in air is 332 m/sec which is greater than that given by
Newton's formula.
(3) Laplace correction : He modified Newton's formula assuming that propagation of sound in air as
adiabatic process.
k E
v= = (As k = E    = Adiabatic elasticity)
 
v = 1.41 × 279= 331.3 m/s (  Air 1.41 )

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 248

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
P 1
(4) Effect of density : v = v 
 
P  RT
(5) Effect of pressure : v   . Velocity of sound is independent of the pressure of gas
 M
provided the temperature remains constant. ( P   when T = constant)

 RT
(6) Effect of temperature : v   v  T  in K 
M
When the temperature change is small then vt = v0 (1 +  t)
v0 = velocity of sound at 0°C, vt = velocity of sound at t°C ,  = temp-coefficient of velocity of
sound.
m/s
Value of  = 0.608 o
= 0.61 (Approx.)
C
Temperature coefficient of velocity of sound is defined as the change in the velocity of sound, when
temperature changes by 1°C.
(7) Effect of humidity : With increase in humidity, density of air decreases. So with rise in humidity
velocity of sound increases.
This is why sound travels faster in humid air (rainy season) than in dry air (summer) at the same
temperature.
(8) Effect of wind velocity : Because wind drifts the medium (air) along its direction of motion
therefore the velocity of sound in a particular direction is the algebraic sum of the velocity of sound
and the component of wind velocity in that direction. Resultant velocity of sound along
SL = v + w cos.
(9) Sound of any frequency or wavelength travels through a A

given medium with the same velocity. Wind (w)

(v = constant) For a given medium velocity remains
 wcos
constant. All other factors like phase, loudness pitch, quality S L
Sound (v)
etc. have practically no effect on sound velocity.

(10) Relation between velocity of sound and root mean square velocity.
 RT 3RT vrms 3
vsound = and vrms = so =
M M vsound 
or vsound = [  /3]1/2 vrms.

(11) There is no atmosphere on moon, therefore propagation of sound is not possible there. To do
conversation on moon, the astronaut uses an instrument which can transmit and detect
electromagnetic waves.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 249

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
Reflection and Refraction of Waves

When sound waves are incident on a boundary between two Incident wave
media, a part of incident waves returns back into the initial medium
(reflection) while the remaining is partly absorbed and partly
i
transmitted into the second medium (refraction) In case of reflection r t

and refraction of sound

(1) The frequency of the wave remains unchanged that means Reflected wave Transmitted wave
i = r = t =  = constant
(2) The incident ray, reflected ray, normal and refracted ray all lie in the same plane.
(3) For reflection angle of incidence (i) = Angle of reflection (r)
sin i vi
(4) For refraction 
sin t vt

(5) In reflection from a denser medium or rigid support, phase changes by 180° and direction reverses if
incident wave is y = A1 sin (t  kx) then reflected wave becomes y = Ar sin ( t  kx   ) = – Ar sin
( t  kx) .

(6) In reflection from a rarer medium or free end, phase does not change and d
direction reverses if incident wave is y = AI sin (  t  kx) then reflected wave Source

becomes y = Ar sin ( t  kx ) Detector

(7) Echo is an example of reflection.

If there is a sound reflector at a distance d from the source then time interval between original sound and
2d
its echo at the site of source will be t 
v
Reflection of Mechanical Waves
Medium Longitudinal Transverse wave Change in Phase Time Path
wave direction change change change
Reflection from Compression as Crest as crest and Reversed  T 
rigid end/denser rarefaction and Trough as trough 2 2
medium vice-versa
Reflection from Compression as Crest as trough No change Zero Zero Zero
free end/rarer compression and and trough as crest
medium rarefaction as
rarefaction

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 250

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
Progressive Wave

(1) These waves propagate in the forward direction of medium with a finite velocity.
(2) Energy and momentum are transmitted in the direction of propagation of waves without actual
transmission of matter.
(3) In progressive waves, equal changes in pressure and density occurs at all points of medium.
(4) Various forms of progressive wave function.
(i) y = A sin ( t – kx) where y = displacement
A = amplitude
2
(ii) y = A sin ( t – x)  = angular frequency
 n = frequency
 t x k = propagation constant
(iii) y = A sin 2    
T   T = time period
 = wave length
2
(iv) y = A sin (vt – x) v = wave velocity
 t = instantaneous time
 x x = position of particle from origin
(v) y = A sin   t  
 v
Important points
(a) If the sign between t and x terms is negative the wave is propagating along positive X-axis and if the
sign is positive then the wave moves in negative X-axis direction.
(b) The coefficient of sin or cos functions i.e. Argument of sin or cos function i.e. ( t - kx) = Phase.
2
(c) The coefficient of t gives angular frequency  = 2  n  = vk.
T
2 
(d) The coefficient of x gives propagation constant or wave number k   .
 v

(e) The ratio of coefficient of t to that of x gives wave or phase velocity. i.e. v = .
k
(f) When a given wave passes from one medium to another its frequency does not change.
v1 1
(g) From v = n  v   n = constant   .
v2 2

(5) Some terms related to progressive waves

(i) Wave number ( n ) : The number of waves present in unit length is defined as the wave number ( n ) =
1
.

Unit = meter–1 ; Dimension = [L–1].
 Phase difference between particles
(ii) Propagation constant (k) : k = =
x Distance between them

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 251

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
 Angular velocity 2
k  and k =  2 
v Wave velocity 
(iii) Wave velocity (v) : The velocity with which the crests and troughs or compression and rarefaction
  
travel in a medium, is defined as wave velocity v = = n    .
k 2 T

(iv) Phase and phase difference : Phase of the wave is given by the argument of sine or cosine in the
2
equation of wave. It is represented by  ( x, t )  (vt  x) .

(v) At a given position (for fixed value of x) phase changes with time (t).
d 2 v 2 2 2
   d = .dt  Phase difference =  Time difference.
dt  T T T
(vi) At a given time (for fixed value of t) phase changes with position (x).
d 2 2 2
  d   dx  Phase difference =  Path difference
dx   
T
 Time difference = × Path difference


Sample Examples based on Progressive wave

Example 1. The speed of a wave in a certain medium is 960 m/sec. If 3600 waves pass over a certain
point of the medium in 1 minute, the wavelength is
(a) 2 meters (b) 4 meters (c) 8 meters (d) 16 meters
3600 v 960
Solution : (d) v = 960 m/s ; n = Hz . So     16 meters.
60 n 60
Example 2. A simple harmonic progressive wave is represented by the equation y = 8 sin 2  (0.1x – 2t)
where x and y are in cm and t is in seconds. At any instant the Phase difference between two
particles separated by 2.0 cm in the x-direction is
(a) 18° (b) 36° (c) 54° (d) 72°
 x   t x
Solution : (d) y = 8 sin 2    2t  given by comparing with standard equation y = a sin 2    
 10  T  
  10cm
2 2 2
So Phase Difference = × path difference =  2  180 = 72°
 10 5
Example 3. The displacement of a particle is given by x = 3 sin (5  t ) + 4 cos (5  t ) The amplitude of
particle is
(a) 3 (b) 4 (c) 5 (d) 7
Solution : (c) Standard equation : x = a sin  t + b cos  t

x  a 2  b 2 sin  t  tan 1  b / a  

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 252

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
Given equation x  3sin  5 t   4cos(5 t )

x  9  16 sin  5 t  tan 1 4 / 3

x  5sin(5 t  tan 1 (4 / 3))

Example 4. The equation of a transverse wave travelling on a rope is given by y 10sin  (0.01 x  2.00 t )
where y and x are in cm and t in seconds. The maximum transverse speed of a particle in the
rope is about
(a) 63 cm/sec (b) 75 cm/s (c) 100 cm/sec (d) 121 cm/sec
Solution : (a) Standard eq. of travelling wave y = A sin ( k x  t )
By comparing with the given equation y = 10 sin (0.01  x  2 t )

A = 10 cm,  = 2 
Maximum particle velocity = A  = 2  × 10 = 63 cm/sec
Example 5. Find the ratio of the speed of sound in nitrogen gas to that of helium gas, at 300 k is
1 2 3 4
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2 3 5 5

 RT v  N2 M He 7/5 4 3
Solution : (c) v  N   . = .
M vHe  He M N 2 5 / 3 28 5

Example 6. A wave is represented by the equation y = 0.5 sin (10 t + x)m. It is a travelling wave
propagating along the x direction with velocity.
(a) 10 m/s (b) 20 m/s
(c) 5 m/s (d) None of these
Solution : (a) v =  / k 10 / 110 m / s

Example 7. A transverse progressive wave on a stretched string has a velocity of 10 ms–1 and a frequency
of 100 Hz. The phase difference between two particles of the string which are 2.5 cm apart
will be
(a)  / 8 (b)  / 4 (c) 3 / 8 (d)  / 2
10
Solution : (d)  v / n   0.1 m 10cm
100
2 2 
Phase difference = × path difference  × 2.5 =
 10 2
Example 8. In a stationary wave, all particles are
(a) At rest at the same time twice in every period of oscillation
(b) At rest at the same time only once in every period of oscillation
(c) Never at rest at the same time

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 253

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
(d) Never at rest at all
Solution : (a)
Example 9. The path difference between the two waves
 2 x   2 x 
y1  a1 sin   t   and y2  a2 cos   t     is
     
    2   2
(a)  (b)    (c)    (d)  
2 2  2   2 
 2 x   2 x 
Solution : (b) y1  a1 sin   t   ; y2  a2 sin  t    
     2
 2 x   2 x   
Phase difference =   t        t      
  2     2
   
Path difference = × Phase difference    
2 2  2
x 
Example 10. A plane wave is described by the equation y  3cos   10t   . The maximum velocity of
4 2
the particles of the medium due to this wave is
(a) 30 (b) 3  / 2 (c) 3/4 (d) 40
Solution : (a) Maximum velocity = A  = 3 × 10 = 30

Example 11. A wave represented by the given equation y = A sin (10  x 15 t  ) where x is in meter
3
and t is in second. The expression represents
(a) A wave travelling in the positive x-direction with a velocity of 1.5 m/sec
(b) A wave travelling in the negative x-direction with a velocity of 1.5 m/sec
(c) A wave travelling in the negative x-direction with a wavelength of 0.2 m
(d) A wave travelling in the positive x-direction with a wavelength of 0.2 m
Solution : (b, c) By comparing with standard equation Y = A sin  k x   t   / 3
K = 10  ,  15
 2
We know that : v  = 1.5 m/sec;   = 0.2 meter.
k k
 x
Example 12. A transverse wave is described by the equation Y  y0 sin 2   ft   The maximum
 
particle velocity is four times the wave velocity if
 y0  y0
(a)   (b)   (c)    y0 (d)   2 y0
4 2
Solution : (b) Maximum particle velocity = 4 wave velocity

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 254

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
 y0
A  = 4 f   y0 2  f  4 f    
2
Example 13. A plane wave is represented by x = 1.2 sin (314 t + 12.56 y) where x and y are distances
measured along in x and y direction in meter and t is time in seconds. This wave has
(a) A wave length of 0.25 m and travels m + ve x-direction
(b) A wavelength of 0.25 m and travels in + ve y-direction
(c) A wavelength of 0.5 m and travels in – ve y-direction
(d) A wavelength of 0.5 m and travels in – ve x-direction
Solution : (c) From given equation k = 12.56
2
 0.5 m direction = – y
k
 
Example 14. The equation of displacement of two waves are given as y1 = 10 sin  3 t   ; y2 = 5
 3
[sin 3 t  3 cos3 t ]

Then what is the ratio of their amplitudes

(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 1
(c) 1 : 1 (d) None of these
   
Solution : (c) y2 = 5 [sin 3 t  3 cos3 t ] = 5 1 3 sin  3 t   = 10 sin  3 t  
 3  3
So, A1 = 10 and A2 = 10
Example 15. The equation of wave is y = 2 sin  (0.5 x  200 t ) where x and y are expressed in cm and t in
sec. The wave velocity is
(a) 100 cm/sec (b) 200 cm/sec (c) 300 cm/sec (d) 400 cm/sec
 200 
Solution : (d) v  = 400 cm/sec
k 0.5 

Principle of Superposition

The displacement at any time due to any number of waves meeting simultaneously at a point in a
medium is the vector sum of the individual displacements due each one of the waves at that point at the same
time.
  
If y1 , y2, y3 ………. are the displacements at a particular time at a particular position, due to individual
   
waves, then the resultant displacement. y  y1  y2  y3  .............

Examples
(i) Radio waves from different stations having different frequencies cross the antenna. But our T.V/Radio
set can pick up any desired frequency.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 255

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
(ii) When two pulses of equal amplitude on a string approach
(A)
each other [fig. (A)], then on meeting, they superimpose to
produce a resultant pulse of zero amplitude [fig (B)]. After
(B)
crossing, the two pulses travel independently as shown in [fig
(C)] as if nothing had happened.
(C)
Important applications of superposition principle :

(a) Interference of waves (b) Stationary waves (c) Beats.

Interference of Sound Waves

When two waves of same frequency, same wavelength, same velocity (nearly equal amplitude) moves
in the same direction, Their superimposition results in the interference. Due to interference the resultant
intensity of sound at that point is different from the sum of intensities due to each wave separately. This
modification of intensity due to superposition of two or more waves is called interference.
Let at a given point two waves arrives with phase difference  and the equation of these waves is given
by
y1 = a1 sin  t , y2 = a2 sin (  t   ) then by the principle of superposition
   a2 sin 
y  y1  y2  y = A sin  t    where A  a12  a2 2  2a1a2 cos  and tan  =
a1  a 2 cos 
and since Intensity  A2 .
So, I = a12  a2 2  2a1 , a2 cos   I  I1  I 2  2 I1 I 2 cos 

Important points
(1) Constructive interference : Intensity will be maximum
when   0,2  ,4 ,...... 2  n ; where n = 0,1,2 ……..

when x = 0, , 2, ……….. n; where n = 0, 1 …….

2
Imax = I1 + I2 + 2 I1 I 2 =  I1  I 2   A  A 
1 2
2

It means the intensity will be maximum at those points where path difference is an integral multiple
of wavelength . These points are called points of constructive interference or interference maxima.
(2) Destructive interference : Intensity will be minimum
when    ,3 ,5 ...... ( 2 n  1) ; where n= 1, 2, 3 ……..

when x = /2, 3/2, ……….. (2n-1); where n = 1, 2, 3……..

2
Imin = I1+I2 – 2 I1 I 2  Imin =  I1  I 2    A1 ~ A2 
2

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 256

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
(3) All maxima are equally spaced and equally loud. Same is also true for minima. Also interference
maxima and minima are alternate as for maximum x  0,  ,2 ....etc. and for minimum
 3 5
x  , , ....... etc .
2 2 2
2
I
(4) max 
 I1  I 2   A  A2 
 1
2

with
I1 A12

2
I min
 I1 ~ I 2   A1 ~ A2  2 I 2 A2 2

(5) If I 1  I 2  I 0 then Imax = 4 I o and Imin = 0

(6) In interference the intensity in maximum I max  ( I1  I 2 )2

I
2
 I1  I 2  exceeds the sum of individual 2 I1 I 2
I1  I 2
2 I1 I 2
intensities (I1 + I2) by an amount 2 I1 I 2 while I min  ( I1 ~ I 2 )2
2
in minima  I1 ~ I 2  lacks  I1  I 2  by the Phase Diff. 0

Path Diff. 0


/2
2


3 4

3/2 2
5 6

5/2 3


x

same amount 2 I1 I 2 .

Hence in interference energy is neither created nor destroyed but is redistributed.

Standing Waves or Stationary Waves

When two sets of progressive wave trains of same type (both longitudinal or both transverse) having the
same amplitude and same time period/frequency/wavelength travelling with same speed along the same
straight line in opposite directions superimpose, a new set of waves are formed. These are called stationary
waves or standing waves.
Characteristics of standing waves :
(1) The disturbance confined to a particular region between the starting point and reflecting point of the
wave.
(2) There is no forward motion of the disturbance from one particle to the adjoining particle and so on,
beyond this particular region.
(3) The total energy associated with a stationary wave is twice the energy of each of incident and reflected
wave. But there is no flow or transference of energy along the stationary wave.
(4) There are certain points in the medium in a standing wave, which are permanently at rest. These are called

nodes. The distance between two consecutive nodes is
2
(5) Points of maximum amplitude is known as antinodes. The distance between two consecutive antinodes is
also  / 2 . The distance between a node and adjoining antinode is  / 4 .
(6) The medium splits up into a number of segments. Each segment is vibrating up and down as a whole.
(7) All the particles in one particular segment vibrate in the same phase. Particles in two consecutive
segments differ in phase by 180°.
(8) All the particles except those at nodes, execute simple harmonic motion about their mean position with
the same time period.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 257

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
(9) The amplitude of vibration of particles varies from zero at nodes to maximum at antinodes.
(10) Twice during each vibration, all the particles of the medium pass simultaneously through their mean position.
(11)The wavelength and time period of stationary waves are the same as for the component waves.
(12)Velocity of particles while crossing mean position varies from maximum at antinodes to zero at nodes.
(13) In standing waves, if amplitude of component waves are not equal. Resultant amplitude at nodes will be
minimum (but not zero). Therefore, some energy will pass across nodes and waves will be partially
standing.

Standing Waves on a String

When a string under tension is set into vibration,

transverse harmonic waves propagate along its length. When x=0 x=L
the length of string is fixed, reflected waves will also exist.
The incident and reflected waves will superimpose to produce y1
transverse stationary waves in a string y2

2
Incident wave y1 = a sin (vt + x)

2 2
Reflected wave y2  a sin  vt  x       a sin  vt  x 
  
2 vt 2 x
According to superposition principle : y = y1 + y2 = 2 a cos sin
 
2L
General formula for wavelength   where n = 1,2,3, … correspond to 1st , 2nd, 3rd modes of vibration of
n
the string.
v v 1 T
(1) First normal mode of vibration n1    n1 
1 2 L 2L m A
N N

This mode of vibration is called the fundamental mode and the

frequency is called fundamental frequency. The sound from the 1
L
2
note so produced is called fundamental note or first harmonic.

v v 2v N
(2) Second normal mode of vibration : n2     2(n1 ) A A
2 L 2 L N N

This is second harmonic or first over tone. L = 2

v 3v
(3) Third normal mode of vibration : n3    3n1 A
N
A
N
A
3 2 L N N

This is third harmonic or second overtone.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 258

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
L 2 L 3L
Position of nodes : x  0, , , ............L
n n n
For first mode of vibration x = 0 , x = L [Two nodes]
L
For second mode of vibration x = 0, x = ,x  L [Three nodes]
2
L 2L
For third mode of vibration x=0,x= , x  , xL [Four nodes]
3 3
L 3L 5 L  2  1 L
Position of antinodes : x  , , ...........
2n 2n 2 n 2n
For first mode of vibration x = L/2 [One antinode]
L 3L
For second mode of vibration x = , [Two antinode]
4 4
String tied at one end :

N A


L
4
v 3v 5v
n1  ; n2 = ; n3=
4L 4L 4L
Only odd Harmonic.

Standing Wave in a Closed Organ Pipe

Organ pipes are the musical instrument which are used for producing musical sound by blowing air into
the pipe. Longitudinal stationary waves are formed on account of superimposition of incident and reflected
longitudinal waves.
2 vt 2 x
Equation of standing wave y = 2a cos sin
  N A

4L
General formula for wavelength   1
L
 2n  1 2

v
(1) First normal mode of vibration : n1 
4L N A N A

This is called fundamental frequency. The note so produced is

32
L
called fundamental note or first harmonic. 4

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 259

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
v 3v
(2) Second normal mode of vibration : n2    3 n1
2 4 L
This is called third harmonic or first overtone.
N N
5v N A A A
(3) Third normal mode of vibration : n3   5n1
4L

This is called fifth harmonic or second overtone.

2L 4L 6L 2nL
Position of nodes : x = 0, , , .........
(2n  1) (2n  1) (2n  1) (2n  1)

For first mode of vibration x=0 [One node]

2L
For second mode of vibration x = 0, x = [Two nodes]
3
2L 4L
For third mode of vibration x = 0, x  , [Three nodes]
5 5
L 3L 5L
Position of antinode : x = , , ........., L
2n  1 2n  1 2n  1
For first mode of vibration x = L [One antinode]
L
For second mode of vibration x= ,x  L [Two antinode]
3
L 3L
For third mode of vibration x= , ,L [Three antinode]
5 5

Standing Waves in Open Organ Pipes

General formula for wavelength

N
2L A A
 where n = 1,2,3 ………
n
1
L
v v 2
(1) First normal mode of vibration : n1  
1 2 L
This is called fundamental frequency and the note so produced is
N N
called fundamental note or first harmonic. A A A

(2) Second normal mode of vibration

v v  v  L = 2
n2   2   2n1  n2  2n1
2 L  2L 

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 260

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
This is called second harmonic or first overtone. N N N
A A A A
v 3v
(3) Third normal mode of vibration n3   , n3  3n1
3 2 L 3 3
L
2
This is called third harmonic or second overtone.
Important points
(i) Comparison of closed and open organ pipes shows that fundamental note in open organ pipe
 v   v 
 n1   has double the frequency of the fundamental note in closed organ pipe  n1  .
 2L   4L 
Further in an open organ pipe all harmonics are present whereas in a closed organ pipe, only alternate
harmonics of frequencies n1 ,3n1 , 5n1 ,...... etc are present. The harmonics of frequencies 2n1, 4n1, 6n1 ……
are missing.
Hence musical sound produced by an open organ pipe is sweeter than that produced by a closed organ
pipe.
(ii) Harmonics are the notes/sounds of frequency equal to or an integral multiple
of fundamental frequency (n). Thus the first, second, third, harmonics have 0.6 r
frequencies n1 , 2n1 ,3n1 , ………
(iii) Overtones are the notes/sounds of frequency twice/thrice/ four times the
fundamental frequency (n) eg. 2 n,3n, 4n ……. and so on.
(iv) In organ pipe an antinode is not formed exactly at the open end rather it is
formed a little distance away from the open end outside it. The distance of
antinode from the open end of the pipe is known as end correction.
Vibration of a String

1 T
Fundamental frequency n
2L m A Fixed
Fixed N N
end
p T end
General formula n p 
2L m Plucking

L = Length of string, T = Tension in the string

m = Mass per unit length (linear density), p = mode of vibration

Important points
(1) As a string has many natural frequencies, so when it is excited with a tuning fork, the string will be in
resonance with the given body if any of its natural frequencies concides with the body.
1 1
(2) (i) n  if T and m are constant (ii) n  T if L and m are constant (iii) n  if T and L are
L m
constant
M
(3) If M is the mass of the string of length L, m 
L

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 261

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
1 T 1 T 1 T 1 T 1 T
So, n    = 2
 where m = r2
2 L m 2 L M / L 2 ML 2 L  r  2 Lr 
(r = Radius,  = Density)
Comparative Study of Stretched Strings, Open Organ Pipe and Closed Organ Pipe

SNo Parameter Stretched string Open organ pipe Closed organ pipe
st v v v
(1) Fundamental frequency or 1
n1  n1  n1 
harmonic 2l 2l 4l
(2) Frequency of 1st overtone or 2nd n2  2n1 n2  2n1 Missing
harmonic
(3) Frequency of 2nd overtone or 3rd n3  3n1 n3  3n1 n3  3n1
harmonic
(4) Frequency ratio of overtones 2 : 3 : 4… 2 : 3 : 4… 3 : 5 : 7…

(5) Frequency ratio of harmonics 1 : 2 : 3 : 4… 1 : 2 : 3 : 4… 1 : 3 : 5 : 7…

(6) Nature of waves Transverse stationary Longitudinal Longitudinal stationary

stationary

Beats

When two sound waves of slightly different frequencies, travelling in a medium along the same
direction, superimpose on each other, the intensity of the resultant sound at a particular position rises and falls
regularly with time. This phenomenon of regular variation in intensity of sound with time at a particular
position is called beats.
Important points
(1) One beat : If the intensity of sound is maximum at time t = 0, one beat is said to be formed when
intensity becomes maximum again after becoming minimum once in between.
(2) Beat period : The time interval between two successive beats (i.e. two successive maxima of sound)
is called beat period.
(3) Beat frequency : The number of beats produced per second is called beat frequency.
(4) Persistence of hearing : The impression of sound heard by our ears persist in our mind for 1/10th of a
second. If another sound is heard before 1/10 second is over, the impression of the two sound mix up
and our mind cannot distinguish between the two.
So for the formation of distinct beats, frequencies of two sources of sound should be nearly equal
(difference of frequencies less than 10)
(5) Equation of beats : If two waves of equal amplitudes 'a' and slightly different frequencies n1 and n2
travelling in a medium in the same direction are.
y1 = a sin 1 t  a sin 2  n1t ; y2  a sin 2 t  a sin 2 n2t
  
By the principle of super position : y  y1 y2

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 262

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
y = A sin  ( n1  n2 ) t where A = 2a cos  ( n1  n2 ) t = Amplitude of resultant wave.

(6) Beat frequency : n = n1 ~ n2.

1 1
(7) Beat period : T= 
Beat frequency n1 ~ n2

Sample Examples based on Superposition of waves

Example 16. The stationary wave produced on a string is represented by the equation y = 5
x
cos   sin (40  t ) where x and y are in cm and t is in seconds. The distance between
 3 
consecutive nodes is
(a) 5 cm (b)  cm (c) 3 cm (d) 40 cm
Solution : (c) By comparing with standard equation of stationary wave
2 x 2  vt
y = a cos sin
 
2 x  x 
We get =   = 6; Distance between two consecutive nodes =  3 cm
 3 2
Example 17. On sounding tuning fork A with another tuning fork B of frequency 384 Hz, 6 beats are
produced per second. After loading the prongs of A with wax and then sounding it again with
B, 4 Beats are produced per second what is the frequency of the tuning fork A.
(a) 388 Hz (b) 80 Hz (c) 378 Hz (d) 390 Hz
Solution : (c) Probable frequency of A is 390 Hz and 378 Hz and After 390 390
loading the beats are decreasing from 6 to 4 so the original
256 384
frequency of A will be n2 = n 1 – x = 378 Hz.
378 378
YA YB

Example 18. Two sound waves of slightly different frequencies propagating in the same direction produces
beats due to
(a) Interference (b) Diffraction (c) Polarization (d) Refraction
Solution : (a)
Example 19. Beats are produced with the help of two sound waves on amplitude 3 and 5 units. The ratio of
maximum to minimum intensity in the beats is
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 5 : 3 (c) 4 : 1 (d) 16 : 1
2 2
I max  A1  A2   5  3 
Solution : (d)   =  = 16:1
I min  A1  A2   5  3 

Example 20. Two tuning forks have frequencies 380 and 384 hertz respectively. When they are sounded
together, they produce 4 beats. After hearing the maximum sound, how long will it take to
hear the minimum sound

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 263

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
(a) 1/2 sec (b) 1/4 sec (c) 1/8 sec (d) 1/16 sec
1 1
Solution : (c) Beats period = Time interval between two minima  T=  sec
n1  n2 4

Time interval between maximum sound and minimum sound = T/2 = 1/8 sec
Example 21. Two tuning fork A and B give 4 beats per second when sounded together. The frequency of A
is 320 Hz. When some wax is added to B and it is sounded with A, 4 beats per second are
again heard. The frequency of B is
(a) 312 Hz (b) 316 Hz (c) 324 Hz (d) 328 Hz
Solution : (c) Since there is no change in beats. Therefore the original frequency of B is
n2 = n 1 + x = 320 + 4 = 324
Example 22. The equation y = 0.15 sin 5x cos 300 t, describes a stationary wave. The wavelength of the
stationary wave is
(a) Zero meter (b) 1.256 meter (c) 2.512 meter (d) 0.628 meter
Solution : (b) By comparing with standard equation
2 x 2
  5 x      = 1.256 meter
 5
Example 23. Which of the property makes difference between progressive and stationary waves
(a) Amplitude (b) Frequency
(c) Propagation of energy (d) Phase of the wave
Solution : (c) In stationary waves there is no transfer of energy.
Example 24. If amplitude of waves at distance r from a point source is A, the amplitude at a distance 2r
will be
(a) 2A (b) A (c) A/2 (d) A/4
1 1 r1 A2 r  1
Solution : (c) I  A2 and I  so r  ;   A2 = A1  1  = A   = A/2
r2 A r2 A1  r2  2

Example 25. If two waves of same frequency and same amplitude respectively on superimposition
produced a resultant disturbance of the same amplitude the wave differ in phase by
(a)  (b) 2 / 3 (c)  / 2 (d) zero

Solution : (b) A  A12  A2 2  2 A1 A2 cos 

A2 = A2 + A2 + 2A2 cos  [A1 = A2 = A given]
2
cos  = – 1/2   120 
3

Example 26. The superposition takes place between two waves of frequency f and amplitude a. The total
intensity is directly proportional to

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 264

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
2 2
(a) a (b) 2a (c) 2a (d) 4a
2
Solution : (d) I   a1  a2  [As a1 = a2 = a]

I  4a 2

Example 27. The following equation represent progressive transverse waves

z1 = A cos ( t – kx)
z2 = A cos ( t + kx)
z3 = A cos ( t + ky)
z4 = A cos ( 2 t – 2ky)
A stationary wave will be formed by superposing
(a) z1 and z2 (b) z1 and z4 (c) z2 and z3 (d) z3 and z4
Solution : (a) The direction of wave must be opposite and frequencies will be same then by superposition,
standing wave formation takes place.

Example 28. When two sound waves with a phase difference of  / 2 and each having amplitude A and
frequency  are superimposed on each other, then the maximum amplitude and frequency of
resultant wave is
A A 
(a) ; / 2 (b) ; (c) 2 A; (d) 2 A;
2 2 2

Solution : (d) Resultant Amplitude = a12  a2 2  2a1a 2 cos  = A2  A2  2 A2 cos = 2A
2
and frequency remains same = .

Example 29. The tuning fork and sonometer wire were sounded together and produce 4 beats/second when
the length of sonometer wire is 95 cm or 100 cm. The frequency of tuning fork is

(a) 156 Hz (b) 152 Hz (c) 148 Hz (d) 160 Hz

1 1 T
Solution : (a) Frequency n   As n 
l 2l m

If n is the frequency of tuning fork.

1 1
n+4   n–4   (n + 4 ) 95 = (n – 4) 100  n = 156 Hz.
95 100
Doppler Effect

Whenever there is a relative motion between a source of sound and the listener, the apparent frequency
of sound heard by the listener is different from the actual frequency of sound emitted by the source.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 265

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
When the distance between the source and listener is decreasing the apparent frequency increases. It
means the apparent frequency is more than the actual frequency of sound. The reverse is also true.
 v  vm   vL  n
General expression for apparent frequency n' =  S L
  v  vm   vS  v

vS vL
Here n = Actual frequency; vL = Velocity of listener; vS = Velocity of
source
vm = Velocity of medium and v = Velocity of sound wave
Sign convention : All velocities along the direction S to L are taken as positive and all velocities along
 v  vL 
the direction L to S are taken as negative. If the medium is stationary vm = 0 then n' =  n
 v  vS 
Special cases :
v
(1) Source is moving towards the listener, but the listener at rest n '  .n
v  vS
v
(2) Source is moving away from the listener but the listener is at rest n '  .n
v  vS
v  vL
(3) Source is at rest and listener is moving away from the source n '  n
v
v  vL
(4) Source is at rest and listener is moving towards the source n '  .n
v
 v  vL 
(5) Source and listener are approaching each other n '   n
 v  vS 
 v  vL 
(6) Source and listener moving away from each other n '   n
 v  vS 
(7) Both moves in the same direction with same velocity n' = n, i.e. there will be no Doppler effect because
relative motion between source and listener is zero.

(8) Source and listener moves at right angle to the direction of wave propagation. n' = n
It means there is no change in frequency of sound heard if there is a small displacement of source and
listener at right angle to the direction of wave propagation but for a large displacement the frequency
decreases because the distance between source of sound and listener increases.
Important points
(i) If the velocity of source and listener is equal to or greater than the sound velocity then Doppler effect is not
seen.
(ii) Doppler effect gives information regarding the change in frequency only. It does not says about intensity of
sound.
(iii) Doppler effect in sound is asymmetric but in light it is symmetric.

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 266

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
Some Typical Features of Doppler’s Effect in Sound

(1) When a source is moving in a direction making an angle L (Listener at rest)

 w.r.t. the listener : The apparent frequency heard by
listener L at rest vs cos

nv
When source is at point A is n  s   vs
v  vs cos A vs C B
vs cos
As source moves along AB, value of  increases, cos
decreases, n goes on decreasing.
At point C,   90o , cos  cos 90o  0 , n  n .
nv
At point B, the apparent frequency of sound becomes n 
v  vs cos
(2) When a source of sound approaches a high wall or a hill with a constant velocity vs , the reflected
sound propagates in a direction opposite to that of direct sound. We can assume that the source and
observer are approaching each other with same velocity i.e. vs  vL
 v  vL 
 n   n
 v  vs 
(3) When a listener moves between two distant sound sources : Let vL be the velocity of listener away
(v  vL ) n
from S1 and towards S 2 . Apparent frequency from S1 is n 
v
(v  vL )n
and apparent frequency heard from S L is n 
v
2nvL
 Beat frequency  n  n 
v
(4) When source is revolving in a circle and listener L is on one side 

nv nv
vs  r so nmax  and nmin  O
v  vs v  vs r S

(5) When listener L is moving in a circle and the source is on one side 
(v  vL )n (v  vL )n
vL  r so nmax  and nmin  O
v v r L

(6) There will be no change in frequency of sound heard, if the source is situated at the centre of the circle
along which listener is moving.

(7) Conditions for no Doppler effect :

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 267
 Wave Motion Phy. XII
(i) When source (S) and listener (L) both are at rest.

(ii) When medium alone is moving.

(iii) When S and L move in such a way that distance between S and L remains constant.

(iv) When source S and listener L, are moving in mutually perpendicular directions.

Sample Examples based on Doppler effect

Example 30. A source of sound of frequency 90 vibration/sec is approaching a stationary observer with a
speed equal to 1/10 the speed of sound. What will be the frequency heard by the observer
(a) 80 vibration/sec (b) 90 vibration/sec
(c) 100 vibration/sec (d) 120 vibration/sec
v v vs(+)
Solution : (c) n ' .n  n '  .n vL = 0
v  vs v
v S L
10
10 10  90
 n ' n 100 vibration/sec
9 9
Example 31. A source of sound of frequency 500 Hz is moving towards an observer with velocity 30 m/s.
The speed of the sound is 330 m/s. The frequency heard by the observer will be
(a) 550 Hz (b) 458.3 Hz (c) 530 Hz (d) 545.5 Hz
vs(+)
vL = 0
v 330
Solution : (a) n ' .n  n '  .500  n' = 550 Hz S L
v  vs 330  30

Example 32. A motor car blowing a horn of frequency 124 vibration/sec moves with a velocity 72 km/hr
towards a tall wall. The frequency of the reflected sound heard by the driver will be (velocity
of sound in air is 330 m/s)
(a) 109 vibration/sec (b) 132 vibration/sec
(c) 140 vibration/sec (d) 248 vibration/sec

Solution : (c) In the given condition source and listener are at the same position i.e. (car) for given
condition
v  vcar 330  20
n ' .n  .n = 140 vibration/sec
v  vcar 330  20

Example 33. The driver of car travelling with a speed 30 meter/sec. towards a hill sounds a horn of
frequency 600 Hz. If the velocity of sound in air is 330 m/s the frequency of reflected sound
as heard by the driver is
(a) 720 Hz (b) 555.5 Hz (c) 550 Hz (d) 500 Hz
v  vcar
Solution : (a) This question is same as that of previous one so n '  .n  720 Hz
v  vcar

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 268

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
Example 34. The source of sound s is moving with a velocity 50 m/s towards a stationary observer. The
observer measures the frequency of the source as 1000 Hz. What will be the apparent
frequency of the source when it is moving away from the observer after crossing him ? The
velocity of sound in the medium is 350 m/s
(a) 750 Hz (b) 857 Hz (c) 1143 Hz (d) 1333 Hz
Solution : (a) When source is moving towards the stationary listener. vs(+) vL = 0
v 350 S
n ' n  1000  .n  n  857.14 L
v  vs 350  50
v 350
When source is moving away from the stationary observer n ''  =  857 = 750
v  vs 350  50
Hz
Example 35. A man is watching two trains, one leaving and the other coming in with equal speed of 4 m/s. If
they sound their whistles, each of frequency 240 Hz, the number of beats heard by the man
(velocity of sound in air = 320 m/s) will be equal to
(a) 6 (b) 3 (c) 0 (d) 12
v
Solution : (a) App. Frequency due to train which is coming in n1  .n
v  vs
v
App. Frequency due to train which is leaving n2  .n
v  vs

 1 1 
So number of beats n1 – n2 =    320  240  n1 – n2 = 6
 316 324 

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 269

 Wave Motion Phy. XII

EXERCISE
LEVEL – 1
1. The equation of a wave is 3cos  (50t  x ) . The wavelength of the wave is

(a) 3 units (b) 2 units (c) 50 units (d) 47 units

2
2. If the wave equation y  0.08sin (200t  x ) then the velocity of the wave will be

(a) 400 2 (b) 200 2 (c) 400 (d) 200
3. A wave of frequency 500 Hz has velocity 360 m/sec. The distance between two nearest points 60° out
of phase, is
(a) 0.6 cm (b) 12 cm (c) 60 cm (d) 120 cm

4. If the frequency of a wave is 360s–1, the distance between two nearest compression & rarefaction is 1m.
Then the velocity of wave is
(a) 720 m/s (b) 180m/s (c) 360m/s (d) 90m/s
5. It takes 2.0 seconds for a sound wave to travel between two fixed points when the day temperature is
10o C. If the temperature rise to 30o C the sound wave travels between the same fixed points in
(a) 1.9 sec (b) 2.0 sec (c) 2.1 sec (d) 2.2 sec
6. The equation of a wave is given as y  0.07sin(12 x  3000 t ) . Where x is in metre and t in sec,
then the correct statement is
(a)   1 / 6m, v  250m / s (b) a  0.07m, v  300m / s
(c) n  1500, v  200m / s (d) None of these
7. In a plane progressive wave given by y  25cos(2 t   x ) , the amplitude and frequency are
respectively
(a) 25,100 (b) 25, 1 (c) 25, 2 (d) 50 , 2
 
8. The displacement y of a wave travelling in the x-direction is given by y  104 sin  600t  2 x  
 3
metres, where x is expressed in metres and t in seconds. The speed of the wave-motion, in ms–1, is
(a) 200 (b) 300 (c) 600 (d) 1200 [AIEEE 2003]
 x
9. The equation y  A cos 2  2 nt  2  represents a wave with
 
(a) Amplitude A/2, frequency 2n and wavelength  / 2 (b) Amplitude A/2, frequency 2n and wavelength 
(c) Amplitude A, frequency 2n and wavelength 2 (d) Amplitude A, frequency n and wavelength 

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 270

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
10. v1 and v2 are the velocities of sound at the same temperature in two monoatomic gases of densities 1
1
and  2 respectively. If 1 /  2  then the ratio of velocities v1 and v2 will be
4
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 4 : 1 (c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 4
11. The temperature at which the speed of sound in air becomes double of its value at 0o C is
(a) 273o K (b) 546o K (c) 1092o K (d) 0o K
12. A wave travelling in positive X-direction with A  0.2m has a velocity of 360 m/sec. if   60m, then
correct expression for the wave is
  x    x 
(a) y  0.2sin 2  6t    (b) y  0.2sin   6t   
  60     60  

  x    x 
(c) y  0.2sin 2  6t    (d) y  0.2sin   6t   
  60     60  

13. The equation for spherical progressive wave is

a
(a) y  a sin( t  kx ) (b) y  sin( t  kx )
r
a a
(c) y  sin(t  kx ) (d) y  sin(t  kx )
2 r
14. A stone is dropped into a lake from a tower 500 metre high. The sound of the splash will be heard by
the man approximately after
(a) 11.5 sec (b) 21 sec (c) 10 sec (d) 14 sec
15. The equation of a plane progressive wave is given by y  0.25sin(100 t  0.25 x) . The frequency of this
wave would be
50 100
(a) Hz (b) Hz (c) 100 Hz (d) 50 Hz
 
16. The equation of a sound wave is
y  0.0015sin(62.4 x  316t )
The wavelength of this wave is
(a) 0.2 unit (b) 0.1 unit (c) 0.3 unit (d) Cannot be calculated
17. Two waves are propagating to the point P along a straight line produced by two sources A and B of
simple harmonic and of equal frequency. The amplitude of every wave at P is ‘a’ and the phase of A is

ahead by than that of B and the distance AP is greater than BP by 50 cm. Then the resultant
3
amplitude at the point P will be, if the wavelength is 1 meter
(a) 2a (b) a 3 (c) a 2 (d) a

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 271

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
18. Two tuning forks have frequencies 450 Hz and 454 Hz respectively. On sounding these forks together,
the time interval between successive maximum intensities will be
(a) 1/4 sec (b) 1/2 sec (c) 1 sec (d) 2 sec
19. Two waves of lengths 50 cm and 51 cm produced 12 beats per second. The velocity of sound is
(a) 306 m/s (b) 331 m/s (c) 340 m/s (d) 360 m/s
20. In stationary longitudinal waves, nodes are points of
(a) Minimum pressure (b) Maximum pressure
(c) Minimum pressure variation (d) Maximum pressure variation
21. A cylindrical tube, open at both ends, has a fundamental frequency f 0 in air. The tube is dipped
vertically into water such that half of its length is inside water. The fundamental frequency of the air
column now is
(a) 3 f0 / 4 (b) f 0 (c) f 0 / 2 (d) 2 f0
22. Equation of motion in the same direction is given by y1  A sin( t  kx ) , y2  A sin( t  kx   ) . The
amplitude of the medium particle will be

(a) 2 A cos (b) 2 A cos  (c) f ,1.2 (d) 1.2 f ,1.2
2
23. A closed organ pipe and an open organ pipe are tuned to the same fundamental frequency. What is the
ratio of lengths
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 1 (c) 2 : 3 (d) 4 : 3
24. An open pipe resonates with a tuning fork of frequency 500 Hz. it is observed that two successive nodes
are formed at distances 16 and 46 cm from the open end. The speed of sound in air in the pipe is
(a) 230 m/s (b) 300 m/s (c) 320 m/s (d) 360 m/s
25. In the experiment for the determination of the speed of sound in air using the resonance column
method, the length of the air column that resonates in the fundamental mode, with a tuning fork is 0.1
m. when this length is changed to 0.35 m, the same tuning fork resonates with the first overtone.
Calculate the end correction
(a) 0.012m (b) 0.025m (c) 0.05m (d) 0.024m
26. At nodes in stationary waves
(a) Change in pressure and density are maximum(b) Change in pressure and density are minimum
(c) Strain is zero (d) Energy is minimum
27. Find the fundamental frequency of a closed pipe, if the length of the air column is 42 m. (speed of
sound in air = 332 m/sec)
(a) 2 Hz (b) 4 Hz (c) 7 Hz (d) 9 Hz
28. If v is the speed of sound in air then the shortest length of the closed pipe which resonates to a
frequency n
v v 2n 4n
(a) (b) (c) (d)
4n 2n v v

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 272

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
29. Two uniform strings A and B made of steel are made to vibrate under the same tension. if the first
overtone of A is equal to the second overtone of B and if the radius of A is twice that of B, the ratio of
the lengths of the strings is
(a) 1: 2 (b) 1 : 3 (c) 1 : 4 (d) 1 : 6
30. If the length of a stretched string is shortened by 40% and the tension is increased by 44%, then the
ratio of the final and initial fundamental frequencies is
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 3 : 2 (c) 3 : 4 (d) 1 : 3
31. Two wires are fixed in a sonometer. Their tensions are in the ratio 8 : 1. The lengths are in the ratio 36 :
35. The diameters are in the ratio 4 : 1. Densities of the materials are in the ratio 1 : 2. If the higher
frequency in the setting is 360 Hz. the beat frequency when the two wires are sounded together is
(a) 5 (b) 8 (c) 6 (d) 10
32. A metal wire of linear mass density of 9.8 g/m is stretched with a tension of 10 kg weight between two
rigid supports 1 metre apart. The wire passes at its middle point between the poles of a permanent
magnet, and it vibrates in resonance when carrying an alternating current of frequency n. The frequency
n of the alternating source is
(a) 25 Hz (b) 50 Hz (c) 100 Hz (d) 200 Hz
33. A tuning fork of known frequency 256 Hz makes 5 beats per second with the vibrating string of a piano.
The beat frequency decreases to 2 beats per second when the tension in the piano string is slightly
increased. The frequency of the piano string before increasing the tension was
(a) 256 + 5 Hz (b) 256 + 2Hz (c) 256 – 2 Hz (d) 256 – 5Hz
34. The frequency of fundamental tone in an open organ pipe of length 0.48 m is 320 Hz. Speed of sound is
320 m/sec. Frequency of fundamental tone in closed organ pipe will be
(a) 153.8 Hz (b) 160.0 Hz (c) 320.0 Hz (d) 143.2 Hz
35. A sonometer wire resonates with a given tuning fork forming standing waves with five antinodes
between the two bridges when a mass of 9 kg is suspended from the wire. When this mass is replaced
by a mass M, the wire resonates with the same tuning fork forming three antinodes for the same
positions of the bridges. The value of M is
(a) 25 kg (b) 5 kg (c) 12.5 kg (d) 1/25 kg
36. The tension of a stretched string is increased by 69%. In order to keep its frequency of vibration
constant, its length must be increased by
(a) 20% (b) 30% (c) 69% (d) 69%
37. A tuning fork arrangement (pair) produces 4 beats/sec with one fork of frequency 288 cps. A little wax
is placed on the unknown fork and it then produces 2 beats/sec. The frequency of the unknown fork is
(a) 286 cps (b) 292 cps (c) 294 cps (d) 288 cps
38. Two wires are in unison. If the tension in one of the wires is increased by 2%, 5 beats are produced per
second. The initial frequency of each wire is
(a) 200 Hz (b) 400 Hz (c) 500 Hz (d) 1000 Hz

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 273

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
39. Two closed organ pipes, when sounded simultaneously gave 4 beats per sec. If longer pipe has a length
of 1m. Then length of shorter pipe will be, (v = 300 m/s)
(a) 185.5 cm (b) 94.9 cm (c) 90 cm (d) 80 cm
40. A source of sound placed at the open end of a resonance column sends an acoustic wave of pressure
amplitude P0 inside the tube. If the atmospheric pressure is p A , then the maximum and minimum
pressure at the closed end of the tube will be
(a) ( PA  P0 ), ( PA  P0 ) (b) ( PA  2 P0 ), ( PA  2 P0 )

 1   1 
(c) PA , PA (d)  PA  P0  ,  PA  P0 
 2   2 
41. Ten tuning forks are arranged in increasing order of frequency in such a way that any two nearest
tuning forks produce 4 beats/sec. The highest frequency is twice of the lowest. Possible highest and the
lowest frequencies are
(a) 80 and 40 (b) 100 and 50 (c) 44 and 22 (d) 72 and 36

42. If two waves of same frequency and same amplitude respectively, on superimposition produced a
resultant disturbance of the same amplitude, the waves differ in phase by
(a)  (b) 2 / 3 (c)  /2 (d) Zero

43. In stationary waves all particles between two nodes pass through the mean position
(a) At different times with different velocities (b) At different times with the same velocity
(c) At the same time with equal velocity (d) At the same time with different velocities
44. For production of beats, the two sources must have
(a) Different frequencies and same amplitude
(b) Different frequencies
(c) Different frequencies, same amplitude and same phase
(d) Different frequencies and same phase
45. Doppler effect is independent of
(a) Distance between source and listener (b) Velocity of source
(c) Velocity of listener (d) None of these
46. A source and an observer approach each other with same velocity 50 m/s. If the apparent frequency is
435 s–1, then the real frequency is
(a) 320 s–1 (b) 360 s–1 (c) 390 s–1 (d) 420 s–1
v
47. A source and an observer are moving towards each other with a speed equal to where v is the speed
2
of sound. The source is emitting sound of frequency n. The frequency heard by the observer will be

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 274

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
n
(a) Zero (b) n (c) (d) 3n
3
48. A police car moving at 22 m/s, chases a motorcyclist. The police man sounds his horn at 176 Hz, while
both of them move towards a stationary siren of frequency 165 Hz. Calculate the speed of the
motorcycle, if it is given that he does not observes any beats
(a) 33 m/s Police Car Motorcycle

(b) 22 m/s
(c) Zero Stationary siren
22 m/s v (165 Hz)
(d) 11 m/s (176 Hz)

49. An observer moves towards a stationary source of sound with a speed 1/5th of the speed of sound. The
wavelength and frequency of the source emitted are  and f respectively. The apparent frequency and
wavelength recorded by the observer are respectively
(a) 1.2 f ,  (b) f ,1.2 (c) 0.8 f , 0.8 (d) 1.2 f ,1.2
50. When an engine passes near to a stationary observer then its apparent frequencies occurs in the ratio
5/3. If the velocity of engine is
(a) 540 m/s (b) 270 m/s (c) 85 m/s (d) 52.5 m/s
51. A racing car moving towards a cliff, sounds its horn. The driver observes that the sound reflected from
the cliff has a pitch one octave higher than the actual sound of the horn. If v is the velocity of sound,
then the velocity of the car is
(a) v / 2 (b) v / 2 (c) v / 3 (d) v / 4
52. A person carrying a whistle emitting continuously a note of 272 Hz is running towards a reflecting
surface with a speed of 18 km/hour. The speed of sound in air is 345ms–1. The number of beats heard by
him is
(a) 4 (b) 6 (c) 8 (d) 3
53. A bus is moving with a velocity of 5 m/s towards a huge wall. the driver sounds a horn of frequency
165 Hz. If the speed of sound in air is 355 m/s, the number of beats heard per second by a passenger on
the bus will be
(a) 6 (b) 5 (c) 3 (d) 4
54. What should be the velocity of a sound source moving towards a stationary observer so that apparent
frequency is double the actual frequency (Velocity of sound is v)
v v
(a) v (b) 2v (c) (d)
2 4
55. Two trains are moving towards each other at speeds of 20 m/s and 15 m/s relative to the ground. The
first train sounds a whistle of frequency 600 Hz. the frequency of the whistle heard by a passenger in
the second train before the train meets is (the speed of sound in air is 340 m/s)
(a) 600 Hz (b) 585 Hz (c) 645 Hz (d) 666 Hz

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 275

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
nd
56. If fundamental frequency of closed pipe is 50 Hz then frequency of 2 overtone is
(a) 100 Hz (b) 50 Hz (c) 250 Hz (d) 150 Hz
57. The phase difference between two waves, represented by
y1  106 sin[100t  ( x / 50)  0.5]m
y2  106 cos[100t  ( x / 50)]m
where x is expressed in meters and t is expressed in seconds, is approximately
(a) 1.07 radians (b) 2.07 radians (c) 0.5 radians (d) 1.5 radians
58. A man x can hear only upto 10 kHz and another man y upto 20 kHz. A note of frequency 500 Hz is
produced before them from a stretched string. Then
(a) Both will hear sounds of same pitch but different quality
(b) Both will hear sounds of different pitch but same quality
(c) Both will hear sounds of different pitch and different quality
(d) Both will hear sounds of same pitch and same quality
59. A light pointer fixed to one prong of a tuning fork touches a vertical plate. The fork is set vibrating and
the plate is allowed to fall freely. If eight oscillations are counted when the plate falls through 10 cm,
the frequency of the tuning fork is
(a) 360 Hz (b) 280 Hz (c) 560 Hz (d) 56 Hz

LEVEL – 2
1. Transverse waves can propagate
(a) Both in a gas and a metal (b) In a gas but not in a metal
(c) Not in a gas but in a metal (d) Neither in a gas nor in a metal
2. A tuning fork produces wave in medium. If the temperature of the medium changes then which of
following will change
(a) Time period (b) Wavelength (c) Frequency (d) Amplitude
3. The rope shown at an instant is carrying a wave travelling towards right, created by a source vibrating
at a frequency n . Consider the following statements
I. The speed of the wave is 4n  ab
4
II. The medium at a will be in the same phase as d after s a b c d e
3n
3
III. The phase difference between b and e is
2
Which of these statements are correct
(a) I, II and III (b) II only (c) I and III (d) III only
4. To increase the frequency from 100 Hz to 400 Hz the tension in the string has to be changed by
(a) 4 times (b) 16 times (c) 20 times (d) None of these

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 276

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
5. The speed of a wave in a medium is 760 m/s. If 3600 waves are passing through a point, in the medium
in 2 minutes, then its wavelength is
(a) 13.8 m (b) 25.3 m (c) 41.5 m (d) 57.2 m
6. A string of 7 m length has a mass of 0.035 kg. If tension in the string is 60.5N, then speed of a wave on
the string is
(a) 77 m/s (b) 102 m/s (c) 110 m/s (d) 165 m/s
7. The relation between phase difference and path difference is
2 2 2 x
(a)   x (b)   2x (c)   (d)  
 x 
8. If the pressure amplitude in a sound wave is tripled, then the intensity of sound is increased by a factor
of
(a) 9 (b) 3 (c) 6 (d) 3
9. Two monoatomic ideal gases 1 and 2 of molecular masses m1 and m2 respectively are enclosed in
separate containers kept at the same temperature. The ratio of the speed of sound in gas 1 to that in gas
2 is given by
m1 m2 m1 m2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
m2 m1 m2 m1
10. A man is standing between two parallel cliffs and fires a gun. If he hears first and second echoes after
1.5 s and 3.5s respectively, the distance between the cliffs is (Velocity of sound in air = 340 ms–1)
(a) 1190 m (b) 850 m (c) 595 m (d) 510 m
11. When the temperature of an ideal gas is increased by 600 K, the velocity of sound in the gas becomes
3 times the initial velocity in it. The initial temperature of the gas is
(a) 73o C (b) 27o C (c) 127 o C (d) 327 o C
12. In a transverse progressive wave of amplitude A, the maximum particle velocity is four times of its wave
velocity. The wavelength of the wave is
A A
(a) (b) (c)  A (d) 2 A
4 2
13. A man fires a bullet standing between two cliffs. First echo is heard after 3 seconds and second echo is
heard after 5 seconds. If the velocity of sound is 330 m/s, then the distance between the cliffs is
(a) 1650 m (b) 1320 m (c) 990 m (d) 660 m
14. The ends of a stretched wire of length L are fixed at x  0 and x  L. In one experiment, the
displacement of the wire is y1  A sin( x / L) sin t and energy is E1 , and in another experiment its
displacement is y2  A sin(2 x / L )sin 2t and energy is E2 . Then
(a) E2  E1 (b) E2  2 E1 (c) E2  4 E1 (d) E2  16 E1

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 277

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
15. Two pulses in a stretched string whose centres are initially 8 cm apart are moving towards each other as
shown in the figure. The speed of each pulse is 2 cm/s. After 2 seconds, the total energy of the pulses
will be
(a) Zero
(b) Purely kinetic
(c) Purely potential 8 cm

(d) Partly kinetic and partly potential

16. In order to double the frequency of the fundamental note emitted by a stretched string, the length is
th
3
reduced to of the original length and the tension is changed. The factor by which the tension is to be
4
changed, is
3 2 8 9
(a) (b) (c) (d)
8 3 9 4
17. Two sound waves of wavelengths 5m and 6m formed 30 beats in 3 seconds. The velocity of sound is
(a) 300 ms–1 (b) 310 ms–1 (c) 320 ms–1 (d) 330 ms–1
18. If the length of a closed organ pipe is 1m and velocity of sound is 330 m/s, then the frequency for the
second note is
330 330 330 4
(a) 4  Hz (b) 3  Hz (c) 2  Hz (d) 2  Hz
4 4 4 330
19. The fundamental note produced by a closed organ pipe is of frequency f . The fundamental note
produced by an open organ pipe of same length will be of frequency
f
(a) (b) f (c) 2 f (d) 4 f
2
20. Two open organ pipes give 4 beats/sec, when sounded together in their fundamental notes. If the length
of the pipes are 100 cm and 102.5 cm respectively, then the velocity of sound is
(a) 160 m/s (b) 240 m/s (c) 328 m/s (d) 496 m/s
21. A second harmonic has to be generated in a string of length l stretched between two rigid supports.
The point where the string has to be plucked and touched are
l l l 3l
(a) Plucked at and touch at (b) Plucked at and touch at
4 2 4 4
l l l 3l
(c) Plucked at and touched at (d) Plucked at and touched at
2 4 2 4
22. If the velocity of sound in air is 336 m/s. The maximum length of a closed pipe that would produce a
just audible sound will be
(a) 3.2 cm (b) 4.2 m (c) 4.2 cm (d) 3.2 m
23. A resonance air column of length 20 cm resonates with a tuning fork of frequency 250 Hz. The speed of the air
is
(a) 300 m/s (b) 200 m/s (c) 150 m/s (d) 75 m/s

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 278

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
24. Two waves are approaching each other with a velocity of 16 m/s and frequency n. The distance between
two consecutive nodes is
16 8 n n
(a) (b) (c) (d)
n n 16 8
25. An organ pipe P1 closed at one end vibrating in its first overtone and another pipe P2 open at both ends
vibrating in its third overtone are in resonance with a given tuning fork. The ratio of lengths of P1 and
P2 is

(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 3 (c) 3 : 8 (d) 3 : 4

26. Two waves y  0.25 sin 316t and y  0.25sin 310t are travelling in same direction. The number of
beats produced per second will be
(a) 6 (b) 3 (c) 3/ (d) 3
27. Standing waves are produced in a 10 m long stretched string. If the string vibrates in 5 segments and the
wave velocity is 20 m/s, the frequency is
(a) 2 Hz (b) 4 Hz (c) 5 Hz (d) 10 Hz
28. y  a cos(kx  t ) superimposes on another wave giving a stationary wave having node at x = 0. What
is the equation of the other wave
(a) a cos(kx  t ) (b) a cos( kx   t ) (c) a cos(kx  t ) (d) a sin( kx   t )
29. Two sound waves of slightly different frequencies propagating in the same direction produce beats due
to
(a) Interference (b) Diffraction (c) Polarization (d) Refraction
30. On sounding tuning fork A with another tuning fork B of frequency 384 Hz, 6 beats are produced per
second. After loading the prongs of A with some wax and then sounding it again with B, 4 beats are
produced per second. What is the frequency of the tuning fork A
(a) 388 Hz (b) 380 Hz (c) 378 Hz (d) 390 Hz
31. Four wires of identical length, diameters and of the same material are stretched on a sonometre wire.
If the ratio of their tensions is 1 : 4 : 9 : 16 then the ratio of their fundamental frequencies are
(a) 16 : 9 : 4 : 1 (b) 4 : 3 : 2 : 1 (c) 1 : 4 : 2 : 16 (d) 1 : 2 : 3 : 4
32. If you set up the ninth harmonic on a string fixed at both ends, what is its frequency compared to the
seventh harmonic
(a) Higher (b) Lower (c) Equal (d) None of the above
33. The frequency of a stretched uniform wire under tension is in resonance with the fundamental
frequency of a closed tube. If the tension in the wire is increased by 8 N, it is in resonance with the first
overtone of the closed tube. The initial tension in the wire is
(a) 1 N (b) 4 N (c) 8 N (d) 16 N
34. Two waves y1  A1 sin(t  1 ) and y2  A2 sin( t   2 ) Superimpose to form a resultant wave whose
amplitude is
(a) A12  A22  2 A1 A2 cos( 1   2 ) (b) A12  A22  2 A1 A2 sin( 1   2 )

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 279

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
(c) A1  A2 (d) A1  A2
35. In stationary wave
(a) Strain is maximum at nodes (b) Strain is maximum at antinodes
(c) Strain is minimum at nodes (d) Amplitude is zero at all the points
36. A wave of frequency 100 Hz is sent along a string towards a fixed end. When this wave travels back
after reflection, a node is formed at a distance of 10 cm from the fixed end of the string. The speed of
incident (and reflected) wave are
(a) 40 m/s (b) 20 m/s (c) 10 m/s (d) 5 m/s
37. The stationary wave y  2a sin kx cos t in a closed organ pipe is the result of the superposition of
y  a sin( t  kx ) and
(a) y   a cos(t  kx) (b) y   a sin(t  kx) (c) y  a sin( t  kx ) (d)
y  a cos( t  kx)
38. Out of the given four waves
y  a sin(kx  t ) .....(1) y  a sin( t  kx ) .....(2)
y  a cos(kx  t ) .....(3) y  a cos( t  kx) .....(4)
Emitted by four different sources S1, S2, S3 and S4 respectively, interference phenomena would be
observed in space under appropriate conditions when
(a) Source S1 emits wave (1) and S4 emits wave (4)
(b) Source S2 emits wave (2) and S4 emits wave (4)
(c) Source S1 emits wave (1) and S2 emits wave (3)
(d) Interference phenomenon cannot be observed by the combination of any of the above waves
39. The phase difference between the two particles situated on both the sides of a node is
(a) 0° (b) 90° (c) 180° (d) 360°
40. In large room, a person receives direct sound waves from a source 120 meters away from him. He also
receive waves from the same source which reach him, being reflected from the 25 meter high ceiling at
the point halfway between them. The two waves interfere constructively for wavelength of
(a) 20, 20/3, 20/5 etc. (b) 10, 5, 2.5 etc. (c) 10, 20, 30 etc (d) 15, 25, 35 etc
41. A small source of sound moves on a circle as shown in the figure and an observer is sitting on O . Let
n1 , n2 and n3 be the frequencies heard when the source is at A, B and C respectively. Then
B
(a) n1  n2  n3
(b) n2  n3  n1 C

(c) n1  n2  n3 O

(d) n2  n1  n3 A
42. Two sirens situated one kilometer apart are producing sound of frequency 330 Hz. An observer starts
moving from one siren to the other with a speed of 2 m/s. If the speed of sound be 330 m/s, what will be
the beat frequency heard by the observer
(a) 8 (b) 4 (c) 6 (d) 1
43. Suppose that the speed of sound in air at a given temperature is 400 m/sec. An engine blows a whistle at
1200 Hz frequency. It is approaching an observer at the speed of 100 m/sec. What is the apparent
frequency as heard by the observer
(a) 1600 Hz (b) 1500 Hz (c) 1200 Hz (d) 600 Hz

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 280

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
44. A man is standing on a railway platform listening to the whistle of an engine that passes the man at
constant speed without stopping. If the engine passes the man at time t0 . How does the frequency f of
the whistle as heard by the man changes with time

f f f f
(a) (b) (c) (d)

t0 t t0 t t0 t t0 t

45. A source is moving towards an observer with a speed of 20 m/s and having frequency of 240 Hz. The
observer is now moving towards the source with a speed of 20 m/s. Apparent frequency heard by
observer, if velocity of sound is 340 m/s, is
(a) 240 Hz (b) 270 Hz (c) 280 Hz (d) 360 Hz
46. Maximum number of beat frequency heard by a human being is
(a) 10 (b) 4 (c) 20 (d) 6
47. A train moves towards a stationary observer with speed 34 m/s. The train sounds a whistle and its
frequency registered by the observer is f1 . If the train’s speed is reduced to 17 m/s, the frequency
registered is f 2 . If the speed of sound is 340 m/s then the ratio f1 / f 2 is
(a) 18/19 (b) 1/2 (c) 2 (d) 19/18
48. A source of sound of frequency 450 cycles/sec is moving towards a stationary observer with 34 m/sec
speed. If the speed of sound is 340 m/sec, then the apparent frequency will be
(a) 410 cycles/sec (b) 500 cycles/sec (c) 550 cycles/sec (d) 450 cycles/sec
49. Two passenger trains moving with a speed of 108 km/hour cross each other. One of them blows a
whistle whose frequency is 750 Hz. If sound speed is 330 m/s, then passengers sitting in the other train,
after trains cross each other will hear sound whose frequency will be
(a) 900 Hz (b) 625 Hz (c) 750 Hz (d) 800 Hz
50. A boy is walking away from a wall towards an observer at a speed of 1 meter/second and blows a
whistle whose frequency is 680 Hz. The number of beats heard by the observer per second is (Velocity
of sound in air = 340 meters/sec)
(a) Zero (b) 2 (c) 8 (d) 4
51. An air column in a pipe, which is closed at one end, will be in resonance with a vibrating body of
frequency 166 Hz, if the length of the air column is
(a) 2.00 m (b) 1.50 m (c) 1.00 m (d) 0.50 m
52. An empty vessel is partially filled with water, then the frequency of vibration of air column in the
vessel
(a) Remains same (b) Decreases
(c) Increases (d) First increases then decreases
53. It is desired to increase the fundamental resonance frequency in a tube which is closed at one end. This
can be achieved by
(a) Replacing the air in the tube by hydrogen gas (b) Increasing the length of the tube
(c) Decreasing the length of the tube (d) Opening the closed end of the tube

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 281

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
54. Quality of a musical note depends on
(a) Harmonics present (b) Amplitude of the wave
(c) Fundamental frequency (d) Velocity of sound in the medium

55. A wave is reflected from a rigid support. The change in phase on reflection will be
(a)  / 4 (b)  / 2 (c)  (d) 2
56. The figure shows four progressive waves A, B, C, and D with their phases expressed with respect to the
wave A. It can be concluded from the figure that

B A C D

y
O t
/2  3/2 2

(a) The wave C is ahead by a phase angle of /2 and the wave B lags behind by a phase angle of  /2
(b) The wave C lags behind by a phase angle of /2 and the wave B is ahead by a phase angle of  /2
(c) The wave C is ahead by a phase angle of  and the wave B lags behind by a phase angle of 
(d) The wave C lags behind by a phase angle of  and the wave B ahead by a phase angle of 
57. Amplitude of a wave is represented by
c
A
abc
Then resonance will occur when
(a) b  c / 2 (b) b  0 and a  c (c) b   a / 2 (d) None of these

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 282

 Wave Motion Phy. XII

Previous Year’s Questions

Questions Asked in 2015, 2014, 2013, 2012
1. The fundamental frequency of a closed organ pipe of length 20 cm is equal to the second overtone of an
organ pipe open at both the ends. The length of organ pipe open at both the ends is:
(a) 100 cm (b) 120 cm (c) 140 cm (d) 80 cm [AIPMT- 2015]
2. A source of sound S emitting waves of frequency 100 Hz and an observer O are located at some
distance from each other. The source is moving with a speed of 19.4 ms–1 at an angle of 60° with the
source observer line as shown in the figure. The observer is at rest. The apparent frequency observed by
the observer (velocity of sound in air 330 ms–1), is [RE AIPMT- 2015]

(a) 97 Hz (b) 100 Hz (c) 103 Hz (d) 106 Hz

3. If n1, n2 and n3 are the fundamental frequencies of three segments into which a string is divided, then
the original fundamental frequency n of the string is given by [AIPMT 2014]
(a) n = n1 + n2 + n3 (b) n = n1 + n2 + n3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(c) = + + (d) = + +
n n1 n2 n3 n n1 n2 n3

4. The number of possible natural oscillations of air column in a pipe closed at one end of length 85 cm
whose frequencies lie below 1250 Hz are : (velocity of sound = 340 ms1) [AIPMT 2014]
(a) 7 (b) 6 (c) 4 (d) 5

5. A speeding motorcyclist sees traffic jam ahead of him. He slows down to 36 km/ hour. He finds that
traffic has eased and a car moving ahead of him at 18 km/ hour is honking at a frequency of 1392 Hz. If
the speed of sound is 343 m/ s , the frequency of the honk as heard by him will be : [AIPMT 2014]
(a) 1412 Hz (b) 1454 Hz (c) 1332 Hz (d) 1372 Hz

6. A source of unknown frequency gives 4 beats / s, when sounded with a source of known frequency 250
Hz. The second harmonic of the source of unknown frequency gives five beats per second, when
sounded with a source of frequency 513 Hz. The unknown frequency is : [NEET 2013]
(a) 260 Hz (b) 254 Hz (c) 246 Hz (d) 240 Hz

7. A train moving at a speed of 220 ms–1 towards a stationary object, emits a sound of frequency
1000 Hz. Some of the sound reaching the object gets reflected back to the train as echo. The frequency
of the echo as detected by the driver of the train is
(Speed of sound in air is 330 ms–1) [CBSE AIPMT 2012]
(a) 3500 Hz (b) 4000 Hz (c) 5000 Hz (d) 3000 Hz
8. When a string is divided into three segments of lengths l1, l2 and l3, the fundamental frequencies of
these three segments are v1, v2 and v3 respectively. The original fundamental frequency (v) of the string
is [CBSE AIPMT 2012]
(a) v  v1  v2  v3 (b) v = v1 + v2 + v3

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 283

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(c)    (d)   
v v1 v2 v3 v v1 v2 v3

9. A transverse wave propagating on a stretched string of linear density 3 × 10–4 kg m–1 is respected by the
equation y = 0.2 sin (15x + 60t)
where x is in metres and t is in seconds. The tension in the string (in newton) is [AFMC 2012]
(a) 0.24 (b) 0.48 (c) 1.20 (d) 1.80
10. A: It is not possible to have interference between the waves produces by two violins.
R: For interference of two waves, the phase difference between the waves must remain constant.
11. When a certain volume of water is subjected to increased of 100 kPa pressure, the volume of water
decreases by 0.005%. The speed of sound in water must be [UP CPMT 2012]
(a) 140 m/s (b) 300 m/s (c) 1400 m/s (d) 5000 m/s
 2
12. A progressive wave moving along x-axis is represented by y  A sin   vt – x  . The wavelength () at
  
which the maximum particle velocity is 3 times the wave velocity is [WB JEE 2012]
A 2A  3  2
(a) (b) (c)    A (d)    A
3  3   4  3
13. Oxygen is 16 times heavier than hydrogen. Equal volumes of hydrogen and oxygen are mixed. The
ratio of speed of sound in the mixture to that in hydrogen is [Manipal 2012]
(a) 8 (b) 2 / 17 (c) 1/ 8 (d) 32 / 17

Basics of Mechanical Waves

 2 
1. The equation of a wave is given by y  10sin  t    .If the displacement is 5 cm at t = 0, then the
 45 
total phase at t = 7.5 sis [Punjab PMET 2011]
(a) /3 (b) /2 (c) /6 (d) 
2. The phase difference between two points separated by0.8 m. in a wave of frequency 120 Hz is /2. The
velocity of wave is [Punjab PMET 2010]
(a) 720 ms1 (b) 384 ms1 (c) 250 ms1 (d) 1 ms1
3. A tuning fork of frequency 512 Hz makes 4 beats/s with the vibrating string of a piano. The beat
frequency decreases to 2 beats/s when the tension in the piano string is slightly increased. The
frequency of the piano string before increasing the tension was [CBSE AIPMT 2010]
(a) 510 Hz (b) 514 Hz (c) 516 Hz (d) 508 Hz
4. A transverse wave is represented by y= A sin (t kx).For what value of the wavelength is the wave
velocity equal to the maximum particle velocity? [CBSE AIPMT 2010]
(a) A/2 (b) A (c) 2A (d) A
5. The equation y  4  2sin  6t  3x  represents a wave motion. Then wave speed and amplitude,
respectively are [AIIMS 2009]
(a) wave speed 1 unit, amplitude 6 unit (b) wave speed 2 unit, amplitude 2 unit
(c) wave speed 4 unit, amplitude 1/2 unit (d) wave speed 1/2 unit, amplitude 5 unit

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 284

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
 2x   2x 
6. The path difference between the two waves y1  a1 sin  t   and y2  a2 cos  t     is
     
   2    2
(a)  (b)    (c)    (d)  [Manipal 2009]
2 2  2  2 
7. When a wave undergoes refraction [J&KCET 2009]
(a) its frequency changes (b) its amplitude changes
(c) its velocity changes (d) both amplitude and frequency change
8. Sound waves transfer [KCET 2009]
(a) only energy not momentum (b) energy
(c) momentum (d) Both (a) and (b)
9. A stationary point source of sound emits sound uniformly in all directions in a non-absorbing medium.
Two points P and Q are at a distance of 4 m and 9 m respectively from the source. The ratio of
amplitudes of the waves at P and Q is [KCET 2009]
(a) 3/2 (b) 4/9 (c) 2/3 (d) 9/4
10. Assertion: The change in air pressure effects the speed of sound. [AIIMS 2008]
Reason: The speed of sound in gases is proportional to the square of pressure.
11. The intensity of sound increases at night due to [AFMC 2007]
(a) increase in density of air (b) decrease in density of air
(c) low temperature (d) None of the above
12. A boat at anchor is rocked by waves of velocity 25 ms1having crests 100 m apart. They reach the boat
once every [AMU 2007]
(a) 4.0s (b) 8.0 s (c) 2.0 s (d) 0.25 s
13. The gas having average speed four times as that of SO2(molecular mass 64) is [MHT CET 2007]
(a) He (molecular mass 4) (b) O2 (molecular mass 32)
(c) H2 (molecular mass 2) (d) CH4 (molecular mass 16)
14. Which one of the following statements is true? [MP PMT 2007]
(a) Both light and sound waves in air are transverse.
(b) The sound waves in air are longitudinal while the light waves are transverse.
(c) Both light and sound waves in air are longitudinal.
(d) Both light and sound waves can travel in vacuum
15. Compressional wave pulses are sent to the bottom of a sea from a ship and the echo is heard after 2 s.
If bulk modulus of elasticity of water is2 109Nm2andmeantemperature is 4°C, the depth of the
sea will be [BCECE 2007]
(a) 1014 m (b) 1414 m (c) 2828 m (d) None of these
16. The speed of sound waves in a gas [J&KCET 2007]
(a) does not depend upon density of the gas (b) does not depend upon changes in pressure
(c) does not depend upon temperature (d) depends upon density of the gas

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 285

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
17. The velocity of sound is v at 273 K. The temperature at which it is 2v is [KeralaCET 2006]
(a) 2273 K (b) 4273 K (c) 8273 K (d) 16273 K
(e) 2 273 K
18. Distance between successive compression and rarefaction is 1 m and velocity of sound is 360 ms1.
Find frequency of the sound wave. [RPMT 2006]
(a) 180 Hz (b) 45 Hz (c) 120 Hz (d) 90 Hz
19. The ratio of velocity of sound in hydrogen and oxygen at STP is [KCET 2005]
(a) 16: 1 (b) 8 :1 (c) 4 : 1 (d) 2 :1
20. Sound travels faster after rain than on a dry day because [Haryana PMT 2005]
(a) the temperature of the atmosphere increases after rain
(b) the density of air increases after rain
(c) the humidity in the air increases after rain
(d) None of the above
21. If the temperature of atmosphere is increased, the following character of sound waves is effected
(a) amplitude (b) frequency (c) speed (d) wavelength [AFMC 2004]
22. vrms, vav and vmp are root mean square, average and most probable speeds of molecules of a gas obeying
Maxwellian velocity distribution. Which of the following statements is correct? [AFMC 2004]
(a) vrms  vav  vmp (b) vrms  vav  vmp
(c) vmp  vrms  vav (d) vmp  vrms  vav

23. The waves produced by a motor boat sailing in water are [AIIMS 2004]
(a) transverse (b) longitudinal
(c) longitudinal and transverse (d) stationary
24. At what temperature, the speed of sound in air will become double of its value at 27°C? [AMU 2004]
(a) 54°C (b) 627°C (c) 327°C (d) 927°C
25. An underwater sonar source operating at a frequency of60 kHz directs its beam towards the surface. If
velocity of sound in air is 330 ms1, wavelength and frequency of the waves in air are [DUMET 2004]
(a) 5.5 mm, 60 kHz (b) 330 m,60 kHz (c) 5.5 mm, 30 kHz (d) 5.5 mm, 80kHz
26. What is the phase difference between two successive crests in the wave? [MHT CET 2004]
(a)  (b) /2 (c) 2 (d) 4
27. Assertion: When a beetle moves along the sand within a few tens of centimeters of a sand scorpion,
the scorpion immediately turns towards the beetle and dashes towards it.
Reason: When a beetle disturbs the sand, it sends pulses along the sand’s surface. One set of pulses is
longitudinal while the other set is transverse. [AILMS 2003]
28. The speed of sound through oxygen at T K is v ms1. As the temperature becomes 2Tand oxygen gas
dissociates into atomic oxygen, the speed of sound [Manipal 2003]
(a) remains the same (b) becomes 2v
(c) becomes(2v) (d) None of the above

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 286

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
29. At which temperature the speed of sound will be three times of its speed at 0°C? [RPMT 2003]
(a) 1100°C (b) 1284°C (c) 1500ºC (d) 2184°C

Progressive Waves
1. The two waves of the same frequency moving in the same direction given rise to [DUMET 2011]
(a) beats (b) interference (c) stationary waves (d) None of these

2. Two points on a travelling wave having frequency500 Hz and velocity 300 m/s are 60° out of phase,
then the minimum distance between the two points is [CMC 2011]
(a) 0.2 (b) 0.1 (c) 0.5 (d) 0.4
 t x
3. The equation of a wave is y  5sin    ; where, x is in cm and t is in second. The maximum
 0.04 4 
velocity of the particle will be [JIPMER 2011]
(a) 1 ms1 (b) 2 ms1 (c) 1.5 ms1 (d) 1.25 ms1
4. The equation of a simple harmonic progressive wave is given by y  A sin 100t  3x  . Find the
distance between 2 particles having a phase difference of/3 [MHT CET 2011]
(a) /9 m (b) /18 m (c) /6 m (d) /3 m
5. In sine wave, minimum distance between 2 particles always having same speed is [MHTCET 2011]
(a) /2 (b) /4 (c) /3 (d) 
6. A wave equation which gives the displacement along the direction is given by y  0.001sin 100t  x 
where, x and y are in metre and t in second. This equation represents a wave [Manipal 2011]
(a) travelling with a velocity of 100 m/s in the negativex-direction
(b) travelling with a velocity of 50/ m/s in the positive x-direction
(c) of wavelength 1 m
(d) of frequency 100/ Hz
7. The equation of longitudinal wave represented as y  20cos   50t  x  cm. Then its wavelength is
(a) 120 cm (b) 50 cm (c) 2 cm (d) 5 cm [Manipal 2011]
8. The wave described by y  0.25sin 10x  2t  , x andy are in metre and t in second, is a wave
travelling along the [CBSE AIPMT 2008]
(a) vex direction with frequency 1 Hz
(b) +vex direction with frequencyHz and wavelength=0.2 m
(c) +vexdirectionwithfrequency1Hzandwavelength =0.2 m
(d) vex direction with amplitude 0.25 m and wavelength  =0.2 m

9. The equation of a simple harmonic wave is given by y  5sin 100t  x  , where x and y are in metre
2
and time is in second. The period of the wave in second will be [AFMC 2008]
longitudinal wave is
(a) 0.04 (b) 0.01 (c) 1 (d) 5

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 287

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
2 t 
10. The displacement of a particle executing periodic motion is given by y  4cos   sin 1000t  . This
2
expression may be considered to be a result of superposition of [BHU 2008]
(a) two waves (b) three waves (c) four waves (d) five waves
11. Pressure variation in a mechanical wave depends upon as [DUMET 2008]
(a) intensity (b) independent of intensity
(c)  1/intensity (d) None of the above
12. The equation of a simple harmonic wave is given by y  6sin 2  2t  0.1x  , where x and y are in mm
and t is in seconds. The phase difference between two particles2 mm apart at any instant is[KCET 2008]
(a) 18° (b) 36° (c) 54° (d) 72°
13. In a sinusoidal wave, the time required for a particular point to move from maximum displacement to
zero displacement is 0.17 s. The frequency of the wave is [Manipal 2008]
(a) 1.47 Hz (b) 0.36 Hz (c) 0.73 Hz (d) 2.94 Hz
14. Three progressive waves A, B and C are shown in the figure. [UPCPMT 2007]
With respect to A, the progressive wave
(a) B lags by /2 and C leads by /2
(b) B lags by  and C leads by 
(c) B leads by /2 and C lags by /2
(d) B leads by  and C lags by 
 x 
15. The equation of a wave travelling on a string is y  4sin   8t   , where x, y are in cm and t is in
2
  8 
second. The velocity of the wave is [AMU 2007]
1 1
(a) 64 cms , in x direction (b) 32 cms , in x direction
1
(c) 32 cms , in +x direction (d) 64 cms1, in +x direction
16. Which of the following expressions is that of a simple harmonic progressive wave? [MP PMT 2007]
(a) a sin t (b) a sin (t)cos kx
(c) a sin (tkx) (d) a cos kx
17. Which of the following equations represents a wave travelling along y-axis? [RPMT 2007]
(a) y = A sin (kxt) (b) x = A sin (kyt)
(c) y= A sin ky cost (d) y = A cosky sin t
18. A point source emits sound equally in all directions in anon-absorbing medium. Two points P and Q
are at distance of 2 m and 3 m respectively from the source. The ratio of the intensities of the waves at
P and Q is [AIIMS 2006]
(a) 9:4 (b) 2 :3 (c) 3 : 2 (d) 4 : 9

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 288

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
 t x 1 
19. A wave equation is given by y  4sin     where x is in cm and t in second. Which of the
5 9 6   
following is true? [DUMET 2006]
l
(a)  = 18cm (b) v = 4ms (c) a = 0.4 m (d) f=50Hz
20. Equations of motion in the same direction are given by
y1  2a sin  t  kx 
y21  2a sin  t  kx  
The amplitude of the medium particle will be [Manipal 2006]
2a cos 
(a) 2a cos (b) 2 a cos  (c) 4acos/2 (d)
2
 t x
21. If the equation of a progressive wave is given as y  a sin     , where x is in metres and t is in
 2 4
seconds, then the distance through which the wave moves in 8 s is [RPMT 2006]
(a) 2 m (b) 16 m (c) 4 m (d) 8 m
22. When a wave travels in a medium the particles displacement is given by the equation
y  0.03sin   2t  0.01x  , where x and y are in metre and t in second. The wavelength of the wave is
[RPMT 2006]
(a) 200m (b) 100m (c) 20 m (d) 10 m

Interference and Superposition of Waves

1. Two waves are represented by the equations y1  a sin  t  kx  0.57  m and y2  a cos  t  kx  m,
where x is in metre and t in second. The phase difference between them is [CBSE AIPMT 2011]
(a) 1.25 rad (b) 1.57 rad (c) 0.57 rad (d) 1.0 rad
2. A point source emits sound equally in all directions in anon-absorbing medium. Two points P and Q
are at distance of 2 m and 3 m respective from the source. The ratio of the intensities of the waves at
P and Q is [AFMC 2010]
(a) 9 : 4 (b) 2 :3 (c) 3 : 2 (d) 4 :9
3. Two waves y1  A1 sin  t  1  , y2  A2 sin  t  2  superimpose to for ma resultant wave whose
amplitudeis [UPCPMT 2010]
(a) A12  A22  2 A1 A2 cos 1  2  (b) A12  A22  2 A1 A2 sin  1  2 
(c) A1  A2 (d) A1  A2
4. Two coherent sources of different intensities send waves which interfere. The ratio of maximum
intensity to the minimum intensity is 25. The intensities of the sources are in the ratio [JCECE 2010]
(a) 25 : 1 (b) 5:1 (c) 9:4 (d) 25 : 16
5. Two waves are passing through a region in the same direction at the same time. If the equations of
2 2
these waves are y1  a sin  vt  x  and y2  b sin  vt  x   x0  then, the amplitude of there sulting
 
wave for x0 = (/2) is [Manipal 2010]

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 289

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
(a) | a - 6| (b) a + b
2 2
(c) a b (d) a 2  b2  2ab cos x
6. Two sound waves, each of amplitude A and frequency, superpose at a point with phase difference
of/2. The amplitude and frequency of the resultant wave are respectively [BCECE 2010]
A  A 
(a) , (b) , (c) 2 A, (d) 2 A , 
2 2 2 2
7. The ratio of intensities between two coherent sound sources is 4 : 1. The difference of loudness in
decibels between maximum and minimum intensities, when they interfere in space, is [AIIMS 2009]
(a) 10 log 2 (b) 20 log3 (c) 10 log 3 (d) 20 log2
8. If 1,2 and 3 are the wavelengths of the waves giving resonance with the fundamental, first and
second overtones respectively of a closed organ pipe. Then the ratio of wavelengths 1 :2 : 3 is
(a) 1 : 3 : 5 (b) 1 : 2 : 3 (c) 5:3:1 (d) 1: 1 : 1 [UP CPMT 2009]
9. If the phase difference between two sound waves of wavelength  is 60°, the corresponding path
difference is [Kerala CEE 2009]
(a) /6 (b) /2 (c) 2 (d) /4
(e) 6/
10. Two waves having intensities in the ratio of 9 : 1produce interference. The ratio of maximum to
minimum intensity is equal to [AMU 2008]
(a) 10 : 8 (b) 9 : 1 (c) 4 : 1 (d) 2:1
11. Two periodic waves of intensities I1 and I2 pass through a region at the same time in the same direction.
The sum of the maximum and minimum intensities is [MHT CET 2008]
2 2
(a) I1  I 2 (b)  I1  I 2  (c)  I1  I 2  (d) 2  I1  I 2 

12. Ratio of intensities of two waves is given by 9 : 1. Then ratio of their amplitudes is [MP PMT 2008]
(a) 9 : 1 (b) 1 : 9 (c) 3 : 1 (d) 2:1
13. A pulse of a wave travels along a stretched string and reaches the fixed end of the string. It will be
reflected back with [MHT CET 2007]
(a) a phase change of 180° with velocity reduced
(b) the same phase as the incident pulse with no reduction of velocity
(c) a phase change of 180° with no reduction of velocity
(d) the same phase as the incident pulse but with velocity reduced
14. Two strings with mass per unit length of 25 g cm1 and 9g cm1 are joined together in series. The
reflection coefficient for the vibration waves are [MHT CET 2006]
(a) 9/25 (b) 3/5 (c) 1/16 (d) 9/16
15. Two waves, represented by the following equations, travelling in the same medium
y1  5sin 2  75t  0.25x  y2  10sin 2 150t  0.50 x 
The intensity I2/I1 of two waves is [MPPMT 2006]
(a) 8 : 1 (b) 2 : 1 (c) 4 : 1 (d) 16 : 1

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 290

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
16. A particle is executing two different simple harmonic motions, mutually perpendicular, of different
amplitudes and having phase difference of /2.The path of the particle will be [RPMT 2006]
(a) circular (b) straight line (c) parabolic (d) elliptical
17. Two similar waves are propagating in x-axis and another one in y-axis. When they collide to
superimpose, the resultant wave will be [AFMC 2003]
(a) elliptical (b) hyperbolic
(c) straight line (d) parabolic

Beats
1. A fork A has frequency 2% more than the standard fork and B has a frequency 3% less than the
frequency of same standard fork. The forks A and B when sounded together produced 6 beats/s. The
frequency of fork A is [AIIMS 2010]
(a) 116.4 Hz (b) 120 Hz (c) 122.4 Hz (d) 238.8 Hz
2. Two instruments having stretched strings are being played in unison. When the tension in one of the
instruments is increased by 1%, 3 beats are produced in 2 s. The initial frequency of vibration of each
wire is [BHU 2010]
(a) 600 Hz (b) 300 Hz (c) 200 Hz (d) 150 Hz

3. 5 beat/s are produced on blowing together two closed organ pipes of the same diameter but of different
lengths. If shorter pipe is of 10 cm length and speed of sound in air is 300 m/s, length of other pipe is
(a) 10.06 cm (b) 11.22 cm (c) 16 cm (d) 14 cm [CMC 2010]
(e) None of these
4. A wave travelling along positive x-axis is given by y  Asin  t  kx  . If it is reflected from rigid
boundary such that 80% amplitude is reflected then equation of reflected wave is [MGIMS 2010]
(a) y  Asin  t  kx  (b) y  0.8 A sin  t  kx 
(c) y  0.8 Asin  t  kx  (d) y  A sin  t  0.8kx 
5. The frequencies of two tuning forks A and B are respectively 1.5% more and 2.5% less than that of the
tuning fork C. When A and B are sounded together,12 beats are produced in 1 s. The frequency of the
tuning fork C is [Kerala CEE 2010]
(a) 200 Hz (b) 240 Hz (c) 360 Hz (d) 300 Hz
(e) 400 Hz
6. Assertion To heart distinct beats, difference infrequencies of two sources should be less than 10.
Reason More the number of beats per second more difficult to hear them. [AIIMS 2009]
7. Each of the two strings of length 51.6 cm and 49.1 cm are tensioned separately by 20 N force. Mass per
unit length of both the strings is same and equal to 1 gm1.When both the strings vibrate simultaneously
the number of beats is [CBSEAIPMT 2009]
(a) 4 (b) 7 (c) 8 (d) 3

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 291

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
8. Three sound waves of equal amplitudes have frequencies ( 1), , ( + 1). They superpose to give
beats. The number of beats produced per second will be [BCECE 2009]
(a)  (b) /2 (c) 2 (d) 1
9. Beats are produced by two waves given by y1  a sin2000t and y2  a sin 2008t . The number of
beats heard per second is [MHTCET 2009]
(a) zero (b) one (c) four (d) eight
10. Two sound waves of slightly different frequencies propagating in the same direction produce beats due
to [AMU 2008]
(a) interference (b) diffraction (c) reflection (d) refraction
11. The frequencies of three tuning forks A, B and C have a relation nA  nB  nC . When the forks A and B
are sounded together the number of beats produced is n1.When A and C are sounded together the
number of beats produced is n2, then the number of beats produced when B and C arc sounded together
is [EAMCET 2008]
n n
(a) n1  n2 (b) 1 2 (c) n2  n1 (d) n1  n2
2
12. Two sound waves with wavelength 5.0 m and 5.5 m respectively, each propagate in a gas with velocity
330 ms1. We expect the following number of beats per second [Haryana PMT 2008]
(a) 12 (b) zero (c) 1 (d) 6
13. Beats are produced by frequencies f1 and f2 ( f1  f2 ).The duration of time between two successive
maxima or minima is equal to [J&K CET 2008]
1 2 2 1
(a) (b) (c) (d)
f1  f 2 f1  f 2 f1  f 2 f1  f 2
14. Which of the following is true regarding beats? [UP CPMT 2007]
(a) Frequency different, amplitude same (b) Frequency same, amplitude same
(c) Frequency same, amplitude different (d) None of the above
15. Two tuning forks P and Q when set vibrating, give4 beats/s. If a prong of the fork P is filed, the beats
are
reduced to 2 s1. What is frequency of P, if that of Q is250 Hz? [AIIMS 2006]
(a) 246 Hz (b) 250 Hz (c) 254 Hz (d) 252 Hz
16. A piston filled in cylindrical pipe is pulled as shown in the figure. A tuning fork is sounded at open end
and loudest sound is heard at open length 13 cm,41 cm and 69 cm. The frequency of tuning fork, if
velocity of sound is 350 ms1 is [DUMET 2006]

(a) 1250 Hz (b) 625Hz (c) 417Hz (d) 715Hz

17. The frequency of a tuning fork is 256 Hz. The velocity of sound in air 344 ms1. The distance travel
(in metre) by the sound during the time in which tuning fork completes 32 vibrations is[EAMCET 2006]
(a) 21 (b) 43 (c) 86 (d) 129

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 292

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
18. Two vibrating tuning forks produce progressive waves given by y1 =4sin 500t and y2 = 2sin506t.
Number of beats produced per minute is [CBSEAIPMT 2005]
(a) 360 (b) 180 (c) 3 (d) 60
19. The ratio of intensities of twowavesis16 : 9. If they produce interference, then ratio of maximum and
minimum intensities will be [AFMC 2005]
(a) 4 : 3 (b) 49: 1 (c) 64 : 27 (d) 81 : 49
20. There are 26 tuning forks arranged in the decreasing order of their frequencies. Each tuning fork
gives 3 beats with the next. The first one is octave of the last. What is the frequency of 18th tuning
fork? [BHU 2005]
(a) 100 Hz (b) 99Hz (c) 96 Hz (d) 103 Hz
21. A tuning fork of frequency 392 Hz, resonates with 50 cm length of a string under tension (T). If length
of the string is decreased, by 2%, keeping the tension constant, the number of beats heard when the
string and the tuning fork made to vibrate simultaneously is [BHU 2005]
(a) 4 (b) 6 (c) 8 (d) 12
1
22. Two identical straight wires are stretched so as to produce 6 beats s when vibrating simultaneously.
On changing the tension slightly in one of them, the beat frequency still remains unchanged. Denoting
by T1 and T2, the higher and the lower initial tensions in the strings, it could be said that while making
the above changes in tension [Haryana PMT 2005]
(a) T1 was decreased (b) T1 was increased (c) T2was increased (d) T2was decreased
23. When beats are produced by two progressive waves of the same amplitude and of nearly the same
frequency, the ratio of maximum loudness to the loudness of one of the waves will be n. Where n is
(a) 3 (b) 1 (c) 4 (d) 2 [Haryana PMT 2005]
24. The frequency of tuning fork is 256 Hz. It will not resonate with a fork of frequency [MHT CET 2003]
(a) 768Hz (b) 738 Hz (c) 512Hz (d) 256 Hz
Stationary Waves: Vibrations of Strings and Organ Pipes
1. A: The fundamental frequency of an open organ pipe increases as the temperature is increased.
R: As the temperature increases, the velocity of sound increases more rapidly than length of the pipe.
2. In a stationary wave all the particles [OJEE 2011]
(a) on either side of a node vibrate in same phase
(b) in the region between two nodes vibrate in same phase
(c) in the region between two antinodes vibrate in same phase
(d) of the medium vibrate in same phase
3. A stretched string of length l fixed at both ends can sustain stationary waves of wavelength  given by
n2 l2 2l
(a)   (b)   (c)   (d)   2l n [CG PMT 2011]
2l 2n n
(Here, n is a integer)
4. The temperature at which the speed of sound in air becomes doubled, its value at 0°C is [VMMC 2011]
(a) 1092°C (b) 819K (c) 819°C (d) 546°C

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 293

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
5. Two vibrating strings of the same material but lengths Land 2L have radii 2r and r respectively. They
are stretched under the same tension. Both the strings vibrate in their fundamental modes, the one of
length L with frequency 1 and the other with frequency 2. The ratio 1 / 2 is [JIPMER 2011]
(a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 3 (d) 1
6. Standing waves are formed on a string when interference occurs between two waves having
(a) the same amplitude travelling in the same direction with no phase difference between them
(b) the same amplitude, travelling in the opposite direction with no phase difference between them
(c) different amplitudes travelling in the same direction [MGIMS 2011]
(d) different amplitudes travelling in the opposite direction
7. In the fundamental mode, time taken by the wave to reach the closed end of the air filled pipe is 0.01 s.
The fundamental frequency is [MHT CET 2011]
(a) 25 (b) 12.5 (c) 20 (d) 15
8. n1 is the frequency of the pipe closed at one end and n2is the frequency of the pipe open at both ends. If
both are joined end to end, find the fundamental frequency of closed pipe so formed [MHT CET 2011]
n1n2 n1n2 n  2n2 2n1  n2
(a) (b) (c) 1 (d)
n2  2n1 2n2  n1 n2 n1 n2 n1
9. The fundamental frequencies of an open and a closed tube, each of same length L with v as the speed
of sound in air, respectively are [Manipal 2011]
       
(a) and (b) and (c) and (d) and
2L L L 2L 2L 4L 4L 2L
10. A uniform wire of length L, diameter D and density  is stretched under a tension T. The correct
relation between its fundamental frequency f the length L and the diameter D is [KCET 2011]
1 1 1 1
(a) f  (b) f  (c) f  2 (d) f 
LD L D D LD2
11. A pipe opened at both ends produces a note of frequency f1. When the pipe is kept with 3/4th of its
f
length in water, it produces a note of frequency f2. The ratio 1 is [BCECE 2011]
f2
(a) ¾ (b) 4/3 (c) ½ (d) 2
12. A cylindrical tube closed at one end contains air. It produces the fundamental note of frequency 512
Hz.
If the tube is opened at both ends, the fundamental frequency that can be excited is [Manipal 2011]
(a) 256 Hz (b) 512 Hz (c) 1024 Hz (d) 128 Hz
13. A closed organ pipe of length 1.2 m vibrates in its first overtone mode. The pressure variation is
maximum [AIIMS 2009]
(a) 0.4 m from the open end (b) 0.4 m from the closed end
(c) Both (a) and (b) (d) 0.8 m from the open end
14. A resonance in an air column of length 40 cm resonates with a tuning fork of frequency 450 Hz.
Ignoring end correction, the velocity of sound in air is
(a) 1020 ms1 (b) 720 ms1 (c) 620 ms1 (d) 820 ms1

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 294

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
15. A wave in a string has an amplitude of 2 cm. The wave travels in the +ve direction of x axis with a
speed of128 ms1 and it is noted that 5 complete waves fit in 4 mI length of the string. The equation
describing the wave is [CBSE AIPMT 2009]
(a) y  (0.02)m sin  7.85x  1005t  (b) y  (0.02)m sin 15.7 x  2010t 
(c) y  (0.02)m sin 15.7 x  2010t  (d) y  (0.02)m sin  7.85x  1005t 
16. A cylindrical tube, open at both ends emits a fundamental frequency f in air. The tube is dipped
vertically in water, so that half of it is in water. The fundamental frequency of air column is now
(a) f/2 (b) 3f/4 (c) f (d) 2f [MGIMS 2009]
17. Damping on snarpness or resonance has [Haryana PMT, CG PMT 2009]
(a) no effect (b) more damping, sharper resonance
(c) less damping, sharper resonance (d) less damping, less sharp resonance
18. In a stationary wave represented by y  2a cos kx sin t the intensity at a certain point is maximum
when [Haryana PMT, CG PMT 2009]
(a) cos kx is maximum (b) cos kx is minimum
(c) sintis maximum (d) sin tis minimum
19. A sound wave with frequency 256 Hz falls normally on a perfectly reflecting wall. The shortest
distance from the wall at which the air particles will have maximum amplitude of vibrations is nearly
(velocity of sound in air is 336 m/s)
(a) 32.8 cm (b) 50 cm (c) 65.8 cm (d) 25 cm
20. Which of the following functions does not represent a stationary wave? Here a, b and c are constants.
(a) y  a cos bx sin ct (b) y  a sin bx cos ct [BCECE 2009]
(c) y  a sin  bx  ct  (d) y  a sin  bx  ct   a sin  bx  ct 
21. In a resonance pipe the first and second resonances are obtained at depths 22.7 cm and 70.2 cm
respectively. What will be the end correction? [MHT CET 2009]
(a) 1.05 cm (b) 115.5cm (c) 92.5 cm (d) 113.5 cm
22. A cylindrical tube open at both the ends has a fundamental frequency of 390Hz in air. If 1/4thof the tube
is immersed vertically in water the fundamental frequency of air column is [KCET 2009]
(a) 260 Hz (b) 130 Hz (c) 390 Hz (d) 520 Hz
23. A uniform wire of linear density 0.004 kg-m-1 when stretched between two rigid supports with a
tension
3.6  102 N, resonates with a frequency of 420 Hz. The next harmonic frequency with which the wire
resonates is 490 Hz. The length of the wire in metre is [Punjab PMET 2008]
(a) 1.41 (b) 2.14 (c) 2.41 (d) 3.14
24. To increase the frequency by20%, the tension in the string vibrating on a sonometer has to be increased
by [Punjab PMET 2008]
(a) 44% (b) 33% (c) 22% (d) 11%

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 295

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
25. A string is hanging from a rigid support. A transverse pulse is excited at its free end. The speed at
which the pulse travels a distance x is proportional to [Kerala CEE 2008]
(a) x (b) 1/x (c) 1/x (d) x2(e) x
26. A metal wire of linear mass density of 9.8 gm1 is stretched with a tension of 10 kg-wt between two
rigid supports 1 m apart. The wire passes at its middle point between the poles of a permanent magnet
and it vibrates in resonance when carrying an alternating current of frequency n. The frequency n of the
alternating source is [RPMT 2008]
(a) 50 Hz (b) 100 Hz (c) 200 Hz (d) 25 Hz
27. A tuning fork of frequency 340 Hz is vibrated just above the tube of 120 cm height. Water is poured
slowly in the tube. What is the minimum height of water necessary for the resonance?
(Speed of sound in air = 340 ms1) [Punjab PMET 2007]
(a) 45 cm (b) 30 cm (c) 40 cm (d) 25 cm
28. A glass tube is open at both the ends. A tuning fork of frequency f resonates with the air column inside
the tube. Now the tube is placed vertically inside water so that half the length of the tube is filled with
water. Now the air column inside the tube is in unison with another fork of frequency f'. Then [KCET 07]
(a) f '  f (b) f '  4 f (c) f '  2 f (d) f '  f / 2
29. A segment of wire vibrates with fundamental frequency of 450 Hz under a tension of 9 kg-wt. Then
tension at which the fundamental frequency of the same wire becomes 900 Hz is [J&KCET 2007]
(a) 36 kg-wt (b) 27 kg-wt (c) 18 kg-wt (d) 72 kg-wt
30. A closed organ pipe of length 20 cm is sounded with tuning fork in resonance. What is the frequency of
tuning fork? (v =332 m/s) [AFMC 2006]
(a) 300 Hz (b) 350 Hz (c) 375 Hz (d) 415 Hz
31. Two closed organ pipes A and B, have the same length A is wider than B. They resonate in the
fundamental mode at frequencies nA and nB respectively, then [BHU 2006]
(a) nA  nB (b) nA  nB
(c) nA  nB (d) Either (b) or (c) depending on the ratio of their diameters
32. Air is blown through a hole on a closed pipe containing liquid. Then, the pressure will
(a) increase on sides (b) increase downwards [Punjab PMET 2006]
(c) increase in all directions (d) never increase
33. A string has tension T. For tripling the frequency, the tension in string will become [DUMET 2006]
(a) 3T (b) T/9 (c) T/3 (d) 9T
34. When the length of the vibrating segment of asonometer wire is increased by 1% , the percentage
change in its frequency is [KCET 2006]
(a) 100/101 (b) 99/100 (c) 1 (d) 2
35. A closed organ pipe and an open organ pipe are tuned to the same fundamental frequency. What is the
ratio of their lengths? [Manipal 2006]
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 1 (c) 2 : 3 (d) 4:3

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 296

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
36. In an experiment with sonometer a tuning fork of frequency 256 Hz resonates with a length of 25 cm
and another tuning fork resonates with a length of 16 cm. Tension of the string remaining constant the
frequency of the second turning fork is [KCET 2005]
(a) 163.84 Hz (b) 400 Hz (c) 320 Hz (d) 204.8Hz
37. The fundamental frequency of a sonometer wire is n. If its radius is doubled and its tension becomes
half, the material of the wire remains same, the new fundamental frequency will be [BCECE 2005]
n n n
(a) n (b) (c) (d)
2 2 2 2
38. In open organ pipe, if fundamental frequency is n, then the other frequencies are [BCECE 2005]
(a) n, 2n, 3n, 4n (b) n, 3n, 5n (c) n, 2n, 4n, 8n (d) None of these
39. Two instruments having stretched strings are being played in unison. When the tension of one of the
instruments is increased by 1%, 3 beats are produced in 2 s. The initial frequency of vibration of each
wire is [BCECE 2005]
(a) 300 Hz (b) 500 Hz (c) 1000 Hz (d) 400 Hz
40. Apparatus used to find out velocity of sound in gas is [AFMC 2004]
(a) Melde's apparatus (b) Kundt’s tube
(c) Quincke’s tube (d) None of these
2
41. A string of length 0.4 m and mass 10 kg is tightly clamped at its ends. The tension in the string is 1.6
N. Identical wave pulses are produced at one end in equal intervals of time t. The minimum value of
t, which allows constructive interference between successive pulses, is [AFMC 2004]
(a) 0.05s (b) 0.40 s (c) 0.20s (d) 0.10 s
42. An organ pipe closed at one end has fundamental frequency of 1500 Hz. The maximum number of
overtones generated by this pipe which a normal person can hear is [AIIMS 2004]
(a) 4 (b) 13 (c) 6 (d) 9
x
43. The equation of stationary wave along a stretched string is given by y  5sin cos40t , where x and
3
y are in centimetre and t in second. The separation between two adjacent nodes is [BHU 2004]
(a) 6 cm (b) 4cm (c) 3 cm (d) 1.5 cm
44. The first overtone of a stretched wire of given length is320 Hz. The first harmonic is [DUMET 2004]
(a) 320 Hz (b) 160 Hz (c) 480 Hz (d) 640 Hz
45. In Melde's experiment in the transverse mode, the frequency of the tuning fork and the frequency of the
waves in the string are in the ratio [KCET 2004]
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 4: 1 (c) l:l (d) 1: 2
46. In Melde’s experiment, the string vibrates in 4 loops when a 50 g weight is placed in the pan of weight
15 g. To make the strings to vibrates in 6 loops the weight that has to be removed from the pan is
(a) 0.0007 kg-wt (b) 0.0021kg-wt [MHTCET 2004]
(c) 0.036 kg-wt (d) 0.0029kg-wt
47. A sonometer wire of length l, vibrates with a frequency250 Hz. If the length of wire is increased then 2
beats s1are heard. What is ratio of the lengths of the wire? [MHT CET 2004]
(a) 124: 125 (b) 250:313 (c) 5:3 (d) 41 : 57
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 297
 Wave Motion Phy. XII
48. Two closed organ pipes 100 cm and 101 cm long gives16 beats in 20 s, when each pipe is sounded in
its fundamental mode. Calculate the velocity of sound [AFMC 2003]
(a) 303 ms1 (b) 332 ms1 (c) 323.2 ms1 (d) 300 ms1
49. A wire has frequency f. Its length is doubled by stretching. Its frequency now will be [AMU 2003]
(a) 1.4f (b) 0.7f (c) 2f (d) f
50. The speed of the sound in air is 333 ms1. The fundamental frequency of the open pipe is 333 Hz. The
second overtone of the open organ pipe can be produced with a pipe of length. [AMU2003]
(a) 0.5 m (b) 1.0 m (c) 1.5 m (d) 2.0 m
51. Two wires are fixed in a sonometer. Their tensions are in the ratio 8:1. The lengths are in the ratio
36:35. The diameters are in the ratio 4:1. Densities of the materials are in the ratio 1 : 2. If the higher
frequency in the setting is 360 Hz, the beat frequency when the two wires are sounded together, is
(a) 8 (b) 5 (c) 10 (d) 6 [KCET 2003]
DOPPLER’S EFFECT
1. A source of sound S is moving with a velocity of 50 m/stowards a stationary observer. The observer
measures the frequency of the source as 1000 Hz. What will be the apparent frequency of the source
when it is moving away form the observer after crossing him? The velocity of the sound in the medium
is 350 m/s. [AIIMS 2011]
(a) 750 Hz (b) 857 Hz (c) 1143 Hz (d) 1333 Hz
2. A source of sound is travelling at 100/3 ms1 along a road towards a point
A. When the source is 2 m away from A, a person standing at a point O on
a road perpendicular of frequency ’. The distance of O from A at that
time is 4m. If the original frequency is 640 Hz, then the value of ’ is
(Given that velocity of sound = 340 ms1) [BHU 2011]
(a) 620 Hz (b) 680 Hz
(c) 720 Hz (d) 840 Hz

3. Two cars A and B approach a stationary observer from opposite sides as shown in figure. Observer
hears no beats. If the frequency of the horn of the car B is 504 Hz, the frequency of horn of car A will
be [CMC 2011]

(a) 529.2 Hz (b) 295.2 Hz (c) 440.5 Hz (d) 259.2 Hz

(e) None of these
4. An observer moves towards a stationary source of sound with a velocity that is one-fifth the velocity of
sound. The apparent change in frequency is [CG PMT 2011]
(a) zero (b) 5% (c) 20% (d) 0.1%
5. A source of sound moves towards an observer with a velocity 108 km/h and the observer also moves
towards the source with the velocity 5 km/h. then the velocity of sound is [UPCPMT 2011]
(a) 320 m/s (b) 330 m/s (c) 340 m/s (d) data insufficient

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 298

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
6. A source of sound of sound is approaching an observer with speed of 30 ms-l and the observer is
approaching the source with a speed of 60 msl. Then the fractional change in the frequency of sound
(speed of sound in air= 330 ms1) is [Manipal 2011]
(a) 1/3 (b) 3/10 (c) 2/5 (d) 2/3
7. Two tuning forks A and B having a frequency of 500 Hzeach are placed with B to the right of A.
An observer is between the forks and is moving towards B with a speed of 25 m/s. The speed of sound
is 345 m/s and the wind speed is 5 m/s from A to B. Calculate the difference in the two frequencies
heard by the observer. [Manipal 2011]
(a) 72.5 Hz (b) 55.6 Hz (c) 76.2 Hz (d) 80.9 Hz
8. Two cars are moving on two perpendicular roads towards a crossing with uniform speeds of 72 km/h
and
36 km/h. If first car blows horn of frequency 280 Hz, then the frequency of horn heard by the driver of
second car when line joining the car makes angle of 45° with the roads, will be [Manipal 2011]
(a) 321 Hz (b) 298 Hz (c) 289 Hz (d) 280 Hz
9. A band playing music at a frequency f is moving towards a wall at a speed vb. A motorist is following
the band with a speed vm. If v be the speed of the sound the expression for beat frequency heard by
motorist is [AFMC, BHU 2011]
v  vm v  vm 2vb (v  vm ) 2vm (v  vm )
(a) f (b) f (c) f (d) f
v  vb v  vb v2  vb2 v2  vm2
10. The driver of a car travelling with speed 30 ms1towards a hill sounds a horn of frequency 600 Hz. If
the velocity of sound in air is 330 ms1, the frequency of reflected sound as heard by driver is
[CBSEAIPMT 2011]
(a) 550 Hz (b) 555.5Hz (c) 720 Hz (d) 500 Hz

11. An observer moves towards a stationary source of sound, with a velocity one-third of the velocity of
sound. What is the percentage increase in the apparent frequency? [JIPMER 2011]
(a) 10% (b) 25% (c) 35% (d) 33%
12. Two sources are at a finite distance apart. They emit sound of wavelength . An observer situated
between them on line joining the sources, approaches towards one source with speed u, then number of
beats heard per second by observer will be [UP CPMT 2011]
(a) 2u/ (b) u/ (c) u/2 (d) /u
13. A train is moving with a constant speed along a circular track. The engine of the train emits a sound of
frequency f. The frequency heard by the guard at rear end of the train is [UP CPMT 2011]
(a) less than f
(b) equal to f
(c) is greater than f
(d) may be greater than, less than or equal to f depending on the factors like speed of train, length of
train and radius of circular track
14. Change in frequency due to Doppler’s effect is zero if [BHU 2008]
(a) the source and the observer are moving with same velocity
(b) the source and the observer are both at rest

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 299

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
(c) there is no relative motion between the source and the observer
(d) all of the above
15. A body is moving forward and backward. Change infrequency observed by the body of a source is 2%.
What is velocity of the body?(Speed of sound is 300 ms1) [DUMET 2008]
(a) 6ms1 (b) 2ms1 (c) 2.5ms1 (d) 3ms1
16. An engine is moving on a circular path of radius 100 m with a speed of 20 ms1. What will be the
frequency observed by an observer standing stationary at the centre of circular path when the engine
blows a whistle of frequency 500 Hz? [Manipal 2008]
(a) More than 500 Hz (b) Less than500 Hz
(c) 500 Hz (d) No sound is heared
17. An observer moves towards a stationary source of sound, with a velocity one-fifth of the velocity of
sound. What is the percentage increase in the apparent frequency? [MHTCET 2008]
(a) Zero (b) 0.5% (c) 5% (d) 20%
18. An observer moves towards a stationary source of sound with a speed l/5th of the speed of sound. The
wavelength and frequency of the source emitted are and f respectively. The apparent frequency and
wavelength recorded by the observer are respectively [BHU 2007]
(a) f, 1.2 (b) 0.8f, 0.8 (c) 1.2f, 1.2 (d) 1.2f, 
19. The difference between the apparent frequency of a source of sound as perceived by the observer
during its approach and recession is 2% of the frequency of the source. If the
speedofsoundinairis300ms1, the velocity of the source is [Punjab PMET 2007]
(a) 1.5 ms1 (b) 12 ms1 (c) 6 ms1 (d) 3 ms1
20. An engine moving towards a wall with a velocity 50 ms1 emits a note of 1.2 kHz. Speed of sound in
air is 350 ms1. The frequency of the note after reflection from the wall as heard by the driver of
the engine is [KCET 2007]
(a) 2.4 kHz (b) 0.24 kHz I (c) 1.6 kHz (d) 1.2 kHz
21. A train approaches a stationary observer, the velocity of train being 1/20 of the velocity of sound. A
sharp blast is blown with the whistle of the engine at equal intervals of a second. The interval between
the successive blasts as heard by the observer is [RPMT 2007]
(a) 1/20 s (b) 1/20 min (c) 19/20 s (d) 19/20 min
22. An astronaut is approaching the moon. He sends out a radio signal of frequency 5000 MHz and the
frequency of echo is different from that of the original frequency by 100 kHz. His velocity of approach
with respect to the moon is [AMU 2006]
(a) 2 km s1 (b) 3 km s1 (c) 4 km s1 (d) 5 km s1
23. A source is approaching a stationary observer withvelocity1/10th that of sound. Ratio of observed and
real frequencies will be [RPMT 2006]
(a) 9/10 (b) 11/10 (c) 10/11 (d) 10/9
1
24. A vehicle with horn of frequency  is moving with a velocity of 30 ms in a direction perpendicular to
the line joining the observer and the vehicle. The observer perceives the sound to have a frequency
( + 1). If the sound velocity in air is 300 ms1, then [AMU 2005]

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 300

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
(a) 1 =0 (b) 1 =0.1  (c) 1 =0.l (d) 1 =10 
25. A person is observing two trains one coming toward shim and other leaving with the same velocity 4
m/s. If their whistling frequencies are 240 Hz each, then the number of beats per second are heard by
the person will be (if velocity of sound is 320 m/s) [BHU 2005]
(a) 3 (b) 6 (c) 9 (d) zero
26. A and B are two hills at a distance 510 m apart. A person standing between the hills, claps his hands
and hears two echoes at the end of 1 s and 2 s respectively. The velocity of sound in air is [BHU 2004]
(a) 225 ms-1 (b) 340 ms-1 (c) 510 ms-1 (d) 1020 ms-1
27. Two sound sources S1 and S2 of frequencies 324 Hz and 320 Hz are placed at certain separation. An
observer is moving away from S1 and towards S2 online joining them. If he hears no beats then speed of
observer is (v = 344 ms -1) [RPMT 2004]
(a) 20 ms-1 (b) 10 ms-1 (c) 5 ms-1 (d) 2.1 ms-1
28. A traveller is running towards a stationary train. If the train sounds a horn of frequency n, the apparent
frequency heard by the traveller will be [RPMT 2004]
 v  v0   v  v0   v  v0 
(a) n '  n   (b) n '  n   (c) n '  n   (d) none of these
 v   v  vs   v 
29. A train moving with 20 ms1 towards a stationary observer produces frequency of 440 Hz. The
apparent frequency heard will be (v =330ms1) [RPMT 2004]
(a) 448 Hz (b) 455 Hz (c) 440 Hz (d) 468 Hz
30. Source of sound and the observer are mutually at rest. If the speed of sound is changed, then the
frequency of sound heard by the observer will appear to be [J&KCET 2004]
(a) increased (b) decreased (c) unchanged (d) decreasing exponentially
31. Doppler’s effect in sound is due to [AFMC 2003]
(a) motion of source (b) motion of observer
(c) relative motion of source and observer (d) None of the above
32. An object producing a pitch of 400 Hz flies past a stationary person. The object was moving in a
straight line with a velocity 200 ms1. The velocity of sound is 300 ms1. What is the change in
frequency noted by the person as the object flies past him? [J&K CET 2003]
(a) 1440 Hz (b) 240 Hz (c) 1200 Hz (d) 960 Hz
Musical Sounds and Accoustics of Buildings
1. A sound absorber attenuates the sound level by 20 dB. The intensity decreases by a factor of
(a) 1000 (b) 10000 (c) 10 (d) 100 [JIPMER 2011]
2. How many times more intense is a 60 dB sound than a30 dB sound? [KCET 2008]
(a) 1000 (b) 2 (c) 100 (d) 4
3. The time of reverberation of a room A is one second. What will be the time (in second) of reverberation
of a room, having all the dimensions double of those of room A? [Haryana PMT 2008]
(a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 1/2 (d) 1
4. Reverberation time does not depend upon [BCECE 2008]
(a) temperature (b) volume of room
(c) size of window (d) carpet and curtain
Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 301
 Wave Motion Phy. XII
5. Two waves having sinusoidal waveforms have different wavelengths and different amplitudes. They
will behaving [BHU 2005]
(a) same pitch and different intensity (b) same quality and different intensity
(c) different quality and different intensity (d) same quality and different pitch
6. Quality depends on [AFMC 2003]
(a) intensity (b) loudness
(c) timbre (d) frequency
7. If T is the reverberation time of a auditorium of volume V, then [KCET 2003]
1 1
(a) T  V 2 (b) T  V (c) T  (d) T 
V V2
Questions Asked in 2016, 2017
1. The second overtone of an open organ pipe has the same frequency as the first overtone of a closed
pipe L metre long. The length of the open pipe will be [NEET 2016]
L 2L L 4L
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2
2. Three sound waves of equal amplitudes have frequencies  n  1 , n,  n  1 . They superimpose to
given beats. The number of beats produced per second will be [NEET 2016]
(a) 1 (b) 4 (c) 3 (d) 2
3. Two cars moving in opposite directions approach each other with speed of 22 m/s and 16.5 m/s
respectively. The driver of first car blows a horn having a frequency 400 Hz. The frequency heard by
the driver of the second car is [velocity of sound 340 m/s]: [NEET 2017]
(a) 350 Hz (b) 361 Hz (c) 411 Hz (d) 448 Hz
4. The two nearest harmonics of a tube closed at one end and open at other end are 220 Hz and 260 Hz.
What is the fundamental frequency of the system? [NEET 2017]
(a) 10 Hz (b) 20 Hz (c) 30 Hz (d) 40 Hz

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 302

 Wave Motion Phy. XII

ANSWER KEY
LEVEL – 1
1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (a) 5. (a)
6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (a) 10. (c)
11. (c) 12. (c) 13. (d) 14. (a) 15. (a)
16. (b) 17. (d) 18. (a) 19. (a) 20. (b)
21. (b) 22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (b) 25. (b)
26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (a) 29. (b) 30. (a)
31. (d) 32. (b) 33. (d) 34. (b) 35. (a)
36. (b) 37. (b) 38. (c) 39. (b) 40. (a)
41. (d) 42. (b) 43. (d) 44. (b) 45. (a)
46. (a) 47. (d) 48. (b) 49. (a) 50. (c)
51. (c) 52. (c) 53. (b) 54. (c) 55. (d)
56. (c) 57. (a) 58. (d) 59. (d)

LEVEL – 2
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (b) 5. (b)
6. (c) 7. (a) 8. (a) 9. (b) 10. (b)
11. (b) 12. (b) 13. (b) 14. (c) 15. (b)
16. (d) 17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (c) 20. (c)
21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (b) 24. (b) 25. (c)
26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (c) 29. (a) 30. (d)
31. (d) 32. (a) 33. (a) 34. (a) 35. (a)
36. (b) 37. (b) 38. (b) 39. (a) 40. (a)
41. (b) 42. (b) 43. (a) 44. (c) 45. (b)
46. (a) 47. (d) 48. (b) 49. (b) 50. (d)
51. (d) 52. (c) 53. (a, c, d) 54. (a) 55. (c)
56. (b) 57. (b)

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS

Questions Asked in 2015, 2014, 2013, 2012
1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (c) 4. (b) 5. (a)
6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (c) 9. (b) 10. (a)
11. (c) 12. (d) 13. (b)

Basics of Mechanical Waves

1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (c) 5. (b)
6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (d) 9. (d) 10. (d)
11. (a) 12. (a) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (b)
16. (b, d) 17. (b) 18. (a) 19. (c) 20. (c)
21. (c) 22. (b) 23. (c) 24. (d) 25. (a)
26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (b) 29. (d)

Progressive Waves
1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (a) 5. (a)
6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (c) 9. (a) 10. (b)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 303

 Wave Motion Phy. XII
11. (d) 12. (d) 13. (a) 14. (c) 15. (d)
16. (c) 17. (b) 18. (a) 19. (a) 20. (c)
21. (b) 22. (a)

Interference and Superposition of Waves

1. (d) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (c) 5. (a)
6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (d) 9. (a) 10. (c)
11. (d) 12. (c) 13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (d)
16. (d) 17. (c)

Beats
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (b) 5. (d)
6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (c) 9. (c) 10. (a)
11. (c) 12. (d) 13. (d) 14. (a) 15. (a)
16. (b) 17. (b) 18. (b) 19. (b) 20. (b)
21. (c) 22. (a,c) 23. (c) 24. (b)

Stationary Waves : Vibrations of Strings and Organ Pipes

1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (c) 5. (d)
6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (a) 9. (c) 10. (a)
11. (c) 12. (c) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (d)
16. (c) 17. (c) 18. (a) 19. (a) 20. (c)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (b) 24. (a) 25. (e)
26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (a) 29. (a) 30. (d)
31. (c) 32. (c) 33. (d) 34. (c) 35. (a)
36. (b) 37. (d) 38. (a) 39. (a) 40. (b)
41. (d) 42. (c) 43. (c) 44. (b) 45. (c)
46. (c) 47. (a) 48. (c) 49. (b) 50. (a)
51. (c)

Doppler’s Effect
1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (c) 5. (d)
6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (b) 9. (a) 10. (c)
11. (d) 12. (a) 13. (b) 14. (d) 15. (d)
16. (d) 17. (d) 18. (d) 19. (d) 20. (c)
21. (c) 22. (b) 23. (d) 24. (a) 25. (b)
26. (b) 27. (d) 28. (a) 29. (d) 30. (c)
31. (c) 32. (c)

Musical Sounds and Accoustics of Buildings

1. (d) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (d) 5. (a)
6. (d) 7. (b)

Questions Asked in 2016, 2017

1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (d) 4. (b)

Website: www.iitianspace.com | assessment.stepapp.in 304